Project No.: PGC-230033-C-P8
Volume 2
General Specifications
Part B
Mechanical Specifications
REVISION
Revision-00
PURPOSE
Issue for Tender
DATE
February 2024
PGC-230033-C-P8
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 10
SECTION
SPECIALITIES
10 04 16
DIVISION 21
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
REV0
FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE
SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
21 05 16
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE
SUPPRESSION PIPING
21 05 19
METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION
SYSTEMS
21 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE
SUPPRESSION PIPING
21 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
21 05 48
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE
SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
21 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT
21 12 00
STANDPIPE SYSTEM
21 13 00
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
21 13 20.0020 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIRCRAFT
HANGERS
21 30 00
FIRE PUMPS
DIVISION 22
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
PLUMBING
22 00 00
PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
22 00 70
PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
22 07 19
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 12 00
WATER STORAGE TANK
22 13 29
SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
22 14 29
SUMP PUMPS
22 32 00
WATER CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
22 33 30.0010 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
22 66 53.0040 LABORATORY CHEMICALS-WASTE AND VENT PIPING
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
DIVISION 23
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
SECTION
SECTION
23 05 00
23 05 13
SECTION
SECTION
23 05 16
23 05 16.13
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
23 05 19
23 05 23
23 05 23.13
SECTION
23 05 29
SECTION
23 05 29.13
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC
EQUIPMENT
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC
PIPING (UNDERGROUND)
METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
(UNDERGROUND)
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT
PIPE SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, & SLEEVES
STABLE OF CONTENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
PGC-230033-C-P8
REV0
REV0
REV0
23 05 93
(UNDERGROUND)
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT (UNDERGROUND)
TESTING ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 13
TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
REV0
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
23 05 48
23 05 53
23 05 53.13
SECTION
SECTION
REV0
REV0
(UNDERGROUND)
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
23 07 13
23 07 16
23 07 16.13
23 07 19
23 09 13
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
23 21 13
23 21 13.13
23 21 23
23 21 30
23 25 00
23 25 13
23 31 00
23 33 00
23 33 19
23 34 13
23 34 16
23 34 23
23 36 00
23 37 00
23 40 00
23 62 13
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
23 64 26
23 73 13
23 81 23
23 81 26
23 82 19
DIVISION33
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
DUCTWORK INSULATION
HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION
HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION(INFRA)
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES
FOR HVAC
HYDRONIC PIPING
UNDERGROUND HYDRONIC PIPING
HYDRONIC PUMPS
HYDRONIC SPECIALITIES
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
CHEMICAL TREATMENT
DUCTWORK
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
SOUND ATTENUATORS
INLINE HVAC FANS
CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES
PACKAGED AIR COOLED DX AIR CONDITIONING
UNITS
AIR COOLED ROTARY-SCREW CHILLERS
MODULAR AIR HANDLING UNITS
COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
FAN COIL UNITS
UTILITIES
33 05 23.19
TRENCHLESS EXCAVATION
33 11 00 19
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
33 11 00 26 (HDPE) PIPING, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
33991300.26.9
16
WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUSTION VALVES
33 32 13.13 PACKAGE SEWAGE LIFTING STATIONS
33 41 00
STORM DRAINAGE AND SEWAGE PIPING
33 42 00.
CULVERTS
33 49 29
STORM DRAINAGE AND SAN SEWER UTILITY
INSULATION
DIVISION46
SECTION
46 07 00
10 04 16
ANNEXURES
STABLE OF CONTENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WATER & WASTE WATER EQUIPMENT
WASTE WATER RECYCLING PLANT
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
REV0
PGC-230033-C-P8
ANNEXURE A
ANNEXURE B
STABLE OF CONTENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIALS / BRANDS APPROVED LIST
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION - EXTERNAL
CHILLED WATER NETWORK (INFRA) & ETS
REV0
REV0
PGC-230033-C-P8
SECTION 10 44 16
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
CONTENTS
PART 1
GENERAL
2
1.1
REFERENCES ....................................................................................................................... 2
1.2
SUBMITTALS ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.3
DELIVERABLES .................................................................................................................. 4
1.3.1 Samples ...................................................................................................................................... 4
1.4
DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE ........................................................................ 4
1.5
WARRANTY ......................................................................................................................... 4
PART 2
PRODUCTS
5
2.1
TYPES ................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2
MATERIAL ........................................................................................................................... 5
2.3
SIZE ....................................................................................................................................... 5
2.4
ACCESSORIES ..................................................................................................................... 5
2.5
CABINETS ............................................................................................................................ 6
2.5.1 Material ...................................................................................................................................... 6
2.5.2 Type ........................................................................................................................................... 6
2.5.3 Size............................................................................................................................................. 6
2.6
WALL BRACKETS ............................................................................................................... 6
PART 3
EXECUTION 7
3.1
INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................... 7
3.2
ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS .............................................................................................. 7
3.2.1 Repairing .................................................................................................................................... 7
3.2.2 Cleaning ..................................................................................................................................... 7
10.44.16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 7
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are
referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
1.
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)
a.
2.
3.
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
a.
NFPA 1 (2012; TIA 11-1) Fire Code
b.
NFPA 10 (2010; Errata 2012) Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
c.
NFPA 101
(2012; Amendment 1 2012) Life Safety Code
d.
NFPA 303
(2011) Fire Protection Standards for Marinas and Boatyards
e.
NFPA 385
Liquids
(2012) Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flammable and Combustible
f.
NFPA 409
(2011; Errata 11-1) Standard on Aircraft Hangars
g.
NFPA 418
(2011) Standard for Heliports
h.
NFPA 505
(2011) Fire Safety Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks
Including Type Designations, Areas of Use, Conversions, Maintenance, and
Operations
i.
NFPA 99 (2012; TIA 11-1; TIA 11-2; Errata 12-1) Health Care Facilities Code
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
a.
b.
4.
5.
ICC IFC (2009) International Fire Code
29 CFR 1910.106 Flammable and Combustible Liquids
29 CFR 1910.157 (2003) Portable Fire Extinguishers
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
a.
UL 154
(2005; Reprint Nov 2010) Carbon-Dioxide Fire Extinguishers
b.
UL 2129 (2005; Reprint Mar 2012) Halocarbon Clean Agent Fire Extinguishers
c.
UL 299
d.
UL 626 (2005; Reprint Mar 2012) 2-1/2 Gallon Stored-Pressure, Water-Type Fire
Extinguishers
e.
UL 8
(2012) Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers
(2005; Reprint Jun 2011) Water Based Agent Fire Extinguishers
UAE FIRE & LIFE SAFETY CODE OF PRACTICE
a.
Chapter 4 portable fire extinguishers
10.44.16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 7
PGC-230033-C-P8
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
a.
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
1. Manufacturer's Data
b.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
1. Fire Extinguishers
2. Accessories
3. Cabinets
4. Wall Brackets
c.
SD-03 Product Data
1. Fire Extinguishers
2. Accessories
3. Cabinets
4. Wall Brackets
5. Replacement Parts
d.
SD-04 Samples
1. Fire Extinguisher
2. Cabinet
3. Wall Brackets
4. Accessories
e.
SD-07 Certificates
1. Fire Extinguishers
2. Manufacturer's Warranty with Inspection Tag
10.44.16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 7
PGC-230033-C-P8
1.3
DELIVERABLES
1.3.1 Samples
Provide the following samples: One of each type of Fire Extinguisher being installed; one full-sized sample
of each type of Cabinet being installed; three samples of Wall Brackets and Accessories of each type being
used.
Approved samples may be used for installation, with proper identification and storage.
1.4
DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
Protect materials from weather, soil, and damage during delivery, storage, and construction.
Deliver materials in their original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the brand name and the name
and type of the material.
[Provide portable fire extinguishers in compliance with NFPA 505 for all ancillary vehicles where Fire
Safety Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks, including type designations, special c conditions relating to
areas of use, conversions, maintenance, or specific operations apply.
1.5
WARRANTY
Guarantee that Fire Extinguishers are free of defects in materials, fabrication, finish, and installation and
that they will remain so for a period of not less than [5years after completion.
10.44.16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 7
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Submit fabrication drawings consisting of fabrication and assembly details performed in the factory and
product data for the following items: Fire Extinguishers; Accessories, Cabinets, Wall Brackets.
2.1
TYPES
Submit certificates that show Fire Extinguishers comply with local codes and regulations.
Provide Fire Extinguishers conforming to NFPA 10. Provide quantity and placement as shown on
drawings and in compliance with the applicable sections of ICC IFC, Section 1414 and ICC IFC, Section
906, NFPA 1, NFPA 101, [NFPA 99], [NFPA 303], [NFPA 385], [NFPA 409], [NFPA 418],[29 CFR
1910.106] and 29 CFR 1910.157. and UAE FIRE & LIFE SAFETY CODE OF PRACTICE
• Provide [stored-pressure] water type fire extinguishers.
• Provide [foam] type fire extinguishers.
• Provide carbon-dioxide type fire extinguishers compliant with UL 154.
• Provide dry chemical type fire extinguishers compliant with UL 299.
• Provide wet chemical type fire extinguishers compliant with UL 8.
• Provide clean agent type fire extinguishers compliant with UL 2129.
• Provide dry powder type fire extinguishers.
• Provide water mist type fire extinguishers compliant with UL 626.
Submit Manufacturer's Data for each type of Fire Extinguisher required, detailing all related Cabinet, Wall
Mounting and Accessories information, complete with Manufacturer's Warranty with Inspection Tag.
2.2
MATERIAL
Provide [corrosion-resistant steel] extinguisher shell. The cylinder should be painted with electrostatic
powder paint, oven backed.
2.3
SIZE
Sizes to be as indicated on drawings, and complying with UAE FIRE & LIFE SAFETY CODE OF
PRACTICE chapter 4.
2.4
ACCESSORIES
•
Forged brass valve
•
Fusible plug
•
Safety release
10.44.16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 7
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.5
•
Hose and nozzle gun
•
Pressure gage
CABINETS
2.5.1 Material
Provide corrosion-resistant steel all round folded edges cabinets. Exposed parts to be stainless steel mirror
polished unexposed parts to be painted with electrostatic powder oven backed red color paint.
2.5.2 Type
Provide [recessed] type cabinets where ever possible, otherwise Provide semi-recessed cabinet for a [150]
[100] millimeter wall
.door to be fitted with piano type stainless steel hinges
Instruction should be silk screened written in Arabic and English, no stickers allowed.
2.5.3 Size
Dimension cabinets to accommodate the specified fire extinguishers.
2.6
WALL BRACKETS
Provide wall-hook fire extinguisher wall brackets.
Provide wall bracket and accessories as approved.
10.44.16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 7
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Install Fire Extinguishers where indicated on the drawings. Verify exact locations prior to installation.
Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for all installations.
Provide extinguishers which are fully charged and ready for operation upon installation. Provide
extinguishers complete with Manufacturer's Warranty with Inspection Tag attached.
The wall mount type portable fire extinguishers shall be installed in such a way that the top of the fire
extinguisher is not more than 1.5 meters above the floor and not less than 30 cm from the bottom of
extinguisher to the finished floor
3.2
ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS
3.2.1 Repairing
Remove and replace damaged and unacceptable portions of completed work with new work at no additional
cost to the Government.
Submit Replacement Parts list indicating specified items replacement part, replacement cost, and name,
address and contact for replacement parts distributor.
3.2.2 Cleaning
Clean all surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces which are soiled as a result of the work. Remove from
the site all construction equipment, tools, surplus materials and rubbish resulting from the work.
-- End of Section --
10.44.16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 7
PGC-230033-C-P8
21 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
EQUIPMENT
CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
RELATED DOCUMENTS......................................................................................... 2
SCOPE OF WORK .................................................................................................. 2
CODES AND STANDARDS ..................................................................................... 2
1.04 MANUFACTURERS ......................................................................................... 2
SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 3
QUALITY ASSURANCE........................................................................................... 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS ..............................................................................................................4
2.1
ELECTRIC MOTORS............................................................................................... 4
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) ..........................................................................5
21 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 5
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Architectural and Structural Specification sections apply to work of this section.
B. Separate electrical components and materials required for field installation and
electrical connections are specified in Division 26.
1.2
1.3
1.4
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which
are an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment. These components
include, but are not limited to factory installed motors, starters, and disconnect
switches furnished as an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment.
B.
Specific electrical requirements (i.e. Horsepower and electrical characteristics)
for mechanical equipment are specified within the individual equipment
specification sections, or are scheduled on the Drawings.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Electrical components of mechanical equipment to conform to the following
codes and standards:
B.
NEMA Standards MG1: Motors and Generators
C.
NEMA Standards ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies
D.
NEMA Standard 250: Enclosed Switches
E.
National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)
F.
Under Writer Laboratory (ul)
G.
Factory Mutual (FM)
1.04
MANUFACTURERS
A. Obtain equipment and accessories from one of the
following:
Westinghouse (U.S.A.)
Square D (U.S.A.)
General Electric (U.S.A.)
Siemens (Germany)
AEG
(Germany)
Klockner Moeller
(Germany)
English Electric (U.K.)
AEI
(U.K.)
Ottermill (U.K.)
Crabree (U.K.)
Midland Electric Mfg. Co.
(U.K.)
GEC
(U.K.)
Newman (U.K.)
21 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 5
PGC-230033-C-P8
Merlin Gerin
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
(France)
No separate submittal is required. Submit product data for motors, starters, and
other electrical components with submittal data required for the equipment for
which it serves, as required by the individual equipment specification sections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
A. Electrical components and materials to be UL labeled.
21 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 5
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ELECTRIC MOTORS
A.
Motors to be supplied by driven equipment manufacturer, to be as
specified for equipment concerned and specifically supplied for available supply
voltage and frequency.
B.
Motors 1/2 horsepower and under to be single phase and over 1/2 horsepower
to be three phase. Motors to be totally enclosed, fan cooled type, unless
otherwise specified.
C.
Motors to have Class F insulation with 120 deg. C continuous temperature rise
above average ambient temperature of 50 deg. C, unless otherwise specified.
D. Motors that will operate outdoors are to have Class F insulation.
E. Motors operating in ambient temperatures of 50 deg. C and above to be
tropicalized and derated for satisfactory operation.
F. Motors to be rated for continuous operation with service factor of 1.15
G.
POWER to be adequate to operate driven equipment without motor overload
under all operating conditions and loads and throughout capacity range of
equipment. Motor to be capable of delivering full rated output when operating at
voltage deviating by 5% from rated voltage at rated frequency.
H. Starting AND Torque Characteristics to be as required by driven equipment.
I.
Speed to be as specified for equipment concerned.
J.
Conduit Terminal Box on Motor to be approved model for type of motor enclosure.
Motor windings to be connected to terminals in terminal box at factory. One
additional earthling terminal to be connected to motor frame.
K.
Motor Base to be adjustable where motors are directly connected to driven
equipment, unless otherwise specified. Motors connected to equipment through
V-belt drive to have adjustable sliding base. Fractional horsepower motors to
have slotted mounting holes in base
21 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 5
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
END OF SECTION 21 05 13
21 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 5
PGC-230033-C-P8
21 05 16
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING
CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
RELATED DOCUMENTS............................................................................................. 2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS............................................................................ 2
SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................. 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................ 3
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
MANUFACTURERS .................................................................................................... 3
PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS, GENERAL ...................................................................... 4
PACKLESS-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS ........................................................... 4
SLIP-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS ...................................................................... 4
BALL-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS ..................................................................... 4
GROOVED-PIPING-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS ............................................... 5
PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES ........................................................................................ 5
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ................................................................................. 5
PART 3 EXECUTION ........................................................................................................... 6
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................ 6
PIPE EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION ................................................................. 6
FABRICATED-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION COMPENSATION INSTALLATION ............. 6
PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDE INSTALLATION................................................................. 6
PIPE ANCHOR INSTALLATION .................................................................................. 6
PAINTING .................................................................................................................... 7
21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 7
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General
andSupplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
SUMMARY
C. This Section includes pipe expansion joints, guides, and anchors for mechanical
piping systems.
1.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Compatibility: Provide pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe
anchors suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and
temperatures.
B. Fabricate and install expansion and anchor system capable of sustaining
forces generated by gravity, thermal movement, and seismic events.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
B.
Product data for each type of pipe expansion joint and pipe alignment guide specified.
C. Pipe expansion joint schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location,
and features for each required expansion joint.
D. Assembly-type shop drawings for each type of pipe expansion joint, pipe
alignment guide, and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances,
and methods of component assembly.
E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that
with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
F.
1.4
welders
comply
Maintenance data for each type pipe expansion joint specified to include in
the "Operating and Maintenance Manuals" specified in the Division 1 Section
"Project Closeout".
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to AWS D1.1
"Structural Welding Code--Steel".
1.
B.
Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests
for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to ASME "Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications".
21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 7
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but
are not limited to the following:
1.
Metal-Bellows, Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Adsco Manufacturing Corp.
Anamet, Inc.
Badger Industries, Inc.
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
Keflex, Inc.
Metraflex Co.
Pathway Bellows, Inc., Dover Corp.
Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
Proco Products, Inc.
Senior Flexonics Inc., Expansion Joint Div.
B. Expansion-Compensator, Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Adsco Manufacturing Corp.
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
Keflex, Inc.
Metraflex Co.
Senior Flexonics Inc., Expansion Joint Div.
C. Slip-Type Pipe Expansion Joints:
1.
Adsco Manufacturing Corp.
2.
Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
D. Ball-Type Pipe Expansion Joints:
1.
2.
Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
Barco Div., Marison Industries.
E. Coupling, Grooved-Piping-Type Pipe Expansion Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Grinnell Corp., Pipe Supports Div.
Gustin-Bacon Div., Tyler Pipe Subsid., Tyler Corp.
Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
Victaulic Company of America.
F. Slip-Joint, Grooved-Piping-Type, Pipe Expansion Joints:
1.
Victaulic Company of America.
G. Pipe Alignment Guides:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Adsco Manufacturing Corp.
Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
B-Line Systems, Inc.
Grinnell Corp., Pipe Supports Div.
21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 7
PGC-230033-C-P8
5.
6.
7.
2.2
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
Keflex, Inc.
Metraflex Co.
PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS, GENERAL
A. Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors.
B. Refer to "Pipe Expansion Joint Schedule" for criteria of individual pipe
expansion joints.
C. Pipe expansion joint pressure ratings shall be compatuble with piping system
where system pressures require PN 16 or PN 32 components. This applies to all
the following joint types.
2.3
PACKLESS-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Metal-Bellows Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints:
Pressure rated for
2070 kPa minimum; conform to the standards of Expansion Joint Manufacturers
Association, Inc. (EJMA); with end fittings and external tie rods for limiting
maximum travel. Features include the following:
1.
2.
B.
2.4
Copper Piping Systems: 2 ply phosphor-bronze bellows and brass shrouds.
Steel Piping Systems: 2 ply stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel shrouds.
Expansion-Compensator Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints: Pressure rated
for 3200 kPa minimum. Include 2 ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds,
and end fittings for copper piping systems and 2 ply stainless-steel bellows,
carbon-steel shrouds, and end fittings for steel piping systems.
Include
internal guides, antitorque device, and removable end clip for proper
positioning.
SLIP-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Carbon-steel packing-type expansion joint designed for repacking under
pressure. Include limit stops, flanged or weld ends to match piping system, and drip
connection where used for steam piping systems.
1.
2.
2.5
Joint Packing: Asbestos-free polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) compound.
Pressure Rating: 2070 kPa minimum at 204 deg C minimum.
BALL-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
General: Designed for 360 degree (6.3rad) rotation and minimum of 30
degree (0.52rad) angular deflection for sizes 150 mm and smaller and 15
degree (0.26rad) for sizes 200 mm and larger.
B.
Carbon steel and comply with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section
II "Materials Specifications" and ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for
materials and design of pressure containing parts and bolting.
1.
2.
Packing: Asbestos-free composition.
Pressure Rating: 2070 kPa minimum at 204 deg C minimum.
21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 7
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.
2.6
2.7
Factory Test: Test before shipment with steam at working pressure of
piping system with no leaks.
GROOVED-PIPING-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Coupling: ASTM A 53, cut-grooved, short, steel-pipe nipples, and ductileiron or malleable-iron shouldered couplings. Include removable ties to hold joint
compressed or expanded during piping fabrication. Include suitable gasket
materials for piping system.
B.
Slip-Joint:
ASTM A 53, steel-pipe body; polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE),
modified- polyphenylene-coated
steel-pipe
slide;
and
ductile-iron
or
malleable-iron housing. Include suitable gasket material for piping system.
PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A.
Factory-fabricated cast semisteel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted twosection outer cylinder and base. Include two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly
to the pipe.
1.
2.8
Alignment Guide Lengths: As required for indicated travel.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and
bars, black and galvanized.
B.
Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex-head, traand
nuts.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Power-Actuated Fasteners: Attachments with pull-out and shear
capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials
where used.
E.
Concrete: Portland-cement mix, (20.7 MPa).
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
Water: Potable.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink, nonmetallic.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Characteristics include post-hardening volume-adjusting dry hydrauliccement-type grout that is nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is
recommended for both interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: (34.5 MPa), 28 day compressive strength.
Water: Potable.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 7
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates and conditions under which pipe expansion joints, pipe
alignment guides, and pipe anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PIPE EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe expansion joints according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Align expansion joints to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.
3.3
3.4
FABRICATED-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION COMPENSATION INSTALLATION
A.
Install pipe expansion loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as
required to absorb 50 percent of total compression or tension that will be
produced during anticipated change in temperature.
B.
Connect risers to mains with at least 5 pipe fittings including tee in main.
C.
Connect risers to terminal units with at least 4 pipe fittings including tee in riser.
PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDE INSTALLATION
A.
Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins pipe expansion joints.
B.
Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins pipe expansion loops.
C. Install pipe alignment guides on piping elsewhere as indicated.
D.
3.5
Secure pipe alignment guides to building substrate.
PIPE ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A.
Install pipe anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding
those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses
to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping
and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS D1.1.
C. Construct concrete pipe anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions
indicated.
D. Where pipe expansion joints are indicated, install pipe anchors according to
expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions to control movement to
compensators.
21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 7
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.6
E.
Pipe Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install pipe anchors at
ends of principal pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion
loops and bends. Preset anchors as required to accommodate both expansion
and contraction of piping.
F.
Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment
guides, and pipe anchors that are installed on or in concrete.
PAINTING
A.
Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint,
exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same
materials as used for shop painting.
Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements
for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils
(0.05 mm).
B.
Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9
Section "Painting".
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 21 05 16
21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 7
PGC-230033-C-P8
21 05 19
METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
RELATED DOCUMENTS ...................................................................................................................... 2
SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................ 2
SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................................... 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE ......................................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
MANUFACTURERS ................................................................................................................................ 3
BI METAL DIAL THERMOMETERS .................................................................................................... 3
PRESSURE GAGES ............................................................................................................................... 4
PRESSURE-GAGE ACCESSORIES ................................................................................................... 5
TEST PLUGS ........................................................................................................................................... 5
FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS, GENERAL ..................................................................................... 5
FLOW-MEASURING METERS ............................................................................................................. 6
METERS .................................................................................................................................................... 6
PART 3 EXECUTION.......................................................................................................................................... 7
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
METER AND GAGE APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................. 7
METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL ............................................................................ 7
PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION ................................................................................................... 7
TEST PLUG INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................ 7
FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM, FLOW ELEMENT AND METER INSTALLATION ................... 7
FLOW METER INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................... 7
CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 8
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING .............................................................................................................. 8
21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes meters and gages used in mechanical systems.
B. Related Sections: Division 21 piping Sections contain requirements that relate
to this Section.
1.3
1.
Meters and gages furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are
specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division 21 Sections.
2.
Division 21 Section "Fire Pumps" for flow meters for testing fire pumps.
SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B.
Product data for each type of meter, gage, and fitting specified. Include scale
range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves, certified where indicated.
Submit a meter and gage schedule showing manufacturer's figure number,
scale range, location, and accessories for each meter and gage.
C.
Product certificates signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying
accuracies under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified
requirements.
D. Maintenance data to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manuals"
specified in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout". Include data for the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Test plugs.
Flow measuring systems.
Flow meters.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with applicable portions of American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(ASME) and Instrument Society of America (ISA) standards pertaining to
construction and installation of meters and gages.
21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but
are not limited to, the following:
1.
Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Marsh Instrument Co.
Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.
H.O. Trerice Co.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
Weksler Instruments Corp.
B. Direct-Mounting Filled-System Dial Thermometers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ashcroft Instrument Div. of Dresser Industries.
Marsh Instrument Co.
H.O. Trerice Co.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
Weksler Instruments Corp.
C. Remote-Reading Filled-System Dial Thermometers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
AMETEK, U.S. Gauge Div.
Ashcroft by Dresser Industries, Instrument Div.
Marsh Instrument Co.
Tel-Tru Manufacturing Co., Inc.
H.O. Trerice Co.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
Weksler Instruments Corp.
BI METAL DIAL THERMOMETERS
A.
Ashcroft by Dresser Industries, Instrument Div.
B.
Marsh Instrument Co.
C.
Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.
D.
Reotemp Instrument Corp.
E.
Tel-Tru Manufacturing Co., Inc.
F.
H.O. Trerice Co.
G. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
H.
Weksler Instruments Corp.
1.
Pressure Gages:
21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
a.
b.
AMETEK, U.S. Gauge Div.
Ashcroft by Dresser Industries, Instrument Div.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Test Plugs:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
ABB Kent-Taylor, Inc.
Brooks Instrument Div., Emerson Electric Co.
Dynasonics, Inc.
Fischer & Porter Co.
Johnson Yokogawa Corp.
Monitek Technologies, Inc.
Schlumberger Industries, Inc., Measurement Div.
Wallace & Tiernan, Inc.
Flow Indicators:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.3
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
BIF by Leeds & Northrup.
Badger Meter, Inc.
Barco Div., Marison Industries.
Fischer & Porter Co.
Gerand Engineering Co.
Preso Industries, Ltd.
Victaulic Company of America.
Electromagnetic Flow Meters:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
5.
Flow Design, Inc.
MG Piping Products Co.
Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.
Sisco Co., Spedco, Inc.
H.O. Trerice Co.
Watts Regulator Co.
Venturi-Type Flow Elements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
4.
Marsh Instrument Co.
Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.
H.O. Trerice Co.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
Weksler Instruments Corp.
WIKA Instruments Corp.
Anderson by Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
Brooks Instrument Div., Emerson Electric Co.
Ernst Gage Co.
Ketema, Inc., Schutte and Koerting Div.
Penberthy, Inc.
Visi-Flo by OPW Div., Dover Corp.
PRESSURE GAGES
A. Description: ASME B40.1, Grade A phosphor-bronze Bourdon-tube pressure
gage, with bottom connection.
B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 115 mm (4-1/2") diameter glass lens.
21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
C. Connector: Brass, 6 mm (1/4") NPS.
D. Scale: White-coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
E. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span.
F. Range: Conform to the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Vacuum: 30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 100 kPa of pressure.
Fluids Under Pressure: 2 times operating pressure.
PRESSURE-GAGE ACCESSORIES
A. Syphons: 6 mm straight coil of brass tubing with threads on each end.
B. Snubbers: 6 mm brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-metal disc of
material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
2.5
TEST PLUGS
A. Description: Nickel-plated brass-body test plug in 15 mm fitting.
B. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.
C. Pressure Rating: 3450 kPa (500 psig) minimum.
D. Core Inserts: 2 self-sealing valve types, suitable for inserting a 3 mm outsidediameter probe from a dial thermometer or pressure gage.
E. Core Material: According to the following for fluid and temperature range:
1. Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: Minus 7 to 93 deg C , neoprene rubber.
2. Air and Water: Minus 35 to 136 deg C, ethylene-propylene-dieneterpolymer (EPDM) rubber.
F. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain.
G. Test Kit: Provide test kit consisting of 1 pressure gage and gage adapter with
probe, 2 bimetal dial thermometers and a carrying case.
H. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately 2 times systems
operating conditions.
2.6
FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
Flow-measuring systems include calibrated flow element, separate meter,
hoses or tubing, valves, fittings, and conversion chart that is compatible with flow
element, meter, and system fluid.
B.
Flow range of flow-measuring element and meter covers operating range of
equipment or system where used.
21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.7
FLOW-MEASURING METERS
A.
Permanent Meters: Suitable for mounting on wall or bracket, 150 mm dial or
equivalent with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to flow element.
1.
2.
Scale: In L/s (gallons/minute) unless otherwise indicated.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 to 80 percent of range.
B. Include complete operating instructions with each meter.
2.8
METERS
A. Fire Pump Test Meters shall be Fire Pump Test Meter, Factory Mutual Approved,
incorporating a calibrated venturi and attached GPM meter, to be installed on the
discharge side of the fire pump, to accurately measure pump performance. Test
Meter shall be supplied with grooved ends for installation with grooved end
couplings.
21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
METER AND GAGE APPLICATIONS
A. General: Where indicated, install meters and gages of types, sizes, capacities,
and with features indicated.
3.2
METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturers' written
instructions for applications where used.
3.3
PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION
A. Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage valve located on pipe at
most readable position.
B. Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated:
1.
2.
At suction and discharge of each pump.
At discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
C. Pressure Gage Needle Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install syphon
instead of snubber for steam pressure gages.
3.4
TEST PLUG INSTALLATION
A. Install test plugs in piping tees where indicated, located on pipe at most
readable position. Secure cap.
3.5
FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM, FLOW ELEMENT AND METER INSTALLATION
A. General: Install flow meters for piping systems located in accessible locations
at most readable position.
B. Locations: Install flow measuring elements and meters at discharge of each
pump, at inlet of each hydronic coil in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as
indicated.
C. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flow meters in readily
accessible locations.
D.
Permanently Mounted Meters for Flow Elements:
brackets in accessible locations.
Install meters on walls or
E. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters as
prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6
FLOW METER INSTALLATION
A. Include 10 pipe diameters upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream of straight
unrestricted piping for 32 mm and smaller pipe. Include 20 pipe diameters
upstream and 10 pipe diameters downstream for 40 mm and larger pipe.
21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.7
CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 21 Sections.
The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow
servicing and maintenance.
C. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to
meters.
D. Connect flow-meter transmitters to meters.
E.
3.8
Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated
meters and devices.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after
installation.
B. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best
visibility.
C.
Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gages and factory-finished surfaces.
Replace cracked and broken windows and repair scratched and marred surfaces
with manufacturer's touchup paint.
END OF SECTION 21 05 19
21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
21 05 23
GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER – BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION
PIPING
CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
RELATED DOCUMENTS............................................................................................. 2
SCOPE OF WORK ...................................................................................................... 2
CODES AND STANDARDS ......................................................................................... 2
SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS............................................................................................................. 4
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS - GENERAL................................................................ 4
BASIC IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................. 4
BASIC VALVES-GROOVED END ................................................................................ 4
SPECIAL VALVES ....................................................................................................... 6
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES ............................................................................. 6
SIAMESE CONNECTIONS .......................................................................................... 7
ALARM TEST MODULE .............................................................................................. 7
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................ 8
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
INSPECTION ............................................................................................................... 8
INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION ............................................................. 8
INSTALLATION OF FIRE PROTECTION VALVES ...................................................... 8
INSTALLATION OF VALVES ....................................................................................... 8
21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER - BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Division-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.
B.
Division-21 Section 210500 "Common Work Results For Fire Suuppression"
apply to work of this section.
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Extent of General-Duty Valves for fire protection work is indicated on Drawings
and schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. Installation of valves, sized to meet the system flow and pressure per NFPA 14.
C. Installation of valves for the proper operation of the system as per NFPA 13.
1.3
D.
Engage a fire fighting designer approved by Civil Defence to assist in preparation
of fire fighting scheme and location of valves and obtaining Civil Defence
approval.
E.
Include cost for all necessary works related to Civil Defence approvals whether
shown on document or not, include for inspection and obtaining completion
certificate.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
NFPA Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with the following
NFPA Standards:
B. Standards for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems NFPA 14.
C. Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems NFPA13.
D. National Electrical Code - NFPA 70.
E. UL Compliance: Provide fire protection products in accordance with UL
standards; provide UP label on each product.
F. FM (Factory Mutual) Compliance: Provide fire protection products and installations
in accordance with FM standards and approved for 300 psi working pressure;
provide FM label on each product.
G. Fire Department/Marshal Compliance: All material and equipment necessary to meet
the requirements of codes and the requirements of the local fire authorities are to
be provided regardless of failure to specifically mention same in this Section or to
show on Drawings.
H.
Screw Thread Connections: Comply with local Fire Department regulations for sizes,
threading and arrangement of connections for fire department equipment to
fire protection systems.
21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER - BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation
instructions for fire protection materials and products. Manufacturer's literature and
data sheets are to be submitted indicating the necessary installation dimensions,
weights, materials and performance information.
The performance is to include
capacities, pressure drop, design and operating pressure, temperatures, and similar
data. Complete electrical data, including power conditions, and identifying types and
numbers, to be included. Where pertinent, electrical diagrams are to be provided.
Literature and data sheets may be provided by standard sales sheets marked to
indicate the specific equipment provided.
B.
Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data and parts lists for fire
protection materials and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings,
approval drawings, approval calculations, certificate of installation, and record
drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
Contractor is to furnish data covering model, type and serial numbers, capacities,
maintenance and operation of each item of equipment or apparatus. Operating
instructions are to cover all phases of control.
C.
Valve Schedule: Furnish a printed schedule, in duplicate, describing each valve by
number, giving locations and service for which used. System identification to be as
stipulated in the other sections of these specifications. One copy of this schedule is
to be mounted under glass in a simple black enamel steel frame and hung in
the mechanical equipment room where directed. The other copy is to be submitted
to the Engineer before completion of the work.
D. Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Literature: Submit shop drawings and
manufacturers literature on fire protection system components, according to the
following listing:
E.
Valve Supervisory Switches
F.
Valve and Hydraulically Calculated ID signs
G. Manufacturers Installation Instructions for all equipment in brochure
1.
Other
a.
b.
Leak Test Certificates
Operation and Maintenance Instructions
21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER - BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS - GENERAL
A.
Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types,
pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not
indicated, provide proper selection to comply with installation requirements.
B. Provide materials and products of sizes and types matching piping and equipment
connections.
C. Provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in fire protection
systems.
2.2
BASIC IDENTIFICATION
A.
Provide identification complying with Division-21 "Common Work Results for
Fire Suppression".
B. Fire Protection Signs: Provide the following signs:
1.
2.
2.3
At each sprinkler valve, sign indicating what portion of system valve controls.
At each outside alarm device, sign indicating what authority to call if device is
activated.
BASIC VALVES-GROOVED END
A. Butterfly Valves
1.
B.
Shall be Underwriters Laboratories Listed for UL Butterfly Specification
1091 and Factory Mutual Approval Standard 1112, sizes 2-1/2" through 12"
(DN65 through DN300), supplied with a ductile iron body conforming to
ASTM A-395, GRADE 65-45-15, coated with a polyphenylene sulfide blend,
a disc of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, GRADE 65-45-15, with
EPDM coating providing bubble tight shut- off. Sizes 2-1/2" through 12"
(DN65 through DN300) shall have an approved weatherproof manual
actuator suitable for indoor or outdoor use with two single pole, double
throw supervisory switches either pre-wired (WRD) or unwired (UWD)
monitoring the open position as specified on the drawings. Shall be
supplied with grooved ends for installation with grooved end couplings and
rated for service up to 300 psi (2065 kPa) working pressure. Valves shall be
installed in accordance with the latest manufacturer’s specifications.
Check Valves
1.
Shall be single disc, spring loaded, check valves 21/2"-12" (DN50-DN300), as
Underwriters Laboratories Listed and Factory Mutual Approved for a single
check and anti-water hammer service and for horizontal or vertical
installation, supplied drilled, tapped and plugged downstream for drainage
outlet with Grade “E” EPDM seal, housing cast of ductile iron conforming to
ASTM A-395, GRADE 65-45-15, with grooved ends for installation with
grooved end couplings rated for service up to
21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER - BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
250 psi (1725 kPa) working pressure. For system subjects to more than 10
bar static head or pressure exceeds the 1725 kpa, use valve with 2400 kPa
working
pressure.
C.
Ball Valves
1.
D.
Alarm Check Valves
1.
E.
Shall be spring assisted Alarm Check Valves, as Underwriters Laboratories
Listed and Factory Mutual Approved, for vertical installation, supplied with
Grade “E” EPDM clapper seal, housing cast of ductile iron conforming to
ASTM A-395, GRADE 65-45-15, serviceable without removal from the line, with
grooved 1 1/2"-6" (DN40 - DN150) or flange by groove 4"-6" (DN100-DN150)
ends for installation with ANSI Class 150 flange or manufacturer grooved end
couplings as applicable, rated for service up to 300 psi (2065 kPa) working
pressure.
Actuated Check Valve with Deluge Trim
1.
F.
Shall be sizes 2" through 3" (DN50 through DN80), Underwriters
Laboratories Listed for UL Specification 1091 and Factory Mutual Approval
Standard 1112, supplied with a ductile iron body conforming to ASTM A-395,
GRADE 65-45-15, painted, and a ball conforming to Type 316 stainless steel.
Shall be unsupervised or have factory installed double pole, double throw
switches monitoring the open position as specified on the drawings. The valve
should be with grooved ends to connect with grooved end couplings and rated
for service up to 300 psi (2065 kPa) working pressure. Valves shall be installed
in accordance with the latest published manufacturer specifications.
Shall be of low differential, latched closed spring assisted, self resetting clapper,
pneumatic, hydraulic, or electric release, Actuated Check Valve with Deluge
Trim as Underwriters Laboratories, Listed and Factory Mutual Approved, for
vertical installation, supplied with Grade “E” EPDM clapper seal, housing cast of
ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, GRADE 65-45-15, serviceable
without removal from the line, with grooved 1-1/2"-6" (DN40-DN150) or flange
by groove 4"-6" (DN100- DN150) ends for installation with ANSI Class 150
flange or manufacturer grooved end couplings as applicable, rated for service
up to 300 psi (2065 kPa) working pressure.
Actuated Check Valve with Pre-Action Trim
1. Shall be of low differential, latched closed spring assisted, self resetting
clapper, pneumatic or electric release, non, single, or double interlock
Actuated Check Valve with Pre-Action Trim as Underwriters Laboratories
Listed and Factory Mutual Approved, for vertical installation, supplied with
Grade “E” EPDM clapper seal, housing cast of ductile iron conforming to
ASTM A-395, GRADE 65-45-15, serviceable without removal from the line,
with grooved 1 1/2"-6" (DN40-DN150) or flange by groove 4"-6" (DN100DN150)) ends for installation with ANSI Class 150 flange or grooved end
couplings as applicable, rated for service up to 300 psi (2065 kPa) working
pressure.
21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER - BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.4
SPECIAL VALVES
A. Provide valves, UL-listed, where indicated, in accordance with the following
listing. Provide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment
connections.
B.
Detector Check Valves: Detector check valves to be galvanized cast iron detector
check with bronze bypass meter with gate and check valves, and weighted
flapper and flanged ends. Provide Hersey-Sparling Meter Co. No. DC, Grinnell
Fig. 1371, or Viking Model C-2.
C.
Backflow Preventers: Backflow preventers to be reduced pressure type,
consisting of two spring-loaded check valves and a spring-loaded, diaphragm
actuated, differential pressure relief valve located between the check valves. Unit
to be galvanized cast iron. Unit to be as manufactured by, or approved equal:
D. Cla-Val Co., Model RP
E. Hersey Products, Equivalent
F. Watts Regulator Co., Equivalent
G. Alarm Check Valves: Alarm check valves to be flanged units complete with
gauges and accessories piped to unit, retarding chamber, and less water motor
alarm and outside gong. Provide Grinnell Model A. Standard alarm trimming to
include electric outlet for alarm connection.
H.
2.5
Deluge Valves: Deluge valves to be flanged units complete with trim package and
water gauges, diaphragm bypass, emergency release panels, dehydrator,
and air maintenance device accessories. Provide Viking Model D-5. Standard
alarm trimming to include electric pressure alarm switch for alarm connection.
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
A.
Provide fire protection specialties, UL-listed, in accordance with the following
listing. Provide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment
connections.
B. Water Flow Indicators: Water flow indicators to be of the paddle flow clamp-on
type with vane projecting into pipe through a hole drilled in pipe, instantly
recycling operation on 110 volt, single phase, 50 hertz service, with contacts for
connection to alarm center. Water flow indicators to be as manufactured by, or
approved equal:
1.
2.
3.
Grinnell, Model F-620
Autocall, Type WF5
Potter
D. Alarm Bells: Provide alarm bell at each waterflow indicator and at central location
where indicated. Bells to be 150 mm size unless otherwise indicated, single
stroke or vibrating type as required by the service, and are to operate on 110
volts, single phase, 50 hertz. Alarm bells to be as manufactured by, or approved
equal:
1.
Edwards Co.
21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER - BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.
3.
E
Water-Motor Gongs: Provide where indicated, and for each alarm check valve
250 mm weatherproof, red enameled finish, water-motor gongs.
F.
Supervisory Switches: Provide UL-listed tamper switches for each sprinkler,
standpipe and fire pump control valve or where indicated, arranged to detect the
open or closed position of control valves and to be connected to the fire
alarm system. Standpipe hose valves and test and drain valves shall not be
provided with supervisory switches. Switches to be attached to the various control
valves being supervised and to be complete with tamper switches, required trim
and electrical characteristics compatible with those of the fire alarm system.
Switch housing to be finished in red baked enamel Supervisory switches to be as
manufactured by, or approved equal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
Autocall Co.
Kidde Ultrasonic and Detection Alarms
Faraday
Temptron
Honeywell
Simplex
Potter
SIAMESE CONNECTIONS
A.
Wall Type Siamese Connections: Provide where indicated, wall type cast brass
flush Siamese connections and escutcheon plate assembly, with two, 65 mm fire
department inlets with female hose connections, fire hose connection screw
thread adapted to locally used hoses, equipped with individual drop clapper
valves, equipped with plugs and chains, construction features as indicated, and
constructed with the following additional construction features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Finish: Chrome plate.
Inlet Pipe: 100 mm (4") pipe, 125 mm (5") pipe, or 150 mm (6") pipe
(pipe size).
Cast Lettering: "AUTO. SPKR."/”STAND PIPE”.
Escutcheon: 180 mm x 360 mm rectangular.
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide siamese connections of one
of the following manufacturers, or approved equal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.7
Potter-Roemer, 5206
Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co. Equivalent
Croke-Standard, Equivalent
Sierra Fire Equipment Co., Equivalent
J.W. Moon, Inc. Equivalent
ALARM TEST MODULE
A. Test master
1. Threaded Outlet Alarm Test Module shall be (threaded) inlet and
outlet, a combination sight glass/orifice, bronze top works and 1/4" NPT plug
for attachment of a gauge water hose for pressure testing.
21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER - BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
3.3
Examine areas and conditions under which fire protection materials and
products are to be installed.
INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install mechanical identification in accordance with Division-21 Section 210553
"Identification for Fire- Suppression Piping and Equipment".
B.
Install fire protection signs on valves in accordance with NFPA 13 and
NFPA 14 requirements.
INSTALLATION OF FIRE PROTECTION VALVES
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 for installation of fire
protection piping materials.
B. Install piping products where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
piping systems comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
C. Install drain piping at low points of piping systems.
where required.
Provide dry drum drips
D. Install sectional valves in inlet piping, at bottom of each riser, and in loops as
indicated.
E. Install water flow indicators where indicated. Mount supervisory switches on
each sectional valve.
F. Install Inspector's test connection where indicated, or at most remote point from
riser.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF VALVES
A. Provide valves on mains and branches for sectionalising the system for
maintenance and operation and for flushing, draining and testing the system.
B. Provide 50 mm drain valves of the globe valve type at base of stack. Slope
piping not less than 2% towards drain valves
C. Install alarm check valves on main water supply pipe to every fire fighting
water distribution system at source of pressure. Install, test and adjust in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Install detector check valves in horizontal position as indicated, orientated for
proper flow direction. Install by-pass meter with globe valve and check valve, in
accordance with manufacturer's installation directions.
END OF SECTION 21 05 23
21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER - BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
21 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS............................................................................................. 2
1.2
SUMMARY .................................................................................................................. 2
1.3
MSS STANDARD (MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE
VALVE AND FITTING INDUSTRY) COMPLIANCE ................................................................. 2
1.4
SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 2
1.5
SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 3
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................. 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS............................................................................................................. 4
2.1
2.2
2.3
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS - GENERAL .................................................................. 4
MANUFACTURED UNITS ........................................................................................... 4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS.................................................................................. 5
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................ 6
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS ................................................................ 6
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION ................................................................. 6
SPACING OF PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS....................................................... 8
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS ........................................................................................... 8
METAL FABRICATION ................................................................................................ 9
PAINTING .................................................................................................................... 9
21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 9
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes
piping and equipment.
hangers
and
supports
for
mechanical
systems
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to
this Section:
1.
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching
hangers and supports to building structure.
2.
Division 21 Section 210548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for FireSuppression Piping and Equipment.
3.
Division 21 Section 211200 " Fire Suppression Stand Pipes" & Section
211300 "Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems".
C.
Approved types of pipe hangers, supports and anchors are shown on the
Drawings, and described in this section. Contractor may provide other types
subject to approval by the Engineer.
D.
Pipe supports and anchors are to be provided following the requirements of this
section and other Division-21 sections irrespective of whether they are
indicated on the Drawings or not.
1.3
MSS STANDARD (MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE
VALVE AND FITTING INDUSTRY) COMPLIANCE
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
Terminology used in this Section is defined in MSS SP-90.
Provide pipe hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58.
Select and apply pipe hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-69.
Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-89.
SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment suitable
for seismic zone of project.
B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes
capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents,
and test water.
C. Design and obtain approval from the Engineer for seismic restraint
hangers and supports for piping and equipment suitable for seismic zone of the
project. Upon application of seismic forces of computed intensity, piping shall
remain fully connected into operable systems and shall not be displaced
21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 9
PGC-230033-C-P8
sufficiently to damage adjacent or connecting equipment, or building members.
Thermal expansion flexibility shall not be impaired. Seismic rate shall be as
follows:
1.
2.
D.
1.5
Project seismic zone is 2A with a zone factor of 0.15
Building Importance Factor: 1.0
All hangers and supports installation details and any cutting and drilling in
structural elements shall be approved by the Engineer.
SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of hanger and support.
1.6
C.
Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's Figure No.,
size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support.
D.
Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders
comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
E.
Shop drawings for each type of hanger and support, indicating dimensions,
weights, required clearances, and methods of component assembly.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
NFPA Compliance:
Comply with NFPA 13 for hangers and supports
used as components of fire protection systems.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide hangers and supports that are listed and
labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 9
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS - GENERAL
A.
Hangers and supports are to allow adjustment of slope of piping and removal
without dismantling pipes.
B. Hangers and supports to be designed and tested to sustain load eight times actual
supported load.
C.
Hangers and supports to be steel with smooth flat bearing surfaces, to carry
weight of piping and contents without sagging, swaying, vibrating or deforming,
and to allow free movement of pipes due to expansion and contraction without
noise or damage to piping or construction.
D.
Hangers and supports to be complete with all necessary structural steel, rods,
bolts, nuts, turnbuckles and other components.
E. Select only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service.
F.
Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to
exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping.
G. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping systems.
2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Hangers, Supports, and Components: Factory-fabricated according to MSS SP-58.
1.
Components include galvanized coatings where installed for piping and
equipment that will not have a field-applied finish.
2.
Pipe attachments include nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection
where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
B.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 690 kPa (100 psi) average compressive
strength, waterproofed calcium silicate, encased with sheet metal shield. Insert
and shield cover entire circumference of pipe and are of length indicated by
manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation.
C.
Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners:
Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin
attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads
and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire protection systems include
UL listing and FM approval.
D.
Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners:
Insert-type attachments with pull-out and
shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials
where used. Fasteners for fire protection systems include UL listing and FM
approval.
E. Pipe Anchor and Guides: 20 mm diameter U-bolts to fit around pipe loosely for
guides and welded to pipe for anchors.
21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 9
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel:
and galvanized.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black
B.
Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex-head, track bolts and
nuts.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink, nonmetallic.
1. Characteristics include post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cementtype grout that is nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for
both interior and exterior applications.
2.
Design Mix: 34.5 MPa , 28-day compressive strength.
3.
Water: Potable.
4.
Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.
21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 9
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A.
Specific hanger requirements are specified in the Section specifying the
equipment and systems.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that
are not specified in piping specification Sections.
C.
Install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent
similar piping.
D.
Do not use wire, rope, wood, chain, strap or perforated metal to support piping,
and do not support piping from other piping.
E.
Hangers and supports in mechanical rooms including chiller hall and pump room
floor to be spring type.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
A. General: Comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Install hangers, supports,
clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure. Provide intermediate steel where required to transfer loads to areas of
structure where they can be safely accommodated.
B.
Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on
field- fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible. Keep pipes in
position with U- bolts. Lines subject to extreme thermal expansion to be free to
slide or roll. (Provide rollers on trapeze hangers)
C.
Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69,
and the requirements of this section. Specified maximum spans are for straight
runs of pipe.
D.
Where pipes of various sizes are supported together by trapeze hangers, space
hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter
pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. Support vertical pipe
risers independently of adjacent horizontal hangers.
E.
Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel.
Space
attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges,
guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping.
Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms. Install
reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
F.
Install concrete inserts in new construction prior to placing concrete.
G. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured.
Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool
manufacturer's operating manual. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or
in concrete slabs less than 100 mm thick.
H. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured.
Install according to fastener manufacturer's written
21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 9
PGC-230033-C-P8
instructions. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs
less than 100 mm thick or in post tensioned slabs.
I.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods,
nuts, washers, and other accessories.
J.
Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Field-fabricate from ASTM A 36 steel shapes
selected for loads being supp. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.
K. Support fire protection systems piping independent of other piping.
L.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems,
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
M.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead
loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected
equipment. Support piping independently of equipment.
N.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and
so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 "Building Services
Piping" is not exceeded.
O. Anchors: Weld U-bolts to pipes at points of contact and bolt to structural
angle frame securely fixed to structure.
P. Insulated Piping:
Protect pipe insulation at hangers and supports from
weight or movement of pipe. Provide firm attachment to pipe. Comply
with the following installation requirements.
1.
Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps
projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME
B31.9.
2.
Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without
vapor barrier. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match
adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Shields: Install MSS Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor
barrier. Shields to span an arc of 180 degrees (3.1 rad) and have dimensions
in mm not less than the following:
PIPE
SIZE Mm
LENGTH
mm
0
0
8 to 900
3000
1.220
1000
3000
1.520
125 and 1500
4500
1.520
200 to 3500
6000
1.910
400 to 6000
6000
2.670
21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
THICKNES
S Mm
PAGE 7 OF 9
PGC-230033-C-P8
4.
5.
6.
3.3
4. Pipes 200 mm and Larger: Include wood inserts.
5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as the protective shield.
6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping.
SPACING OF PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Ductile Iron Pipe Supports:
1.
Support ductile iron pipes with at least one support per length of pipe
and at intervals not exceeding 3.5 m with hanger preferably located adjacent
to joint.
B. Steel Pipe Supports:
1.
Support horizontal steel pipes at intervals not exceeding maximum support
spacing and by hanger rod of minimum size as follows:
PIPE DIAMETER
(m)
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
600
2.
3.4
MAXIMUM SUPPORT
SPACING (m)
MINIMUM SIZE OF
HANGER ROD (mm)
1.5
10
1.8
10
2.0
10
2.5
10
2.7
10
3.0
10
3.3
13
3.6
4.2
13
16
4.2
4.2
4.8
4.8
4.8
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
16
22
25
25
25
25
28
32
32
38
38
Support vertical steel pipes at a minimum of every storey height.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or
support equipment above floor.
21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 9
PGC-230033-C-P8
B.
3.5
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make a smooth
bearing surface.
METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections
that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
D.
3.6
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.l procedures for manual shielded
metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, methods used in correcting
welding work, and the following:
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3.
Remove welding flux immediately.
4.
Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after
finishing, and so that contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments
and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
PAINTING
A.
Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint
exposed areas immediately after erection of hangers and supports. Use same
materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for
touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm
B.
Touching Up: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections.
and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9
Section “Painting”.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with AST\I A ~‘SC’.
END OF SECTION 21 05 29
21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 9 OF 9
PGC-230033-C-P8
21 05 48
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE –
SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
RELATED DOCUMENTS............................................................................................. 2
SUMMARY .................................................................................................................. 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................. 2
NOISE CRITERIA: ....................................................................................................... 3
SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS............................................................................................................. 5
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................ 5
VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS AND SUPPORTS UNITS .................................. 5
VIBRATION ISOLATORS ............................................................................................ 5
BASES......................................................................................................................... 6
GENERAL ISOLATOR REQUIREMENTS: .................................................................. 7
SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT...................................... 7
PART 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................................... 10
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
INSPECTION ............................................................................................................. 10
PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS ............................................................................ 10
APPLICATIONS ......................................................................................................... 10
INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................... 10
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ................................................................................... 11
21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of
this Section.
B. Architectural layout and locations of sound related materials. Also site layout with
respect to adjacent buildings.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Extent of vibration control work required by this section is indicated on Drawings
and schedules, and/or specified in other Division 21sections. Noise criteria,
seismic restraints for equipment, vibration tolerance, and vibration isolation for
HVAC and plumbing work.
B. Types of vibration control products specified in this section include the following:
1. Neoprene Pads.
2. Vibration Isolation Springs.
3. All-Directional Anchors.
4. Neoprene Mountings.
5. Spring Isolators, Vertically-Restrained.
6. Thrust Restraints.
7. Fabricated Equipment Bases.
8. Inertia Base Frames.
9. Isolation Hangers.
10. Flexible Pipe Connectors.
1.3
C.
Vibration control products furnished as integral part of factory-fabricated
equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 21
sections.
D.
Refer to other Division 21 sections for equipment foundations, hangers,
sealants, gaskets, and other work related to vibration control work.
E.
Refer to other Division 21 and 26 sections for requirements of electrical
connections to equipment isolated on vibration control products.
F.
Refer to other Division 23 sections for requirements of duct connections to air
handling equipment isolated on vibration control products.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of
vibration control products, of type, size, and capacity required, whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
1.
Except as otherwise indicated, obtain vibration control products from
single manufacturer.
21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
1.4
NOISE CRITERIA:
A. Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and duct systems shall not
exceed NC 35 within the occupied room, except as mentioned in the design
guidelines.
B. For equipment which has no sound power ratings scheduled on the plans, the
contractor shall select equipment such that the fore-going noise criteria, local
ordinance noise levels, and OSHA requirements are not exceeded. Selection
procedure shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 1999 HVAC Applications
Handbook, Chapter 43, SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL. Cooling Tower
shall not exceed 80 dB at 3 metre.
C.
An allowance, not to exceed 5db, may be added to the measured value to
compensate for the variation of the room attenuating effect between room test
condition prior to occupancy and design condition after occupancy which may
include the addition of sound absorbing material, such as, furniture. This
allowance may not be taken after occupancy. The room attenuating effect is
defined as the difference between sound power level emitted to room and sound
pressure level in room.
D. In absence of specified measurement requirements, measure equipment noise
levels one meter from equipment and at an elevation of maximum noise
generation.
E. Seismic Restraint Requirements:
1.
For equipment:
a.
All mechanical equipment shall be suitable for applications
requiring equipment anchorage to resist seismic forces of Seismic Zone
2A, per the Uniform Building Code (UBC).
b. All mechanical equipment not supported with isolators external to the unit
shall be securely anchored to the structure.
Such mechanical
equipment, shall be properly supported to resist a horizontal force of 20
percent of the weight of the equipment furnished
c.
All mechanical equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall be
provided with seismic restraints capable of resisting a horizontal force
of 20 percent of the weight of the equipment furnished.
d. Mechanical Equipment: Mechanical equipment to be seismically protected
shall include the following items to the extent required on the Drawings or
in other Sections of the Specification:
e.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Storage tanks for oil and water.
Expansion air separator tanks.
Valves and fittings for piping.
Air compressors.
1.
For piping:
i.
a.
Mechanical Systems: The following mechanical systems
shall be installed as required on the Drawings and other Sections of
the Specification and shall be seismically protected in accordance
with this Specification:
21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
1) All Piping Inside the Building Except as Specifically Stated
Below Under "Items Not Covered By This Section".
2) Fuel piping outside of buildings.
F.
Allowable Vibration Tolerances for Rotating, Non-reciprocating Equipment:
Not to exceed a self-excited vibration maximum velocity of 5 mm per second
RMS, filter in, when measured with a vibration meter on bearing caps of machine
in vertical, horizontal and axial directions or measured at equipment mounting feet
if bearings are concealed. Measurements for internally isolated fans and motors
may be made at the mounting feet.
G. The contractor shall employ an Acoustic Consultant to ensure he meets the
criteria.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation
instructions for each type of vibration control product. Submit schedule showing
size, type, deflection, and location for each product furnished. Manufacturer's
Literature shall include:
1. Vibration isolators:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
Floor mountings.
Hangers.
Snubbers.
Thrust restraints.
Bases.
Seismic restraint provisions and bolting.
Acoustical enclosures.
B.
Isolator manufacturer shall furnish with submittal load calculations for selection of
isolators, including supplemental bases, based on lowest operating speed of
equipment supported.
C.
Seismic Requirements: Submittals are required for all equipment anchors,
supports and seismic restraints. Submittals shall include weights, dimensions,
standard connections, manufacturer's recommendations, behavior problems
(vibration, thermal, expansion etc.) associated with equipment or piping
D. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating
dimensions, weights, required clearances, and method of assembly of
components. Detail bases, and show location of equipment anchoring points,
coordinated with equipment manufacturer's shop drawings.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each type of vibration
control product. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in
maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering vibration control products which may be incorporated in
the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS AND SUPPORTS UNITS
A.
2.3
Amber/Booth Co.
Korfund Dynamics Corp.
Kinetics Noise Control
Mason Industries, Inc.
Peabody Noise Control, Inc.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.
General: Type of isolator, base, and minimum static deflection shall be as
required for each specific equipment application as recommended by isolator or
equipment manufacturer but subject to minimum requirements indicated in the
schedule on the drawings.
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A.
Hangers: Shall be combination neoprene and springs unless otherwise noted
and shall allow for expansion of pipe.
1. Combination Neoprene and Spring (Type H): Vibration hanger shall
contain a spring and double deflection neoprene element in series. Spring
shall have a diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed operating spring
height. Spring shall have a minimum additional travel of 50 percent between
design height and solid height. Spring shall permit a 15 degree angular
misalignment without rubbing on hanger box.
2. Spring Position Hanger (Type HP): Similar to combination neoprene and
spring hanger except hanger shall hold piping at a fixed elevation during
installation and include a secondary adjustment feature to transfer load to
spring while maintaining same position.
3. Neoprene (Type HN): Vibration hanger shall contain a double deflection
type neoprene isolation element.
Hanger rod shall be separated from
contact with hanger bracket by a neoprene grommet.
4. Spring (Type HS): Vibration hanger shall contain a coiled steel spring in
series with a neoprene grommet.
Spring shall have a diameter not
less than 0.8 of compressed operating spring height. Spring shall have a
minimum additional travel of 50 percent between design height and solid
height. Spring shall permit a 15 degree angular misalignment without
rubbing on hanger box.
5.
Hanger supports for piping 50 mm and larger shall have a pointer and
scale deflection indicator.
21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.4
B.
Snubbers: Each spring mounted base shall have a minimum of four alldirectional or eight two directional (two per side) seismic snubbers that are
double acting. Elastomeric materials shall be shock absorbent neoprene bridge
quality bearing pads, maximum 60 durometer, replaceable and have a minimum
thickness of 6 mm. Air gap between hard and resilient material shall be not less
than 3 mm nor more than 6 mm. Restraints shall be capable of withstanding
design load without permanent deformation.
C.
Thrust Restraints (Type THR): Restraints shall provide a spring element
contained in a steel frame with neoprene pads at each end attachment.
Restraints shall have factory preset thrust and be field adjustable to allow a
maximum movement of 6 mm when the fan starts and stops. Restraint
assemblies shall include rods, angle brackets and other hardware for field
installation.
BASES
A.
Rails (Type R): Design rails with isolator brackets to reduce mounting
height of equipment and cradle machines having legs or bases that do not
require a complete supplementary base. To assure adequate stiffness, height of
members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest base dimension but not less than
100 mm (four-inches). Where rails are used with neoprene mounts for small fans
or close coupled pumps, extend rails to compensate overhang of housing.
B.
Integral Structural Steel Base (Type B): Design base with isolator brackets to
reduce mounting height of equipment which require a complete supplementary
rigid base. To assure adequate stiffness, height of members shall be a
minimum of 1/12 of longest base dimension, but not less than 100 mm.
C.
Inertia Base (Type I): This applies to diesel generators, any floor mounted
pumps and as shown on drawings. Base shall be a reinforced concrete inertia
base. Pour concrete into a welded steel channel frame, incorporating prelocated
equipment anchor bolts and pipe sleeves. Level concrete to provide a smooth
uniform bearing surface for equipment mounting. Provide grout under uneven
supports. Channel depth shall be a minimum of
1/12 of longest dimension of base but not less than 150 mm. Form shall include
13 mm reinforcing bars welded in place on minimum of 203 mm centers running
both ways in a
layer 40 mm above bottom. The whole assembly shall be supported on spring
isolators
carrying the base from brakets that keep the centre of gravity low. Use height
saving brackets in all mounting locations. Weight of inertia base two to three the
weight of equipment supported to provide a maximum peak-to-peak displacement
of 2 mm. For pumps use wide enough base, so that the supports for the pipe
connections are made on the base.
D.
Curb Mounted Isolation Base (Type CB): Fabricate from aluminum to fit on
top of standard curb with overlap to allow water run-off and have wind and water
seals which shall not interfere with spring action. Provide resilient snubbers with 6
mm clearance for wind resistance. Top and bottom bearing surfaces shall
have sponge type weather seals. Integral spring isolators shall comply with
Spring Isolator (Type S) requirements.
21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.5
GENERAL ISOLATOR REQUIREMENTS:
A.
Elastomeric isolators shall comply with ASTM D2240 and be oil resistant
neoprene with a maximum stiffness of 60 durometer and have a straight-line
deflection curve.
B.
Exposure to Weather: Isolators, including springs, exposed to weather shall be
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Hot-dip zinc coating shall be not less than
609 grams per square meter (two ounces per square foot) by weight complying
with ASTM A123. In addition, provide limit stops to resist wind velocity. Comply
with the design wind velocity for hurricane areas as per VA Construction Standard
CD-54.
C.
Uniform Loading: Select and locate isolators to produce uniform loading and
deflection even when equipment weight is not evenly distributed.
D. Color code isolator by type and size for easy identification of capacity.
2.6
SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT
A.
Bolt pad mounted equipment, without vibration isolators, to the floor or other
support using ASTM A307 standard bolting material; or, equal.
B.
Floor Mounted Equipment, With Vibration Isolators: Type SS. Where Type N
isolators are used provide channel frame lease horizontal restraints bolted to the
floor, or other support, on all sides of the equipment. Size and material required
for the lease shall be as recommended by the isolator manufacturer.
C.
On all sides of suspended equipment, provide bracing for rigid supports and
provide restraints for resiliently supported equipment. The slack cable restraint
method, Mason Industries, or equal, is acceptable.
D.
Neoprene Pads: Oil-resistant neoprene sheets, of manufacturer's standard
hardness and cross-ribbed or waffled pattern.
E.
Vibration Isolation Springs: Wound-steel compression springs, or high-strength
spring alloy steel; with spring diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed height
of spring at rated loads. Provide minimum additional travel to solid, equal to 50%
of rated deflection. Provide spring wire with elastic limit stress exceeding at solid
deflection.
F.
All-Directional Anchors: Provide all-directional acoustical pipe anchor consisting
of telescopic arrangement of 2 sizes of steel tubing separated by minimum
12.7 mm thickness of heavy-duty neoprene and duck, or neoprene isolation
material. Provide vertical restraints by similar material arranged to prevent
vertical travel in either direction. Design for maximum 3450 kPa load on
isolation materials, and provide for equal resistance in any direction. Equip
anchor with threaded hole on top and 2 holes in base plate for bolting down; or
provide welding provisions top and bottom, if indicated.
G.
Thrust Restraints: Provide horizontal thrust restraints consisting of spring
element in series with neoprene pad. Select spring deflection same as for
equipment loading. Design so thrust restraints can be pre-set and adjusted
21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
in field. Attach horizontal restraints at centerline of thrust and symmetrically on
either side of unit.
H.
Fabricated Equipment Bases: Where supplementary bases are indicated for
use with isolator units to support equipment (base not integral with equipment),
provide welded rectangular unit, fabricated of structural steel shapes, plates and
bars complying with ASTM A36, as shown. Provide welded support brackets at
points indicated, and anchor base to spring isolator units. Except as otherwise
indicated arrange brackets to result in lowest possible mounting height for
equipment, but provide minimum of 25 mm. Provide bolt holes in base matching
anchor bolt holes in equipment.
1.
2.
I.
Inertia Base Frames: Where inertia bases are indicated for use with pad type
isolation units to support equipment, provide rectangular structural beam channel, or
complete sheet metal box concrete forms for floating foundations, with materials
complying with ASTM A36. Frame unit as shown or, if not shown, with minimum
depth of 0.08 x longest dimension of base, but not less than 150 mm deep. Size
frame as shown or, if not shown, so that weight of frame plus concrete fill will be
greater than operating weight of equipment supported. Provide steel reinforcing
both ways with both ends of reinforcing butt welded to base framing.
1.
2.
J.
Where indicated, provide for auxiliary motor slide base under motor or motor
slide rails for adjusting belt tension. Design primary base for bolting of rails or
slide base in position.
Where sizes of base framing members are not indicated, fabricate base with
depth of structure not less than 0.10 x longest span of base, rigidly braced to
support equipment without deflections or distortions which would be
detrimental to equipment or equipment performance.
Provide anchor bolts, located as required for equipment anchorage and
supported for casting of concrete. Locate bolts as indicated.
Provide adjustable bolts in pipe sleeves; for minimum of 12.7 mm (1/2")
adjustment around anchor bolts.
Isolation Hangers: Hanger units formed with brackets and including manufacturer's
standard compression isolators of type indicated. Design brackets for 3 times rated
loading of units. Fabricate units to accept misalignment of 15 degrees off center in
any direction before contacting hanger box, and for use with either rod or
strap type members, and including acoustical washers to prevent metal-to-metal
contacts.
1. Provide vibration isolation spring with cap in lower part of hanger and rubber
hanger element in top, securely retained in unit.
2.
K.
Provide hangers, precompressed to rated load to limit deflection during
installation. Design so hanger may be released after full load is applied.
Flexible Pipe Connectors:
1. For non-ferrous piping, provide bronze hose covered with copper tube ends
or bronze flanged ends, braze-welded to hose.
2.
For ferrous piping, provide stainless steel hose covered with stainless steel wire
braid with NPT steel nipples or 1030 kPa ANSI flanges, welded to hose.
21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.
Flexible pipe connectors to have screwed ends for pipes 50 mm and under and
flanged ends for pipes over 50 mm .
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible pipe connectors of one of
the following manufacturers, or approved equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Mason Industries
Anaconda
Aeroquip Corp.
Flexonics
Keflex, Inc.
21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 9 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Examine areas and conditions under which vibration control units are to be
installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS
A.
General:
Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by
ASHRAE, for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units
as indicated.
B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration
isolation materials and units.
3.3
3.4
APPLICATIONS
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, select vibration control products in
accordance with latest edition of ASHRAE Handbook, Systems Volume, Chapter
35 "Sound and Vibration Control", Table 27. Where more than one type of
product is offered, selection is Contractor's option.
B.
Piping: For piping connected to equipment mounted on vibration control products,
install isolation hangers as indicated, and for first 3 points of support for pipe
sizes 100 mm and less, for first 4 points of support for pipe sizes 125 mm
through 200 mm , and for first 6 points of support for pipe sizes 250 mm and
over.
C.
Comply with NFPA 13 & 14 for requirements related to seismic and
vibration requirements.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions
for installation and load application to vibration control materials and units. Adjust
to ensure that units have equal deflection, do not bottom out under loading, and
are not short- circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks
and similar devices intended for temporary support during installation.
B.
Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation
and to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated.
C.
Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators.
Shim units as required where substrate is not level.
D.
Install inertia base frames on isolator units as indicated, so that minimum of
25 mm clearance below base will result when frame is filled with concrete and
supported equipment has been installed and loaded for operation.
21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 10 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
E.
For air handling equipment, install thrust restraints as indicated, and also
wherever thrust exceeds 10% of equipment weight.
F. Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible.
G. Flexible Pipe Connectors:
Install on equipment side of shutoff valves,
horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible.
H.
Provide Seismic snubbers on cooling towers, air handling units, pumps, chillers
and boilers.
I.
Vibration Isolation:
J.
3.5
1.
Connections to Equipment: do not apply any flexible couplings on
discharge from fire pumps as per NFPA 20 A.
2.
Common Foundation: Mount each electric motor on same foundation as
driven machine. Hold driving motor and driven machine in positive rigid
alignment with provision for adjusting motor alignment and belt tension.
Bases shall be level throughout length and width. Provide shims to facilitate
pipe connections, leveling, and bolting.
2.
Provide heat shields where elastomers are subject to temperatures
over 38 degrees C (l00 degrees F).
4.
Extend bases for pipe elbow supports at discharge and suction
connections at pumps. Pipe elbow supports shall not short circuit pump
vibration to structure.
Inspection and Adjustments: Check for vibration and noise transmission through
connections, piping, foundations, and walls. Adjust, repair, or replace
isolators as required to reduce vibration and noise transmissions to specified
levels.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Upon completion of vibration control work, prepare report showing measured
equipment deflections for each major item of equipment as indicated.
B.
Clean each vibration control unit, and verify that each is working freely, and that
there is no dirt or debris in immediate vicinity of unit that could possibly
short-circuit unit isolation.
END OF SECTION 21 05 48
21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 11 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
21 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
RELATED DOCUMENTS............................................................................................. 2
SUMMARY .................................................................................................................. 2
SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................. 2
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING ............................................................................ 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS............................................................................................................. 3
2.1
IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS ....................................................................... 3
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................ 6
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS ..................................................... 6
VALVE TAGS .............................................................................................................. 7
EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS ......................................................................... 8
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ..................................................................................... 8
21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes mechanical identification materials and devices.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For identification materials and devices.
B. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and graphic representation required for
each identification material and device.
C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Reproduce on standard-size bond
paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown on
tag, room or space location of valve, and variations for identification. Mark valves
intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Besides mounted copies,
furnish copies for maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" for
lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
devices.
1.5
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and
painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar
concealment.
21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
A.
General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required
for each application as referenced in other Division 21 Sections. If more
than one type is specified for application, selection is the Contractor's option,
but provide one selection for each product category.
B.
Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data
engraved or stamped. Nameplates for external and wet applications to be
stainless steel.
C.
1.
Data:
Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number,
capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances,
and essential data.
2.
Location: Accessible and visible.
Stencils:
Standard stencils, prepared with letter sizes conforming to
recommendations of ASME A13.1. Minimum letter height is 30 mm for ducts,
and 20 mm for access door signs and similar operational instructions.
1.
Material: Brass.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd gloss black enamel, unless otherwise
indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3.
Identification Paint:
Exterior, oil-based, alkyd
according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
enamel
in
colors
D. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent
adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl type with permanent
adhesive, complying with ASME A13.1.
E.
Pipes, Including Insulation:
around pipe at each location.
Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees
F. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by the
Engineer.
1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to accommodate
both directions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction
of flow.
G.
Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid,
snap on, color-coded, complying with ASME A13.1.
H.
Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, selfadhesive, vinyl tape, at least 0.08 mm thick.
1.
2.
Width: 40 mm on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 150 mm; 65
mm for larger pipes.
Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
I.
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 6 mm letters for piping system
abbreviation and 13 mm sequenced numbers. Include 4 mm hole for fastener.
1.
Material: 0.8 mm thick, polished brass, or aluminum for indoor and internal
applications, and stainless steel for external and wet applications.
Size: 40 mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
J.
Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link chain; beaded chain; or S-hooks.
K.
Access Panel Markers:
2 mm thick, engraved plastic-laminate markers,
with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide
3 mm center hole for attachment.
L.
Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on
masonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include screws.
1.
Frame: Extruded aluminum.
2.
Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing quality B, 2.5 mm,
single- thickness glass.
M.
Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs:
ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose,
paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black
surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical
fastening.
1.
Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to
match equipment identification.
2.
Thickness: 3 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type,
permanent adhesive.
N.
Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the
following color codes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Green: Cooling equipment and components.
Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above.
Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
O.
Name and plan number.
Equipment service.
Design capacity.
Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and
leaving conditions, and speed.
Size: 65 mm by 100 mm for control devices, dampers, and valves; 115 mm by
150 mm for equipment.
21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
P.
Plasticized T a g s : Preprinted o r p a r t i a l l y p r e p r i n t e d , a c c i d e n t -prevention
tags, of plasticized card stock with mat finish suitable for writing.
1.
2.
3.
Size: 85 mm by 145 mm.
Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire.
Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or
DO NOT OPERATE.
Q.
Lettering and Graphics:
Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other
designations used in mechanical identification with corresponding designations
indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification,
operation, and maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
R.
Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple
systems of same name are indicated.
21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction
of flow.
B. Marker Type: Stenciled markers complying with ASME A13.1.
C.
Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 150 mm OD by
following method:
1.
D.
Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 150 mm in diameter and
larger by following method:
1.
E.
Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less
than 20 mm wide, lapped a minimum of 40 mm at both ends of pipe marker,
and covering full circumference of pipe.
Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less
than 40 mm wide, lapped a minimum of 75 mm at both ends of pipe marker,
and covering full circumference of pipe.
Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished
spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels,
ceilings, and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations according to the
following:
1.
Near each valve and control device.
2.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and
terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.
3.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or nonaccessible enclosures.
4.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
5.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6.
Spaced at a maximum of 15 m intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to
7.5 m in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately
spaced markers.
F. Route Markers for underground services:
1.
Route markers for underground
abbreviations as follows:
services
shall
have
standardized
2. FPL - Fire Pipeline
3.
FUEL - Fuel Pipeline
21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
4.
All presently used services shall be classified under the aforesaid categories
as deemed relevant. If new services are identified and cannot be logically
classified under any of the aforesaid categories, then such services shall be
provided with a new, separate abbreviated standard, as approved by the
Engineer.
5.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the abbreviations shall be
imprinted clearly in English letters of 12 mm height and 3 mm depth, as per
lettering sample shown, on a 100 mm diameter, 10 mm thick circular castaluminum stud which has an insert length of at least 100 mm, to allow it to be
set into concrete. The insert section shall have a thickness sufficient to
prevent break-off of the stud and shall be provided with “back-cut” indentations
to ensure that the route marker is firmly held in place by the surrounding
concrete.
6.
The route markers shall be set into the ground surface at finished grade level
(FGL) in areas where concrete/tile paving or asphalt is provided. At locations
where the FGL finish is bare earth, the route markers shall be embedded
onto the top of a concrete pillar which is buried into the earth as detailed
below.
7.
The concrete pillars shall be of class P1, filled into 150 mm diameter GRP pipe
600 mm long. The pillars shall be buried into the ground to a depth of 400 mm
with the remaining 200 mm projecting above FGL.
8.
The route markers shall be placed along the center line of the underground
service route and shall be located at every 75 m along straight runs of the
underground service and at every bend on the route. Spacing on curved
sections shall be suitably reduced in consultation with the Engineer. Where
the underground service is laid in pre-formed raceways that are provided with
covers, that cannot accept embedding of the route marker studs, these shall be
located at FGL adjacent to the relevant raceway, as approved by the Engineer.
9.
Samples of all the various route markers shall be submitted for approval to
the Engineer.
10. All buried underground services including, fire, pipes etc … shall be
further identified to show service below. The buried pipes shall be covered
with plastic sheet identifying type of service. Sheet to extend 300 mm on
both sides of pipe and shall be located at 300 mm above identified pipe.
Agree with the engineer on colour of plastic sheet and identification letters.
3.2
VALVE TAGS
A.
B.
Install on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves,
within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture supply stops, shutoff
valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and HVAC
terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units.
List tagged valves in valve schedule.
Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, color
scheme, and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
C.
Tag Material: Brass or aluminum for indoor and internal applications, and stainless
steel for outdoor and wet applications.
D.
Tag Size and Shape: According to the following:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Tag Color: According to the following:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Fire Protection: 40 mm, round.
Sprinkler: 40 mm, round.
Gas: 40 mm, round.
Fire Protection: Red.
Sprinkler: Red.
Gas: Yellow.
Letter Color: According to the following:
1. Fire Protection: White.
2. Sprinkler: White.
3. Gas: Black.
G. Install mounted valve schedule in each major equipment room.
3.3
EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS
A.
Install engraved plastic-laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each
major item of mechanical equipment.
Include signs for the following general
categories of equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Plasticized Tags: Install within concealed space, to reduce amount of text in
exposed sign outside concealment, if equipment to be identified is concealed
above acoustical ceiling or similar concealment.
1.
3.4
Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous
units such as gas outlets.
Fire department hose valves and hose stations.
Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
Pumps and similar motor-driven units.
Tanks and pressure vessels.
Strainers, filters and similar equipment.
Identify operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in
unoccupied spaces, including machine rooms, by installing plasticized tags.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become
visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions.
B. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.
END OF SECTION 21 05 53
21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 8
PGC-230033-C-P8
21 12 00
STANDPIPE SYSTEM
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL.............................................................................................................. 3
1.1
REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 3
1.2
SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 3
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................. 5
1.3.1 Qualifications of Installer ............................................................................................ 5
1.3.2 System As-Built Drawings ........................................................................................... 6
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .................................................................... 6
PART 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 7
2.1 ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS ............................................................................... 7
2.1.1 Pipe and Fittings ......................................................................................................... 7
2.1.2 Pipe Hangers and Supports ........................................................................................ 7
2.1.3 Valves......................................................................................................................... 7
2.1.3.1 Hose Valves ............................................................................................................. 7
2.1.4 Identification Signs ...................................................................................................... 7
2.1.5 Water flow Test Connection ........................................................................................ 7
2.1.6 Main Drains ................................................................................................................ 8
2.1.7 Pipe Sleeves ............................................................................................................... 8
2.1.7.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs ....................................... 8
2.1.7.2 Sleeves in Partitions .................................................................................................. 8
2.1.8 Escutcheon Plates ...................................................................................................... 8
2.1.9 Fire Department Connections ..................................................................................... 8
2.1.10 Alarm Valves............................................................................................................. 9
2.1.11 Water Motor Alarms .................................................................................................. 9
2.1.12 Pressure Switch ........................................................................................................ 9
2.1.13 Waterflow Detector ................................................................................................... 9
2.1.14 Fire Hose Cabinets ................................................................................................... 9
2.1.15 Valve Tamper Switch .............................................................................................. 10
2.1.16 Fire Pumps ............................................................................................................. 10
2.1.17 Backflow Preventer ................................................................................................. 10
2.2
BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS ...................................................................................... 10
2.2.1 Buried Pipe and Fittings ............................................................................................ 10
2.2.2 Buried Utility Warning and Identification Tape ........................................................... 10
2.3
ELECTRICAL WORK ................................................................................................. 11
PART 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................................... 12
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING ................................................. 12
CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS ................................... 12
STANDPIPE SYSTEM INSTALLATION ..................................................................... 12
DISINFECTION.......................................................................................................... 12
21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.5
FIELD PAINTING ....................................................................................................... 12
3.6
ELECTRICAL WORK ................................................................................................. 13
3.7
FLUSHING................................................................................................................. 13
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ...................................................................................... 13
3.8.1 Preliminary Tests ...................................................................................................... 13
3.8.2 Formal Inspection and Tests (Acceptance Tests)...................................................... 13
3.8.2.1 Flow Test ............................................................................................................... 13
3.8.2.2 Alarm Testing......................................................................................................... 14
3.8.3 Additional Tests ........................................................................................................ 14
21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic
designation only.
1.
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
a.
2.
6.
1.2
FM APP GUIDE
Approval Guide
FCCCHR List (continuously updated) List of Approve Backflow
Prevention Assemblies
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
a.
NFPA 13 (2010; Errata 10-1; TIA 10-1; TIA 11-2) Standard for the
Installation of Sprinkler Systems
b.
NFPA 14 (2010) Standard for the Installation of Standpipes and Hose
Systems
c.
NFPA 24 (2010) Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service
Mains and Their Appurtenances
d.
NFPA 70 (2011; Errata 2 2012) National Electrical Code
e.
NFPA 72 (2010; TIA 10-4) National Fire Alarm and Signalling Code
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
a.
7.
(2010e1) Standard Specification for Flat Glass
FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND
HYDRAULIC RESEARCH (FCCCHR)
a.
5.
ASTM C1036
FM GLOBAL (FM)
a.
4.
(2005; Errata 2005) Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
a.
3.
AWWA C651
UL Fire Prot Dir (2012) Fire Protection Equipment Directory
UAE FIRE & LIFE SAFETY CODE OF
PRACTICE
SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES
21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
a. SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
1- Hydraulic Calculations:
Submit hydraulic calculations to the Engineer for approval.
b. SD-02 Shop Drawings
Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Literature: Submit shop drawings and
manufacturers literature on fire protection system components, according to
the following listing:
1. Hanger Supports
2. Brackets
3. Hangers
4. Clamps
5. List of Manufacturers
6. Piping Layout and Details
7. Valves
8. Pipe
9. Fittings
10.Leak Test Certificates
11.Operation and Maintenance Instructions
12.Mechanical couplings
13.Fire Department Breaching Points
14.Alarm valves
15.Water motor alarms
16.Pressure switch
17.Water flow detector
18.Fire hose cabinets
19.Valve tamper switch
20.Backflow preventer
c. SD-03 Product Data
1. Technical Data
Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation
instructions for fire protection materials and products.
Manufacturer's literature and data sheets are to be submitted
indicating the necessary installation dimensions, weights, materials
and performance information. The performance is to include
capacities, pressure drop, design and operating pressure,
temperatures, and similar data. Complete electrical data, including
power conditions, and identifying types and numbers, to be
included. Where pertinent, electrical diagrams are to be provided.
Literature and data sheets may be provided by standard sales
sheets marked to indicate the specific equipment provided.
2. Certificate of Installation:
Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work
which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with
NFPA 13 and NFPA 14, and also that system is operational,
complete, and has no defects.
21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
3. Record Drawings:
At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed fire
protection piping and products; in accordance with requirements of
Division 1.
4. Maintenance Data:
Submit operation and maintenance data and parts lists for fire
protection materials and products. Include this data, product data,
shop drawings, approval drawings, approval calculations, certificate
of installation, and record drawings in maintenance manual; in
accordance with requirements of Division1. Contractor is to furnish
data covering model, type and serial numbers, capacities,
maintenance and operation of each item of equipment or apparatus.
Operating instructions are to cover all phases of control.
5. Valve Schedule:
Furnish a printed schedule, in duplicate, describing each valve by
number, giving locations and service for which used. System
identification to be as stipulated in the other sections of these
specifications. One copy of this schedule is to be mounted under
glass in a simple black enamel steel frame and hung in the
mechanical equipment room where directed. The other copy is to
be submitted to the Engineer before completion of the work.
d. SD-05 Design Data
Design Analysis and Calculations
e. SD-06 Test Reports
Test reports shall be submitted for the following tests in accordance with the
paragraph entitled, "System Testing," of this section
1. Pressure Tests
2. System Operating Tests
3. Air Tests
4. Valve-Operating Tests
5. Drainage Tests
Data which describes more than one type of item shall be clearly marked to
indicate which type the Contractor intends to provide. Submit one original
for each item and clear, legible, first-generation photocopies for the
remainder of the specified copies. Incomplete or illegible photocopies will
not be accepted. Partial submittals will not be accepted.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1 Qualifications of Installer
Prior to commencing work, submit data showing that the specialized sub-Contractor has
successfully installed fire extinguishing standpipe systems of the same type and design
21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
as specified herein, or that he has a firm contractual agreement with a subcontractor
having the required experience. Include the names and locations of at least five
installations where the Contractor, or the subcontractor referred to above, has installed
such systems. Indicate the type and design of each system, and certify that the system
has performed satisfactorily for a period of at least 18 months. Qualifications of System
Technician: Installation drawings, shop drawing and as-built drawings shall be prepared,
by or under the supervision of, an individual who is experienced with the types of works
specified herein, and is currently certified by UAE Civil Defence. Contractor shall submit
data for approval showing the name and certification of all involved individuals with such
qualifications at or prior to submittal of drawings.
1.3.2 System As-Built Drawings
Upon completion, and before final acceptance of the work, submit a complete set of asbuilt drawings of each system. Furnish as-built (record) working drawings in addition to
the as-built drawings required by Division 1, "General Requirements.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Protect stored equipment from weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt, dust, and
other contaminants
21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS
Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and for connections.
Make changes in piping sizes through tapered reducing pipe fittings; bushings will not be
permitted. Perform welding in the shop; field welding will not be permitted. [Conceal piping
in areas with suspended ceiling.]
2.1.1 Pipe and Fittings
NFPA 14, except as modified herein. Steel piping shall be Schedule 40 for sizes less than
200 mm 8 inches, and Schedule 30 or 40 for sizes 200 mm 8 inches and larger. Fittings
shall be welded, threaded, or grooved-end type. Plain-end fittings with mechanical
couplings and fittings which use steel gripping devices to bite into the pipe when pressure is
applied will not be permitted. Rubber gasketed grooved-end pipe and fittings with
mechanical couplings shall be permitted in pipe sizes 40 mm 1.5 inches and larger. Fittings
shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM APP GUIDE approved for use in dry /wet pipe
sprinkler systems. Fittings, mechanical couplings, and rubber gaskets shall be supplied by
the same manufacturer. Steel piping with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 shall not be
threaded.[Side outlet tees using rubber gasketed fittings shall not be permitted. Pipe and
fittings shall be metal.
2.1.2 Pipe Hangers and Supports
Provide in accordance with NFPA 14.
2.1.3 Valves
NFPA 14. Provide valves of types approved for fire service. Hose and gate valves shall
open by counterclockwise rotation. Provide isolation and check valves as required by NFPA
14. Isolation valves shall be OS&Y type. Check valves shall be flanged clear opening
swing-check type with flanged inspection and access cover plate for sizes 100 mm 4 inches
and larger.
2.1.3.1 Hose Valves
Provide bronze [pressure regulating type] hose valve with 65 mm National Standard male
hose threads, and 65 mm NH female by 40 mm IPT male reducer with cap and chain.
2.1.4 Identification Signs
NFPA 14. Attach properly lettered and approved metal signs to each valve and alarm
device.
2.1.5 Water flow Test Connection
Provide test connections approximately 1.83 m above the floor for each standpipe
system or portion of each standpipe system equipped with an alarm device; locate
downstream and adjacent to each alarm actuating device. Provide test connection piping to
a location where the discharge will be readily visible and where water may be discharged
without property damage. Discharge to janitor sinks or similar fixtures shall not be
permitted. Provide discharge orifice equivalent to 15 mm sprinkler orifice.
21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.1.6 Main Drains
Provide separate drain piping to discharge at safe points outside each building or to sight
cones attached to drains of adequate size to readily receive the full flow from each drain
under maximum pressure. Provide auxiliary drains as required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
2.1.7 Pipe Sleeves
Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, floors, roofs and partitions. Secure
sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to
pass through entire thickness of walls, floors, roofs and partitions. Provide one inch
minimum clearance between exterior of piping and interior of sleeve or core-drilled hole.
Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation. Seal space at both ends of the sleeve or
core-drilled hole with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass, or
provide a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomeric seal. In fire walls and fire floors,
seal both ends of pipe sleeves or core-drilled holes with UL listed fill, void, or cavity
material.
2.1.7.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs
Provide hot-dip galvanized steel, ductile-iron, or cast-iron sleeves. Core drilling of
masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the coredrilled hole are completely grouted smooth. Extend sleeves in floor slabs 76 mm above
finished floors.
2.1.7.2 Sleeves in Partitions
Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet.
2.1.8 Escutcheon Plates
Provide one piece or split hinge type metal plates for piping passing through walls, floors,
and ceilings in both exposed and concealed spaces. Provide polished stainless steel
plates or chromium-plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished spaces. Provide paint
finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces. Securely anchor plates in place.
2.1.9 Fire Department Connections
Provide Wall Type Siamese Connections: Provide where indicated, wall type cast brass
flush Siamese connections and escutcheon plate assembly, with two, 65 mm fire
department inlets with female hose connections, fire hose connection screw thread
adapted to locally used hoses, equipped with individual drop clapper valves, equipped
with plugs and chains, construction features as indicated, and constructed with the
following additional construction features:
Finish: Chrome plate.
Inlet Pipe: 100 mm pipe, 125 mm pipe, or 150 mm pipe (pipe size).
Cast Lettering: "AUTO. SPKR."/”STAND PIPE”. English and Arabic
Escutcheon: 180 mm x 360 mm rectangular.
21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.1.10 Alarm Valves
Provide variable pressure type alarm valve complete with retarding chamber, alarm test
valve, alarm shutoff valve, drain valve, pressure gages, accessories, and appurtenances
for the proper operation of the system. The alarm shut-off valve in the piping between the
alarm valve and the alarm pressure switch shall be a UL listed electrically supervised
quarter-turn valve. Connection of switch shall be under Section [28 31 74.00 20
INTERIOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM.] [28 31 63.00 20
ANALOG/ADDRESSABLE INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM.]
2.1.11 Water Motor Alarms
Provide alarms of the approved weather proof and guarded type, to sound locally on the
flow of water in each corresponding standpipe. Mount alarms on the outside of the outer
walls of each building. Provide separate drain piping directly to exterior of building.
2.1.12 Pressure Switch
Provide switch with circuit opener or closer [SPDT contacts] for the automatic transmittal
of an alarm over the facility fire alarm system. Connect into the building fire alarm
system. Alarm actuating device shall have mechanical diaphragm controlled retard
device adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds and shall instantly recycle.
2.1.13 Waterflow Detector
Provide vane-type waterflow detector. Provide detector with adjustable retard feature to
prevent false alarms caused by momentary water surges. Connect into the building fire
alarm system. [Alarm actuating device shall have mechanical diaphragm controlled
retard device adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds and shall instantly recycle.] Provide
detector in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.1.14 Fire Hose Cabinets
A. Recessed type, with stainless steel body and trim and door. Body and trim to be 16
gauge and door 20 gauge thickness. Door to have full panel double strength glass ( or
solid as indicated or approved at site ) with "Fire Hose" decal. Hose rack cabinet to be
supplied from factory with the following equipment:
1. one 65 mm pressure restricting angle valve,
2. one 65 mm x 40 mm chrome finished brass reducer,
3. one stainless steel hose rack with rack nipple,
4. one 40 mm unlined linen fire hose 30 m long, with brass hose couplings attached.
5. one 4o mm brass nozzle, 250 mm long, 15 mm discharge, with chrome finish,
6. one 4.5 kg ABC nitrogen operated dry chemical fire extinguisher, with steel body
and stainless steel finish.
B. Surface mounted type, with clear anodized, 16 gauge thick stainless steel body, trim
and door. Door to have full panel double strength glass ( or solid as indicated or
approved at site ) with "Fire Hose" decal. Hose rack cabinet to be supplied from factory
with the following equipment:
21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 9 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
1. one 65 mm pressure restricting angle valve,
2. one 65 mm x 40 mm chrome finished brass reducer,
3. one stainless steel hose rack with rack nipple,
4. one 40 mm unlined linen fire hose 30 m long, with brass hose couplings attached.
5. one 40 mm brass nozzle, 250 mm long, 15 mm discharge, with chrome finish,
6. one 4.5 kg ABC nitrogen operated dry chemical fire extinguisher, with stainless steel
body .
C. Construction: Manufacturer's standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door
and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld all joints and
grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. Provide pipe knockouts.
2.1.15 Valve Tamper Switch
Provide valve tamper switch(es) to monitor the open position of valve(s) controlling water
supply to the standpipe system. Switch contacts shall transfer from the normal (valve open)
position to the off-normal (valve closed) position during the first two revolutions of the hand
wheel or when the stem of the valve has moved not more than one-fifth of the distance
from its normal position. Switch shall be tamper resistant. Removal of the cover shall cause
switch to operate into the off-normal position.
2.1.16 Fire Pumps
Provide as specified in Section 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS.
2.1.17 Backflow Preventer
Provide [reduced pressure principle] or [double check] valve assembly backflow preventer
with OS&Y gate valve on both ends. Each check valve shall have a drain. Backflow
prevention assemblies shall have current "Certificate of Approval from the Foundation for
Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research, FCCCHR List. Listing of the specific
make, model, design, and size in the FCCCHR List shall be acceptable as the required
documentation."
2.2
BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS
2.2.1 Buried Pipe and Fittings
NFPA 24, outside coated, cement lined, ductile iron pipe and fittings or HDPE or as
indicated on plans for piping under the building and to a point 1.52 m outside the building
walls. Anchor the joints in accordance with NFPA 24 using pipe clamps and steel rods.
Minimum pipe size shall be 150 mm. Minimum depth of cover shall be one meter. Piping
more than 1.52 m outside the building walls shall be provided under Section 33 11 00
WATER DISTRIBUTION.
2.2.2 Buried Utility Warning and Identification Tape
Provide detectable tape in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK
21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 10 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.3
ELECTRICAL WORK
Provide electrical work associated with this section under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, except for fire alarm wiring. Provide fire alarm wiring and
connection to fire alarm systems under Section [ 28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR FIRE
DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM], [28 31 63.00 20 ANALOG/ADDRESSABLE
INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM.],[this section in accordance with NFPA 70 and
NFPA 72]
21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 11 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
Provide under this section as specified in Section 31 00 00
EARTHWORK.
3.2
CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS
Connections to existing water supply system are specified in Section 33 11 00 WATER
DISTRIBUTION.
3.3
STANDPIPE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection,
examination, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with the NFPA standards
referenced herein. Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and
supports. [Conceal piping to the maximum extent possible. Piping shall be inspected,
tested and approved before being concealed.] Provide fittings for changes in direction of
piping and for all connections Make changes in piping sizes through standard reducing
pipe fittings; do not use bushings. Cut pipe accurately and work into place without
springing or forcing. Ream pipe ends and free pipe and fittings from burrs. Clean with
solvent to remove all varnish and cutting oil prior to assemble. Make screw joints with
PTFE tape applied to male thread only.
3.4
DISINFECTION
Disinfect new water piping from the point of connection at the water main and existing
water piping affected by the Contractor's operation in accordance with AWWA C651.
Exercise caution when mixing chlorine disinfectant solutions. Fill piping systems with
solution containing minimum of 50 parts per million of free available chlorine and allow
solution to stand for a minimum of 24 hours. Flush solution from systems with clean water
until maximum residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million. Obtain
at least two consecutive satisfactory bacteriological samples from new water piping,
analyze by a certified laboratory, and submit results prior to new water piping being
placed into service.
3.5
FIELD PAINTING
Field painting of fire extinguishing standpipe system shall be specified in Section 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS. Field painting requirements for "Fire Extinguishing Sprinkler
Systems" shall apply.
3.5.1 Piping Labels
Provide permanent labels in mechanical rooms, spaced at 6 meters maximum intervals
along pipe, indicating "STANDPIPE".
21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 12 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.6
ELECTRICAL WORK
Provide electrical work associated with this section under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, except for fire alarm wiring. Provide fire alarm wiring and
connection to fire alarm systems under Section [ 28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR FIRE
DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM], [28 31 63.00 20ANALOG/ADDRESSABLE
INTERIOR ALARM SYSTEM.], [this section in accordance with NFPA 70
and NFPA 72].
3.7
FLUSHING
Flush the piping system with potable water in accordance with NFPA 14. Continue
flushing operation until water is clear, but for not less than 10 minutes.
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Prior to initial operation, inspect equipment and piping systems for compliance with
drawings, specifications, and manufacturer's submittals. Perform tests in the presence of
PGC Engineer to determine conformance with the specified requirements.
3.8.1 Preliminary Tests
Each piping system shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with NFPA 14 and
NFPA 24 and shall show no leakage or reduction in gauge pressure after 2 hours. The
Contractor shall conduct complete preliminary tests, which shall encompass all aspects of
system operation. [Individually test alarms, and all other components and accessories to
demonstrate proper functioning. Test water flow alarms by flowing water.] When tests
have been completed and all necessary corrections made, submit to PGC Engineer a
signed and dated certificate, similar to that specified in NFPA 13, attesting to the
satisfactory completion of all testing and stating that the system is in operating condition.
Also include a written request for a formal inspection and test.
3.8.2 Formal Inspection and Tests (Acceptance Tests)
PGC Engineer and / or committee, Fire Protection Engineer, (Civil Defence or Military fire
brigade) will witness formal tests and approve all systems before they are accepted. The
system shall be considered ready for such testing only after all necessary preliminary tests
have been made and all deficiencies found have been corrected to the satisfaction of PGC
Engineer and written certification to this effect is received by the Fire Protection Engineer.
Submit the request for formal inspection at least 15 working days prior to the date the
inspection is to take place. Experienced technicians regularly employed by the Contractor
in the installation of both the mechanical and electrical portions of such systems shall be
present during the inspection and shall conduct the testing. All instruments, personnel,
appliances and equipment for testing shall be furnished by the Contractor is responsible to
provide test water in case instructed by PGC All necessary tests encompassing all aspects
of system operation shall be made including the following, and any deficiency found shall
be corrected and the system retested at no cost to the Government.
3.8.2.1 Flow Test
Perform flow tests of each standpipe riser in accordance with NFPA 14. Affix [0-200] [0300] psi pressure gauges to lowest hose valve and next-to-highest hose valve. Connect
lined, 65 mm diameter fire hose with underwriter's playpipe to highest hose valve and flow
at least 946 L/m ( 250 gpm) for 5 minutes from standpipe to a safe location outside the
21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 13 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
building. [For dry pipe system, supply system through 65 mm fire hose connected to the
nearest fire hydrant which is Furnish hose, nozzles and fittings required for this test.
3.8.2.2 Alarm Testing
a. Each pressure switch, water flow detector, and water motor gong shall be activated by
flow of water.
b. Each valve tamper switch shall be activated by partially closing the associated control
valve.
c. Alarm annunciation at the fire alarm control panel shall be verified. d. Circuit
supervision shall be demonstrated.
3.8.3 Additional Tests
When deficiencies, defects or malfunctions develop during the tests required, all further
testing of the system shall be suspended until proper adjustments, corrections or revisions
have been made to assure proper performance of the system. If these revisions require
more than a nominal delay, the PGC Engineer shall be notified when the additional work
has been completed, to arrange a new inspection and test of the system. All tests required
shall be repeated prior to final acceptance, unless directed otherwise.
END OF SECTION 21 12 00
21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 14 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
SECTION 21 13 00
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 4
1.1
REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 4
1.2
SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 6
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................. 8
1.3.1 Qualifications of Installer .......................................................................................... 8
1.3.2 System As-Built Drawings ........................................................................................... 9
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .................................................................... 9
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................... 10
2.1
GENERAL.................................................................................................................. 10
2.2
UNDERGROUND PIPING MATERIALS..................................................................... 10
2.2.1 Type CIWP ............................................................................................................... 10
2.2.2 Type DIWP ............................................................................................................... 10
2.3
ABOVEGROUND PIPING MATERIALS ..................................................................... 11
2.3.1 Type BCS - Black Carbon Steel ................................................................................ 11
2.3.2 Type GCS - Galvanized Carbon Steel ....................................................................... 11
2.4
SUPPORTING ELEMENTS ....................................................................................... 12
2.4.1 Building-Structure Attachments ................................................................................. 12
2.4.1.1 Anchor Devices, Concrete and Masonry .................................................................. 12
2.4.1.2 Beam Clamps ......................................................................................................... 12
2.4.1.3 C-Clamps ............................................................................................................... 13
2.4.1.4 Inserts, Concrete..................................................................................................... 13
2.4.2.1 Single Pipes............................................................................................................ 13
2.4.2.2 Parallel Fire-Protection Pipes ................................................................................. 13
2.4.3 Vertical-Pipe Attachments ......................................................................................... 13
2.4.4 Hanger Rods and Fixtures ........................................................................................ 13
2.4.5 Supplementary Steel................................................................................................. 13
2.5
FIRE-DEPARTMENT BREECHING CONNECTIONS ................................................ 13
2.5.1 Wall Siamese............................................................................................................ 14
2.5.2 Sidewalk Siamese .................................................................................................... 14
2.5.3 Wall Hydrant ............................................................................................................. 14
2.5.4 Roof Manifold ........................................................................................................... 14
2.6
RISER ALARM EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................... 14
2.6.1 Wet-Pipe Alarm Check Valve .................................................................................... 14
2.6.2 Standard Check Valve .............................................................................................. 14
2.6.3 Dry-Pipe Alarm Check Valve ..................................................................................... 14
2.6.4 Water-Flow Alarm Device ......................................................................................... 15
2.6.4.1 Water Motor Gong Local Alarm .............................................................................. 15
2.6.4.2 Pressure Switch Remote Alarm ............................................................................... 15
2.6.4.3 Vane-Type Flow Alarm ............................................................................................ 15
2.6.4.4 Electric Motor Gong................................................................................................. 15
2.7
DRY-PIPE MAINTENANCE AIR ................................................................................ 15
2.7.1 Independent Source ................................................................................................. 15
2.7.2 Continuous Source ................................................................................................... 15
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.7.3 Retard Orifice ........................................................................................................... 15
2.8
STANDPIPE EQUIPMENT AND FIRE HOSE CABINET STATIONS.......................... 16
2.8.1 Fire Hose Cabinet Stations ....................................................................................... 16
2.8.2 Firehouse Racks and Hoses ..................................................................................... 16
2.8.3 Standpipe-Mounted Hose Racks and Hoses ............................................................. 16
2.8.4 Hose Reels and Hoses ............................................................................................. 16
2.8.5 Standpipe Valve........................................................................................................ 17
2.8.6 Fire-Hose Cabinet ..................................................................................................... 17
2.9
SPRINKLER HEADS ................................................................................................. 18
2.9.1 Head Categories ....................................................................................................... 18
2.9.1.1 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS TYPE SP-1 ................................................................. 18
2.9.1.2 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS TYPE SP-2: ............................................................... 18
2.9.1.3 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS TYPE SP-3: ............................................................... 18
2.9.2 Head Types .............................................................................................................. 18
2.9.3 Temperature Rating .................................................................................................. 19
2.9.4Spares ....................................................................................................................... 19
2.9.5 Head Protection ........................................................................................................ 19
2.10 VALVES ..................................................................................................................... 19
2.10.1 Underground ........................................................................................................... 19
2.10.1.1 Post Indicator Valve Assembly (PIV) ...................................................................... 19
2.10.1.2 Fire-Hydrant Service Valves .................................................................................. 19
2.10.1.3 Valve Boxes .......................................................................................................... 19
2.10.2 Aboveground .......................................................................................................... 20
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS................................................................................ 20
2.11.1 Bituminous Coating ................................................................................................. 20
2.11.2 Bolting .................................................................................................................... 20
2.11.3 Elastomer Calk ....................................................................................................... 20
2.11.4 Escutcheons ........................................................................................................... 20
2.11.5 Flashing .................................................................................................................. 21
2.11.5.1 Lead ..................................................................................................................... 21
2.11.5.2 Copper ................................................................................................................. 21
2.11.6 Flange Gaskets........................................................................................................ 21
2.11.7 Pipe-Thread Compounds ......................................................................................... 21
2.12 FIRE-PROTECTION SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION ...................................................... 21
2.12.1 Diagrams ................................................................................................................ 21
2.12.2 Metal Tags .............................................................................................................. 21
2.12.3 Service Labeling ..................................................................................................... 22
2.13 PAINTING .................................................................................................................. 22
PART 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................................... 23
3.1
GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 23
3.2
UNDERGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION ............................................................... 23
3.2.1 Construction Tolerances for Types CIWP and DIWP ................................................ 23
3.2.2 Fire Hydrants ............................................................................................................ 24
3.2.3 Valve Boxes .............................................................................................................. 24
3.2.4 Thrust Blocks ............................................................................................................ 24
3.3
ABOVEGROUND PIPING-SYSTEMS INSTALLATION .............................................. 24
3.4
SOUND STOPPING .................................................................................................. 25
3.5
SLEEVES .................................................................................................................. 25
3.6
ESCUTCHEONS ....................................................................................................... 26
3.7
FLASHINGS .............................................................................................................. 26
3.8
BRANCH-LINE TESTERS ......................................................................................... 26
3.9
PAINTING .................................................................................................................. 26
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.10 ELECTRICAL WORK ................................................................................................. 26
3.11 SYSTEM TESTING .................................................................................................... 27
3.11.1 Test Gages ............................................................................................................. 27
3.11.2 Pneumatic Testing .................................................................................................. 27
3.11.3 Test and Acceptable Criteria ................................................................................... 27
3.12 DISINFECTION.......................................................................................................... 28
3.13 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING ................................................................................... 28
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
1.
AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI)
a) AISC/AISI 121 (2004) Standard Definitions for Use in the Design of Steel
Structures
2.
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
a)
AWWA C104/A21.4 (2008) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and
Fittings for Water
b)
AWWA C110/A21.10 (2008) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water
c)
AWWA C111/A21.11 (2000) Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure
Pipe and Fittings
d) AWWA C151/A21.51 (2009) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water
3.
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
a) ASME A112.18.1 (2005) Standard for Plumbing Fixture Fittings
d)
ASME B16.1 (2005) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; Classes 125
and 250
e)
ASME B16.3 (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300
d) ASME B16.34 (2009) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End
4.
f)
ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron
f)
Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250, and 300
g)
ASME B16.4 (2006) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; Classes 125
and 250
h)
ASME B16.9 (2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt welding
Fittings
i)
ASME B31.1 (2007; Addenda 2008; Addenda 2009) Power Piping
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
a) ASTM A 1008/A 1008M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet,
Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength
Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened
b) ASTM A 126 (2004) Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,
Flanges, and Pipe Fittings
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
c) ASTM A 135/A 135M (2009) Standard Specification for Electric-ResistanceWelded Steel Pipe
d) ASTM A 183 (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track
Bolts and Nuts
e) ASTM A 197/A 197M (2000; R 2006) Standard Specification for Cupola
Malleable Iron
f)
ASTM A 234/A 234M (2007) Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of
Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature
Service
g) ASTM A 307 (2007b) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and
Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength
h) ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
i)
ASTM A 563 (2007a) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
j)
ASTM A 563M (2007) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
(Metric)
k) ASTM A 568/A 568M (2009a) Standard Specifications for Steel, Sheet,
Carbon, and High- Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General
Requirements for
l)
ASTM B 370 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for
Building Construction
m) ASTM B 749 (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy
Strip, Sheet and Plate
n) Products
o) ASTM C 592 (2008a) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket
Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial
Type)
p) ASTM C 920 (2008) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
q) ASTM D 2000 (2008) Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in
Automotive Applications
r) ASTM F 568M (2007) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel
Externally Threaded Metric Fasteners
5.
FM GLOBAL (FM)
a) FM P7825a (2005) Approval Guide Fire Protection
6.
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND
FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
a) MSS SP-58 (2009) Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials,
Design and Manufacture
7.
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
a) NFPA 13 (2010) Installation of Sprinkler Systems
b) NFPA 13E (2010) Fire Department Operations in Properties Protected by
Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems
c) NFPA 14 (2010) Standard for the Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrants
and Hose Systems
d) NFPA 1961 (2007) Standard on Fire Hose
e) NFPA 1963 (2009) Standard for Fire Hose Connections
e) NFPA 24 (2010) Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains
and Their Appurtenances
f)
8.
9.
NFPA 291 (2010) Recommended Practice for Fire Flow Testing and Marking
of Hydrants h) NFPA 70 (2008; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code - 2008
Edition
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
a)
MIL-C-18480 (Rev B; Notice 2) Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent,
Coal-Tar Base
b)
MIL-STD-101 (Rev B) Color Code for Pipelines & for Compressed Gas
Cylinders
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
a) FED-STD-595 (Rev C) Colors Used in Government Procurement
b) FS FF-S-325 (Int Amd 3) Shield, Expansion; Nail, Expansion; and Nail, Drive
Screw (Devices, Anchoring, Masonry)
c) FS WW-P-421 (Rev D) Pipe, Cast, Gray and Ductile Iron, Pressure (For
Water and Other Liquids)
10. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
a) UL 19 (2001) Standard for Lined Fire Hose and Hose Assemblies
b) UL 6 (2007) Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel
11. UAE FIRE & LIFE SAFETY CODE OF PRACTICE
1.2
SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
a. SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
1- Hydraulic Calculations:
Submit hydraulic calculations to the Engineer for approval.
b. SD-02 Shop Drawings
Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Literature: Submit shop drawings and manufacturers
literature on fire protection system components, according to the following listing:
1. Hanger Supports
2. Brackets
3. Hangers
4. Clamps
5. List of Manufacturers
6. Piping Layout and Details
7. Valves
8. Piping materials
9. Fittings
10. Leak Test Certificates
11. Operation and Maintenance Instructions
12. Mechanical couplings
13. Fire Department Breaching Points
14. Alarm valves
15. Water motor alarms
16. Pressure switch
17. Water flow detector
18. Fire hose cabinets
19. Valve tamper switch
20. Backflow preventer
21. Compressor
22. Sprinkler Heads
23. Underground Piping Materials
c. SD-03 Product Data
1. Technical Data
Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for
fire protection materials and products. Manufacturer's literature and data
sheets are to be submitted indicating the necessary installation dimensions,
weights, materials and performance information. The performance is to
include capacities, pressure drop, design and operating pressure,
temperatures, and similar data. Complete electrical data, including power
conditions, and identifying types and numbers, to be included. Where
pertinent, electrical diagrams are to be provided. Literature and data sheets
may be provided by standard sales sheets marked to indicate the specific
equipment provided.
2. Certificate of Installation:
Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work which
indicates that work has been tested in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA
14, and also that system is operational, complete, and has no defects.
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
3. As Build Drawings:
At project closeout, submit As Build drawings of installed fire protection piping
and products; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
4. Maintenance Data:
Submit operation and maintenance data and parts lists for fire protection
materials and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings,
approval drawings, approval calculations, certificate of installation, and record
drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of
Division1. Contractor is to furnish data covering model, type and serial
numbers, capacities, maintenance and operation of each item of equipment or
apparatus. Operating instructions are to cover all phases of control.
5. Valve Schedule:
Furnish a printed schedule, in duplicate, describing each valve by number,
giving locations and service for which used. System identification to be as
stipulated in the other sections of these specifications. One copy of this
schedule is to be mounted under glass in a simple black enamel steel frame
and hung in the mechanical equipment room where directed. The other copy
is to be submitted to the Engineer before completion of the work.
d. SD-05 Design Data
Design Analysis and Calculations
e. SD-06 Test Reports
Test reports shall be submitted for the following tests in accordance with the
paragraph entitled, "System Testing," of this section
1. Pressure Tests
2. System Operating Tests
3. Air Tests
4. Valve-Operating Tests
5. Drainage Tests
Data which describes more than one type of item shall be clearly marked to
indicate which type the Contractor intends to provide. Submit one original for each
item and clear, legible, first-generation photocopies for the remainder of the
specified copies. Incomplete or illegible photocopies will not be accepted. Partial
submittals will not be accepted.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1
Qualifications of Installer
Prior to commencing work, submit data showing that the specialized subContractor has successfully installed fire extinguishing standpipe and sprinkler
systems of the same type and design as specified herein, or that he has a firm
contractual agreement with a subcontractor having the required experience.
Include the names and locations of at least five installations where the Contractor,
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
or the subcontractor referred to above, has installed such systems. Indicate the
type and design of each system, and certify that the system has performed
satisfactorily for a period of at least 18 months. Qualifications of System
Technician: Installation drawings, shop drawing and as-built drawings shall be
prepared, by or under the supervision of, an individual who is experienced with the
types of works specified herein, and is currently certified by UAE Civil Defence.
Contractor shall submit data for approval showing the name and certification of all
involved individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of drawings.
1.3.2 System As-Built Drawings
Upon completion, and before final acceptance of the work, submit a complete set
of as-built drawings of each system. Furnish as-built (record) working drawings in
addition to the as-built drawings required by Division 1, "General Requirements.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Protect stored equipment from weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt, dust, and
other contaminants
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 9 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
Fire-protection system materials and equipment provided under this section shall conform
to the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or the Factory Mutual (FM P7825a)
Approval Guide. Products with UL label or seal or listing in UL 6, and products with FM
label or listed in the FM P7825a Approval Guide are acceptable fire-protection system
materials and equipment. Materials and equipment furnished shall be compatible with
existing system. Equipment and Performance Data shall be submitted for fire protection
sprinkler systems consisting of information on use life, system functional flows, safety
features, and mechanical automated details.
2.2
UNDERGROUND PIPING MATERIALS
Ells, tees, reducing tees, wyes, couplings, increasers, crosses,
transitions, and end
caps shall be the same type and class of material as the pipe or shall be material
having equal or superior physical and chemical properties.
2.2.1 Type CIWP
Cast-iron water pipe shall be mechanical joint or push-on type, centrifugally cast, UL
listed and labeled, conforming to FS WW-P-421and, as applicable, to AWWA
C151/A21.51, AWWA C110/A21.10, AWWA C111/A21.11. Piping shall be Class 150.
Bell-and-spigot fittings shall conform to AWWA C110/A21.10.
For FS WW-P-421 wall-thickness criteria only, depth of cover shall be 1500
millimeter unless drawings indicate less, in which case, drawing requirements shall apply;
field-laying conditions shall be B (flat-bottom trench, without blocks, tamped backfill).
Flanged cast-iron pipe fittings shall be Class 125 conforming to ASME B16.1. Piping and
fittings shall be coated on the [inside] and [outside] with a bituminous sealer in accordance
with AWWA C104/A21.4. [Piping and fittings shall be coated on the inside with a mortar
lining in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4.] Restraining joint against endwise
separation due to internal pressure may be accomplished by NFPA-recommended metal
harness consisting of clamping devices and bolting or by hardened-metal retainers molded
into a push-on gasket and engaged by a groove in the spigot end. Where electrical
continuity is indicated, pipe shall be supplied with factory-brazed heavy cross section
copper connectors to be joined with copper fasteners upon joint assembly. Connectors, as
a minimum, shall be equal to No. 1/0.
2.2.2 Type DIWP
Ductile-iron water pipe shall be mechanical-joint or push-on type, centrifugally cast, UL
listed and labeled, conforming to applicable provisions of AWWA C111/A21.11, and
AWWA C151/A21.51. Wall- thickness criteria shall be 1380 kilopascal 200-pounds per
square inch (psi) working pressure plus 690 kilopascal 100-psi surge allowance, AASHTO
H-20 loading with specified trench conditions. Gasket elastomeric shall be chloroprene.
Piping shall be coated on the [inside] and [outside] with a bituminous sealer in accordance
with AWWA C104/A21.4. [Piping and fittings shall be coated on the inside with a mortar
lining in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4.] Restraining joint against endwise
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 10 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
separation due to internal pressure may be accomplished by using a metal harness
consisting of clamping devices and bolting or by hardened- metal retainers molded into a
push on gasket and engaged by a groove in the spigot end.
Where electrical continuity is indicated, pipe shall be supplied with factory-brazed heavy
cross section copper connectors to be joined with copper fasteners upon joint assembly.
Connectors, at a minimum, shall be equal to No. 1/0
2.3
ABOVEGROUND PIPING MATERIALS
2.3.1 Type BCS - Black Carbon Steel
Pipe(DN6 through DN40) : Schedule 40 furnace butt weld black-carbon steel conforming
to ASTM A 53/A 53M, or ASTM A 135/A 135M, Type F furnace butt welded; Schedule 10
conforming to ASTM A 135/A 135M, Grade B
Pipe (DN50 through DN206, where indicated): Schedule 40 seamless or electricresistance welded black carbon steel, conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 135/A
135M, Type E (electric- resistance welded), Grade B, or Type S (seamless), Grade B;
Schedule 10 conforming to ASTM A 135/A 135M, Grade B
Pipe (DN250): Schedule 30 black carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type
E (electric- resistance welded) or Type S (seamless)
Unions (DN50 and under): 2068 kilopascal working steam pressure (wsp) female,
screwed, black malleable iron, with ground joint and brass-to-iron seat conforming to
ASME B16.39
Standard pipe couplings: Extra-heavy screwed black steel
Grooved pipe couplings (all sizes): 1207 kilopascal minimum working pressure with a
housing fabricated in two or more parts of black malleable-iron castings. Coupling gasket
shall be molded of synthetic rubber, conforming to requirements of ASTM D 2000.
Coupling bolts shall be oval-neck, track-head type with heavy hexagonal nuts, conforming
to ASTM A 183
Fittings (DN100): 1207 kilopascal working pressure, cast iron, screwed, conforming to
ASTM A 126, Class A, and ASME B16.4
Fittings (DN150): 1207 kilopascal working pressure, cast iron, conforming to ASTM A 126,
Class A, screwed, conforming to ASME B16.4, or flanged, conforming to ASME B16.1
Fittings (DN200 and under): Couplings shall be rolled-groove type or mechanical
locking (push-on) type. Grooves for rolled-groove type shall be rolled only; cut grooving
will not be allowed. Rolled grooves shall be dimensionally compatible with the couplings.
Grooved fittings (all sizes): 1207 kilopascal working pressure fittings used with grooved
couplings shall be fabricated of black malleable-iron castings. If a manufacturer's
standard-size malleable-iron fitting pattern is not available, fabricated fittings shall be
used; fittings shall be fabricated from Grade B seamless-steel pipe and long-radius
seamless welding fittings, with wall thickness to match pipe, conforming to ASTM A 234/A
234M and ASME B16.9.
2.3.2 Type GCS - Galvanized Carbon Steel
Pipe (DN15 through DN250 and where indicated): Schedule 40 seamless or electric
resistant welded galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E (electric-
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 11 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
resistance welded) or Type S (seamless). Type F (furnace butt welded continuous
welded) is acceptable for sizes less than DN50 .
Fittings (all sizes): 1034 kilopascal working pressure banded, galvanized, malleable,
screwed, conforming to ASTM A 197/A 197M and ASME B16.3
Fittings (DN65 and over): 862 kilopascal working pressure cast-iron flanges and flanged
fittings conforming to ASTM A 126, Class A and to ASME B16.1
Grooved pipe couplings (all sizes): 1207 kilopascal minimum working pressure with a
housing fabricated in two or more parts of galvanized malleable-iron castings. Coupling
gasket shall be molded of synthetic rubber, conforming to requirements of ASTM D 2000.
Coupling bolts shall be oval-neck, track-head type with heavy hexagonal nuts, conforming
to ASTM A 183.
Grooved fittings (all sizes): 1207 kilopascal working pressure fittings used with grooved
couplings shall be fabricated of galvanized malleable-iron castings. If a manufacturer's
standard-size malleable-iron fitting pattern is not available, fabricated fittings shall be used;
fittings shall be fabricated from Grade B seamless steel pipe and long-radius seamless
welding fittings, with wall thickness to match pipe, conforming to ASTM A 234/A 234M and
ASME B16.9.
Unions (DN50 and under): 2070 kilopascal working pressure female, screwed, galvanized
malleable iron, with brass-to-seat and ground joint
2.4
SUPPORTING ELEMENTS
Piping system components and miscellaneous supporting elements shall be provided,
including, but not limited to, building-structure attachments; supplementary steel; hanger
rods, stanchions, and fixtures; vertical-pipe attachments; horizontal-pipe attachments;
restraining anchors; and guides. Supporting elements shall be suitable for stresses
imposed by systems pressures and temperatures, natural, and other external forces.
Supporting elements shall be FM approved or UL listed and shall conform to ASME B31.1,
MSS SP-58, and ASME B16.34.
2.4.1 Building-Structure Attachments
2.4.1.1 Anchor Devices, Concrete and Masonry
Anchor devices shall conform to FS FF-S-325:
Group I: Shield, expansion (lead, bolt, and stud anchors)
Group II: Shield, expansion (bolt anchors), Type 2, Class 2, Style 1 or 2
Group III: Shield, expansion (self drilling tubular expansion shell bolt anchors
Cast-in floor-mounted equipment-anchor devices shall provide adjustable positions.
Powder-actuated anchoring devices shall not be used to support mechanical-systems
components.
2.4.1.2 Beam Clamps
Beam clamps shall be center-loading Types 21, 28, 29, and 30, UL listed, cataloged,
and load-rated commercially manufactured products. Type 20 beam clamps shall be
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 12 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
used for pipe DN50 and under. Two Type 25 beam clamps shall be used per point of
pipe support.
2.4.1.3 C-Clamps
C-clamps shall [not be used]
2.4.1.4 Inserts, Concrete
Concrete inserts shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of MSS SP58 for Type 18 and ASME B16.34. When applied to piping in sizes DN50 iron pipe size
(ips) and larger, and where otherwise required by imposed loads, a 300 millimeter
length of 15 millimeter reinforcing rod shall be inserted and wired through wing slots.
2.4.2 Horizontal-Pipe Attachments
2.4.2.1 Single Pipes
Piping in sizes up to and including DN50 ips shall be supported by Type 1, 5, 6, 7, 9,
10, 11, or 12 solid, split-ring, or band type attachments.
Piping in sizes DN65 and larger shall be supported by Type 1, 2, 3, or 4 attachments or
with Type 41 or Type 49 pipe rolls.
2.4.2.2 Parallel Fire-Protection Pipes
Trapeze hangers fabricated from approved structural steel shapes, with U-bolts, shall be
used when so specified. Structural-steel shapes shall conform to supplementary steel
requirements or the support shall be of commercially available, approved proprietarydesign rolled steel.
2.4.3 Vertical-Pipe Attachments
Single vertical-pipe attachments shall be Type 8.
2.4.4 Hanger Rods and Fixtures
Only circular solid cross section rod hangers shall be used to connect building structure
attachments to pipe-support devices. Pipe, straps, or bars of equivalent strength shall be
used for hangers. Turnbuckles, swing eyes, and clevises shall be provided as required by
support system to accommodate temperature changes, pipe accessibility, and
adjustment for load and pitch.
2.4.5 Supplementary Steel
Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing members or where
structural members are used in lieu of commercially rated supports, such supplementary
steel shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with AISC/AISI 121.
2.5
FIRE-DEPARTMENT BREECHING CONNECTIONS
Hose connections shall have National Fire hose standard-thread form and rocker
lugs in accordance with NFPA 1963. Hose-connection sizes and threads shall be
compatible with the equipment used by the fire department serving the facility.
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 13 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.5.1 Wall Siamese
Unit shall be cast brass or bronze flush-mounted escutcheon-plate type, with two DN65 ,
fire- department, swivel, female inlets; double-clapper valves; rocker-lug caps and chains;
and cast-in function-identifying lettering. Finish shall be chrome-plated or polished surface.
Chrome plate shall be in accordance with ASME A112.18.1.
2.5.2 Sidewalk Siamese
Unit shall be cast brass or bronze, with two DN65 , fire-department, swivel, female
inlets; double- clapper valves; rocker-lug caps and chains; and cast-in function-identifying
lettering. Finish shall be chrome-plated or polished surface. Chrome plate shall be in
accordance with ASME A112.18.1. Unit shall be mounted on a Schedule 40 ASTM A
53/A 53M galvanized carbon-steel pipe with red- enameled finish on prime-coated
surface. All surfaces embedded in concrete or below grade shall be protected with a
0.508 millimeter thick bituminous coating
2.5.3 Wall Hydrant
Unit shall be of cast brass or bronze flush-mounted escutcheon-plate type with two
DN65, fire- department, male outlets; rocker lug caps and chains; and cast-in functionidentifying lettering. Finish shall be chrome-plated or polished surface. Chrome plate shall
be in accordance with ASME A112.18.1.
2.5.4 Roof Manifold
Unit shall be of cast brass or bronze, horizontal type, with two DN65, 1200 kilopascal
rated hose valves fitted with rocker-lug caps and chains. Finish shall be rough body with
polished trim.
2.6
RISER ALARM EQUIPMENT
Riser alarm equipment shall be UL listed or FM approved for fire-protection use.
2.6.1 Wet-Pipe Alarm Check Valve
Wet-pipe alarm check valve shall be complete with standard accessories and trim
necessary to give an alarm and shall include pressure gages, retard chamber, testing
provisions, and all necessary intercomponent piping, fittings, and valves. Pilot valve and
clapper shall have individual elastomer seats.
2.6.2 Standard Check Valve
Check valve shall be FM-approved or UL-listed standard swing-check type with elastomerdisc seat. Pressure gages shall be provided on both sides of the clapper. Water-flow alarm
shall be vane type.
2.6.3 Dry-Pipe Alarm Check Valve
Dry-pipe alarm check valve shall be complete with standard accessories and trim
necessary to give an alarm, and shall include pressure gages, accelerator, priming
provisions, testing provisions, and all necessary intercomponent compressed-air and water
piping, fittings, and valves.
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 14 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
System shall include a trouble alarm indicating a loss of air pressure.
2.6.4 Water-Flow Alarm Device
Water-flow alarm devices shall be UL listed for the particular type
of system.
2.6.4.1 Water Motor Gong Local Alarm
Assembly shall include a gong with an aluminum or chrome-plated brass hood with
nonstaining weather-resistant mounting. Water motor shaft shall
have
tetrafluoroethylene bearings and an inlet strainer. Waste water shall drain as indicated.
2.6.4.2 Pressure Switch Remote Alarm
Pressure switch shall be wired to make or break a circuit depending on rise or fall of
water pressure.
2.6.4.3 Vane-Type Flow Alarm
Vane-type flow alarm shall make or break an alarm circuit upon deflection by a volume of
flowing water that equals or exceeds the capacity of a single sprinkler. Alarm shall have
an instant-recycle pneumatic-retard time delay.
2.6.4.4 Electric Motor Gong
Electric motor gong shall be a 150 millimeter diameter bell, synchronous-motor type.
Weather-exposed units shall be weatherproof and shall be provided with a weather
hood. Assembly shall be constructed of nonstaining materials
2.7
DRY-PIPE MAINTENANCE AIR
2.7.1 Independent Source
Dry-pipe system air pressure shall be maintained by an independent Air Compressor
mounted on the riser. Compressor shall be spring and elastomer vibration-isolated from
the riser, of oil-free construction, complete with adjustable set point low-differential
pressure switch, check valve, and necessary unloader and intercomponent piping and
wiring. Spare inlet-air filter media shall be provided.
2.7.2 Continuous Source
Dry-pipe system air pressure shall be maintained by an adjustable set point lowdifferential-diaphragm pressure-reducing valve connected to 690 kilopascal facility
compressed-air system to maintain air side of dry-pipe valve. Unit shall be entirely of
nonferrous-metal construction with a replaceable cartridge inlet-air filter. Air-maintenance
device shall be complete with intercomponent piping, fittings, and valves. Spare inlet-air
filter media shall be provided.
2.7.3 Retard Orifice
Air-supply line near each dry-pipe valve shall be provided with an orifice union with a
3 millimeter orifice corrosion-resistant steel plate, externally identified, and a DN15 threevalve bypass around the orifice union.
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 15 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.8
STANDPIPE EQUIPMENT AND FIRE HOSE CABINET STATIONS
2.8.1 Fire Hose Cabinet Stations
Fire hose cabinet stations shall be furnished with cabinet, fire hose rack, DN40 hose,
valve, and spanner wrench.
2.8.2 Firehouse Racks and Hoses
Rack-and-hose assemblies shall be nipple mounted, swinging, semiautomatic, and red
enameled. Racks shall be fitted with spring-friction retainer clip. Hoses shall be DN40
diameter, 20 meter
long, cotton-polyester jacketed, rubber lined, mildew-proof,
conforming to NFPA 1961, and UL approved for rack service. Couplings shall be rockerlug type. A spanner, mounted in clips, shall be provided at each rack.
Rack valves shall be polished brass, 1200 kilopascal rated, DN65 angle valve with 65
millimeter 2-1/2- inch female to 40 millimeter male reducer, and fitted with automatic drainvent device.
Hose nozzles shall be DN40 chemical hose thread, polished brass, adjustable fog, offand-on solid- stream type.
2.8.3 Standpipe-Mounted Hose Racks and Hoses
Hose racks shall be suitable for specified hose length. Firehouse racks and accessories
shall be red enameled, designed for standpipe mounting at an elevation high enough to
avoid damage. Suitable clips or spring-loaded retainers shall be provided to prevent
hoses from unwinding and hoses and nozzles from swinging from their mounted position
until placed into service.
Rack hoses shall be DN40 diameter, 30 meter long, cotton-polyester jacketed, rubber
lined and mildew-proof, conforming to [ NFPA 1961] [UL 19]. Couplings shall be rockerlug type. A spanner, mounted in clips, shall be provided at each rack.
Rack valve shall be polished brass, 1200 kilopascal rated, DN65 angle valve with 65
millimeter 2- female to 40 millimeter male reducer, and fitted with automatic drain-vent
device.
Hose nozzle shall be DN40 chemical hose thread, polished brass, adjustable fog, offand-on solid- stream type.
2.8.4 Hose Reels and Hoses
Hose reels, frames, and accessories shall be red enameled and suitable for specified
hose diameter and length. Reels shall be fitted with a swivel and piping to allow
continuous flow through hoses. Friction brakes shall be provided to prevent hoses from
accidentally unwinding.
Hoses shall be 40 millimeter inside diameter, 45 millimeter outside diameter, 3-braid,
single-jacket, 2070 kilopascal working pressure, 30 meter long, hard rubber or heavy
duty synthetic cover, noncollapsible, and fitted with couplings. Hoses shall be red
covered, flexible, nonkinking, and shall weigh not over 35 kilogram per 30 meter .
Couplings shall be hole type, one female swivel and one male, both with chemical hose
thread (M44 - 3.175 male)
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 16 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
Reel control valve shall be 1200 kilopascal rated, quarter-turn, ball- or butterfly-valve, for
quick- opening operation.
Hose nozzle shall be DN40 chemical hose thread, polished brass, adjustable fog, offand-on solid- stream type.
2.8.5 Standpipe Valve
Valve shall be DN65
angle hose type, 1200 kilopascal rated, with 65 millimeter
female to 40 millimeter male reducer, 40 millimeter cap and chain, and chrome-plated
polished brass.
In multistory buildings with fire pumps, valve shall include orifice plate to restrict discharge
pressure to 450 kilopascal.
2.8.6 Fire-Hose Cabinet
A. Recessed type, with stainless steel body and trim and door. Body and trim to be 16
gauge and door 20 gauge thickness. Door to have full panel double strength glass ( or solid
as indicated or approved at site ) with "Fire Hose" decal. Hose rack cabinet to be supplied
from factory with the following equipment:
1. one 65 mm pressure restricting angle valve,
2. one 65 mm x 40 mm chrome finished brass reducer,
3. one stainless steel hose rack with rack nipple,
4. one 40 mm unlined linen fire hose 30 m long, with brass hose couplings attached.
5. one 4o mm brass nozzle, 250 mm long, 15 mm discharge, with chrome finish,
6. one 4.5 kg ABC nitrogen operated dry chemical fire extinguisher, with
steel body and stainless steel finish.
B. Surface mounted type, with clear anodized, 16 gauge thick stainless steel body, trim
and door. Door to have full panel double strength glass ( or solid as indicated or approved
at site ) with "Fire Hose" decal. Hose rack cabinet to be supplied from factory with the
following equipment:
1. One 65 mm pressure restricting angle valve,
2. One 65 mm x 40 mm chrome finished brass reducer,
3. One stainless steel hose rack with rack nipple,
4. One 40 mm unlined linen fire hose 30 m long, with brass hose couplings attached.
5. One 40 mm brass nozzle, 250 mm long, 15 mm discharge, with chrome finish,
6. One 4.5 kg ABC nitrogen operated dry chemical fire extinguisher, with stainless
steel body .
C. Construction: Manufacturer's standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld all joints and grind
smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. Provide pipe knockouts.
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 17 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.9
SPRINKLER HEADS
Provide automatic sprinklers of type indicated on Drawings, and in accordance with the
following listing. Quick response wet type sprinklers with fusible links rated for 74 °C, and with
sprinkler head finishes as mentioned below shall be the standard type except as noted in the
table below or unless otherwise indicated. The sprinkler shall be installed in the flush position
with the element exposed below the ceiling line
2.9.1 Head Categories
2.9.1.1 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS TYPE SP-1
For installation in false ceilings, quick response type, decorative style extending less
than 25 mm below ceiling with only fusible link, levers and ceiling plate visible. Deflector
and retaining parts to be concealed in sprinkler body. Visible parts to be stainless steel
and ceiling plate satin finish chrome. Sprinkler body to be high quality bronze. Sprinklers
to have 15 mm male thread inlet and a K-factor of 5.6 .
2.9.1.2 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS TYPE SP-2:
For exposed installations, quick response upright type of high quality bronze
construction. Sprinklers to have 15 mm male thread inlet and a K-factor of 5.6 .
2.9.1.3 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS TYPE SP-3:
For transformer rooms, quick response upright type of high quality bronze construction.
Sprinklers to have 15 mm male thread inlet and a K-factor of 57 (U.S).
2.9.2 Head Types
•
Sprinkler Heads - No false ceiling Areas: Sprinkler heads to be rough bronze
finish, of an approved upright type, installed in accordance with NFPA Standard No.
13.
•
Sprinkler Heads - No false ceiling Areas: Sprinkler heads to be rough bronze
finish, of an approved pendant type, installed in accordance with NFPA Standard
No. 13.
•
Sprinkler Heads - Ceiling Areas: Sprinkler heads to be of types in accordance
with the following listing:
1.
Pendant Type: Sprinkler heads to be polished chrome plated finish, of an
approved pendant type, installed in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 13.
The maximum distance from the deflector to finished ceiling shall be 50 mm.
2.
Recessed Type: Sprinkler heads to be new automatic pendent chrome plated
sprinkler heads with matching chrome plated recessed cup.
3.
Concealed Type: New automatic concealed sprinkler heads with white
finish cover plate.
•
Sprinkler Heads - Sidewall: Sidewall sprinkler heads to be chrome plated
•
Sprinklers types: Provided sprinklers at the specified locations or as shown on plans.
Follow NFP13 in selecting and installing sprinklers.
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 18 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.9.3 Temperature Rating
Fusible links shall be for ordinary hazard, except where otherwise indicated.
2.9.4Spares
Spares shall be furnished for each type of sprinkler head, complete with appropriate
storage cabinet and wrench.
2.9.5 Head Protection
Heads shall be protected with paper or plastic bags during painting operations. Protection
shall be removed immediately upon finishing painting operations. Head guards shall be
provided wherever mechanical damage could occur. Guard finish shall be red enamel
2.10
VALVES
2.10.1 Underground
2.10.1.1 Post Indicator Valve Assembly (PIV)
Assembly shall consist of a standard FM-approved or UL-listed inside-screw gate
valve with an above-grade post indicator or a completely factory-assembled FMapproved quarter-turn valve and above-grade post indicator-operator. Direction to open
shall be counterclockwise.
Quarter-turn valve shall be a wafer-type butterfly valve, rated at 1200 kilopascal,
elastomer-lined and sealed. Liner shall act as a gasket between ASME B16.1, Class
125 or Class 250 flanges. Post shall have a fail- safe feature to keep valve intact in
case of breaking off above grade. Operator shall be worm-gear type with permanently
oil-lubricated watertight gear case complete with handle.
Surfaces below grade shall receive a coating of bitumen not less than 0.508 millimeter
thick. Above-grade surfaces shall be filled, primed, and finished with a multiple coat of
high-gloss, weather-resistant, red enamel.
Post indicator valves shall be fitted to accommodate electrical supervisory switches.
Electrical supervisory switches shall be provided for interconnection to the building
Fire Alarm System. Switches and connections shall meet the requirements of Section
28 31 13.00 40 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM CONTROL, GUI, AND LOGIC
SYSTEMS.
2.10.1.2 Fire-Hydrant Service Valves
Fire-hydrant service valves shall be standard FM-approved or UL-listed inside-screw
gate valve, with valve box connection flange.
2.10.1.3 Valve Boxes
Valve boxes shall be not less than 5 millimeter thick cast-iron construction with locking
cover that has a cast-in identification legend. Boxes shall be adjustable extension type
with screw- or slide-type adjustment. Base flange shall be fitted to the valve flange. Full
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 19 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
extended length of box shall be greater than required by depth of cover by not less than
100 millimeter. One valve-operating wrench shall be supplied for each size valve nut.
Guide rings shall be provided where operating rods are longer than 2 meter.
2.10.2 Aboveground
Gate, globe, and check valves (all sizes) shall be FM approved or UL listed.
Ball valves, DN50 and under, shall be FM approved, rated 2070 kilopascal, with provisions
to wire or lock handle in place where critical alarm function may be isolated.
Butterfly valves, DN150, DN200, and DN250 shall be FM approved, rated 1200 kilopascal,
cast-iron bodied wafer type, with elastomer liners and seals. Liners shall act as gasket
between standard piping- system flanges. Operator shall be worm-gear type, with
permanently lubricated gears, and oil-tight and watertight case, complete with handle and
automatic position indication.
2.11
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2.11.1 Bituminous Coating
Bituminous coating shall be a solvent cutback, heavy-bodied material to produce not less
than a 0.305 millimeter dry-film thickness in one coat and shall be as recommended by the
conduit manufacturer for compatibility with factory coating and rubber joints.
For previously coal-tar-coated and for uncoated ferrous surfaces underground, bituminous
coating shall be solvent cutback coal-tar type, conforming to MIL-C-18480.
2.11.2 Bolting
Flange and general-purpose bolting shall be hex-head and shall conform to ASTM F 568M,
Class 4.8 or higher ASTM A 307, Grade B. Heavy hex-nuts shall conform to ASTM A
563M. ASTM A 563.Square- head bolts and nuts are not acceptable.
2.11.3 Elastomer Calk
Polysulfide- or polyurethane-base elastomer-calking material shall be two-component type,
conforming to ASTM C 920.
2.11.4 Escutcheons
Escutcheons shall be manufactured from nonferrous metals and shall be chrome-plated,
except when AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel is provided. Metals and finish shall
conform to ASME A112.18.1.
Escutcheons shall be one-piece type where mounted on chrome-plated pipe or tubing and
one-piece or split-pattern type elsewhere. Escutcheons shall have provisions consisting of
internal spring tension devices or setscrews to maintain a fixed position against a surface.
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 20 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.11.5 Flashing
2.11.5.1 Lead
Sheet lead shall conform to ASTM B 749, and shall weigh not less than 20 kilogram per
square meter 4 pounds per square foot.
2.11.5.2 Copper
Sheet copper shall conform to ASTM B 370 and shall weigh not less than 4.88 kilogram
per square meter.
2.11.6 Flange Gaskets
Gaskets shall be suitable for the intended use and shall contain no asbestos.
2.11.7 Pipe-Thread Compounds
Tetrafluoroethylene tape or other suitable compounds shall be used.
2.12
FIRE-PROTECTION SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A coordinated system of piping and equipment identification shall be provided which
includes the following:
Framed and plastic-protected diagrammatic layout of all piping systems, identifying and
locating piping, equipment, and valves. Where existing systems are being modified,
existing layouts shall be brought up to date.
Metal-tag-identified major valves, piping-system components, and equipment
Metal identification plate at controlling alarm valve identifying system and area protected
Service-labeled piping
Color coding shall be in accordance with NFPA 291.
2.12.1 Diagrams
Chart listing of equipment shall be by designation number and shall show pertinent data.
Diagrams shall be neat, mechanical drawings mounted in extruded aluminum frames,
with 3 millimeter thick acrylic plastic protection. Location shall be as directed by PGC
engineer. A minimum of one mounted chart and diagram, plus one extra copy of each,
shall be provided for each fire-protection system.
2.12.2 Metal Tags
Identification tags made of brass or aluminum and indicating function of valve or similar
component, shall be installed on such system devices. Tags shall be not less than 50
millimeter in diameter and marking shall be stamped.
Equipment shall be provided with metal identification tags bearing an equipment
designation number matching the drawing or diagram designations.
Tags shall be secured to valve or equipment items with 2.7 millimeter galvanized wire.
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 21 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.12.3 Service Labeling
Piping, including that concealed in accessible spaces, shall be labeled to designate
service. Each label shall include an arrow or arrows to indicate flow direction. Labels or
tag designations shall be as follows:
SERVICE
LABEL OR TAG
DESIGNATION Main sprinkler supply
MAIN SPRINKLER
SUPPLY Sprinkler riser number
SPRINKLER RISER NO.
Sprinkler branch
SPRINKLER BRANCH
Standpipe piping
STANDPIPE
Piping shall be labeled and arrowed in accordance with the following:
2.13
•
Each point of entry and exit through walls
•
Each change in direction
•
In congested or hidden areas, at each point required to clarify service or indicate
hazard
•
In long straight runs, labels shall be located at a distance visible to each other,
but in no case shall the distance between labels exceed 12.2 meter .
•
Label lettering shall be 50 millimeter high. Where the size of pipes is 65 millimeter
outside diameter and smaller,
•
Labels shall be attached to 1.6 millimeter aluminum sheet which shall be
attached to the pipe with 2.7 millimeter galvanized wire. Labels shall be legible
from the primary service and operating area.
•
Labels shall be made of self-sticking plastic film designed for permanent
installation. Labels shall have red letters on white background.
•
Label and valve tag schedule above shall not be construed as defining or limiting
the work. All piping systems shall be labelled.
PAINTING
Equipment of the manufacturer's standard product shall be furnished with the manufacturer's
standard finish coat.
Other mechanical equipment shall be furnished with a shop-applied prime paint.
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 22 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
Installation of system materials and equipment shall be in accordance with the
recommendations and provisions of NFPA 13, NFPA 13E, NFPA 14, and NFPA 24, and UAE
Fire and Life Safety code of Practice .Work shall be performed in the presence of PGC
Engineer who shall be notified by the Contractor 48 hours in advance of the start of work.
All installation work shall be performed by licensed fire protection sprinkler contractors,
Licensed by Civil Defence.
3.2
UNDERGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION
Installation of piping materials shall conform to the written or published instructions of the
manufacturer. Pipes passing through walls below grade and ground-floor slab shall pass
through pipe sleeves one size larger than pipe and shall be calked watertight with lead and
oakum or mechanically expandable chloroprene inserts with bitumen sealed metal
components.
In fill areas, pipe passing under or through building grade beams shall have a minimum
clearance of 100 millimeter in all directions.
Rubber- or elastomer-jointed piping embedded in concrete walls shall have a joint within 150
millimeter of the face of the wall, capable of absorbing movement without leakage.
Piping penetrating earth or concrete grade shall be extended-joint or flange-bolt height plus
150 millimeter above the grade.
Underground piping below supported or suspended slabs shall be supported from the slab
with a minimum of two supports per length of pipe. Supports shall be protected with a coating
of bitumen.
On excavations near and below building footings, the backfilling material shall consist of 13.8
Megapascal cured-strength concrete poured or pressure-grouted up to the level of the footing.
After piping has been inspected, and not less than 48 hours prior to being lowered into a
trench, external surfaces of the piping, valves, valve operators, and valve boxes shall be
coated with a compatible bituminous coating suitable for protection against brackish ground
water. Application shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to a dry-film
thickness of not less than 0.305 millimeter.
3.2.1 Construction Tolerances for Types CIWP and DIWP
Maximum deviation from design elevation at any point along piping shall not exceed 65
millimeter for all sizes of piping.
Maximum deviation from line at the end of an 5.5 meter length of piping shall be 65
millimeter and cumulatively shall not exceed 150 millimeter. Corrections from line within
preceding tolerances shall be made at a rate not to exceed 65 millimeter for any one
length of piping.
Maximum deflection for curves for 5.5 meter lengths of cast ferrous pipe shall be in
accordance with NFPA 24.
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 23 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
When the alignment requires deflections in excess of the above limitations, special
bends or a sufficient number of shorter lengths of pipe shall be furnished to provide
angular deflections within established limits, as approved.
3.2.2 Fire Hydrants
Hydrant outlets shall be 600 millimeter, minimum, to 900 millimeter, maximum, above
grade. The DN115 outlet shall face the road or area of access.
3.2.3 Valve Boxes
Valves and valve boxes and shall be set plumb. Valve boxes shall be centered on the
valves. Where feasible, valves shall be located outside traffic areas. Soil shall be
carefully tamped around each valve box to a distance of 1.2 meter on all sides of the box
or to the undisturbed trench face when less than 1.2 meter.
Class 3000A concrete slabs 600 millimeter square by 100 millimeter thick shall be
provided to protect valve boxes.
3.2.4 Thrust Blocks
Thrust blocks shall be provided to absorb hydraulic thrust at caps, plugs, and at system
change-of- direction fittings.
Thrust block shall be 20 Megapascal cured-strength concrete placed against
undisturbed soil, with an area sufficient to provide load transmittal.
3.3
ABOVEGROUND PIPING-SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
Piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building. Piping and components shall be spaced
and installed so that a threaded pipe fitting may be removed between adjacent pipes and so
that there will be not less than 13 millimeter of clear space between the finished surface and
other work and between the finished surface of parallel adjacent piping. Hangers on different
adjacent service lines running parallel shall be arranged to be in line with each other and
parallel to the lines of the building.
Load rating for pipe-hanger supports shall be based on all lines filled with water. Deflection per
span shall not exceed slope gradient of pipe.
Schedule 40 and heavier ferrous pipe supports shall be in accordance with the following
minimum rod size and maximum allowable hanger spacing. For concentrated loads such as
valves, allowable span shall be reduced proportionately.
PIPE SIZE (DN)
(mm)
ROD SIZE
(mm)
HANGER SPACING FOR
STEEL PIPE (mm)
Up to 25
10
2400
32
40
65 to 90
125
10
10
10
15
3600
4500
4500
4500
100
150
15
15
4500
4500
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 24 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
Vertical risers shall be supported at the base where possible and at intervals specified. Piping
shall be guided for lateral stability as necessary. Clamps shall be placed under fittings
wherever possible. Carbon- steel pipe shall be supported at each floor at not more than 4.5
meter intervals for pipe DN50 and smaller, and at not more than 6.1 meter intervals for pipe
DN65 and larger.
Piping shall be securely supported with allowance for thrust forces and thermal expansion and
contraction and shall not be subject to mechanical, chemical, vibrational, or other damage, in
conformance with ASME B31.1.
3.4
SOUND STOPPING
Effective sound stopping and adequate operating clearance shall be provided to prevent
structure contact where piping penetrates walls, floors, or ceilings; into occupied spaces
adjacent to equipment rooms; where similar penetrations occur between occupied spaces;
and where penetrations occur from pipe chases into occupied spaces. Occupied spaces
include space above ceiling where no special acoustic treatment of ceiling is provided.
Penetrations shall be finished to be compatible with surface being penetrated.
Sound stopping and vapor-barrier sealing of pipe shafts, and large floor and wall openings
may be accomplished by packing with properly supported mineral fiber insulation or by
foaming-in-place with self- extinguishing, 0.9 kilogram density polyurethane foam to a depth
not less than 150 millimeter. Foam shall be finished with a rasp. Vapor barrier shall be not less
than 3 millimeter thickness of vinyl mastic applied to visible and accessible surfaces. Where
fire stopping is a consideration, only mineral fiber shall be used, and, in addition, openings
shall be covered with 1.6 millimeter sheet metal.
3.5
SLEEVES
Sleeves shall be provided where piping passes through roofs, masonry or concrete walls, or
floors. Sleeves passing through steel decks shall be continuously welded or brazed to the
deck.
Sleeves extending through floors, roofs, or load-bearing walls, and sleeves through fire
barriers shall be continuous and fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded anchor
lugs. Other sleeves shall be formed by molded linear polyethylene liners or similar materials
that are removable.
Diameter of sleeves shall be large enough to accommodate pipe, insulation, and jacketing
without touching the sleeve, and additionally shall provide a minimum 10 millimeter clearance.
Sleeve shall accommodate mechanical and thermal motion of pipe to preclude transmission of
vibration to walls and generation of noise.
Space between a pipe and the inside of a pipe sleeve or a construction surface penetration
shall be packed solid with mineral fiber conforming to ASTM C 592 wherever the piping
passes through firewalls, equipment-room walls, floors, and ceilings connected to occupied
spaces, and other locations where sleeves or construction-surface penetrations occur
between occupied spaces. Where sleeves or construction-surface penetrations occur between
conditioned and unconditioned spaces, the space between a pipe, bare or insulated, and the
inside of a pipe sleeve or construction-surface penetration shall be filled with an elastomer
calk to a depth of 15 millimeter. Surfaces to be calked shall be oil- and grease-free.
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 25 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
Exterior wall sleeves shall be calked watertight with lead and oakum or mechanically
expandable chloroprene inserts with mastic-sealed components.
3.6
ESCUTCHEONS
Escutcheons shall be provided at penetrations of piping into finished areas. Where finished
areas are separated by partitions through which piping passes, escutcheons shall be provided
on both sides of the partition. Where suspended ceilings are installed, plates shall be provided
at the underside only of such ceilings. Escutcheons shall be chrome plated in occupied spaces
and shall conceal openings in building construction. Escutcheons shall be firmly attached.
3.7
FLASHINGS
Flashings at systems penetrations of building boundaries shall be provided as indicated.
3.8
BRANCH-LINE TESTERS
Branch-line testers shall permit testing and flushing lines without shutdown of system or loss of
fire- protection capability. Line testers shall be fitted with chain-attached caps. Line testers
shall be installed where indicated and on most remote branch lines being served by cross
mains, so that testing may be accomplished at the dead corners of each sprinkler system.
3.9
PAINTING
Manufacturer's standard-finish equipment surfaces damaged during construction shall be
brought to as- new condition by touchup or repainting to the satisfaction of PGC Engineer, or
replaced with new undamaged equipment at no additional cost to PGC.
Pipe hangers, supports, and other iron work in concealed spaces shall be thoroughly cleaned
and painted with one coat of primer paint.
All fire piping, valves, and appurtenances, including hose racks and reels, but excluding
hoses, hose nozzles and siamese connections, shall receive two coats of enamel, color No.
11105 (red) in accordance with MIL-STD-101 and FED-STD-595.
3.10
ELECTRICAL WORK
Electrical work is specified in Division 16, "Electrical," except for control and fire alarm wiring
which shall be provided under this section in accordance with NFPA 70. Rigid metal conduit or
intermediate metal conduit shall be used, except that electrical metallic tubing may be used in
dry locations not enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical damage.
Motors, controllers, contactors, and disconnects shall be furnished with their respective pieces
of equipment, except that controllers indicated as part of the motor control centers shall be
provided under Section 26 24 19.00 40 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS. Motors, controllers,
contactors, and disconnects shall conform to and shall have electrical connections provided
under Section 26 05 00.00 40 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. Controllers
and contactors shall have maximum 120-volt control circuits, and auxiliary contacts for use
with the controls furnished. When motors and equipment are furnished larger than sizes
indicated, the cost of providing additional electrical service and related work shall be included
under this section.
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 26 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.11
SYSTEM TESTING
Prior to acceptance of the work, completed systems shall be tested in the presence of PGC
Engineer. Upon approval, certificates of testing shall be provided.
Tests shall be hydrostatic, unless otherwise specified. Only potable water shall be used for
testing. Air Tests, Valve-Operating Tests, and Drainage Tests shall be performed for dry-pipe
systems.
Full-flow System Operating Tests shall be performed for standpipe systems.
Contractor will supply testing water , the Contractor shall be responsible for approved disposal
of contaminated water.
Contractor shall prepare and maintain test records of piping-system tests.
Records shall show personnel responsibilities, dates, test-gage identification numbers,
ambient and test- water temperatures, pressure ranges, rates of pressure drops, and leakage
rates. Each test acceptance shall require the signature of the Contracting Officer.
3.11.1 Test Gages
Test gages, to be acceptable, shall have 115 millimeter dials or larger with accuracy of
plus or minus 1/2 of 1 percent of full-scale range and dial graduations and pointer width
compatible with readability to within one-half of the accuracy extremes. Maximum
permissible scale range for a given test shall be such that the pointer during a test shall
have a starting position at midpoint of the dial or within the middle third of the scale
range. Certification of accuracy and correction table shall bear a date within 90 calendar
days prior to the test, test gage number, and the project number.
3.11.2 Pneumatic Testing
Pressure Tests shall be pneumatic when freezing conditions may occur and upon prior
approval by PGC Engineer. Compressed air used for testing shall be oil-free.
Pneumatic testing shall include swabbing all joints under a test pressure of 34 kilopascal
with a standard high film strength soap solution and observing for bubbles.
Duration of the test will be determined by PGC Engineer and will be for 2 hours,
minimum, to 24 hours, maximum. Test may be terminated by direction of PGC Engineer
at any point during this period after it has been determined that the permissible leakage
rate has not been exceeded.
3.11.3 Test and Acceptable Criteria
Aboveground systems shall have Pressure Tests at 1380 kilopascal and the applied
pressure shall be maintained without further addition of test media for not less than 2
hours. Maximum allowable pressure drop shall be 14 kilopascal.
Underground rubber-jointed ferrous-pipe water systems shall be tested at 1380
kilopascal, and the applied test pressure shall be maintained for not less than 2 hours.
Maximum allowable pressure drop shall be 14 kilopascal. After satisfactory hydrostatic
testing, piping shall be tested for leakage as follows:
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 27 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
•
•
Duration of each leakage test shall be not less than 2 hours; during the test, the
main shall be subjected to 200 psi pressure based on the elevation of the lowest
section under test and corrected to the elevation of the test gage.
Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water supplied into the laid pipe, or
any valved section thereof, necessary to maintain the specified leakage test
pressure after the pipe has been filled with water and the air expelled.
•
No piping installation will be accepted if the leakage in gallons per hour exceeds
2.04 times the number of joints in the length of the pipe line tested times the
nominal diameter of the pipe in inches times the square root of the average test
pressure expressed as psig. Amount of leakage at the joints shall not exceed
1.89 litre per 100 joints regardless of pipe diameter.
•
Hydrostatic tests shall be applied to piping with concrete thrust blocking only after
the concrete has cured for more than 7 calendar days.
Backflow prevention into connected potable-water systems and system devices shall
be tested for proper functioning under conditions normal to their application.
Dripping or weeping joints shall be repaired.
3.12
DISINFECTION
Water piping, including valves, fittings, and other devices, shall be disinfected with a solution
of chlorine and water. Solution shall contain not less than 50 parts per million (ppm) of
available chlorine. Solution shall be held for a period of not less than 8 hours, at which time
the solution shall contain a minimum residue of 2 ppm of available chlorine or the system shall
be re-disinfected. After successful disinfection the piping shall be thoroughly flushed before
placing into service. Water for disinfection, and flushing will be furnished by the Government.
3.13
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
At the completion of the work, all parts of the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned.
Equipment, pipes, valves, and fittings shall be cleaned of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge
that may have accumulated from the installation and testing of the system. Automatic control
devices shall be adjusted for proper operation.
END OF SECTION 21 13 00
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 28 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
SECTION 21 13 20.00 20
FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIRCRAFT HANGERS
CONTENTS
PART 1
GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 6
1.1
REFERENCES .............................................................................................................................6
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................7
1.2.1 Design Requirements ................................................................................................................7
1.2.1.1 Calculations .............................................................................................................................8
1.2.1.2 AFFF Containment and Disposal Plan ................................................................................8
1.2.2 System Operation ......................................................................................................................8
1.2.2.1 Overhead Systems .................................................................................................................8
1.2.2.2 Monitor System .......................................................................................................................9
1.2.2.3 Hose System ...........................................................................................................................9
1.3
SUBMITTALS ...............................................................................................................................9
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE .......................................................................................................... 11
1.4.1 Fire Protection Specialist ....................................................................................................... 12
1.4.2 Qualifications of Welders ....................................................................................................... 12
1.4.3 Qualifications of Installer ........................................................................................................ 12
1.4.4 Preliminary Test Certification ................................................................................................ 12
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING............................................................................ 12
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................................... 13
DESIGN OF FOAM SYSTEMS ....................................................................................... 13
2.1.1 Sprinkler Heads ....................................................................................................................... 13
2.1.2 Cabinet ..................................................................................................................................... 13
2.1.3 [Deluge] and /or [Pre-Action] Valves .................................................................................... 13
2.1.4 AFFF Solution Distribution ..................................................................................................... 13
2.1.4.1 For pre-action systems........................................................................................................ 13
2.1.4.2 For deluge systems ............................................................................................................. 14
2.1.5 AFFF Solution Application Density ....................................................................................... 14
21 13 20. 00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.1.6 Sprinkler Discharge Area ....................................................................................................... 14
2.1.6.1 For pre-action systems........................................................................................................ 14
2.1.6.2 For deluge systems ............................................................................................................. 14
2.1.7 Friction Losses ........................................................................................................................ 14
2.1.8 Location of Sprinkler Heads .................................................................................................. 14
2.1.9 Duration of Discharge............................................................................................................ 14
2.2
ELECTRIC DETECTION DEVICES ....................................................................................... 14
2.2.1 Control Panel ........................................................................................................................... 15
2.2.1.1 Main Annunciator ................................................................................................................. 16
2.2.1.2 Initiating Zones ..................................................................................................................... 16
2.2.1.3 Remote Annunciator Panel ................................................................................................ 16
2.2.2 Auxiliary Power Supply .......................................................................................................... 16
2.2.2.1 Storage Batteries ................................................................................................................. 16
2.2.2.2 Battery Charger .................................................................................................................... 17
2.3
PNEUMATIC DETECTION SYSTEM .................................................................................... 17
2.3.1 Air Compressor ....................................................................................................................... 17
2.3.2 Piping and Control Panel ....................................................................................................... 17
2.4
PIPING SUPERVISION ........................................................................................................... 17
2.5
MANUAL RELEASE STATIONS ............................................................................................ 18
2.6
HEAT DETECTORS ................................................................................................................. 18
2.6.1 Combination Fixed Temperature Rate-of-Rise Detectors ................................................ 18
2.6.2 Rate Compensating Detector ................................................................................................ 18
2.7
OPEN-AREA (SPOT-TYPE) SMOKE DETECTORS .......................................................... 18
2.7.1 Ionization Detectors ................................................................................................................ 19
2.7.2 Photoelectric Detectors .......................................................................................................... 19
2.7.3 Detector Spacing and Location ............................................................................................. 19
2.8
COMBINATION ULTRAVIOLET-INFRARED FLAME DETECTORS ............................... 19
2.9
ELECTRICAL WORK ............................................................................................................... 20
2.9.1 Wiring ........................................................................................................................................ 20
2.9.2 Operating Power ..................................................................................................................... 20
2.9.3 Conductor Identification ......................................................................................................... 21
2.10
SYSTEM ACTIVATION ............................................................................................................ 21
21 13 20. 00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.10.1 Overhead System Activation ............................................................................................... 21
2.10.2 Monitor System Activation ................................................................................................... 21
2.10.3 Hose System Activation ....................................................................................................... 21
2.11
ALARMS ..................................................................................................................................... 21
2.11.1 Water Motor Alarms.............................................................................................................. 21
2.11.2 Local Alarm ............................................................................................................................ 22
2.11.3 Fire Alarm............................................................................................................................... 22
2.11.3.1 Pressure Switch ................................................................................................................. 22
2.11.4 Trouble Alarm ........................................................................................................................ 22
2.12
TANK MOUNTED AIR COMPRESSOR ................................................................................ 22
2.13
AFFF CONCENTRATE ............................................................................................................ 22
2.13.1 Concentrate Fill Pump.......................................................................................................... 22
2.14
DIAPHRAGM PRESSURE PROPORTIONING EQUIPMENT........................................... 23
2.14.1 Diaphragm Pressure Proportioning Tanks ........................................................................ 23
2.14.2 Concentrate Ratio Controller .............................................................................................. 23
2.15
BALANCED PRESSURE PROPORTIONING SYSTEM..................................................... 23
2.15.1 Skid-Mounted Balanced Pressure Proportioning System ............................................... 23
2.15.2 In-Line Balanced Pressure Proportioning System ........................................................... 24
2.15.3 AFFF Concentrate Storage Tanks ..................................................................................... 24
2.16
OSCILLATING MONITOR NOZZLES.................................................................................... 24
2.17
HAND HOSE LINES ................................................................................................................. 24
2.18
WALL FOAM HYDRANTS ....................................................................................................... 25
2.19
ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS ................................................................................... 25
2.19.1 Pipe, Fittings, and Mechanical Couplings ......................................................................... 25
2.19.2 Jointing Material .................................................................................................................... 25
2.19.3 Duplex Basket Strainers ...................................................................................................... 25
2.19.4 Pipe Hangers and Supports ................................................................................................ 25
2.19.5 Valves ..................................................................................................................................... 25
2.19.6 Identification Signs................................................................................................................ 26
2.19.7 Inspector's Test Connection ................................................................................................ 26
2.19.8 Main Drains ............................................................................................................................ 26
2.19.9 Pipe Sleeves.......................................................................................................................... 26
21 13 20. 00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.19.9.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, Roofs ............................................. 26
2.19.9.2 Sleeves in Partitions .......................................................................................................... 26
2.19.10 Escutcheon Plates .............................................................................................................. 26
2.19.11 Fire Department breaching Connections ........................................................................ 27
2.19.12 Backflow Preventers .......................................................................................................... 27
2.20
BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS ................................................................................................... 27
2.20.1 Pipe and Fittings ................................................................................................................... 27
2.20.2 Valves ..................................................................................................................................... 27
2.20.3 Post Indicator Valves............................................................................................................ 27
2.20.4 Valve Boxes ........................................................................................................................... 27
2.20.5 Buried Utility Warning and Identification Tape ................................................................. 27
PART 3 EXECUTION................................................................................................................ 28
3.1
EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING ......................................................... 28
3.2
CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS ......................................... 28
3.3
AFFF SYSTEM INSTALLATION ............................................................................................ 28
3.4
DISINFECTION ......................................................................................................................... 28
3.5
FIELD PAINTING ...................................................................................................................... 29
3.5.1 Foam Systems in Unfinished Areas ..................................................................................... 29
3.5.2 Foam Systems in All Other Areas ........................................................................................ 29
3.5.3 Piping Labels ........................................................................................................................... 29
3.5.4 Field Touch-Up ........................................................................................................................ 29
3.6
ELECTRICAL WORK ............................................................................................................... 29
3.6.1 Wiring ........................................................................................................................................ 30
3.7
FLUSHING ................................................................................................................................. 30
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ................................................................................................... 30
3.8.1 Preliminary Tests .................................................................................................................... 30
3.8.2 Formal Inspection and Tests (Acceptance Tests) ............................................................. 30
3.8.2.1 Systems and Device Testing ............................................................................................. 31
3.8.2.2 AFFF Discharge and Concentration Testing ................................................................... 31
3.8.2.3 Flushing and Rinsing ........................................................................................................... 31
3.8.3 Environmental Protection....................................................................................................... 32
3.8.4 Additional Tests ....................................................................................................................... 32
21 13 20. 00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.8.5 AFFF Concentrate Storage Tanks Fill-Up ........................................................................... 32
3.8.6 Manufacturer's Representative ............................................................................................. 32
3.9
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................................... 32
3.10
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 32
3.11
SCHEDULE ............................................................................................................................... 33
21 13 20. 00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
1. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
a. AWWA C500 (2009) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service
b. AWWA C651 (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains
2. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
a. ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black
and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
3. FM GLOBAL (FM)
a. FM P7825 (2009) Approval Guide
4. FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC
RESEARCH (FCCCHR)
a. FCCCHR List (continuously updated) List of Approved Backflow
Prevention Assemblies
5. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
a. NFPA 11 (2005; Amendment 1 2006; Amendment 2 2007) Low-,
Medium- and High- Expansion Foam Systems
b. NFPA 13 (2010) Installation of Sprinkler Systems
c. NFPA 14 (2010) Standard for the Installation of Standpipe, Private
Hydrants and Hose Systems
d. NFPA 15 (2006) Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection
e. NFPA 16 (2006) Installation of Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-Water
Spray Systems
f.
NFPA 24 (2010) Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service
Mains and Their Appurtenances
g. NFPA 30 (2007; Errata 2008) Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code
h. NFPA 409 (2004; TIA 2005; TIA 2006) Standard on Aircraft Hangers
i.
NFPA 70 (2008; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code - 2008 Edition
j.
NFPA 72 (2010) National Fire Alarm Code
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
6. THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
a. SSPC Paint 22 (1982; E 2004) Paint Specification No. 22 EpoxyPolyamide Paints (Primer, Intermediate, and Topcoat)
b. SSPC Paint 25 (1997; E 2004) Paint Specification No. 25 Zinc Oxide,
Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel Type I and
Type II
c. SSPC SP 11 (1987; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal
d. SSPC SP 3 (2004; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning
e. SSPC SP 6 (2007) Commercial Blast Cleaning
7. U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
a. MIL-DTL-24441 (Rev D) Paint, Epoxy-Polyamide
b. MIL-F-24385 (Rev F; Am 1) Fire Extinguishing Agent, Aqueous Film
Forming Foam (AFFF) Liquid Concentrate, for Fresh and Seawater
8. U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
a. FS A-A-2962 (Rev J) Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss, Low VOC Content
b. FS A-A-58092 (Basic) Tape, Antiseize, Polytetrafluoroethylene
c. FS WW-S-2739 (Basic) Strainers, Sediment: Pipeline, Water, Air, Gas, Oil,
or Steam
9. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
a. UL 262 (2004) Standard for Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service
b. UL 789 (2004; Rev thru Aug 2008) Indicator Posts for Fire-Protection Service
c. UL Fire Prot Dir (2009) Fire Protection Equipment Directory
10. UAE Fire and Life Safety Code of Practice
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.2.1 Design Requirements
Design, provide new, install and commission automatic aqueous film forming foam (AFFF)
deluge pre- action sprinkler system and under-wing supplemental protection system.
System shall provide uniform distribution of AFFF solution to provide complete coverage
throughout the areas indicated. The design, equipment, materials, installation, and
workmanship shall be in strict accordance with the required and advisory provisions of
NFPA 11, NFPA 13, NFPA 14, NFPA 15, NFPA 16, NFPA 24, NFPA 30, NFPA 70, NFPA
72, and NFPA 409,( whichever applicable for the specific project), Each system [shall be
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
designed for earthquakes and] shall include all materials, accessories and equipment
necessary to provide each system complete and ready for use. Design and install each
system to give full consideration to blind spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ductwork,
and all other construction and equipment to provide complete coverage in accordance with
the drawings to be submitted for approval. Devices and equipment for fire protection
service shall be of a make and type listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. in the UL
Fire Prot Dir, or approved by the Factory Mutual System and listed in FM P7825. In the
publications referred to herein, the advisory provisions shall be considered to be
mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it
appears; reference to the "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted to mean the
PGC and its clients.
1.2.1.1 Calculations
Submit design calculations for the system.
a. Hydraulic calculations showing basis for design in accordance with NFPA
11 and NFPA 13.
b. Pressure discharge graphs or tables showing pressure discharge
relationship for sprinkler heads and discharge nozzles.
c. Substantiating battery standby power requirements calculations showing
battery capacity, supervisory and alarm power requirements.
c. System surge analysis showing surge pressure occurring throughout the
system at both design flow and nonflow conditions.
1.2.1.2 AFFF Containment and Disposal Plan
Submit AFFF containment and disposal plan as required under paragraph entitled
"Environmental Protection."
1.2.2 System Operation
Flow of water and AFFF shall be controlled by deluge pre-action valves. Foam
proportioning equipment shall activate automatically upon tripping of the valve(s) for the
corresponding foam system(s). [Deluge], [Pre-action] valves shall be tripped by
independent detection systems. No valve will be operated by the building fire evacuation
alarm system. Use of motor-operated valves is prohibited. Once activated, system(s) shall
operate until shut down manually. Provide separate circuits from the control panel to each
zone of initiating devices. Transmission of signals from more than one zone over a
common circuit is prohibited.
1.2.2.1 Overhead Systems
Overhead systems shall be controlled by [deluge], [pre-action] valves operated by automatic
detection systems and by remote manual release stations.
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
1.2.2.2 Monitor System
Monitor nozzles shall be controlled by deluge valves operated by flow of AFFF solution in
the overhead system.
1.2.2.3 Hose System
Hose reels shall be controlled by deluge valves operated by remote manual release
stations, separate from those used for overhead systems and monitor nozzles.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
A. SD-02 Shop Drawings
1. Installation Requirements
Prepare shop drawings for fire extinguishing system in accordance with the
requirements for "Plans" as specified in NFPA 11 and "Working Plans" as specified
in NFPA 13.
Do not commence work until the design of each system and the various
components have been approved. Show:
a. Room, space or area layout and include data essential to the proper installation
of each system
b. Sprinkler heads, discharge nozzles and system piping layout annotated with
reference points for design calculations
c. Field wiring diagrams showing locations of devices and points of connection
and terminals used for all electrical field connections in the system, with wiring
color code scheme
2. As-Built Drawings
As-built drawings, as specified.
3. Piping Layout and Sensing piping Arrangement
4. Pump Room
B. SD-03 Product Data
1. Equipment data
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Pipe, fittings, and mechanical couplings
[Deluge] and/or [Pre-action] valves
Valves, including gate, check, and globe
Water motor alarms
Sprinkler heads
Monitor nozzles
Hose and nozzles
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 9 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Pipe hangers and supports
Pressure switch
Fire department inlet connections
Tank mounted air compressor
Air pressure regulating device
Air compressor pneumatic detection system
Low air pressure trouble alarm
Detection devices
Storage batteries
Alarm bells
Alarm horns
Annunciator panel
Foam hydrants
AFFF concentrate storage tanks
Proportioning equipment
AFFF concentrate
Strainers
Manual release stations
Backflow preventers
Control panel
Battery charger
Data which describe more than one type of item shall be clearly marked to indicate which
type the Contractor intends to provide. Submit only originals. Photocopies will not be
accepted. Partial submittals will not be accepted.
2. Spare Parts
Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified.
C. SD-05 Design Data
•
•
•
•
Hydraulic calculations
Pressure discharge graphs or tables
Battery standby power requirements calculation
System surge analysis
D. SD-06 Test Reports
1. Preliminary Tests
Three copies of the completed Preliminary Tests Reports, no later than 5 days after the
completion of the Preliminary Tests. The Preliminary Tests Report shall include both the
Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping and the Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping. All items in the Preliminary Tests
Report shall be signed by the Fire Protection Specialist and by the Manufacturer's
Representative.
2. Final Test
Three copies of the completed final test Reports , no later than 5 days after the completion of
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 10 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
the tests. All items in the reports shall be signed by the Fire Protection Specialist and the
Manufacturer's Representative. Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests and
measurements taken during the preliminary and final testing, and documentation that proves
compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion of the installation and
final testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of the
controls and pressure switches. The test reports shall include the description of the
hydrostatic test conducted on the piping and flushing of the suction and discharge piping. A
copy of the manufacturer's certified pump curve for each fire pump shall be included in the
report.
E. SD-07 Certificates
1. Fire Protection Specialist
Concurrent with the Final Acceptance Test Report, certification by the Fire Protection
Specialist that the fire fighting installation is in accordance with the contract requirements,
including signed approval of the Preliminary and Final Acceptance Test Reports.
2. Qualifications of Welders
3. Qualifications of Installer
Certificates of qualifications, as specified.
4. Preliminary and Final Test Certification
Request for formal inspection and tests, as specified
5. Certificate of origin
6. Certificate of unconditioned 5 years warranty
F. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
[Deluge]and/or [Pre-action] valves
Tank mounted air compressor
Proportioning equipment
Control panel
AFFF concentrate storage tanks
Monitor nozzles
Instructions for operating the fire extinguishing system
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
Furnish one complete set of data prior to the time that final acceptance tests are performed,
and furnish the remaining sets before the contract is completed.(total of four copies of each
data package)
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 11 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
1.4.1 Fire Protection Specialist
Work specified in this section shall be performed under the supervision of and certified by
the Fire Protection Specialist. The Fire Protection Specialist shall be specialized
subcontractor who is certified by UAE Civil Defence in the Automatic Sprinkler System
design, studies, erection, installation, operating, maintaining, testing and commissioning.
The Fire Protection Specialist shall be regularly engaged in the design and installation of
the type and complexity of system specified in the Contract documents, and shall have
served in a similar capacity for at least five systems that have performed in the manner
intended for a period of not less than 6 months.[ Submit data for approval showing the name
and certification of all involved individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of
drawings.]
1.4.2 Qualifications of Welders
Submit certificates of each welder's qualifications prior to site welding; certifications shall not
be more than one year old.
1.4.3 Qualifications of Installer
Prior to installation, submit data for approval showing that the Contractor has successfully
installed automatic foam fire extinguishing sprinkler systems and associated equipment of
the same type and design as specified herein, or that he has a firm contractual agreement
with a subcontractor having such required experience. The data shall include the names
and locations of at least three installations where the Contractor, or the subcontractor
referred to above, has installed such systems. Indicate the type and design of each system
and certify that each system has performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for a
period of not less than 18 months.
1.4.4 Preliminary Test Certification
When preliminary tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a signed and
dated certificate with a request for a formal inspection and tests.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, excessive humidity
and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, all pipes shall
be either capped or plugged until installed.
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 12 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
DESIGN OF FOAM SYSTEMS
Design of [deluge] and/or [pre-action] fire extinguishing foam systems shall be by hydraulic
calculations for uniform distribution of AFFF solution over the protected area and shall
conform to the NFPA standards listed above and to the requirements as specified herein.
2.1.1 Sprinkler Heads
Heads shall have 15 or 13.50 mm orifice. No o-rings will be permitted in sprinkler heads.
[For deluge systems, provide open heads. [For pre-action systems, the release element of
each head shall be of the "high" temperature rating or higher as suitable for the individual
location installed.] Provide chromium plated ceiling plates and pendent sprinklers below
suspended ceilings. Provide corrosion resistant sprinkler heads and sprinkler head guards
as required by NFPA 13.
2.1.2 Cabinet
Provide extra sprinkler heads and sprinkler head wrench in a metal cabinet adjacent to the
pre-action valve within each building. The number and types of extra sprinkler heads shall
be as specified in NFPA 13.
2.1.3 [Deluge] and /or [Pre-Action] Valves
Valves shall be operated by a detection system listed for releasing service and independent
of the building fire alarm system. [[Deluge] [Pre-action] valve clappers shall incorporate a
latching mechanism that will not be affected by changes of pressure in the water system.] If
150 mm valves are used in 200 mm risers, provide smoothly tapered connections. In
addition to automatic operation, arrange each valve for manual release at the valve. Provide
pressure gages and other appurtenances at the [deluge] [pre-action] valves as required by
NFPA 13.
Provide a detection device at the end of each actuation circuit to test the circuit and mount
the device between 1.80 and 2.40 meters above the finish floor. Label each testing device
to indicate the valve it activates
2.1.4 AFFF Solution Distribution
2.1.4.1 For pre-action systems
Distribution shall be essentially uniform throughout the area in which it is assumed the
sprinkler heads will open. Variation in discharge from individual heads in the hydraulically
most remote area shall be between 100 and 115 percent of the specified density.
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 13 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.1.4.2 For deluge systems
Distribution shall be essentially uniform throughout the area. Variation in discharge from
individual heads shall be between 100 and 115 percent of the specified density.
2.1.5 AFFF Solution Application Density
Size system to provide the specified density when the system is discharging the specified
total maximum required flow. Application to horizontal surfaces below the ceiling sprinklers
shall be 110 mL/sec per sq meter with simultaneous operation of foam monitor nozzles, and
foam hose lines as instructed.
2.1.6 Sprinkler Discharge Area
2.1.6.1 For pre-action systems
Area shall be as defined by NFPA 13
2.1.6.2 For deluge systems
Area shall be as determined in accordance with NFPA 409 for Type I aircraft hangars
2.1.7 Friction Losses
Calculate losses in pipe in accordance with the Hazen-Williams Formula with 'C' value of
100 for steel pipe [except 120 for steel pipe used in deluge systems], 150 for copper tube,
and 140 for cement lined ductile iron pipe.
2.1.8 Location of Sprinkler Heads
Location of heads in relation to the ceiling and spacing of sprinkler heads shall conform to
NFPA 13 for extra hazard occupancy. The spacing of sprinklers on the branch lines shall be
essentially uniform.
2.1.9 Duration of Discharge
System shall apply foam solution over the sprinkler discharge area for a minimum of [10]
minutes while simultaneously discharging foam solution through monitors for a minimum of
[10] minutes. Hose station discharge time shall be a minimum of [20minutes. Reduction of
the discharge duration based on a discharge rate higher than the specified minimum is not
permitted.
2.2
ELECTRIC DETECTION DEVICES
Provide electric heat detectors, and smoke detectors, and combination ultraviolet-infrared
detectors. All wiring shall be supervised and installed in protective metal conduit or tubing.
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 14 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.2.1 Control Panel
Modular type panel installed in a surface mounted steel cabinet with hinged door and
cylinder lock. Switches and other controls shall not be accessible without the use of a key.
The control panel shall be a neat, compact, factory-wired assembly containing all parts and
equipment required to provide specified operating and supervisory functions of the system.
Panel cabinet shall be finished on the inside and outside with factory-applied enamel finish.
Provide main annunciator located on the exterior of the cabinet door or visible through the
cabinet door. Provide audible trouble signal. Provide prominent engraved rigid plastic or
metal identification plates, or silk-screened labels attached to the rear face of the panel
viewing window, for all lamps and switches. System power shall be 120 volts AC service,
transformed through a two winding isolation transformer and rectified to 24 volts DC for
operation of all system initiating, actuating, signal sounding, trouble signal and fire alarm
tripping circuits. System shall be electrically supervised on all circuits. A single open or
ground fault condition in any detection (initiating) or signaling circuit shall not result in any
loss of system function, but shall cause the actuation of system trouble signals. A ground
fault condition or single break in any other circuit shall result in the activation of the system
trouble signals. Loss of AC power, a break in the standby battery power circuits, or
abnormal AC power or low battery voltage shall result in the operation of the system trouble
signals. The abnormal position of any system switch in the control panel shall result in the
operation of the system trouble signals. Trouble signals shall operate continuously until the
system has been restored to normal at the control panel. System trouble shall also be
annunciated on the appropriate zone of the building fire alarm panel. Provide a 100 mm
remote system trouble bell [or buzzer], installed in a constantly attended area, arranged to
operate in conjunction with the integral trouble signals of the panel. Provide remote bell [or
buzzer] with a rigid plastic or metal identification sign which reads in English and Arabic
"Foam System Trouble." Lettering on identification sign shall be a minimum of 25 mm high.
Control panel, batteries, and battery charger shall be weatherproof type or located in an
area not subject to water damage. System control panel shall be UL listed or FM approved
for extinguishing system control (releasing device service). Permanently label all switches.
Provide panel with the following switches:
a. Trouble silencing switch which transfers audible trouble signals (including remote
trouble devices, if provided) to an indicating lamp. Upon correction of the trouble
condition, audible signals will again sound until the switch is returned to its normal
position, or the trouble signal circuit shall be automatically restored to normal upon
correction of the trouble condition. The silencing switch may be a momentary
action, self-resetting type.
b. Alarm silencing switch which when activated will silence all associated alarm
devices without resetting the panel, and cause operation of system trouble signals.
c. Individual zone disconnect switches which when operated will disable only their
respective initiating circuit and cause operation of the system and zone trouble
signals.
d. Reset switch which when activated will restore the system to normal standby status
after the cause of the alarm has been corrected, and all activated initiating devices
reset. [Operation of reset switch shall restore activated smoke detectors to normal
standby status.]
e. Lamp test switch.
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 15 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
f. City disconnect switch which when activated will disconnect the coded device and
cause operation of the system trouble signal.
2.2.1.1 Main Annunciator
Provide integral with the main control panel. Provide separate alarm and trouble lamps
for each zone alarm initiating circuit as indicated below, located on the exterior of the
cabinet door or visible through the cabinet door. Lamps shall be LED (Light Emitting
Diode) type. Supervision will not be required provided a fault in the annunciator circuits
results only in loss of annunciation and will not affect the normal functional operation of
the remainder of the system. Each lamp shall provide specific identification of the [zone]
[area] [device] by means of a permanent label.
In no case shall zone identification consist of the words "Zone 1," "Zone 2," etc., but shall
consist of the description of the [zone] [area] [device].
2.2.1.2 Initiating Zones
List zones from 1 to x, with a brief description of each zone; e.g. "Zone 1: Hangar Bay
No. 1". Expand this list as necessary to identify all the zones required for the building.
Initiating Zones shall be arranged as follows:
Zone 1: [
Zone 2: [
Zone 3: [
Zone x: [
_]
_]
_]
]
2.2.1.3 Remote Annunciator Panel
Locate as shown. Panel shall duplicate all requirements specified for the main control
panel annunciator, except that in lieu of individual zone trouble lamps a single common
system trouble lamp may be provided. Lamps shall be LED (Light Emitting Diode) type,
except lamps used in backlit panels shall be LED or neon type. Panel shall have a lamp
test switch.
Zone identification shall be by means of silk-screened labels attached to the reverse face
of backlighted viewing window(s). Panel shall be of the weatherproof type, surface mounted.
2.2.2 Auxiliary Power Supply
2.2.2.1 Storage Batteries
Provide [sealed lead calcium,] [or] [sealed lead acid,] [or] [vented wet cell nickel
cadmium,] batteries and charger. Drycell batteries are not acceptable. House batteries in
the control panel or in a well constructed vented steel cabinet with cylinder lock, noncorrosive base, and louvered vents. Provide batteries of adequate ampere-hour rating to
operate the system under supervisory conditions for 60 hours, at the end of which time
batteries shall be capable of operating the entire system in a full alarm condition for not
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 16 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
less than [30] minutes. Provide calculations substantiating the battery capacity. Provide
reliable separation between cells to prevent contact between terminals of adjacent cells
and between battery terminals and other metal parts. Provide batteries with post-and-nut,
"L"-blade, or similar terminals. Slip-on tab type terminals are not acceptable. When a
separate battery cabinet is used, provide a fuse block for battery leads within the
cabinets.
Finish the cabinet on the inside and outside with enamel paint. Locate the top of the
battery cabinet not more than 1.20 meters above floor level.
2.2.2.2 Battery Charger
Provide completely automatic high/low charging rate type charger capable of recovery of
the batteries from full discharge to full charge in 24 hours or less. Provide an ammeter for
recording rate of charge and a voltmeter to indicate the state of battery charge under
load. Meters shall be factory installed, or factory-supplied plug-in modules. Field
installation of meters other than the panel manufacturer's plug- in modules is prohibited.
Provide a trouble light to indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of
charge as part of the unit assembly if a high-rate switch is provided. House charger in the
control panel or battery cabinet.
2.3
PNEUMATIC DETECTION SYSTEM
Provide pneumatic single acting rate-of-rise heat detectors. All tubing shall be supervised
and installed in protective metal conduit or tubing.
2.3.1 Air Compressor
Shall be automatic, electric motor driven and include piping, pressure switch, regulator, and
tank if required. Provide compressor with a minimum capacity capable of charging the
pneumatic detection system to normal system pressure in 15 minutes and shall include all
controls necessary to maintain the system fully charged.
2.3.2 Piping and Control Panel
Provide copper piping. Provide a control panel or equivalent device(s) to automatically
maintain the required pneumatic pressure in the detection system, and limit the quantity of
air that enters the detection/release system. Provide supply air and system air pressure
gages.
2.4
PIPING SUPERVISION
[Pre-action sprinkler piping] [and] [pneumatic detection system] shall be supervised. A break
in the piping or tubing systems resulting in loss of pneumatic pressure shall result in the
activation of a trouble signal.
Provide a silencing switch which transfers trouble signals to an indicating lamp and arrange
so that correction of the trouble condition will automatically transfer the trouble signal from
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 17 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
the indicating lamp back to the trouble signal until the switch is restored to normal position.
2.5
MANUAL RELEASE STATIONS
Provide [combined] overhead system, and monitor nozzle release stations where shown,
and separate hose station release stations at each hose station. Stations shall be of a type
not subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Stations shall have a dual action release
configuration to prevent accidental system discharge. Break-glass-front stations are not
permitted; however a pull lever break-glass-rod type is acceptable. Station color shall be
red. Station shall provide positive visible indication of operation. Restoration shall require
use of a key or special tool. Place warning signs at each station indicating that operation of
the station will cause immediate AFFF discharge. Where a building fire alarm pull station is
also mounted in the vicinity of a foam release station, separate the stations by at least one
meter horizontally. Provided permanent engraved rigid plastic or metal labels to clearly
distinguish foam release stations from building fire alarm stations, and to indicate the
function of each foam release station. Stations shall be weatherproof type.
2.6
HEAT DETECTORS
Designed for detection of fire by [combination fixed temperature rate-of-rise] or [rate
compensating] principle. Locate detectors in accordance with their listing by UL or FM and
the requirements of NFPA 72, except provide at least two detectors in all rooms of 56
square meters or larger in area. Temperature rating of detectors shall be in accordance with
NFPA 72. Reduce heat detector spacing in areas with ceiling heights exceeding 3 meters ,
in accordance with NFPA 72. No detector shall be located closer than 305 mm to any part of
any lighting fixture nor closer than 610 mm to any part of an air supply diffuser. Detectors,
located in hazardous locations as defined by NFPA 70, shall be types approved for such
locations. Provide with terminal screw type connections. Removal of detector head from its
base shall cause activation of system trouble signal. Detectors shall be weatherproof type.
2.6.1 Combination Fixed Temperature Rate-of-Rise Detectors
Designed for surface outlet box mounting and supported independently of conduit, tubing or
wiring connections. Contacts shall be self-resetting after response to rate-of-rise actuation.
Operation under fixed temperature actuation shall result in an external indication.
Detector units located in areas subject to abnormal temperature changes shall operate on
fixed temperature principle only.
2.6.2 Rate Compensating Detector
Designed for surface outlet box mounting and supported independently of conduit, tubing or
wiring connections. Detectors shall be hermetically sealed and automatically resetting type
which will operate when ambient air temperature reaches detector setting regardless of rate
of temperature rise. Detector operation shall not be subject to thermal time lag.
2.7
OPEN-AREA (SPOT-TYPE) SMOKE DETECTORS
Designed for detection of abnormal smoke densities by the [ionization] [or] [photoelectric]
principle. Provide necessary control and power modules required for operation integral with
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 18 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
the main control panel. Provide detectors and associated modules which are compatible
with the main control panel and suitable for use in a supervised circuit. Detector circuits
shall be of the 4 wire type whereby the detector operating power is transmitted over
conductors separate from the initiating circuit. Provide a separate, fused, power circuit for
each smoke detection initiating circuit (zone). Failure of the power circuit shall be indicated
as a trouble condition on the corresponding initiating circuit.
Malfunction of the electrical circuits to the detector or its control or power units shall result in
the operation of the system trouble signals. Equip each detector with a visible indicator lamp
that flashes when the detector is in the normal standby mode and glows continuously when
the detector is activated.
Provide plug-in type detectors with tab-lock or twist-lock, quick disconnect head and
separate base in which the detector base contains screw terminals for making all wiring
connections. Detector head shall be removable from its base without disconnecting any
wires. Removal of detector head from its base shall cause activation of system trouble
signals. Provide each detector with an integral screen to prevent entrance of insects into the
detection chamber(s).
2.7.1 Ionization Detectors
Multiple chamber type which is responsive to both visible and invisible particles of
combustion. Detectors shall not be susceptible to operation by changes in relative humidity.
2.7.2 Photoelectric Detectors
Operate on a multiple cell concept using an infra-red light-emitting diode (LED) light source.
2.7.3 Detector Spacing and Location
Should be as per NFPA 72, the manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements
stated herein, however, in no case shall spacing exceed 9 by 9 meters per detector, and 9
lineal meter per detector along corridors. Detectors shall not be placed closer than [1.50]
meter from any air discharge or return grille, nor closer than 305 mm to any part of any
lighting fixture.
2.8
COMBINATION ULTRAVIOLET-INFRARED FLAME DETECTORS
Flame detectors shall operate on the dual spectrum ultraviolet-infrared (UV-IR) principle.
Detector shall employ a solar-blind UV sensor with a high signal-to-noise ratio, and a narrow
band IR sensor.
Detector logic shall require UV and IR signals to be present, in the proper ratio or signature
as emitted by a hydrocarbon fire, before the detector initiates an alarm. Detectors shall
respond within 5 seconds to a JP-4 fire 3 meters square, 46 meters from the detector.
Detector shall not be activated by non-fire sources such as continuous or intermittent direct
or reflected solar radiation, arc-welding, lightning, radiant heat, x-rays, artificial lighting,
radio transmissions, and normal jet engine functions.
Detector shall have an automatic through-the-lens self-testing feature.
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 19 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
Malfunction of the detector circuitry, or degradation of the sensors' lens cleanliness to the
point where the detector will not detect the design fire signature, shall cause operation of
the system trouble signals. Logic circuits necessary for operation of the detector shall be
integral to the detector or located in separate flame detector control panel(s) located
adjacent to the foam system control panel(s). Each detector in alarm shall be individually
annunciated by an LED on the detector or at the detector control panel. Primary and
auxiliary power supply shall be taken from the foam system control panel(s).
Detectors, and associated control panels if required, shall be compatible with the foam
system control panel(s).
Detectors and associated control panels shall be weatherproof, or housed in weatherproof
enclosure(s) when in an area subject to system discharge and shall also be explosion-proof
when located in hazardous areas as defined by NFPA 70. Detector spacing and location
shall be in accordance with NFPA 72, their UL listing or FM approval, and the
manufacturer's recommendations.
The detector manufacturer shall determine or approve the detector layout. Detector layout
drawings shall include horizontal and vertical angles for correct aiming. Locate detectors so
that every portion of the protected area is within the field of view of at least three detectors,
taking into account fixed obstructions. Provide detectors with manufacturer's swivel
mounting bracket. Provide a permanent engraved rigid plastic or metal label at each
detector location with detector aiming information (degrees horizontal and vertical) for the
corresponding detector.
2.9
ELECTRICAL WORK
Electrical work is specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, except
for control wiring. Fire alarm system is specified in Section [28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM.
2.9.1 Wiring
Provide control wiring and connections to fire alarm systems, under this section and
conforming to NFPA 70 and NFPA 72. Wire for 120 volt circuits shall be No. 12 AWG
minimum solid conductor. Wire for low voltage DC circuits shall be No. [14] [16] AWG
minimum solid conductor [, except wire to remote annunciators, if provided, may be 18 AWG
minimum solid conductor]. All wiring shall be color coded. Wiring, conduit and devices
exposed to water or foam discharge shall be weatherproof. Wiring, conduit and devices
located in hazardous atmospheres, as defined by NFPA 70, shall be explosion proof. All
conduit shall be minimum 20 mm.
2.9.2 Operating Power
Power shall be 120 volts AC service, transformed through a two winding isolation type
transformer and rectified to 24 volts DC for operation of all signal initiating, signal sounding,
trouble signal, and actuating (releasing) circuits. Provide secondary DC power supply for
operation of system in the event of failure of the AC supply. Transfer from normal to
emergency power or restoration from emergency to normal power shall be fully automatic
and shall not cause transmission of a false alarm. Obtain AC operating power for control
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 20 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
panel, [and] battery charger [, and air compressor] from the line side of the incoming
building power source ahead of all building services. Provide independent properly fused
safety switch, with provisions for locking the cover and operating handle in the "POWER
ON" position for these connections and locate adjacent to the main distribution panel. Paint
switch box red and suitably identify by a lettered designation.
2.9.3 Conductor Identification
Identify circuit conductors within each enclosure where a tap, splice or termination is made.
Identify conductors by plastic coated self sticking printed markers or by heat-shrink type
sleeves. Attach the markers in a manner that will not permit accidental detachment.
Properly identify control circuit terminations.
2.10
SYSTEM ACTIVATION
2.10.1 Overhead System Activation
Provide one or more risers per hangar bay as required by NFPA 409 based on size of bay.
Overhead systems, monitor systems and hose systems shall be served by separate risers.
Each zone shall encompass of one hangarbay. Upon activation of the detection system or
overhead system manual release station(s), the corresponding overhead system protecting
that area shall activate.
2.10.2 Monitor System Activation
Overhead systems, monitor systems and hose systems shall be served by separate risers.
Each zone shall encompass one hangar bay. Upon activation of detectors and /or two UVIR detectors for more than 5 seconds or activation of a manual release station, all monitors
in that zone shall be activated.
2.10.3 Hose System Activation
Each zone shall encompass the hose stations indicated . Hose stations shall be activated
upon activation of a hose station manual release station. Provide a manual release station
at each hose station.
2.11
ALARMS
2.11.1 Water Motor Alarms
Provide weatherproof and guarded type alarm for each group of deluge and pre-action
valve(s). Alarms shall sound locally on the flow of foam solution in each system to which it is
connected. Mount alarms on the outside of the outer walls of each building, at locations
indicated. When more than one alarm gong is provided, provide permanent engraved rigid
plastic or metal signs indicating to which system each gong is connected.
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 21 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.11.2 Local Alarm
Provide electric [alarm bells] to sound locally on operation of any system, regardless of
whether water flows or not. When more than one alarm is provided, provide permanent
engraved rigid plastic or metal signs indicating to which system each alarm is connected.
2.11.3 Fire Alarm
Provide equipment for the automatic transmittal of an alarm over the building fire alarm
system. Arrange so that the detection system and the flow of solution in each system will
actuate the alarm. [Activation of a single UV-IR detector shall not cause activation of the
foam system but shall cause activation of the fire alarm system].
2.11.3.1 Pressure Switch
Provide switch with SPDT contacts to automatically transmit alarms upon flow of water or
AFFF. Alarm actuating device shall have mechanical diaphragm controlled retard device
adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds and shall instantly recycle.
2.11.4 Trouble Alarm
Provide local electric alarm to indicate trouble or failure of the detection system or pre-action
sprinkler piping system. Also connect trouble alarm into the building fire alarm control panel
to indicate "trouble" on a separate zone labeled "Foam System Trouble".
2.12
TANK MOUNTED AIR COMPRESSOR
Include for projects involving pre-action sprinkler piping systems only.
Provide an approved automatic type electric motor driven air compressor including pressure
switch, air piping, and 38 liter minimum capacity tank. Compressor shall have a minimum
capacity capable of charging the complete sprinkler system to normal system air pressure
within 30 minutes. Provide each system with an approved automatic air pressure regulating
device.
2.13
AFFF CONCENTRATE
To be as per MIL-F-24385,
2.13.1 Concentrate Fill Pump
Provide one pump to fill foam system tank. Pump shall have a minimum flow rate of 27 L/m .
Pump shall be complete with 115 VAC motor, fused switch, power cord with plug and 3
meters 10 foot minimum suction and clear discharge hoses.
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 22 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.14
DIAPHRAGM PRESSURE PROPORTIONING EQUIPMENT
Foam solution shall be produced by introducing AFFF concentrate into the water stream by
the balanced pressure proportioning method using a diaphragm pressure tank and ratio
controller.
2.14.1 Diaphragm Pressure Proportioning Tanks
Tanks shall be cylindrical steel ASME pressure vessels with a full Buna-N impregnated
nylon inner tank or bladder designed to contain AFFF concentrate and to be used in
conjunction with the concentrate ratio controller. Tanks shall be designed for working
pressure of 1206 kPa(gage) and hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times the working pressure in
accordance with ASME standards at the factory. Tanks shall have UL or FM label and
ASME stamp affixed to the vessel. Size tank to provide sufficient AFFF concentrate for the
time specified when the system is discharging foam solution at total maximum system flow.
Also provide connected reserve tanks(s) of equal capacity. Permanently label each tank
with its capacity, type and percentage of concentrate, which system(s) it serves, and
whether it is a main or reserve tank. Conspicuously post filling instructions near each group
of tanks. Provide a gage or unbreakable sight glass to permit visual determination of level of
tank contents. Prior to shop painting, abrasive blast clean tank exterior surface in
accordance with SSPC SP 6 to a surface profile not to exceed 0.05 mm and provide a MILDTL-24441 or SSPC coating system to the tank exterior. Prime tank exterior with one coat
of MIL-DTL-24441/1, Formula 150 or SSPC Paint 22 primer applied to a dry film thickness
of 0.076 mm and topcoat with one coat of MIL-DTL-24441/7 Formula 156 (red) or SSPC
Paint 22 topcoat (red) applied to a dry film thickness of 0.076 mm .
2.14.2 Concentrate Ratio Controller
Ratio controller shall be a modified venturi device with AFFF concentrate feed line from
diaphragm tank(s), and integral concentrate metering orifice. Size for specified flow rate(s).
2.15
BALANCED PRESSURE PROPORTIONING SYSTEM
Foam solution shall be produced by introducing AFFF concentrate into the water stream by
the balanced pressure proportioning method using a pump and proportioner.
2.15.1 Skid-Mounted Balanced Pressure Proportioning System
Self-contained, skid-mounted system, fully assembled at the factory and delivered complete
and ready for use. Field connections shall be limited to water, electrical, and AFFF
concentrate inputs, foam solution output, and foam concentrate return line to storage tank.
Size system for required flow rate(s). The concentrate pump and all piping, valves, and
fittings in contact with foam concentrate shall be of materials resistant to the corrosive
effects of the AFFF concentrate. Concentrate pump shall be electric motor driven, drip
proof, 240/480 volts, 60 Hz AC. Activation and operation of system shall be fully automatic,
with manual over-ride and manual shut-down. Provide permanent engraved rigid plastic or
corrosion resistant metal instruction plate for emergency manual operation, along with a
similarly constructed label for each control device.
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 23 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.15.2 In-Line Balanced Pressure Proportioning System
Size system for required flow rates. AFFF concentrate pump shall be positive displacement,
electric motor driven, drip proof, 240/480 volts, 60 Hz AC. System operation shall be fully
automatic, with manual over-ride and manual shut-down. Provide a pressure regulating
device in the AFFF concentrate pump return line to maintain constant pressure on the
concentrate piping system at all AFFF solution flow rates. Provide an in-line balanced
pressure proportioning device at each system riser to automatically balance the AFFF
concentrate pressure with the water pressure at the riser to provide correct proportioning
over the range of flow rates calculated for that riser. The pump and all piping, valves, and
fittings in contact with the foam concentrate shall be of materials resistant to the corrosive
effects of the AFFF concentrate. Provide permanent engraved rigid plastic or corrosionresistant metal instruction plate for emergency manual operation, along with a similarly
constructed label for each control device.
2.15.3 AFFF Concentrate Storage Tanks
Tank shall be designed for storage of AFFF concentrate at atmospheric pressure, and shall
be [horizontal] [or] [vertical] cylindrical, fiberglass or polyethylene construction. Tank shall
have the following: Drain valve located at the lowest point in the tank, connections for
concentrate supply and return lines to the proportioners, top-mounted fill connections and
inspection hatch, and a pressure/vacuum relief vent. All openings and tank connections
shall be installed at the factory, no holes shall be made in the tank shell in the field. Tank
shall include all necessary supports for free- standing installation. Provide a gage or
unbreakable sight glass to permit visual determination of level of tank contents, unless liquid
level is clearly visible through shell of tank. Size tank to provide sufficient AFFF concentrate
for the time specified when the system is discharging foam solution at total maximum
system flow. Also provide connected reserve tank(s) of equal capacity. Permanently label
each tank with its capacity, type and percentage of concentrate, which system it serves, and
whether it is a main or reserve tank.
2.16
OSCILLATING MONITOR NOZZLES
Fixed, water motor operated, with override to allow manual aiming. Oscillation arc shall be
adjustable from at least 0 to 2.88 radian 165 degrees. Oscillation speed shall be adjustable
from 0 to 0.52 radian 30 degrees per second. Nozzle shall be adjustable while in operation
from 0.52 radian 30 degrees below to 1.40 radian 80 degrees above horizontal, with lock or
latching mechanism. Nozzle shall be air aspirating type, adjustable while in operation from
straight stream to fan-spray. Nozzle shall be capable of retaining the adjusted setting once
the desired pattern has been set. [Nozzle shall produce a straight stream of 46 meters at
1920 L/m and [690 kPa (gage)] Nozzles shall provide a minimum application rate of 4.2L/m
per sq meter over the entire floor area underneath the aircraft wings and fuselage.
Provide normally open 0S&Y gate valve in supply line at each monitor location.
2.17
HAND HOSE LINES
Provide each hose station with flow-through reel and 30 meter of 40 mm hard rubber hose
and nozzles. Nozzle shall have pistol-grip ball shutoff valve. Nozzle shall be air aspirating
type. Provide normally closed quarter-turn ball valve in supply line at each hose station.
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 24 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
Nozzle flow rate shall be 228 L/m minimum.
2.18
WALL FOAM HYDRANTS
Provide dual outlet connections with integral gate valves and locate about one meter above
grade. Provide each outlet with 65 mm male National Standard hose threads with cap and
chain. Hydrant shall be controlled by 0S&Y gate valve located inside foam room. Provide
wall escutcheon plate with "FOAM HYDRANT" in raised letters cast in plate. [Hydrant shall
permit testing of each pre-action system riser at full design flow without charging the system
supplied by the riser.]
2.19
ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS
2.19.1 Pipe, Fittings, and Mechanical Couplings
To be as per NFPA 13, except steel piping shall be Schedule 40 for sizes smaller than 200
mm , and Schedule 30 or 40 for sizes 200 mm and larger. Pipe nipples 150 mm long and
shorter shall be Schedule 80 steel pipe. Water motor alarm piping shall be zinc-coated steel
pipe and fittings. Rubber gasketed grooved-end pipe and fittings with mechanical couplings
shall only be permitted in pipe sizes 40 mm and larger. Rubber gaskets shall be UL listed
for use in dry-pipe sprinkler systems. Use of restriction orifices, reducing flanges, and plainend fittings with mechanical couplings (which utilize steel gripping devices to bite into the
pipe when pressure is applied) are not permitted. Pipe and fittings in contact with AFFF
concentrate shall be material resistant to the corrosive effects of AFFF concentrate as
approved by the manufacturer of the proportioning system Fittings on concentrate lines
shall be flanged or welded only. Screwed or mechanical fittings will not be permitted.
2.19.2 Jointing Material
To be as per FS A-A-58092, Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) tape. Pipe joint compound
(pipe dope) is not acceptable.
2.19.3 Duplex Basket Strainers
Include for deluge systems with high volume flow, and for untreated water supply.
FS WW-S-2739, Style Y (Y pattern). Provide duplex basket strainers with removable
screens having standard perforations, 3 mm in diameter in the riser beneath the deluge
valves.
2.19.4 Pipe Hangers and Supports
To be as per NFPA 13.
2.19.5 Valves
Provide valves as required by NFPA 13 and of types approved for fire service. Gate valves
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 25 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
shall open by counterclockwise rotation. Check valves shall be flanged clear opening swing
check type with flanged inspection and access cover plate for sizes 100 mm and larger.
Provide an OS&Y valve beneath each [deluge] or [pre-action] valve in each riser, when
more than one valve is supplied from the same water supplypipe. Butterfly valves are not
acceptable.
2.19.6 Identification Signs
Attach properly lettered approved metal signs conforming to NFPA 13 to each valve and
alarm device. Permanently affix design data nameplates to the riser of each system.
2.19.7 Inspector's Test Connection
Include for pre-action systems.
Provide test connections about 2 meters above the floor for each sprinkler system and
locate at the hydraulically most remote part of each system. Provide test connection piping
to a location where the discharge will be readily visible and where water may be discharged
without damage.
2.19.8 Main Drains
Provide drain piping to discharge at safe points outside each building or to sight cones
attached to drains of adequate size to readily receive the full flow from each drain under
maximum pressure. Provide auxiliary drains as required by NFPA 13.
2.19.9 Pipe Sleeves
Provide where piping passes through walls, floors, roofs, and partitions. Secure sleeves in
proper position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass
through entire thickness of walls, floors, roofs, and partitions. Provide not less than 6 mm
space between exterior of piping and interior of sleeve. Firmly pack space with insulation
and calk at both ends of the sleeve with plastic waterproof cement.
2.19.9.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, Roofs
ASTM A 53/A 53M, schedule 40 or standard weight, zinc-coated steel pipe sleeves.
Extend sleeves in floor slabs 80 mm above the finished floor.
2.19.9.2 Sleeves in Partitions
Provide zinc-coated steel sheet having a nominal weight of not less than 4.40 kg per sq
meter.
2.19.10 Escutcheon Plates
Provide one piece or split hinge type plates for piping passing through floors, walls and
ceilings, in both exposed and concealed areas. Provide chromium plated metal plates
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 26 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
where pipe passes through finished ceilings. Provide other plates of steel or cast iron with
aluminum paint finish. Securely anchor plates in place.
2.19.11 Fire Department breaching Connections
Two way type with 65 mm National Standard female hose threads with plug, chain, and
identifying fire department connection escutcheon plate.
2.19.12 Backflow Preventers
Reduced pressure principle type. Proof shall be furnished that each make, model/design,
and size of backflow preventer being furnished for the project is approved by and has a
current "Certificate of Approval" from the FCCCHR List. Listing of the particular make,
model/design, and size in the current FCCCHR List will be acceptable as the required proof.
2.20
BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS
2.20.1 Pipe and Fittings
To be as per NFPA 24, and Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION
2.20.2 Valves
Provide as required by NFPA 24 and 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION, for fire service.
Gate valves shall conform to AWWA C500 or UL 262 with cast iron body and bronze trim,
and shall open by counterclockwise rotation.
2.20.3 Post Indicator Valves
To be as Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION.
2.20.4 Valve Boxes
To be as Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION
2.20.5 Buried Utility Warning and Identification Tape
Provide detectable aluminum foil plastic-backed tape or detectable magnetic plastic tape
manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried piping. Tape shall be
detectable by an electronic detection instrument. Provide tape in rolls, 76 mm 3 minimum
width, color coded for the utility involved, with warning and identification imprinted in bold
black letters continuously and repeatedly over entire tape length. Warning and identification
shall be CAUTION BURIED WATER PIPING BELOW or similar. Use permanent code and
letter coloring unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in trench backfill
material. Bury tape with the printed side up at a depth of 305 mm below the top surface of
earth or the top surface of the subgrade under pavements.
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 27 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
To be as per specified in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.2
CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS
Use tapping or drilling machine valve and mechanical joint type sleeves for connections to
be made under pressure. Bolt sleeves around the mains; bolt valve conforming to AWWA
C500 or UL 262 to the branch. Open valve, attach drilling machine, make tap, close valve,
and remove drilling machine, all without interruption of service. Notify PGC Engineer in
writing at least 15 calendar days prior to the date the connections are required; approval
shall be received before any service is interrupted.
Furnish all material required to make connections into the existing water supply systems,
and perform all excavating, backfilling, and other incidental labor as required. Furnish the
labor and the tapping or drilling machine for making the actual connections to the existing
systems.
3.3
AFFF SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection,
examination, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with the NFPA standards and
UAE SAFETY AND FIRE PROTECTION CODE OF PRACTICE referenced herein. Install
piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and supports. Conceal piping to the
maximum extent possible. Piping shall be inspected, tested and approved before being
concealed. Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and for all connections. Make
changes in piping sizes through standard reducing pipe fittings; do not use bushings. Cut
pipe accurately and work into place without springing or forcing. Ream pipe ends and free
pipe and fittings from burrs. Clean with solvent to remove all varnish and cutting oil prior to
assembly. Make screw joints with PTFE tape applied to male thread only.
3.4
DISINFECTION
Disinfect new water piping from the system control valve to the point of connection at the
water main and existing water piping affected by the Contractor's operation in accordance
with AWWA C651. Fill piping systems with solution containing minimum of 50 mg/kg parts
per million (ppm) of free available chlorine and allow solution to stand for minimum of 24
hours. Flush solution from systems with clean water until maximum residual chlorine content
is not greater than 0.2 mg/kg ppm.
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 28 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.5
FIELD PAINTING
Clean, prime, and paint new foam systems including valves, piping, conduit, hangers,
miscellaneous metal work, and accessories. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces using
clean brushes. Clean the surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 11. Immediately after
cleaning, prime the metal surfaces with one coat of SSPC Paint 25 or SSPC Paint 25primer
applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.04 mm. Exercise care to avoid the painting of
sprinkler heads and operating devices. Upon completion of painting, remove materials
which were used to protect sprinkler heads and operating devices while painting is in
process. Remove sprinkler heads and operating devices which have been inadvertently
painted and provide new clean sprinkler heads and operating devices of the proper type.
Finish primed surfaces as follows:
3.5.1 Foam Systems in Unfinished Areas
Unfinished areas are defined as attic spaces, spaces above suspended ceilings, crawl
spaces, foam rooms, pump rooms, pipe chases, and other spaces where ceilings are not
painted or not constructed of a prefinished material. Paint primed surfaces with two coats of
FS A-A-2962 red enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.04 mm.
3.5.2 Foam Systems in All Other Areas
Paint primed surfaces with two coats of paint to match adjacent surfaces, except paint
valves and operating accessories with two coats of FS A-A-2962 red enamel applied to a
minimum dry film thickness of 0.04 mm. Provide piping with 50 mm wide red bands spaced
at maximum 6 meters intervals throughout the piping systems. Bands shall be red enamel
or self-adhering red plastic tape.
3.5.3 Piping Labels
Provide permanent labels in foam rooms, spaced at 6 meters maximum intervals along
pipe, indicating "WATER", "FOAM CONCENTRATE", and "FOAM SOLUTION" on
corresponding piping.
3.5.4 Field Touch-Up
Clean damaged areas of shop coated tanks in accordance with SSPC SP 11 and coat
cleaned areas with the same materials used for the shop applied coating system.
3.6
ELECTRICAL WORK
Electrical work is specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, except
for control and fire alarm wiring. Fire alarm system is specified in Section 28 31 74.00 20
INTERIOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 29 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.6.1 Wiring
Provide control wiring, and connections to fire alarm systems, under this section in
accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 72. Provide wiring in rigid metal conduit or
intermediate metal conduit, except electrical metallic tubing may be used in dry locations not
enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical damage. Do not run low voltage
DC circuits in the same conduit with AC circuits. [Run wiring to UV-IR detectors alone in
separate conduit if required by the detector manufacturer.]
3.7
FLUSHING
Flush the piping system with potable water in accordance with NFPA 13. Continue flushing
operation until water is clear, but for not less than 10 minutes.
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Prior to initial operation, inspect equipment and piping systems for compliance with
drawings, specifications, and manufacturer's submittals.
Perform tests in the presence of PGC Engineer to determine conformance with the specified
requirements.
3.8.1 Preliminary Tests
Each piping system shall be hydrostatically tested at 1379 kPa (gage) in accordance with
NFPA 13 and shall show no leakage or reduction in gage pressure after 2 hours. The
Contractor shall conduct complete preliminary tests, which shall encompass all aspects of
system operation. Individually test all detectors, manual actuation stations, alarms, control
panels, and all other components and accessories to demonstrate proper functioning. Test
water flow alarms by flowing water through the inspector's test connection. When tests have
been completed and all necessary corrections made, submit to PGC Engineer a signed and
dated certificate, similar to that specified in NFPA 13, attesting to the satisfactory completion
of all testing and stating that the system is in operating condition. Also include a written
request for a formal inspection and test.
3.8.2 Formal Inspection and Tests (Acceptance Tests)
PGC Engineer (s) will witness formal tests and approve all systems before they are
accepted. The system shall be considered ready for such testing only after all necessary
preliminary tests have been made and all deficiencies found have been corrected to the
satisfaction of the equipment manufacturer's technical representative and written
certification to this effect is received by the Fire Protection Engineer. Submit the request for
formal inspection at least 15 working days prior to the date the inspection is to take place.
The control panel(s) and detection system(s) shall be in continuous service for a "break-in"
period of at least 15 consecutive days prior to the formal inspection. Experienced
technicians regularly employed by the Contractor in the installation of both the mechanical
and electrical portions of such systems shall be present during the inspection and shall
conduct the testing. All AFFF concentrate, instruments, [including UV-IR detector test lamp
and function test kit,] personnel, appliances and equipment for testing shall be furnished by
the Contractor. All necessary tests encompassing all aspects of system operation shall be
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 30 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
made including the following, and any deficiency found shall be corrected and the system
retested at no cost to the Government.
3.8.2.1 Systems and Device Testing
The entire initiating, alarm, actuation systems shall be operated. As a minimum,
operation and supervision of the following functions and devices shall be demonstrated:
a. All operational and supervisory functions of the control and annunciator panels.
b. Each manual actuation station and associated circuit(s).
c. All detectors and associated circuits.
d. All alarms and associated circuits.
e. All actuator circuits and system control valve(s) (without foam discharge).
f.
Activation of the building fire evacuation alarm system.
g. Activation of the Base fire alarm system (receipt of fire alarm at alarm office).
h. All of the above tests shall then be repeated with the system on battery power only.
3.8.2.2 AFFF Discharge and Concentration Testing
When all of the initiating, alarm, actuation, and supervisory functions of the system
operate to the satisfaction of the system manufacturer's technical representative and the
PGC Fire Protection Engineer, a complete discharge test of each system shall be
performed to demonstrate satisfactory performance, proper AFFF concentration,
mechanical operation and operation of valves, release devices, alarms, and interlocks
which control the protected areas. These tests shall be conducted by experienced
personnel according to the equipment and AFFF manufacturers' recommendations.
a. Test each deluge system by full flow of foam solution from the individual systems or
combination of systems to achieve maximum design flow rate for at least 60 seconds.
b. Test each pre-action system at their design flow rate for at least 60 seconds with
temporary hose lines and nozzles connected to a test header. Furnish hose and
nozzles required for tests.
c. Test all hose lines and monitor nozzles by full flow of foam solution for at least 60
seconds. The manufacturer's representative shall test samples of foam solution taken
from each system to ensure proper AFFF concentration. Provide protection for all
electrical fixtures and equipment exposed to possible damage during tests and
protect doors and other openings leading from the protected area(s), to prevent
migration of foam solution into other areas or spaces.
3.8.2.3 Flushing and Rinsing
After completion of tests flush all piping carrying AFFF concentrate and solution with
fresh water. Piping normally containing AFFF concentrate when the system is in standby
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 31 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
mode need not be flushed. Rinse with fresh water all equipment and building surfaces
exposed to AFFF discharge.
3.8.3 Environmental Protection
Provide temporary measures to prevent AFFF from entering storm drains, sanitary sewers,
drainage ditches, streams and water courses. Collect all discharged AFFF and rinse and
flushing water and dispose of it in an EPA - approved waste-water treatment facility which
provides secondary (biological) treatment. At least 15 days prior to the date flow testing is to
take place, submit written plan for AFFF containment and disposal methods(s) to PGC
Engineer for approval.
3.8.4 Additional Tests
When deficiencies, defects or malfunctions develop during the tests required, all further
testing of the system shall be suspended until proper adjustments, corrections or revisions
have been made to assure proper performance of the system. If these revisions require
more than a nominal delay, PGC Engineer shall be notified when the additional work has
been completed, to arrange a new inspection and test of the system. All tests required shall
be repeated prior to final acceptance, unless directed otherwise.
3.8.5 AFFF Concentrate Storage Tanks Fill-Up
Fill storage tanks including reserve tanks and piping normally containing concentrate when
the system is in standby mode with Contractor furnished AFFF concentrate after
acceptance of the system.
3.8.6 Manufacturer's Representative
Provide the services of representatives or technicians from the manufacturers of the foam
system, and control panel , and UV-IR detectors, experienced in the installation and
operation of the type of system being provided, to supervise installation, adjustment,
preliminary testing, and final testing of the system and to provide instruction to Government
personnel.
3.9
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Provide operating instructions at control equipment and at each remote control station.
Instructions shall clearly indicate all necessary steps for the operation of the system. Submit
the proposed legend for operating instructions for approval prior to installation. Instructions
shall be in engraved white letters on red rigid plastic or red enameled steel backgrounds
and shall be of adequate size to permit them to be easily read.
3.10
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide operation and maintenance training to
the Base Fire Department and final user personnel, training session shall include
emergency procedures, and unique maintenance and safety requirements. The training
conducted shall use operation and maintenance manuals specified in paragraph entitled
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 32 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
"Operations and Maintenance Manuals". Dates and times of the training period shall be
coordinated through PGC Engineer and the final user
3.11
SCHEDULE
Some metric measurements in this section are based on mathematical conversion of inchpound measurement, and not on metric measurement commonly agreed to by the
manufacturers or other parties. The inch-pound and metric measurements shown are as
follows:
Products
a. Air Compressor
Tank Capacity
b. Concentrate Fill Pump
Flow Rate
c. Diaphragm Pressure
Proportioning Tanks
Working Pressure
Inch-Pound
= 10 gallons
Metric
= 38 liters
= 7 gpm
= 27 L/m
= 175 psig
= 1206 kPa (gage)
END OF SECTION 21 13 20.00 20
21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 33 OF 33
PGC-230033-C-P8
SECTION 21 30 00
FIRE PUMPS
CONTENTS
PART 1
GENERAL............................................................................................................. 3
1.1
REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 3
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................. 6
1.3
SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 6
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................ 10
1.4.1 Fire Protection Specialist .......................................................................................... 10
1.4.2 Qualifications of Welders .......................................................................................... 10
1.4.3 Qualifications of Installer ........................................................................................... 10
1.4.4 Preliminary Test Certification .................................................................................... 10
1.4.5 Manufacturer's Representative ................................................................................. 10
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................................................. 10
PART 2
PRODUCTS........................................................................................................ 11
2.2
FIRE PUMP ............................................................................................................... 11
2.3
REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE ............................................ 11
2.3.1 General Requirements .............................................................................................. 11
2.3.2 Alarms ...................................................................................................................... 11
2.4
PIPING COMPONENTS ............................................................................................ 12
2.4.1 Pipe Sizes 65 mm and Larger ................................................................................... 12
2.4.1.1 Pipe ........................................................................................................................ 12
2.4.1.2 Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings ................................................................... 12
2.4.1.3 Flanges................................................................................................................... 12
2.4.1.4 Gaskets .................................................................................................................. 12
2.4.1.5 Bolts ....................................................................................................................... 12
2.4.1.6 Nuts........................................................................................................................ 12
2.4.1.7 Washers ................................................................................................................. 12
2.4.2 Piping Sizes 50 mm and Smaller .............................................................................. 12
2.4.2.1 Steel Pipe ............................................................................................................... 12
2.4.2.2 Copper Tubing ........................................................................................................ 13
2.4.3 Pipe Hangers and Supports ...................................................................................... 13
2.4.4 Valves....................................................................................................................... 13
2.4.4.1 Gate Valves and Control Valves .............................................................................. 13
2.4.4.2 Tamper Switch ........................................................................................................ 13
2.4.4.3 Check Valve............................................................................................................ 13
2.4.4.4 Relief Valve ............................................................................................................ 13
2.4.4.5 Circulating Relief Valve............................................................................................ 13
2.4.4.6 Suction Pressure Regulating Valve .......................................................................... 13
2.4.5 Hose Valve Manifold Test Header............................................................................. 14
2.4.6 Pipe Sleeves ............................................................................................................. 14
2.4.7 Escutcheon Plates .................................................................................................... 14
2.5
DISINFECTING MATERIALS ..................................................................................... 14
2.5.1 Liquid Chlorine .......................................................................................................... 14
2.5.2 Hypochlorites ............................................................................................................ 14
2.6
ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVER ..................................................................................... 14
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.7
DIESEL ENGINE DRIVER ......................................................................................... 15
2.7.1 Engine Capacity........................................................................................................ 15
2.7.2 Exhaust System External to Engine .......................................................................... 15
2.7.2.1 Steel Pipe and Fittings............................................................................................. 15
2.7.2.2 Flanges................................................................................................................... 15
2.7.2.3 Piping Insulation ...................................................................................................... 15
2.8
FIRE PUMP CONTROLLER ...................................................................................... 16
2.8.1 Controller for Electric Motor Driven Fire Pump .......................................................... 16
2.8.2 Controller for Diesel Engine Driven Fire Pump .......................................................... 16
2.9
BATTERIES ............................................................................................................... 17
2.10 PRESSURE SENSING LINE ..................................................................................... 17
2.11 DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM EXTERNAL TO ENGINE ..................................................... 17
2.11.1 Steel pipe ................................................................................................................ 18
2.11.2 Copper Tubing ........................................................................................................ 18
2.11.3 Diesel Fuel Tanks ................................................................................................... 18
2.11.4 Valves ..................................................................................................................... 18
2.12 JOINTS AND FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBE .......................................................... 18
2.13 PUMP BASE PLATE AND PAD ................................................................................. 19
2.14 FLOW METER ........................................................................................................... 19
PART 3
EXECUTION ....................................................................................................... 20
3.1
EXAMINATION .......................................................................................................... 20
3.2
FIRE PUMP INSTALLATION RELATED SUBMITTALS ............................................. 20
3.3
INSPECTION BY FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALIST ................................................. 20
3.4
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 20
3.5
PIPE AND FITTINGS ................................................................................................. 20
3.5.1 Cleaning of Piping ..................................................................................................... 20
3.5.2 Threaded Connections.............................................................................................. 21
3.5.3 Pipe Hangers and Supports ...................................................................................... 21
3.5.3.1 Vertical Piping ......................................................................................................... 21
3.5.3.2 Horizontal Piping ..................................................................................................... 21
3.5.4 Underground Piping .................................................................................................. 21
3.5.5 Grooved Mechanical Joint......................................................................................... 21
3.6
ELECTRICAL WORK ................................................................................................. 21
3.7
PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING ................................................................................ 22
3.8
FLUSHING................................................................................................................. 22
3.9
FIELD TESTS ............................................................................................................ 22
3.9.1 Hydrostatic Test ........................................................................................................ 22
3.9.2 Preliminary Tests ...................................................................................................... 22
3.9.3 Final Acceptance Test .............................................................................................. 23
3.9.3.1 Flow Tests .............................................................................................................. 23
3.9.3.2 Starting Tests.......................................................................................................... 23
3.9.3.3 Battery Changeover ................................................................................................ 23
3.9.3.4 Alarms .................................................................................................................... 23
3.9.3.5 Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................... 24
3.9.3.6 Correction of Deficiencies ........................................................................................ 24
3.9.3.8 Test Documentation ................................................................................................ 24
3.9.4 Test Equipment......................................................................................................... 24
3.10 DISINFECTION.......................................................................................................... 24
3.10.1 Chlorination ............................................................................................................ 24
3.10.2 Flushing .................................................................................................................. 25
3.10.3 Sample Testing ....................................................................................................... 25
3.11 FIELD TRAINING....................................................................................................... 25
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
1. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
a. AWWA 10084 (2005) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and
Wastewater
b. AWWA B300 (2004) Hypochlorites
c. AWWA B301 (2004) Liquid Chlorine
d. AWWA C104/A21.4 (2008) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and
Fittings for Water
e. AWWA C110/A21.10 (2008) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water
f. AWWA C111/A21.11 (2000) Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure
Pipe and Fittings
g. AWWA C151/A21.51 (2009) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water
h. AWWA C500 (2009) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service
i. AWWA C606 (2006) Grooved and Shouldered Joints
2. ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
a. ASME B16.11 (2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
b. ASME B16.18 (2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
c. ASME B16.21 (2005) Non-metallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges
d. ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2005) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper
Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
e. ASME B16.26 (2006) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared
Copper Tubes
f. ASME B16.3 (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300
g. ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions;
Classes 150, 250, and 300
h. ASME B16.5 (2009) Standard for Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS
1/2 Through NPS 24
i.
ASME B16.9 (2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt welding
Fittings
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
j.
ASME B31.1 (2007; Addenda 2008; Addenda 2009) Power Piping
3. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
a. ASTM A 183 (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track
Bolts and Nuts
b. ASTM A 193/A 193M (2009) Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and
Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service
c. ASTM A 194/A 194M (2009) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy
Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service, or Both
d. ASTM A 449 (2007b) Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts, and Studs,
Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use
e. ASTM A 47/A 47M (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for f.
Aluminium-Coated, by the Hot-Dip Process
Steel Sheet,
g. ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
h. ASTM A 536 (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
i.
ASTM A 563 (2007a) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
j.
ASTM A 563M (2007) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
(Metric)
k. ASTM A 795/A 795M (2008) Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire
Protection Use
l.
ASTM B 135 (2008a) Standard Specification for Seamless Brass Tube
m. ASTM B 135M (2008a) Standard Specification for Seamless Brass Tube
(Metric)
n. ASTM B 42 (2002e1) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe,
Standard Sizes
o. ASTM B 62 (2009) Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce
Metal Castings Copper Tube
p. ASTM B 75M (1999; R 2005) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper
Tube (Metric)
q. ASTM B 88 (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
r.
ASTM B 88M (2005) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water
Tube (Metric)
s. ASTM C 533 (2009) Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and
Pipe Thermal Insulation
t. ASTM D 2000 (2008) Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in
Automotive Applications
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
u. ASTM D 3308 (2006) PTFE Resin Skived Tape
v. ASTM F 436 (2009) Hardened Steel Washers
w. ASTM F 436M (2009) Hardened Steel Washers (Metric)
4. FM GLOBAL (FM)
a. FM P7825a (2005) Approval Guide Fire Protection
b. FM P7825b (2005) Approval Guide Electrical Equipment
5. MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND
FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)
a. MSS SP-58 (2009) Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials,
Design and Manufacture
b. MSS SP-69 (2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports Selection and Application
c. MSS SP-80 (2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves
6. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
a. NEMA MG 1 (2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors and Generators
7. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
a. NFPA 1963 (2009) Standard for Fire Hose Connections
b. NFPA 20 (2010) Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection
c. NFPA 24 (2010) Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains
and Their Appurtenances
d. NFPA 37 (2010) Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and
Gas Turbines
e. NFPA 70 (2008; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code - 2008 Edition
f. NFPA 72 (2010) National Fire Alarm Code
8. NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR CERTIFICATION IN ENGINEERING
TECHNOLOGIES (NICET)
a. NICET 1014-7 (2003) Program Detail Manual for Certification in the Field of
Fire Protection Engineering Technology (Field Code 003) Subfield of Automatic
Sprinkler System Layout
9. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
a. UL 1247 (200; Rev thru Sep 2008) Diesel Engines for Driving Centrifugal Fire
Pumps
b. UL 142 (2006; Rev thru Dec 2007) Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable
and
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
c. Combustible Liquids
d. UL 262 (2004) Standard for Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service
e. UL 448 (2007) Pumps for Fire-Protection Service
f.
UL 80 (2007; Rev thru Aug 2009) Steel Tanks for Oil-Burner Fuel
g. UL Fire Prot Dir (2009) Fire Protection Equipment Directory
10. UAE Fire and Life Safety Code of Practice
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Install fire pumps in conformance with NFPA 20, NFPA 70, and NFPA 72,
including all recommendations and advisory portions, which shall be considered
mandatory; this includes advisory provisions listed in the appendices of such
standards, Devices and equipment for fire protection service shall be UL Fire Prot
Dir listed or FM P7825a approved.
B. Tank supports, piping offsets, fittings, and any other accessories required shall be
furnished as specified to provide a complete installation and to eliminate
interference with other construction.
C. Show detail plan view of the pump room including elevations and sections
showing the fire pumps, associated equipment, and piping. Show piping
schematic of pumps, devices, valves, pipe, and fittings.
Provide an isometric drawing of the fire pump and all associated piping. Show
point to point electrical wiring diagrams. Show piping layout and sensing piping
arrangement. Show engine fuel and cooling system. Include:
(1) Pumps, drivers, and controllers
(2) Hose valve manifold test header
(3) Circuit diagrams for pumps
(4) Wiring diagrams of each controller
D. Post operating instructions for pumps, drivers, controllers, and flow meters.
E. Fully enclose or properly guard coupling, rotating parts, gears, projecting
equipment, etc. so as to prevent possible injury to persons that come in close
proximity of the equipment. Conduct testing of the fire pumps in a safe manner
and ensure that all equipment is safely secured. Hoses and nozzles used to
conduct flow tests shall be in excellent condition and shall be safely anchored
and secured to prevent any misdirection of the hose streams.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
A. SD-02 Shop Drawings
1. Installation Requirements
Three copies of the Fire Pump Installation Drawings consisting of a detailed plan
view, detailed elevations and sections of the pump room, equipment and piping,
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
drawn to a scale of not less than 1:20 . Drawings shall indicate equipment, piping,
and associated pump equipment to scale. All clearance, such as those between
piping and equipment; between equipment and walls, ceiling and floors; and for
electrical working distance clearance around all electrical equipment shall be
indicated. Drawings shall include a legend identifying all symbols, nomenclatures,
and abbreviations. Drawings shall indicate a complete piping and equipment layout
including elevations and/or section views of the following:
a. Fire pumps, controllers, piping, valves, and associated equipment.
b. Sensing line for each pump including the pressure maintenance pump.
c. Engine fuel system for diesel driven pumps.
d. Engine cooling system for diesel driven pumps.
e. Pipe hangers and sway bracing including support for diesel muffler and exhaust
piping.
f. Restraint of underground water main at entry-and exit-points to the building
including details of pipe clamps, tie rods, mechanical retainer glands, and thrust
blocks.
g. A one-line schematic diagram indicating layout and sizes of all piping, devices,
valves and fittings.
h. A complete point-to-point connection drawing of the pump power, control and
alarm systems, as well as interior wiring schematics of each controller.
2. As-Built Drawings
As-built drawings, as specified.
3.
Piping Layout and Sensing piping Arrangement
4.
Pump Room
B. SD-03 Product Data
1. Fire Pump Installation Related Submittals
A list of the Fire Pump Installation Related Submittals.
2. Installation Requirements
Manufacturer's catalog data included with the Fire Pump Installation
Drawings for each separate piece of equipment proposed for use in the
system. Catalog data shall indicate the name of the manufacturer of each
item of equipment, with data annotated to indicate model to be provided. In
addition, a complete equipment list that includes equipment description,
model number and quantity shall be provided. Catalog data for material and
equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a. Fire pumps, drivers and controllers including manufacturer's certified shop
test characteristic curve for each pump. Shop test curve may be submitted
after approval of catalog data but shall be submitted prior to the final tests.
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
b. Pressure maintenance pump and controller.
c. Piping components.
d. Valves, including gate, check, globe and relief valves.
e. Gauges.
f. Hose valve manifold test header and hose valves.
g. Flow meter.
h. Restrictive orifice union.
i. Associated devices and equipment.
3. Spare Parts
Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment
specified.
4. Preliminary Tests
Proposed procedures for Preliminary Tests, at least 14 days prior to the
proposed start of the tests. Proposed date and time to begin Preliminary
Tests, submitted with the Preliminary Tests Procedures.
5. Field Tests
Proposed diagrams, at least 2 weeks prior to start of related testing.
6. Fire Protection Specialist
The name and documentation of certification of the proposed Fire
Protection Specialists, prior to the submittal of the fire pump installation
drawings.
7. Manufacturer's Representative
The name and documentation of certification of the proposed
Manufacturer's Representative, concurrent with submittal of the Fire
Protection Specialist Qualifications.
C. SD-06 Test Reports
1. Preliminary Tests
Three copies of the completed Preliminary Tests Reports, no later than 5
days after the completion of the Preliminary Tests. The Preliminary Tests
Report shall include both the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for
Underground Piping and the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for
Aboveground Piping. All items in the Preliminary Tests Report shall be
signed by the Fire Protection Specialist and by the Manufacturer's
Representative.
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
2. Final Test
Three copies of the completed final test Reports , no later than 5 days after
the completion of the tests. All items in the reports shall be signed by the
Fire Protection Specialist and the Manufacturer's Representative. Test
reports in booklet form showing all field tests and measurements taken
during the preliminary and final testing, and documentation that proves
compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion of the
installation and final testing of the installed system. Each test report shall
indicate the final position of the controls and pressure switches. The test
reports shall include the description of the hydrostatic test conducted on the
piping and flushing of the suction and discharge piping. A copy of the
manufacturer's certified pump curve for each fire pump shall be included in
the report.
D. SD-07 Certificates
1. Fire Protection Specialist
Concurrent with the Final Acceptance Test Report, certification by the Fire
Protection Specialist that the fire pump installation is in accordance with the
contract requirements, including signed approval of the Preliminary and
Final Acceptance Test Reports.
2. Qualifications of Welders
3. Qualifications of Installer
Certificates of qualifications, as specified.
4.
Preliminary Test Certification
Request for formal inspection and tests, as specified
5. Certificate of origin
6. Certificate of unconditioned 5 years warranty
E. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
1. Fire Pumps
4 manuals listing step-by-step procedures required for system startup,
operation, shutdown, and routine maintenance, at least 14 days prior to field
training. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model
number, parts list, list of parts and tools that should be kept in stock by the
owner for routine maintenance including the name of a local supplier,
simplified wiring and controls diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and
recommended service organization (including address and telephone
number) for each item of equipment. Data Package shall be submitted for
fire pumps and drivers in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 9 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Fire Protection Specialist
Work specified in this section shall be performed under the supervision of and
certified by the Fire Protection Specialist. The Fire Protection Specialist shall be
specialized subcontractor who is certified by UAE Civil Defence in the Automatic
Sprinkler System design, studies, erection, installation, operating, maintaining,
testing and commissioning. The Fire Protection Specialist shall be regularly
engaged in the design and installation of the type and complexity of system
specified in the Contract documents, and shall have served in a similar capacity for
at least five systems that have performed in the manner intended for a period of not
less than 6 months.[ Submit data for approval showing the name and certification
of all involved individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of
drawings.]
1.4.2 Qualifications of Welders
Submit certificates of each welder's qualifications prior to site welding; certifications
shall not be more than one year old.
1.4.3 Qualifications of Installer
Prior to installation, submit data for approval showing that the Contractor has
successfully installed fire pumps and associated equipment of the same type and
design as specified herein, or that he has a firm contractual agreement with a
subcontractor having such required experience. The data shall include the names
and locations of at least three installations where the Contractor, or the
subcontractor referred to above, has installed such systems. Indicate the type and
design of each system and certify that each system has performed satisfactorily in
the manner intended for a period of not less than 18 months.
1.4.4 Preliminary Test Certification
When preliminary tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a
signed and dated certificate with a request for a formal inspection and tests.
1.4.5 Manufacturer's Representative
Work specified in this section shall be performed under the supervision of and
certified by a representative of the fire pump manufacturer. The Manufacturer's
Representative shall be regularly engaged in the installation of the type and
complexity of fire pump(s) specified in the Contract documents, and shall have
served in a similar capacity for at least five systems that have performed in the
manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, excessive
humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.
Additionally, all pipes shall be either capped or plugged until installed.
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 10 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2
2.1
2.2
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
a.
Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and shall essentially
duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 5 years prior to
bid opening.
b.
All equipment shall have a nameplate that identifies the manufacturer's name,
address, type or style, model or serial number, ; capacity or size; system in
which installed and system which it controls and catalog number. Pumps and
motors shall have standard nameplates securely affixed in a conspicuous
place and easy to read. Fire pump shall have nameplates and markings in
accordance with UL 448. Diesel driver shall have nameplate and markings in
accordance with UL 1247. Electric motor nameplates shall provide the
minimum information required by NFPA 70, Section 430-7.
FIRE PUMP
Fire pump set shall be one electric motor driven and one diesel engine driven.
Each pump capacity and pressure of shall be as indicated on plans. Fire pump
shall furnish not less than 150 percent of rated flow capacity at not less than 65
percent of rated net pressure. Pump shall be centrifugal [horizontal split case] or
[water lubricated, vertical shaft turbine] end suction fire pump as indicated on
plans.
Horizontal pump shall be equipped with automatic air release devices. The
maximum rated pump speed shall be 2100 rpm when driving the pump at rated
capacity. Pump shall be automatic start and manual stop [automatic start and
automatic stop]. Pump shall conform to the requirements of UL 448.
2.3
REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE
2.3.1 General Requirements
Materials and Equipment shall have been tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and
listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by Factory Mutual and listed in FM P7825a and
FM P7825b. Where the terms "listed" or "approved" appear in this specification, such
shall mean listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b.
2.3.2 Alarms
Provide audible and visual alarms as required by NFPA 20 on the controller. Provide
remote supervision as required by NFPA 20, in accordance with NFPA 72 Provide
remote alarm devices located where shown. Alarm signal shall be activated upon the
following conditions.
Exterior alarm devices shall be weatherproof type. Provide alarm silencing switch and
red signal lamp, with signal lamp arranged to come on when switch is placed in OFF
position.
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 11 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.4
PIPING COMPONENTS
2.4.1 Pipe Sizes 65 mm and Larger
2.4.1.1 Pipe
Piping shall be [ASTM A 53/A 53M][ASTM A 795/A 795M], Weight Class STD
(Standard), Schedule 40 (except for Schedule 30 for pipe sizes 200 mm greater in
diameter), Type E or Type S, Grade A; black steel pipe. Steel pipe shall be joined by
means of flanges welded to the pipe or mechanical grooved joints only. Piping shall not
be jointed by welding or weld fittings. Suction piping shall be galvanized on the inside in
accordance with NFPA 20.
2.4.1.2 Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings
Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 1200 kPa service and shall be the
product of the same manufacturer. Fitting and coupling houses shall be malleable iron
conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510; ductile iron conforming to ASTM A
536, Grade 65-45-12. Gasket shall be the flush type that fills the entire cavity between
the fitting and the pipe. Nuts and bolts shall be heat-treated steel conforming to ASTM
A 183 and shall be cadmium plated or zinc electroplated.
2.4.1.3 Flanges
Flanges shall be ASME B16.5, Class 150 flanges. Flanges shall be provided at valves,
connections to equipment, and where indicated.
2.4.1.4 Gaskets
Gaskets shall be AWWA C111/A21.11, cloth inserted red rubber gaskets.
2.4.1.5 Bolts
Bolts shall be [ASTM A 449, Type [1][2]][ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade B7]. Bolts shall
extend no less than three full threads beyond the nut with bolts tightened to the
required torque.
2.4.1.6 Nuts
Nuts shall be [ASTM A 194/A 194M, Grade 7][ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade 5][ ASTM A
563M ASTM A 563, Grade [C3][DH3]].
2.4.1.7 Washers
Washers shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 436M ASTM F 436. Flat circular
washers shall be provided under all bolt heads and nuts.
2.4.2 Piping Sizes 50 mm and Smaller
2.4.2.1 Steel Pipe
Steel piping shall be [ASTM A 795/A 795M, Weight Class STD (Standard), Schedule
40, Type E or Type S, Grade A][ASTM A 53/A 53M, Weight Class XS (Extra Strong)],
zinc-coated steel pipe with threaded end connections. Fittings shall be [ASME
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 12 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
B16.3][ASME B16.39], Class 150, zinc-coated threaded fittings. Unions shall be ASME
B16.39, Class 150, zinc-coated unions.
2.4.2.2 Copper Tubing
Copper tubing shall be ASTM B 88M ASTM B 88, Type L or K, soft annealed. Fittings
shall be ASME B16.26, flared joint fittings. Pipe nipples shall be ASTM B 42 copper
pipe with threaded end connections.
2.4.3 Pipe Hangers and Supports
Pipe hangers and support shall be [MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69][UL listed UL Fire Prot
Dir or FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b] and shall be the adjustable type.
Finish of rods, nuts, washers, hangers, and supports shall be zinc-plated after
fabrication.
2.4.4 Valves
Valves shall be UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b
for fire protection service. Valves shall have flange or threaded end connections.
2.4.4.1 Gate Valves and Control Valves
Gate valves and control valves shall be outside screw and yoke (O.S.&Y.) type which
open by counterclockwise rotation. Butterfly-type control valves are not permitted.
2.4.4.2 Tamper Switch
The suction control valves, the discharge control valves, valves to test header and flow
meter, and the by-pass control valves shall be equipped with valve tamper switches for
monitoring by the fire alarm system.
2.4.4.3 Check Valve
Check valve shall be clear open, swing type check valve with flange or threaded
inspection plate.
2.4.4.4 Relief Valve
Relief valve shall be [pilot operated][ or][ spring operated] type conforming to NFPA 20.
A means of detecting water motion in the relief lines shall be provided where the
discharge is not visible within the pump house.
2.4.4.5 Circulating Relief Valve
An adjustable circulating relief valve shall be provided for each fire pump in accordance
with NFPA 20.
2.4.4.6 Suction Pressure Regulating Valve
Suction pressure regulating valve shall be FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b.
Suction pressure shall be monitored through a pressure line to the controlling
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 13 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
mechanism of the regulating valve. Valve shall be arranged in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
2.4.5 Hose Valve Manifold Test Header
Construct header of steel pipe. Provide ASME B16.5, Class 150 flanged inlet
connection to hose valve manifold assembly. Provide approved bronze hose gate valve
with 65 mm National Standard male hose threads with cap and chain; locate one meter
above grade in the horizontal position for each test header outlet. Welding shall be
metallic arc process in accordance with ASME B31.1.
2.4.6 Pipe Sleeves
A pipe sleeve shall be provided at each location where piping passes entirely through
walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors, including pipe entering buildings from the exterior.
Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient
length to pass through entire thickness of walls, ceilings, and floors. Provide 25 mm
minimum clearance between exterior of piping or pipe insulation, and interior of sleeve
or core-drilled hole. Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation. Seal space at both
ends of the sleeve or core-drilled hole with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to a
firm but pliable mass, or provide a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomeric seal.
In fire walls and fire floors, a fire seal shall be provided between the pipe and the sleeve
in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
2.4.7 Escutcheon Plates
Provide one-piece or split-hinge metal plates for piping entering floors, walls, and
ceilings in exposed areas. Provide polished stainless steel or chromium-plated finish on
copper alloy plates in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished
spaces. Plates shall be secured in place.
2.5
DISINFECTING MATERIALS
2.5.1 Liquid Chlorine
Liquid chlorine shall conform to AWWA B301.
2.5.2 Hypochlorites
Calcium hypochlorite and sodium hypochlorite shall conform to AWWA B300.
2.6
ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVER
Motors, controllers, contactors, and disconnects shall be provided with their respective
pieces of equipment, as specified herein and shall have electrical connections provided
under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Controllers and contactors
shall have a maximum of 120-volt control circuits, and auxiliary contacts for use with the
controls furnished.
Motor shall conform to NEMA MG 1 Design B type. Integral size motors shall be the
premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Motor wattage, horsepower
shall be of sufficient size so that the nameplate wattage horsepower rating will not be
exceeded throughout the entire published pump characteristic curve. The motor and fire
pump controller shall be fully compatible.
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 14 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.7
DIESEL ENGINE DRIVER
Diesel engine driver shall conform to the requirements of UL 1247 and shall be UL listed
UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b for fire pump service. Driver
shall be of the make recommended by the pump manufacturer. The engine shall be
closed circuit, liquid-cooled [with raw water heat exchanger] or [with radiator and enginedriven fan]as indicated. Diesel engine shall be electric start type taking current from 2
battery units. Engine shall be equipped with a fuel in-line filter- water separator. Engine
conditions shall be monitored with engine instrumentation panel that has a tachometer,
hour meter, fuel pressure gauge, lubricating oil pressure gauge, water temperature
gauge, and ammeter gauge. Engine shall be connected to horizontal-shaft pump by
flexible couplings. For connections to vertical-shaft fire pumps, right-angle gear drives and
universal joints shall be used. An engine jacket water heater shall be provided to maintain
a temperature of 49 degrees C in accordance with NFPA 20.
2.7.1 Engine Capacity
Engine shall have adequate wattage horsepower to drive the pump at all conditions of
speed and load over the full range of the pump performance curve. The wattage
horsepower rating of the engine driver shall be as recommended by the pump
manufacturer and shall be derated for temperature and elevation in accordance with
NFPA 20.
2.7.2 Exhaust System External to Engine
Exhaust system shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 20 and NFPA 37.
An exhaust muffler shall be provided for each diesel engine driver to reduce noise levels
less than [85] dBA. A flexible connector with flange connections shall be provided at the
engine. Flexible sections shall be stainless steel suitable for diesel-engines exhaust gas
at 538 degrees C
2.7.2.1 Steel Pipe and Fittings
ASTM A 53/A 53M, [Schedule 40 black steel, welding end connections. ASME B16.9 or
ASME B16.11 welding fittings shall be of the same material and weight as the piping.
2.7.2.2 Flanges
ASME B16.5, Class [300]or [150]. Flanges shall be provided at connections to diesel
engines, exhaust mufflers, and flexible connections. Gaskets shall be ASME B16.21,
composition ring, 1.5875 mm. ASTM A 193/A 193M,Grade [B8] or [B7] bolts and ASTM
A 194/A 194M, Grade [8][7] nuts shall be provided.
2.7.2.3 Piping Insulation
Products containing asbestos will not be permitted.
Exhaust piping system including the muffler shall be insulated with ASTM C 533
calcium silicate insulation, minimum of 75 mm. Insulation shall be secured with not less
than 9.525 mm width fibrous glass reinforced waterproof tape or Type 304 stainless
steel bands spaced not more than 200 mm on center. An aluminum jacket encasing the
insulation shall be provided. The aluminum jacket shall have a minimum thickness of
0.406 mm, a factory-applied polyethylene and Kraft paper moisture barrier on the
inside surface. The jacket shall be secured with not less than 13 mm 0 wide stainless
steel bands, spaced not less than 200 mm on centers. Longitudinal and circumferential
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 15 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
seams of the jacket shall be lapped not less than 75 mm Jackets on horizontal line shall
be installed so that the longitudinal seams are on the bottom side of the pipe. The
seams of the jacket for the vertical lines shall be placed on the off-weather side of the
pipe. On vertical lines, the circumferential seams of the jacket shall overlap so the lower
edge of each jacket overlaps the upper edge of the jacket below.
2.8
FIRE PUMP CONTROLLER
Controller shall be the automatic type and UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM
P7825a and FM P7825b for fire pump service. Pump shall be arranged for automatic start
and stop, and manual push-button stop. Automatic stopping shall be accomplished only
after all starting causes have returned to normal and after a minimum pump run time has
elapsed.
Controllers shall be completely terminally wired, ready for field connections, and mounted
in a NEMA Type 4 watertight and dust tight enclosure arranged so that controller current
carrying parts will not be less than 300 mm above the floor.
Controller shall be provided with voltage surge arresters installed in accordance with
NFPA 20. Controller shall be equipped with a bourdon tube pressure switch or a solid
state pressure switch with independent high and low adjustments, automatic starting relay
actuated from normally closed contacts, visual alarm lamps and supervisory power light.
2.8.1 Controller for Electric Motor Driven Fire Pump
Controller shall be [electronic soft start], [across the line], [auto-transformer], [wye-delta,
open circuit transition], [wye-delta, closed circuit transition] starting type as indicated.
Controller shall be designed for voltage and horsepower as indicated. Controller shall
have a short circuit rating as indicated.
Controller shall monitor pump running, loss of a phase or line power, phase reversal.
Alarms shall be individually displayed in front of panel by lighting of visual lamps. Each
lamp shall be labeled with rigid etched plastic labels.
Controller shall be equipped with terminals for remote monitoring of pump running, pump
power supply trouble (loss of power or phase and phase reversal) Limited service fire
pump controllers are not permitted, except for fire pumps driven by electric motors rated
less than 11 kW 15 hp. Controller shall be equipped with a 7-day electric pressure
recorder with 24-hour spring wound back-up. The pressure recorder shall provide a
readout of the system pressure from 0 to 207 Pa, time, and date. Controller shall require
the pumps to run for ten minutes for pumps with driver motors under 149 kW and for 15
minutes for pumps with motors 149 kW and greater, prior to automatic shutdown. The
controller shall be equipped with an externally operable isolating switch which manually
operates the motor circuit. Means shall be provided in the controller for measuring current
for all motor circuit conductors.
2.8.2 Controller for Diesel Engine Driven Fire Pump
Controller shall require the pump to run for 30 minutes prior to automatic shutdown.
Controller shall be equipped with two battery chargers; two ammeters; two voltmeters,
one for each set of batteries. Controller shall automatically alternate the battery sets for
starting the pumps. Controller shall be equipped with the following supervisory alarm
functions:
a.
Engine Trouble (individually monitored)
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 16 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Engine overspeed
Low Oil Pressure
High Water Temperature
Engine Failure to Start
Battery
Battery Charger/AC Power Failure
b. Main Switch Mis-set
c. Pump Running
Alarms shall be individually displayed in front of panel by lighting of visual lamps, except
that individual lamps are not required for pump running and main switch mis-set.
Controller shall be equipped with a 7-day electric pressure recorder with 24-hour back-up
mounted inside the controller. The pressure recorder shall provide a readout of the
system pressure from 0 to 207 Pa, time, and date. The controller shall be equipped with
an audible alarm which will activate upon any engine trouble or pump room trouble alarm
condition and alarm silence switch. Controller shall be equipped with terminals for field
connection of a remote alarm for main switch mis-set, pump running, engine trouble and
pump room trouble When engine emergency overspeed device operates, the controller
shall cause the engine to shut down without time delay and lock out until manually reset.
2.9
BATTERIES
Batteries for diesel engine driver shall be sealed lead calcium batteries.
Batteries shall be mounted in a steel rack with non-corrosive, non-conductive base, not
less than 300 mm above the floor.
2.10
PRESSURE SENSING LINE
A completely separate pressure sensing line shall be provided for each fire pump and for
the jockey pump. The sensing line shall be arranged in accordance with Figure A-7-5.2.1.
of NFPA 20. The sensing line shall be 13 mm H58 brass tubing complying with ASTM B
135M ASTM B 135. The sensing line shall be equipped with two restrictive orifice unions
each.
Restricted orifice unions shall be ground-face unions with brass restricted diaphragms
drilled for a 2.4 mm. Restricted orifice unions shall be mounted in the horizontal position,
not less than 1.5 m apart on the sensing line. Two test connections shall be provided for
each sensing line. Test connections shall consist of two brass 13 mm globe valves and 8
mm gauge connection tee arranged in accordance with NFPA 20. One of the test
connections shall be equipped with a 0 to 2100 kPa water oil-filled gauge. Sensing line
shall be connected to the pump discharge piping between the discharge piping control
valve and the check valve.
2.11
DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM EXTERNAL TO ENGINE
Fuel system shall be provided that meets all requirements and advisory provisions of
NFPA 20 and NFPA 37. The fuel tank vent piping shall be equipped with screened
weatherproof vent cap. Vents shall be extended to the outside. Each tank shall be
equipped with a fuel level gauge.
Flexible bronze or stainless steel piping connectors with single braid shall be provided at
each piping connection to the diesel engine. Supply, return, and fill piping shall be steel
piping, except supply and return piping may be copper tubing. Fuel lines shall be protected
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 17 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
against mechanical damage. Fill line shall be equipped with 16 mesh removable wire
screen. Fill lines shall be extended to the exterior. A weatherproof tank gauge shall be
mounted on the exterior wall near each fill line for each tank. The fill cap shall be able to be
locked by padlock. The engine supply (suction) connection shall be located on the side of
the fuel tank so that 5 percent of the tank volume provides a sump volume not useable by
the engine. The elevation of the fuel tank shall be such that the inlet of the fuel supply line
is located so that its opening is no lower than the level of the engine fuel transfer pump.
The bottom of the tank shall be pitched 21 mm/m to the side opposite the suction inlet
connection, and to an accessible 25 mm plugged globe drain valve.
2.11.1 Steel pipe
ASTM A 53/A 53M, hot-dipped zinc-coated, Schedule 40, threaded connections.
Fittings shall be ASME B16.3, zinc-coated, threaded malleable iron fittings. Unions shall
be ASME B16.39 zinc-coated, threaded unions.
2.11.2 Copper Tubing
ASTM B 88M ASTM B 88, Type K, soft annealed, with ASME B16.26 flared fittings.
2.11.3 Diesel Fuel Tanks
UL 80 or UL 142 for aboveground tanks.
2.11.4 Valves
An indicating and lockable ball valve shall be provided in the supply line adjacent to the
tank suction inlet connection. A check valve shall be provided in fuel return line. Valves
shall be suitable for oil service. Valves shall have union end connections or threaded
end connections.
a.
b.
c.
2.12
Globe valve: MSS SP-80 Class 125
Check valve: MSS SP-80, Class 125, swing check
Ball valve: Full port design, copper alloy body, 2-position lever handle.
JOINTS AND FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBE
Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform to ASME B16.22
and ASTM B 75M ASTM B 75. Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure fittings shall
conform to ASME B16.18. Cast copper alloy fittings for flared copper tube shall conform
to ASME B16.26 and ASTM B 62. Brass or bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be
used for connecting tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment.
Extracted brazed tee joints produced with an acceptable tool and installed as
recommended by the manufacturer may be used. Grooved mechanical joints and
fittings shall be designed for not less than 862 kPa service and shall be the product of
the same manufacturer. Grooved fitting and mechanical coupling housing shall be
ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536.
Gaskets for use in grooved joints shall be molded synthetic polymer of pressure
responsive design and shall conform to ASTM D 2000 for circulating medium up to 110
degrees C Grooved joints shall conform to AWWA C606 Coupling nuts and bolts for
use in grooved joints shall be steel and shall conform to ASTM A 183.
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 18 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.13
PUMP BASE PLATE AND PAD
A common base plate shall be provided for each horizontal-shaft fire pump for mounting
pump and driver unit. The base plate shall be constructed of cast iron with raised lip
tapped for drainage or welded steel shapes with suitable drainage. Each base plate for
the horizontal fire pumps shall be provided with a 25 mm galvanized steel drain line
piped to the nearest floor drain. For vertical shaft pumps, pump head shall be provided
with a cast-iron base plate and shall serve as the sole plate for mounting the discharge
head assembly. Pump units and bases shall be mounted on a raised 150 mm
reinforced concrete pad that is an integral part of the reinforced concrete floor.
2.14
FLOW METER
Meter shall be UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b
as flow meters for fire pump installation with direct flow readout device. Flow meter
shall be capable of metering any waterflow quantities between 50 percent and 150
percent of the rated flow of the pumps. The flow meter shall be arranged in accordance
with Figure A-2-14.2.1 of NFPA 20. The meter throttle valve and the meter control
valves shall be O.S.&Y. valves. Automatic air release shall be provided if flow meter
test discharge is piped to the pump suction and forms a closed-loop meter arrangement
as defined in Figure A-2-14.2.1 of NFPA 20.
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 19 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and
advise the PGC site engineer of any discrepancy before performing any work.
3.2
FIRE PUMP INSTALLATION RELATED SUBMITTALS
The Fire Protection Specialist shall prepare a list of the submittals, from the Contract
Submittal Register, that relate to the successful installation of the fire pump(s). The
submittals identified on this list shall be accompanied by a letter of approval signed and
dated by the Fire Protection Specialist when submitted to PGC.
3.3
INSPECTION BY FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALIST
The Fire Protection Specialist shall periodically perform a thorough inspection of the fire
pump installation, including visual observation of the pump while running, to assure that
the installation conforms to the contract requirements. There shall be no excessive
vibration, leaks (oil or water), unusual noises, overheating, or other potential problems.
Inspection shall include piping and equipment clearance, access, supports, and
guards. Any discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of PGC Engineer in writing,
no later than three working days after the discrepancy is discovered. The Fire Protection
Specialist shall witness the preliminary and final acceptance tests and, after completion
of the inspections and a successful final acceptance test, shall sign test results and
certify in writing that the installation the fire pump installation is in accordance with the
contract requirements.
3.4
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Carefully remove materials so as not to damage material which is to remain. Replace
existing work damaged by the Contractor's operations with new work of the same
construction.
Equipment, materials, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, installation,
examination, inspection and testing shall be in accordance NFPA 20, except as
modified herein. In addition, the fire pump and engine shall be installed in accordance
with the written instructions of the manufacturer.
3.5
PIPE AND FITTINGS
Piping shall be inspected, tested and approved before burying, covering, or concealing.
Fittings shall be provided for changes in direction of piping and for all connections.
Changes in piping sizes shall be made using tapered reducing pipe fittings. Bushings
shall not be used
3.5.1 Cleaning of Piping
Interior and ends of piping shall be clean and free of any water or foreign material.
Piping shall be kept clean during installation by means of plugs or other approved
methods. When work is not in progress, open ends of the piping shall be securely
closed so that no water or foreign matter will enter the pipes or fittings. Piping shall be
inspected before placing in position.
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 20 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.5.2 Threaded Connections
Jointing compound for pipe threads shall be as per manufacturer instruction and shall
be applied to male threads only. Exposed ferrous pipe threads shall be provided with
one coat of zinc molybdate primer applied to a minimum of dry film thickness of 0.025
mm.
3.5.3 Pipe Hangers and Supports
Additional hangers and supports shall be provided for concentrated loads in
aboveground piping, such as for valves and risers.
3.5.3.1 Vertical Piping
Piping shall be supported at each floor, at not more than 3 meters intervals.
3.5.3.2 Horizontal Piping
Horizontal piping supports shall be spaced as follows:
Maximum Spacing (Meters)
Nominal
Pipe Size
(mm)
Coper Tube
Steel Pipe
25 and
under
1.8
2.0
32
40
50
65
80
90
100
120
150+
2.0
2.4
2.4
2.7
3.0
3.3
3.6
3.9
4.2
4.8
5.0
3.5.4 Underground Piping
Installation of underground piping and fittings shall conform to NFPA 24. Joints shall be
anchored in accordance with NFPA 24. Concrete thrust block shall be provided at elbow
where pipe turns up towards floor, and the pipe riser shall be restrained with steel rods
from the elbow to the flange above the floor. After installation in accordance with NFPA
24, rods and nuts shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with asphalt or other
corrosion-retard material approved by PGC Engineer. Minimum depth of cover shall be
900 mm.
3.5.5 Grooved Mechanical Joint
Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's instructions.
Grooved fittings, couplings, and grooving tools shall be products of the same
manufacturer. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances specified by
the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured
using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, narrow- land micrometer, or other
method specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended application.
Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured for each
change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's
tolerances. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations, such as behind
solid walls or ceilings, unless an access panel is shown on the drawings for servicing or
adjusting the joint.
3.6
ELECTRICAL WORK
Electric motor and controls shall be in accordance with NFPA 20, NFPA 72 and NFPA
70, unless more stringent requirements are specified herein or are indicated on the
drawings. Electrical wiring and associated equipment shall be provided in accordance
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 21 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
with NFPA 20 and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide
wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit, except electrical metallic
tubing conduit may be provided in dry locations not enclosed in concrete or where
not subject to mechanical damage.
3.7
PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING
Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND
COATINGS.
3.8
FLUSHING
The fire pump suction and discharge piping shall be flushed at 150 percent of rated
capacity of each pump. Where the pump installation consists of more than one pump,
the flushing shall be the total quantity of water flowing when all pumps are discharging
at 150 percent of their rated capacities. The new pumps may be used to attain the
required flushing volume. No underground piping shall be flushed by using the fire
pumps. Flushing operations shall continue until water is clear, but not less than 10
minutes. Submit a signed and dated flushing certificate before requesting field testing.
3.9
FIELD TESTS
Submit, at least 2 weeks before starting field tests, system diagrams that show the
layout of equipment, piping, and storage units, and typed condensed sequence of
operation, wiring and control diagrams, and operation manuals explaining preventative
maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal, safe operation,
and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be framed under glass
or laminated plastic. After approval, these items shall be posted where directed.
3.9.1 Hydrostatic Test
Piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 1551 kPa for a period of 2-hours, or at least 345
kPa in excess of the maximum pressure, when the maximum pressure in the system is
in excess of 1379 kPa in accordance with NFPA 20.
3.9.2 Preliminary Tests
The Fire Protection Specialist shall take all readings and measurements.
The Manufacturer's Representative, a representative of the fire pump controller
manufacturer, and a representative of the diesel engine manufacturer shall witness the
complete operational testing of the fire pump and drivers. The fire pump controller
manufacturer's representative and the diesel engine manufacturer's representative shall
each be an experienced technician employed by the respective manufacturers and
capable of demonstrating operation of all features of respective components including
trouble alarms and operating features.
Fire pumps, drivers and equipment shall be thoroughly inspected and tested to insure
that the system is correct, complete, and ready for operation. Tests shall ensure that
pumps are operating at rated capacity, pressure and speed.
Tests shall include manual starting and running to ensure proper operation and to detect
leakage or other abnormal conditions, flow testing, automatic start testing, testing of
automatic settings, sequence of operation check, test of required accessories; test of
pump alarms devices and supervisory signals, test of pump cooling, operational test of
relief valves, Pumps shall run without abnormal noise, vibration or heating. If any
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 22 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
component or system was found to be defective, inoperative, or not in compliance with
PGC Engineer during the tests and inspection, the corrections shall be made and the
entire preliminary test shall be repeated.
3.9.3 Final Acceptance Test
The Fire Protection Specialist shall take all readings and measurements.
The Manufacturer's Representative, the fire pump controller manufacturer's
representative, and the diesel engine manufacturer's representative shall also witness
for the final tests. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairing any damage caused
by hose streams or other aspects of the test. The final acceptance test shall include the
following:
3.9.3.1 Flow Tests
Flow tests using the test header, hoses and playpipe nozzles shall be conducted. Flow
tests shall be performed at churn (no flow), 75, 100, 125 and 150 percent capacity for
each pump and at full capacity of the pump installation. Flow readings shall be taken
from each nozzle by means of a calibrated pitot tube with gauge or other approved
measuring equipment.
Rpm, suction pressure and discharge pressure reading shall be taken as part of each
flow test. Voltage and ampere readings shall taken on each phase as part of each flow
test for electric-motor driven pumps.
3.9.3.2 Starting Tests
Pumps shall be tested for automatic starting and sequential starting.
Setting of the pressure switches shall be tested when pumps are operated by pressure
drop. Tests may be performed by operating the test connection on the pressure sensing
lines. As a minimum, each pump shall be started automatically 10 times and manually
10 times, in accordance with NFPA 20. Tests of engine-driven pumps shall be divided
equally between both set of batteries. The fire pumps shall be operated for a period of a
least 10 minutes for each of the starts; except that electric motors over 149 kW shall be
operated for at least 15 minutes and shall not be started more than 2 times in 10 hours.
Pressure settings that include automatic starting and stopping of the fire pump(s) shall
be indicated on an etched plastic placard, attached to the corresponding pump
controller.
3.9.3.3 Battery Changeover
Diesel driven fire pumps shall be tested for automatic battery changeover in event of
failure of initial battery units.
3.9.3.4 Alarms
All pump alarms, both local and remote, shall be tested. Supervisory alarms for diesel
drivers shall be electrically tested for low oil pressure, high engine jacket coolant
temperature, shutdown from overspeed, battery failure and battery charger failure.
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 23 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.9.3.5 Miscellaneous
Valve tamper switches shall be tested. Pressure recorder operation relief valve settings,
valve operations, operation and accuracy of meters and gauges, and other accessory
devices shall be verified.
3.9.3.6 Correction of Deficiencies
If equipment was found to be defective or non-compliant with contract requirements,
perform corrective actions and repeat the tests. Tests shall be conducted and repeated
if necessary until the system has been demonstrated to comply with all contract
requirements.
3.9.3.8 Test Documentation
The Manufacturer's Representative shall supply a copy of the manufacturer's certified
curve for each fire pump at the time of the test. The Fire Protection Specialist shall
record all test results and plot curve of each pump performance during the test.
Complete pump acceptance test data of each fire pump shall be recorded. The pump
acceptance test data shall be on forms that give the detail pump information such as
that which is indicated in Figure A-11-2.6.3(f) of NFPA 20. All test data records shall be
submitted in a three ring binder.
3.9.4 Test Equipment
Provide all equipment and instruments necessary to conduct a complete final test,
including 65 mm diameter hoses, playpipe nozzles, pitot tube gauges, portable digital
tachometer, voltage and ampere meters, and calibrated oil filled water pressure gauges.
Provide all necessary supports to safely secure hoses and nozzles during the test. The
Contractor shall furnish water for the tests.
3.10
DISINFECTION
After all system components are installed including pumps, piping, and other associated
work, and all hydrostatic tests are successfully completed, thoroughly flush the pumps
and all piping to be disinfected with potable water until there is no visible sign of dirt or
other residue. and hydrostatic test are successfully completed, each portion of the
piping specified in this Section system to be disinfected shall be thoroughly flushed with
potable water until all entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed
before introducing chlorinating material.
3.10.1 Chlorination
The chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. The chlorinating
material shall be fed into the sprinkler piping at a constant rate of 50 parts per million
(ppm). A properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected into the system with a
hypochlorinator, or liquid chlorine injected into the system through a solution-fed
chlorinator and booster pump shall be used. Chlorination application shall continue until
the entire system if filled. The water shall remain in the system for a minimum of 24
hours. Each valve in the system shall be opened and closed several times to ensure its
proper disinfection. Following the 24-hour period, no less than 25 ppm chlorine residual
shall remain in the system.
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 24 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.10.2 Flushing
The system shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine is reduced
to less than one part per million. Samples of water in disinfected containers for bacterial
examination will be taken from several system locations which are approved by PGC
Engineer.
3.10.3 Sample Testing
Samples shall be tested for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform,
streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance with AWWA 10084. The testing method
shall be either the multiple- tube fermentation technique or the membrane-filter
technique. The disinfection shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of coliform
organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in the samples for at least 2
full days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have
been obtained.
3.11
FIELD TRAINING
The Fire Protection Specialist and the Manufacturer's Representative shall conduct a
training course for operating and maintenance personnel as designated by PGC and
Final user. The field instruction shall cover all of the items contained in the approved
Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
END OF SECTION 21 30 00
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 25 OF 25
PGC-230033-C-P8
SECTION 22 00 00
PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
CONTENTS
PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 6
REFERENCES......................................................................................................... 6
SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................ 15
STANDARD PRODUCTS ....................................................................................... 17
1.3.1 Alternative Qualifications ........................................................................................ 17
1.3.2 Service Support...................................................................................................... 17
1.3.3 Manufacturer's Nameplate...................................................................................... 17
1.3.4 Modification of References ..................................................................................... 17
1.4
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ............................................................... 18
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 18
1.5.1 Welding .................................................................................................................. 18
1.5.2 Cathodic Protection and Pipe Joint Bonding ........................................................... 18
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... 18
1.6.1 Sustainable Design Requirements ........................................................................... 18
1.7
1.8
1.9
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS ............................................................................... 18
TRAINING TO USER OPERATORS ....................................................................... 19
ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT .......................................................................... 19
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS .................................................................................................... 20
MATERIALS .......................................................................................................... 20
2.1.1 Pipe Joint Materials ................................................................................................ 20
2.1.2 Miscellaneous Materials ......................................................................................... 21
2.1.3 Pipe Insulation Material .......................................................................................... 22
2.2
2.3
PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS ....................................................... 22
VALVES ................................................................................................................ 22
2.3.1 Backwater Valves ................................................................................................... 23
2.3.2 Wall Faucets .......................................................................................................... 23
2.3.3 Lawn Faucets ......................................................................................................... 23
2.3.4 Relief Valves .......................................................................................................... 23
2.3.5 Thermostatic Mixing Valves .................................................................................... 23
2.4
FIXTURES ............................................................................................................. 24
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.4.1 Lavatories .............................................................................................................. 24
2.4.2 Automatic Controls ................................................................................................. 24
2.4.3 Flush Valve Water Closets ..................................................................................... 24
2.4.4 Flush Valve Urinals ................................................................................................ 25
2.4.5 Wheelchair Flush Valve Type Urinals ..................................................................... 25
2.4.6 Flush Tank Water Closets ...................................................................................... 25
2.4.7 Wall Hung Lavatories ............................................................................................. 25
2.4.8 Countertop Lavatories ............................................................................................ 26
2.4.9 Kitchen Sinks ......................................................................................................... 26
2.4.10 Service Sinks ....................................................................................................... 26
2.4.11 Drinking-Water Coolers ........................................................................................ 26
2.4.12 Wheelchair Drinking Water cooler ........................................................................ 26
2.4.13 Plastic Bathtub/Shower Units ............................................................................... 27
2.4.14 Plastic Bathtubs.................................................................................................... 27
2.4.15 Plastic Shower Stalls ............................................................................................ 27
2.4.16 Plastic Bathtub Liners ........................................................................................... 27
2.4.17 Plastic Bathtub Wall Surrounds ............................................................................ 28
2.4.18 Precast Terrazzo Shower Floors .......................................................................... 28
2.4.19 Precast Terrazzo Mop Sinks ................................................................................. 28
2.4.20 Bathtubs, Cast Iron ............................................................................................... 28
2.4.21 Bathtubs, Porcelain .............................................................................................. 28
2.4.22 Emergency Eyewash and Shower ........................................................................ 28
2.4.23 Emergency Eye and Face Wash .......................................................................... 29
2.5
2.6
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS ................................................................................... 29
DRAINS ................................................................................................................. 29
2.6.1 Floor and Shower Drains ........................................................................................ 29
2.6.2 Bathtub and Shower Faucets and Drain Fittings ..................................................... 30
2.6.3 Area Drains ............................................................................................................ 30
2.6.4 Floor Sinks ............................................................................................................. 30
2.6.5 Pit Drains ............................................................................................................... 30
2.6.6 Sight Drains............................................................................................................ 30
2.6.7 Roof Drains and Expansion Joints .......................................................................... 31
2.6.8 Swimming Pool [and Spa ]Suction Fittings ............................................................. 31
2.7
SHOWER PAN ...................................................................................................... 31
2.7.1 Plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Shower Pan Material ............................................... 32
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.7.2 Nonplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Shower Pan Material ............................... 32
2.8
2.9
TRAPS .................................................................................................................. 32
INTERCEPTORS ................................................................................................... 33
2.9.1 Grease Interceptor ................................................................................................. 33
2.9.2 Oil Interceptor......................................................................................................... 33
2.9.3 Sand Interceptors ................................................................................................... 33
2.10
WATER HEATERS ................................................................................................ 33
2.10.1 Automatic Storage Type ....................................................................................... 33
2.11
2.12
HOT-WATER STORAGE TANKS ........................................................................... 34
PUMPS .................................................................................................................. 34
2.12.1 Sump Pumps ........................................................................................................ 34
2.12.2 Circulating Pumps ................................................................................................ 34
2.12.3 Booster Pumps ..................................................................................................... 35
2.12.4 Flexible Connectors.............................................................................................. 35
2.12.5 Sewage Pumps .................................................................................................... 35
2.13
WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM ............................................................. 35
2.13.1 Constant Speed Pumping System ........................................................................ 35
2.13.2 Hydro-Pneumatic Water Pressure System............................................................ 36
2.13.3 Variable Speed Pumping System ......................................................................... 36
2.14
COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM ................................................................................ 36
2.14.1 Air Compressors................................................................................................... 36
2.14.2 Lubricated Compressors ...................................................................................... 37
2.14.3 Air Receivers ........................................................................................................ 37
2.14.4 Intake Air Supply Filter ......................................................................................... 37
2.14.5 Pressure Regulators............................................................................................. 37
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE METER .................................................................. 38
POOL WATER PUMP SAFETY VACUUM RELEASE SYSTEM (SVRS) .................. 38
ELECTRICAL WORK ............................................................................................. 38
MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS ......................................................................... 39
2.18.1 Escutcheon Plates................................................................................................ 39
2.18.2 Pipe Sleeves ........................................................................................................ 39
2.18.3 Pipe Hangers (Supports) ...................................................................................... 39
2.18.4 Nameplates .......................................................................................................... 39
2.18.5 Labels .................................................................................................................. 40
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION ................................................................................................... 41
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................ 41
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.1.1 Water Pipe, Fittings, and Connections .................................................................... 41
3.1.2 Compressed Air Piping (Non-Oil Free) ................................................................... 43
3.1.3 Joints...................................................................................................................... 43
3.1.4 Dissimilar Pipe Materials ........................................................................................ 45
3.1.5 Corrosion Protection for Buried Pipe and Fittings ................................................... 45
3.1.6 Pipe Sleeves and Flashing ..................................................................................... 45
3.1.7 Fire Seal................................................................................................................. 47
3.1.8 Supports................................................................................................................. 48
3.1.9 Welded Installation ................................................................................................. 50
3.1.10 Pipe Cleanouts ..................................................................................................... 50
3.2
WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS ..................................... 50
3.2.1 Relief Valves .......................................................................................................... 50
3.2.2 Installation of Gas- and Oil-Fired Water Heater ...................................................... 51
3.2.3 Heat Traps ............................................................................................................. 51
3.2.4 Connections to Water Heaters................................................................................ 51
3.2.5 Expansion Tank...................................................................................................... 51
3.2.6 Direct Fired and Domestic Water Heaters .............................................................. 51
3.3
FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS ................................................................. 51
3.3.1 Fixture Connections ............................................................................................... 51
3.3.2 Flushometer Valves................................................................................................ 52
3.3.3 Height of Fixture Rims Above Floor ........................................................................ 52
3.3.4 Shower Bath Outfits ............................................................................................... 52
3.3.5 Fixture Supports ..................................................................................................... 52
3.3.6 Backflow Prevention Devices ................................................................................. 53
3.3.7 Access Panels........................................................................................................ 53
3.3.8 Sight Drains............................................................................................................ 53
3.3.9 Traps ...................................................................................................................... 53
3.3.10 Shower Pans ........................................................................................................ 54
3.4
3.5
3.6
VIBRATION-ABSORBING FEATURES ................................................................... 55
WATER METER REMOTE READOUT REGISTER ................................................. 55
IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS.................................................................................. 55
3.6.1 Identification Tags .................................................................................................. 55
3.6.2 Pipe Color Code Marking ....................................................................................... 55
3.6.3 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components .............................. 56
3.7
ESCUTCHEONS .................................................................................................... 56
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.8
PAINTING .............................................................................................................. 56
3.8.1 Painting of New Equipment .................................................................................... 56
3.9
TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION ............................................................... 57
3.9.1 Plumbing System ................................................................................................... 57
3.9.2 Defective Work ....................................................................................................... 58
3.9.3 System Flushing ..................................................................................................... 58
3.9.4 Operational Test ..................................................................................................... 59
3.9.5 Disinfection ............................................................................................................ 59
3.9.6 [OPTIONAL DISINFECTION METHOD .................................................................. 60
3.10
3.11
3.12
WASTE MANAGEMENT ........................................................................................ 60
POSTED INSTRUCTIONS ..................................................................................... 60
PERFORMANCE OF WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT ........................................... 60
3.12.1 Storage Water Heaters ......................................................................................... 61
3.12.2 Unfired Hot Water Storage ................................................................................... 61
3.12.3 Instantaneous Water Heater ................................................................................. 61
3.12.4 Pool Heaters ........................................................................................................ 62
3.13
TABLES ................................................................................................................. 62
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
1. AIR-CONDITIONING,
HEATING
AND
REFRIGERATION
INSTITUTE
(AHRI)AHRI1010 (2002) Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water
Coolers
2. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3(2011) Gas Water Heaters Vol.III, Storage Water
Heaters With Input Ratings Above 75,000 Btu Per Hour, Circulating and
Instantaneous
ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 (1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R 2004) Relief
Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems
3. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING,
REFRIGERATING
CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
AND
AIR-
ASHRAE 146 (2011) Method of Testing and Rating Pool Heaters
ASHRAE 90.1 - SI(2010; Errata 2011; INT 2-12 2011; Errata 2011, Addenda A, B,
C, G, H, J, K, O, P, S, Y, Z, BZ, CG, CI, AND DS 2012, INT 13 2012; Errata 2012,
Errata 2012, Errata 2012, Errata 2012) Energy Standard for Buildings Except
Low-Rise Residential Buildings
4. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)
ASSE 1001 (2008)
Performance
Requirements
Vacuum Breakers (ANSI approved 2009)
for
Atmospheric
Type
ASSE 1003
(2009) Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing
Valves for Domestic Water Distribution Systems - (ANSI approved 2010)
ASSE 1010
(2004) Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters
(ANSI approved 2004)
ASSE 1011
(2004; Errata 2004) Performance
Connection Vacuum Breakers (ANSI approved 2004)
Requirements
ASSE 1012 (2009) Performance Requirements for Backflow
an Intermediate Atmospheric Vent - (ANSI approved 2009)
for
Preventer
Hose
with
ASSE 1013
(2009) Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure
Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle
Backflow Preventers - (ANSI approved 2010)
ASSE 1018
(2001) Performance Requirements for Trap Seal Primer Valves –
Potable Water Supplied (ANSI Approved 2002)
ASSE 1020 (2004; Errata 2004; Errata 2004) Performance
Pressure Vacuum Breaker Assembly (ANSI Approved 2004)
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Requirements
PAGE 6 OF 70
for
PGC-230033-C-P8
ASSE 1037
(1990) Performance Requirements
Devices (Flushometers) for Plumbing Fixtures
for
Pressurized
Flushing
5. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA 10084 (2005) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and
Wastewater AWWA B300 (2010; Addenda 2011) Hypochlorites
AWWA B301 (2010) Liquid Chlorine AWWA C203 (2008) Coal-Tar Protective
Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - HotApplied
AWWA C606 (2011) Grooved and Shouldered Joints
AWWA C651 (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA C652 (2011) Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities
AWWA C700 (2009) Standard for Cold Water Meters - Displacement Type,
Bronze Main Case
AWWA C701 (2007) Standard for Cold-Water Meters - Turbine Type for
Customer Service AWWA D100 (2011) Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage
6. AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2011) Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze
Welding
AWS B2.2/B2.2M (2010) Specification for Brazing Procedure and
Performance Qualification
7. ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME A112.1.2 (2012) Standard for Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems (For
Plumbing Fixtures and Water-Connected Receptors)
ASME A112.14.1 (2003; R 2008) Backwater Valves
ASME A112.19.1/CSA B45.2 (2008; Update 1 2008; Update 2 2011) Enameled
Cast Iron and Enameled Steel Plumbing Fixtures
ASME A112.19.17 (2010) Manufactured Safety Vacuum Release Systems
(SVRS) for Residential and Commercial Swimming Pool, Spa, Hot Tub, and Wading
Pool Suction Systems
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 (2008; Update 1 2009; Update 2 2011) Standard
for Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for Water
Closets and Urinals
ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 (2008; Update 1 2009; Update 2 2011) Stainless
Steel Plumbing Fixtures
ASME A112.19.5 (2011) Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals
ASME A112.19.8 (2007; Addenda A 2008; Addenda B 2009) Suction Fittings for
Use in Swimming Pools, Wading Pools, Spas, And Hot Tubs
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
ASME A112.36.2M (1991; R 2008) Cleanouts ASME A112.6.1M (1997; R 2008)
Floor Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use
ASME A112.6.3 (2001; R 2007) Standard for Floor and Trench Drains
ASME A112.6.4 (2003: R 2008) Roof, Deck and Balcony Drains
ASME B1.20.1 (1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General Purpos (Inch) ASME B16.12
(2009) Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings
ASME B16.15 (2011) Cast Bronze Alloy Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250
ASME B16.18 (2012) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.21 (2011) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges
ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2010) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy
Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.23 (2011) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV
ASME B16.24 (2011) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings:
Classes 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500
ASME B16.29 (2007) Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint
Drainage Fittings - DWV
ASME B16.3 (2011) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300
ASME B16.34 (2009; Supp 2010) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End
ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes
150, 250, and 300
ASME B16.4
250
(2011) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; Classes 125 and
ASME B16.5 (2009) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through NPS
24 Metric/Inch Standard
ASME B16.50 (2001; R 2008) Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Braze-Joint
Pressure Fittings
ASME B31.1 (2010) Power Piping
ASME B31.5 (2010) Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components
ASME B40.100 (2005; R 2010) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
ASME BPVC SEC IV (2010) BPVC Section IV-Rules for Construction of Heating
Boilers
ASME BPVC SEC IX (2010) BPVC Section IX-Welding and Brazing Qualifications
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2010) BPVC Section VIII-Rules for Construction of
Pressure Vessels Division 1
ASME CSD-1 (2012) Control and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
8. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A105/A105M
(2011a) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel
Forgings for Piping Applications
ASTM A183 (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts
and Nuts
ASTM A193/A193M (2012) Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless
Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service and Other Special Purpose
Applications
ASTM A47/A47M (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable
Iron Castings
ASTM A515/A515M (2010) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service
ASTM A516/A516M (2010) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service
ASTM A518/A518M (1999; R 2008) Standard Specification for CorrosionResistant High-Silicon Iron Castings
ASTM A53/A53M (2012) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and HotDipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
ASTM A536 (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A733 (2003; R 2009e1) Standard Specification for Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples
ASTM A74 (2009) Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
ASTM A888 (2011) Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications
ASTM B117 (2011) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM B152/B152M (2009) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate,
and Rolled Bar
ASTM B306 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)
ASTM B32 (2008) Standard Specification for Solder Metal
ASTM B370 (2011e1) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for
Building Construction
ASTM B42
Sizes
(2010) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard
ASTM B43 (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe,
Standard Sizes
ASTM B584 (2011) Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings
for General Applications
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 9 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
ASTM B75M (1999; R 2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper
Tube (Metric)
ASTM B813
(2010) Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for
Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube
ASTM B828
(2002; R 2010) Standard Practice for Making Capillary
Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings
ASTM B88 (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
ASTM B88M (2005; R 2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water
Tube (Metric)
ASTM C1053 (2000; R 2010) Standard Specification for Borosilicate Glass Pipe
and Fittings for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Applications
ASTM C564
(2011) Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings
ASTM C920
(2011) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM D1004 (2009) Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting
ASTM D1248 (2012) Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics
Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable
ASTM D1785 (2012) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC),
Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D2000 (2012) Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in
Automotive Applications
ASTM D2235 (2004; R 2011) Standard Specification for Solvent Cement
for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2239 (2012) Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe
(SIDR- PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter
ASTM D2241 (2009) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Pressure- Rated Pipe (SDR Series)
ASTM D2464 (2006) Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM D2466 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
ASTM D2467 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM D2564 (2004; R 2009e1) Standard Specification for Solvent Cements
for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems
ASTM D2657 (2007) Heat Fusion Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2661 (2011) Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene
(ABS) Schedule 40, Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 10 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
ASTM D2665 (2012) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2672 (1996a; R 2009) Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using Solvent Cement
ASTM D2683 (2010) Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings
for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing
ASTM D2737 (2012) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing
ASTM D2822/D2822M
(2005e1; R 2011) Asphalt Roof Cement
ASTM D2846/D2846M
(2009be1) Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems
ASTM D2855 (1996; R 2010) Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented
Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2996 (2001; R 2007e1) Filament-Wound "Fiberglass" (Glass-FiberReinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
ASTM D3035 (2010) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on
Controlled Outside Diameter
ASTM D3122 (1995; R 2009) Solvent Cements for Styrene-Rubber (SR) Plastic
Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D3138 (2004; R 2011) Solvent Cements for Transition Joints
Between Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Non- Pressure Piping Components
ASTM D3139 (1998; R 2011) Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using
Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D3212 (2007) Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer
Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D3261 (2010a) Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene
(PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing
ASTM D3311 (2011) Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns
ASTM D4101 (2011) Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and
Extrusion Materials
ASTM D4551 (1996; R 2008e1) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Flexible
Concealed Water-Containment Membrane
ASTM D638 (2010) Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
ASTM E1 (2007) Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers
ASTM E96/E96M (2010) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission
of Materials
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 11 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
ASTM F1290 (1998a; R 2011) Electrofusion Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings
ASTM F1760 (2001; R 2011) Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) NonPressure Plastic Pipe Having Reprocessed-Recycled Content
ASTM F2387 (2004) Standard Specification for Manufactured Safety Vacuum
Release Systems (SVRS) for Swimming Pools, Spas, and Hot Tubs
ASTM F2389 (2010) Standard Specification for Pressure-rated Polypropylene
(PP) Piping Systems
ASTM F409 (2002; R 2008) Thermoplastic Accessible and Replaceable Plastic
Tube and Tubular Fittings
ASTM F437 (2009) Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM F438 (2009) Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
ASTM F439 (2011) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM F441/F441M (2009) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80
ASTM F442/F442M (2009) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)
ASTM F477 (2010) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for
Joining Plastic Pipe
ASTM F493 (2010) Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
ASTM F628 (2008) Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic
Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe with a Cellular Core
ASTM F877 (2011a) Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot- and ColdWater Distribution Systems
ASTM F891 (2010) Coextruded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe with
a Cellular Core
9. CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)
CISPI 301 (2009) Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm
Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications
CISPI 310 (2011) Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe
and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications
10.
COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA) CDA A4015
1995) Copper Tube Handbook
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(1994;
PAGE 12 OF 70
R
PGC-230033-C-P8
11.
INTERNATIONAL
ASSOCIATION
MECHANICAL OFFICIALS (IAPMO)
OF
PLUMBING
AND
IAPMO PS 117 (2005b) Press Type Or Plain End Rub Gasketed W/ Nail CU &
CU Alloy Fittings 4 Install On CU Tubing
IAPMO UPC (2003) Uniform Plumbing Code
IAPMO Z124.1.2 (2005) Plastic Bathtub and Shower Units
IAPMO Z124.8 (1990) Plastic Bathtub Liners
12.
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)
ICC A117.1 (2009) Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities
ICC IPC (2009) International Plumbing Code
13.
INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA)
ANSI/ISEA Z358.1 (2009) American National Standard for Emergency Eyewash
and Shower Equipment
14.
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND
FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-110 (2010) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint,
Grooved and Flared Ends
MSS SP-25
Unions
(2008) Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and
MSS SP-44
(2010; Errata 2011) Steel Pipeline Flanges
MSS SP-58
(2009) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and
Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation
MSS SP-67
(2011) Butterfly Valves
MSS SP-69
(2003) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application
(ANSI Approved American National Standard)
MSS SP-70
(2011) Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
MSS SP-71
(2011) Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
MSS SP-72
(2010a) Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for
General Service
15.
MSS SP-78
(2011) Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
MSS SP-80
(2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves
MSS SP-83
(2006) Class 3000 Steel Pipe Unions Socket Welding and Threaded
MSS SP-85
Ends
(2011) Gray Iron Globe & Angle Valves Flanged and Threaded
NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 13 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
NACE SP0169 (1992; R 2007) Control of External Corrosion on Underground
or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems
16.
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
NEMA MG 1 (2011) Motors and Generators
NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for Selection and
Use of Single Phase Motors
17.
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 31 (2011) Standard for the Installation of Oil-Burning Equipment
NFPA 54 (2012) National Fuel Gas Code
NFPA 90A (2012) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
18.
NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)
NSF/ANSI 14 (2012) Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials
NSF/ANSI 61 (2011; Addenda 2012) Drinking Water System Components Health Effects
19.
PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA)
PPFA Fire Man (2010) Firestopping: Plastic Pipe in Fire Resistive Construction
20.
PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)
PDI G 101 (2010) Testing and Rating Procedure for Hydro
Grease Interceptors with Appendix of Installation and Maintenance
Mechanical
PDI WH 201 (2010) Water Hammer Arresters Standard
21.
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE) SAE J1508
(2009) Hose Clamp Specifications
22.
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
EPA SM 9223 (2004) Enzyme Substrate Coliform Test
Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System
PL 93-523 (1974; A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act
23.
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
LEED NC (2009)
Leadership
in
Energy and
Design(tm) New Construction Rating System
24.
Environmental
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
10 CFR 430 Energy Conservation Program for Consumer Products
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 14 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
40 CFR 141.80 National Primary Drinking Water Regulations; Control of Lead
and Copper; General Requirements
PL 109-58 Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPAct05)
25.
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 174 (2004; Reprint Jul 2011) Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters
UL 1951 (2011) Electric Plumbing Accessories
UL 430 (2009; Reprint Mar 2011) Standard for Waste Disposers
1.2
26.
UNIFIED PLUMBING CODE OF ABU DHABI (PCAD)
27.
ESTIDAMA BY URBAN PLANNING COUNCIL OF ABU DHABI (UPC)
SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
A. SD-02 Shop Drawings
1. Plumbing System;
Detail drawings consisting of schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams, and
other information to illustrate the requirements and operations of systems that are not
covered by the Plumbing Code. Detail drawings for the complete plumbing system
including piping layouts and locations of connections; dimensions for roughing-in,
foundation, and support points; schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams or connection and
interconnection diagrams. Detail drawings shall indicate clearances required for
maintenance and operation. Where piping and equipment are to be supported other than
as indicated, details shall include loadings and proposed support methods. Mechanical
drawing plans, elevations, views, and details, shall be drawn to scale.
B. SD-03 Product Data
1. Fixtures; (LEED NC)
List of installed fixtures with manufacturer, model, and flow rate.
▪ Flush valve water closets
▪ Flush valve urinals
▪ Flush tank water closets
▪ Wall hung lavatories
▪ Countertop lavatories
▪ Kitchen sinks
▪ Service sinks
▪ Drinking-water coolers
▪ Plastic bathtubs
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 15 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
▪ Plastic shower stalls
▪ Plastic bathtub liners
▪ Plastic bathtub wall surrounds
▪ Water heaters
▪ Pumps
▪ Backflow prevention assemblies
▪ [Shower mixers
▪ Swimming Pool [and Spa ]Suction Fittings
▪ Pool Water Pump safety vacuum release system
2. Welding
A copy of qualified procedures and a list of names and identification symbols of qualified
welders and welding operators.
3. Vibration-Absorbing Features
Details of vibration-absorbing features, including arrangement, foundation plan, dimensions
and specifications.
4. Plumbing System
Diagrams, instructions, and other sheets proposed for posting. Manufacturer's
recommendations for the installation of bell and spigot and hubless joints for cast iron soil
pipe.
C. SD-06 Test Reports
1. Tests, Flushing and Disinfection
Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and
all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria,
completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final
position of controls.
2. Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies.
Certification of proper operation shall be as accomplished in accordance with concern
authority regulations by an individual certified by the concern Authority to perform such
tests. If no concern Authority requirement exists, the Contractor shall have the
manufacturer's representative test the device, to ensure the unit is properly installed and
performing as intended. The Contractor shall provide written documentation of the tests
performed and signed by the individual performing the tests.
D. SD-07 Certificates
1. Materials and Equipment
Where equipment is specified to conform to requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, the design, fabrication, and installation shall conform to the code.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 16 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
2. Bolts
Written certification by the bolt manufacturer that the bolts furnished comply with the
specified requirements.
E. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
1. Plumbing System
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
1.3
STANDARD PRODUCTS
Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the manufacture of such products. Specified equipment shall essentially
duplicate equipment that has performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid
opening. Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for
2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and
materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for
sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2 year period.
1.3.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a
certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of
the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.
1.3.2 Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified
list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which
includes their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory
service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty
period of the contract.
1.3.3 Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name,
address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the
nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.
1.3.4 Modification of References
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be
mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it
appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or
words of similar meaning, to mean the
PGC representative .
1.3.4.1 Definitions
For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents,
advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted
as "shall." Reference to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean the " PGC
representative ."
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 17 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
1.3.4.2 Administrative Interpretations
For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1,
"Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements are covered by the
applicable PGC Regulations included in this contract and by the authority granted to the
PGC representative to administer the construction of this project. References in the ICC
Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied appropriately by PGC site engineer as
authorized by PGC Headquarter .
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during
installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by
PGC site engineer . Replace damaged or defective items.
1.5
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.5.1 Welding
[Piping shall be welded in accordance with qualified procedures using performancequalified welders and welding operators. Procedures and welders shall be qualified in
accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding procedures qualified by others, and
welders and welding operators qualified by another employer, may be accepted as
permitted by ASME B31.1.
PGC site engineer shall be notified 24 hours in
advance of tests, and the tests shall be performed at the work site if practicable. Welders
or welding operators shall apply their assigned symbols near each weld they make as a
permanent record. [Welding and nondestructive testing procedures are specified in
Section 40 05 13.96 WELDING PROCESS PIPING.] Structural members shall be welded
in accordance with Section 05 05 23 WELDING, STRUCTURAL.
1.5.2 Cathodic Protection and Pipe Joint Bonding
Cathodic protection and pipe joint bonding systems shall be in accordance with [Section 26
42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)] [and] [Section 26
42 17.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (IMPRESSED CURRENT)] [Section 26 42
13.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY GALVANIC ANODES] [and] [Section 26 42 19.00
20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY IMPRESSED CURRENT] Section 26 42 14.00 10
CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE) and Section 26 42 19.00 20
CATHODIC PROTECTION BY IMPRESSED CURRENT.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Unless otherwise required herein, plumbing work shall be in accordance with ICC IPC.
Energy consuming products and systems shall be in accordance with PL 109-58 and
ASHRAE 90.1 – SI
1.6.1 Sustainable Design Requirements
Follow and comply with sustainability requirement program (ESTIDAMA) issued by Abu
Dhabi planning Council (UPC). Nevertheless applying for Pearl rating is not required
1.7
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field,
and advise PGC site engineer of any discrepancy before performing any work.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 18 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
1.8
TRAINING TO USER OPERATORS
When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full
instruction to the designated
user personnel in the adjustment, operation, and
maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or
system. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall
be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.
Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system
has been accepted and turned over to the user for regular operation. Instructor
to
coordinate with user to designate the most convenient time to deliver the training
When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under
the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating
personnel with the changes or modifications.
1.9
ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and
repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls,
dampers, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access
doors.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 19 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and II.
Pipe
schedules shall be selected based on service requirements. Pipe fittings shall be
compatible with the applicable pipe materials. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement
shall meet NSF/ANSI 14 and shall be NSF listed for the service intended. Plastic pipe,
fittings, and solvent cement used for potable hot and cold water service shall bear the
NSF seal "NSF-PW." Polypropylene pipe and fittings shall conform to dimensional
requirements of Schedule 40, Iron Pipe size and shall comply with NSF/ANSI 14,
NSF/ANSI 61 and ASTM F2389. Polypropylene piping that will be exposed to UV light
shall be provided with a Factory applied UV resistant coating. Pipe threads (except dry
seal) shall conform to ASME B1.20.1. Grooved pipe couplings and fittings shall be from
the same manufacturer. Material or equipment containing lead shall not be used in any
potable water system. In line devices such as water meters, building valves, check
valves, meter stops, valves, fittings and back flow preventers shall comply with PL 93-523
and NSF/ANSI 61, Section 8. End point devices such as drinking water fountains,
lavatory faucets, kitchen and bar faucets, residential ice makers, supply stops and end
point control valves used to dispense water for drinking must meet the requirements of
NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be installed underground,
under concrete floor slabs, or in crawl spaces below kitchen floors. Plastic pipe shall not
be installed in air plenums.
2.1.1 Pipe Joint Materials
Grooved pipe and hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be used under ground. Solder
containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe. Cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be
marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Institute. Joints and gasket
materials shall conform to the following:
a. Coupling for Cast-Iron Pipe: for hub and spigot type ASTM A74, AWWA C606. For
hubless type: CISPI 310
b. Coupling for Steel Pipe: AWWA C606.
c. Couplings for Grooved Pipe: [Ductile Iron ASTM A536 (Grade 65-45-12)] [Malleable Iron
ASTM A47/A47M, Grade 32510]. [Copper ASTM A536].
d. Flange Gaskets: Gaskets shall be made of non-asbestos material in accordance with
ASME B16.21. Gaskets shall be flat, 1.6 mm thick, and contain Aramid fibers bonded
with Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) or Nitro Butadiene Rubber (NBR). Gaskets shall
be the full face or self centering flat ring type. Gaskets used for hydrocarbon service shall
be bonded with NBR.
e. Brazing Material: Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP-5.
f. Brazing Flux: Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for use with brazing
material. Flux shall be as follows: lead-free; have a 100 percent flushable residue;
contain slightly acidic reagents; contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides.
g. Solder Material: Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B32.
h. Solder Flux: Flux shall be liquid form, non-corrosive, and conform to ASTM B813,
Standard Test 1.
i. PTFE Tape: PTFE Tape, for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 20 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
j. Rubber Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil-Pipe and Fittings (hub and spigot type and hubless
type): ASTM C564.
k. Rubber Gaskets for Grooved Pipe: ASTM D2000, maximum temperature 110 degrees C.
l. Flexible Elastomeric Seals: ASTM D3139, ASTM D3212 or ASTM F477.
m. Bolts and Nuts for Grooved Pipe Couplings: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A183.
n. Solvent Cement for Transition Joints between ABS and PVC Nonpressure Piping
Components: ASTM D3138.
o. Plastic Solvent Cement for ABS Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2235.
p. Plastic Solvent Cement for PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2564 and ASTM D2855.
q. Plastic Solvent Cement for CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F493.
r. Flanged fittings including flanges, bolts, nuts, bolt patterns, etc., shall be in accordance
with ASME B16.5 class 150 and shall have the manufacturer's trademark affixed in
accordance with MSS SP-25. Flange material shall conform to ASTM A105/A105M.
Blind flange material shall conform to ASTM A516/A516M cold service and ASTM
A515/A515M for hot service. Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength with
material conforming to ASTM A193/A193M.
s. Plastic Solvent Cement for Styrene Rubber Plastic Pipe: ASTM D3122.
t. Press fittings for Copper Pipe and Tube: Copper press fittings shall conform to the
material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22 and performance
criteria of IAPMO PS 117. Sealing elements for copper press fittings shall be EPDM,
FKM or HNBR. Sealing elements shall be factory installed or an alternative supplied
fitting manufacturer. Sealing element shall be selected based on manufacturer's
approved application guidelines.
u. Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B88M, Type K, L or M. v. Heat-fusion joints for
polypropylene piping: ASTM F2389.
2.1.2 Miscellaneous Materials
Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following:
a. Water Hammer Arrester: PDI WH 201.
b. Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction: ASTM B370.
c. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D2822/D2822M.
d. Hose Clamps: SAE J1508.
e. Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures: ASME A112.6.1M.
f. Metallic Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M.
g. Plumbing Fixture Setting Compound: A preformed flexible ring seal molded from
hydrocarbon wax material. The seal material shall be nonvolatile nonasphaltic and
contain germicide and provide watertight, gastight, odorproof and verminproof properties.
h. Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines: AWWA C203.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 21 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
i.
Hypochlorites: AWWA B300.
j. Liquid Chlorine: AWWA B301.
k. Gauges - Pressure and Vacuum Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element: ASME B40.100.
l. Thermometers: ASTM E1. Mercury shall not be used in thermometers.
2.1.3 Pipe Insulation Material
Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
2.2
PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS
Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
2.3
VALVES
Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves 65 mm and
smaller shall be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and solder-type connections for
tubing. Valves 80 mm and larger shall have flanged iron bodies and bronze trim.
Pressure ratings shall be based upon the application. Grooved end valves may be
provided if the manufacturer certifies that the valves meet the performance requirements
of applicable MSS standard. Valves shall conform to the following standards:
Description
Butterfly Valves
Cast-Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged
and Threaded Ends
Ball Valves with Flanged Butt-Welding
Ends for General Service
Ball Valves Threaded, SocketWelding, Solder Joint, Grooved and
Flared Ends
Cast-Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check
Valves
Steel Valves, Socket Welding and
Threaded Ends
Cast-Iron Globe and Angle
Valves, Flanged and Threaded
Ends
Vacuum Relief Valves
Water Pressure Reducing Valves
Water Heater Drain Valves
Trap Seal Primer Valves
Temperature and Pressure Relief
Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Standard
MSS SP-67
MSS SP-70
MSS SP-71
MSS SP-72
MSS SP-110
MSS SP-78
MSS SP-80
ASME B16.34
MSS SP-85
ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4
ASSE 1003
ASME BPVC SEC IV, Part HLW-810:
Requirements for Potable-Water Heaters
Bottom Drain Valve
ASSE 1018
ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4
ASME CSD-1
PAGE 22 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
for Automatically Fired Hot Water Boilers
Safety Code No., Part CW, Article 5
2.3.1 Backwater Valves
Backwater valves shall be either separate from the floor drain or a combination floor
drain, P-trap, and backwater valve, as shown. Valves shall have cast-iron bodies with
cleanouts large enough to permit removal of interior parts. Valves shall be of the flap
type, hinged or pivoted, with revolving disks.
Hinge pivots, disks, and seats shall be nonferrous metal. Disks shall be slightly open in
a no-flow no- backwater condition. Cleanouts shall extend to finished floor and be fitted
with threaded countersunk plugs.
2.3.2 Wall Faucets
Wall faucets with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer shall be brass with 20 mm male
inlet threads, hexagon shoulder, and 20 mm hose connection. Faucet handle shall be
securely attached to stem.
2.3.3 Lawn Faucets
Lawn faucets shall be brass, with either straight or angle bodies, and shall be of the
compression type. Body flange shall be provided with internal pipe thread to suit 20 mm
pipe. Body shall be suitable for wrench grip. Faucet spout shall have 20 mm exposed
hose threads. Faucet handle shall be securely attached to stem.
2.3.4 Relief Valves
Water heaters and hot water storage tanks shall have a combination pressure and
temperature (P&T) relief valve. The pressure relief element of a P&T relief valve shall
have adequate capacity to prevent excessive pressure buildup in the system when the
system is operating at the maximum rate of heat input. The temperature element of a
P&T relief valve shall have a relieving capacity which is at least equal to the total input
of the heaters when operating at their maximum capacity. Relief valves shall be rated
according to ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4. Relief valves for systems where the maximum rate
of heat input is less than 59 kW shall have 20 mm minimum inlets, and 20 mm outlets.
Relief valves for systems where the maximum rate of heat input is greater than 59 kW
shall have 25 mm minimum inlets, and 25 mm outlets. The discharge pipe from the
relief valve shall be the size of the valve outlet.
2.3.5 Thermostatic Mixing Valves
Provide thermostatic mixing valve for lavatory faucets. Mixing valves, thermostatic type,
pressure- balanced or combination thermostatic and pressure-balanced shall be line
size and shall be constructed with rough or finish bodies either with or without plating.
Each valve shall be constructed to control the mixing of hot and cold water and to
deliver water at a desired temperature regardless of pressure or input temperature
changes. The control element shall be of an approved type. The body shall be of
heavy cast bronze, and interior parts shall be brass, bronze, corrosion-resisting steel or
copper. The valve shall be equipped with necessary stops, check valves, unions, and
sediment strainers on the inlets. Mixing valves shall maintain water temperature within
2 degrees C of any setting.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 23 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.4
FIXTURES
Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ICC IPC. Fixtures for use
by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1. [ASME
A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302 stainless steel] [Vitreous China], nonabsorbent, hard-burned,
and vitrified throughout the body shall be provided. Porcelain enameled ware shall have
specially selected, clear [white], acid-resisting enamel coating evenly applied on surfaces.
No fixture will be accepted that shows cracks, crazes, blisters, thin spots, or other flaws.
Fixtures shall be equipped with appurtenances such as traps, faucets, stop valves, and
drain fittings. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the drainage
system, except grease interceptors, shall be equipped with a trap. Brass expansion or
toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be provided for supports, and polished
chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view.
Fixtures with the supply discharge below the rim shall be equipped with backflow
preventers. Internal parts of flush and/or flushometer valves, shower mixing valves,
shower head face plates, pop-up stoppers of lavatory waste drains, and pop-up stoppers
and overflow tees and shoes of bathtub waste drains [may contain acetal resin,
fluorocarbon, nylon, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) or other plastic material, if the
material has provided satisfactory service under actual commercial or industrial operating
conditions for not less than 2 years][shall be copper alloy with all visible surfaces chrome
plated].[ Plastic in contact with hot water shall be suitable for 82 degrees C water
temperature.]
2.4.1 Lavatories
[Vitreous china lavatories shall be provided with two integral molded lugs on the backunderside of the fixture and drilled for bolting to the wall in a manner similar to the hanger
plate.]
2.4.2 Automatic Controls
Provide automatic, sensor operated faucets and flush valves to comply with ASSE 1037
and UL 1951 for lavatory faucets, urinals, and water closets. Flushing and faucet
systems shall consist of solenoid- activated valves with light beam sensors. Flush valve
for water closet shall include an override pushbutton. Flushing devices shall be provided
as described in paragraph FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS.
2.4.3 Flush Valve Water Closets
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, [white] vitreous china, [ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302
Stainless Steel,] siphon jet, elongated bowl, [floor-mounted, floor outlet]. Top of toilet
seat height above floor shall be 356 to 381 mm, except 432 to 483 mm for wheelchair
water closets. Provide wax bowl ring including plastic sleeve. Provide [white] solid
plastic elongated [closed-front seat with cover].
Water flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination shall not exceed
[6.1][3.8] liters per flush. [Provide a dual-flush water closet and flush valve combination
that will also provide a second flushing water volume not to exceed 4.1 liters per flush.]
Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve, vacuum breaker, tail
pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view components shall be chromium-plated
or polished stainless steel. Flush valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves
not less than 279 mm above the fixture. Mounted height of flush valve shall not interfere
with the hand rail in ADA stalls.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 24 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.4.4 Flush Valve Urinals
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, [white] vitreous china, [ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302
stainless steel],wall-mounted, wall outlet, siphon jet, integral trap, and extended side
shields. Provide urinal with the rim 430 mm above the floor. Provide urinal with the rim
610 mm above the floor. Water flushing volume of the urinal and flush valve combination
shall not exceed [1.9][3.8][0.5] liters per flush.
Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe supports.
Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve, vacuum breaker, tail
pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view components shall be chromium-plated
or polished stainless steel. Flush valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves
not less than 279 mm above the fixture.
[Provide solenoid-activated flush valves including electrical-operated light-beam-sensor to
energize the solenoid.]
2.4.5 Wheelchair Flush Valve Type Urinals
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, [white] vitreous china, [ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302
stainless steel],wall-mounted, wall outlet, blowout action, integral trap, elongated
projecting bowl, 508 mm long from wall to front of flare, and ASME A112.19.5 trim.
Provide large diaphragm (not less than 66 mm upper chamber inside diameter at the
point where the diaphragm is sealed between the upper and lower chambers), nonholdopen flush valve of chrome plated cast brass conforming to ASTM B584, including
vacuum breaker and angle (control-stop) valve with back check. The water flushing
volume of the flush valve and urinal combination shall not exceed [1.9][3.8][0.5] liters per
flush. Furnish urinal manufacturer's certification of conformance. Provide ASME
A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers. Mount urinal with front rim a maximum of 432 mm
above floor and flush valve handle a maximum of 1118 mm above floor for use by
handicapped on wheelchair. [Provide solenoid-activated flush valves including electricaloperated light-beam-sensor to energize the solenoid.]
2.4.6 Flush Tank Water Closets
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, [white] vitreous china, [ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302
stainless steel],siphon jet, round bowl, pressure assisted, floor-mounted, floor outlet. Top
of toilet seat height above floor shall be 356 to 381 mm, except 432 to 483 mm for
wheelchair water closets. [Nonfloat swing type flush tank valves are not acceptable.]
[Gravity tank type water closets are not permitted.] Provide wax bowl ring including plastic
sleeve. Water flushing volume of the water closet shall not exceed [4.85][3.8] liters per
flush. [Provide a dual-flush toilet with a second flushing option that shall not exceed 4.1
liters per flush.] Provide [white] solid plastic round closed-front seat with cover.
2.4.7 Wall Hung Lavatories
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, [white] vitreous china, [ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302
stainless steel],straight back type, minimum dimensions of 483 mm, wide by 432 mm
front to rear, with supply openings for use with top mounted centerset faucets, and
openings for concealed arm carrier installation. Water flow rate shall not exceed [90] mL
per second when measured at a flowing water pressure of 414 kPa. Provide ASME
A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe supports and concealed arms
for the lavatory. Mount lavatory with the front rim 864 mm above floor and with 737 mm
minimum clearance from bottom of the front rim to floor. [Provide top mounted
washerless centerset lavatory faucets.]
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 25 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.4.8 Countertop Lavatories
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, [white] vitreous china, [ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302
stainless steel],self-rimming, minimum dimensions of 483 mm wide by 432 mm front to
rear, with supply openings for use with top mounted centerset faucets. Furnish template
and mounting kit by lavatory manufacturer. Water flow rate shall not exceed [90] mL per
second when measured at a flowing water pressure of 414 kPa. Mount counter with the
top surface 864 mm above floor and with 737 mm minimum clearance from bottom of the
counter face to floor.
2.4.9 Kitchen Sinks
ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4, 20 gage stainless steel with integral mounting rim for flush
installation, minimum dimensions of 838 mm wide by 533 mm front to rear, two
compartments, with undersides fully sound deadened, with supply openings for use with
top mounted washerless sink faucets with hose spray, and with 89 mm drain outlet.
Water flow rate shall not exceed [90] mL per second when measured at a flowing water
pressure of 414 kPa. Provide stainless steel drain outlets and stainless steel cup
strainers. Provide separate 38 mm P-trap and drain piping to vertical vent piping from
each compartment. Provide top mounted washerless sink faucets with hose spray.
[Provide filters for chlorine in supply piping to faucets.] [Provide UL 430 waste disposer in
right compartment.] [Provide pedal valve for foot-operated flow control.] [Provide
secondary kitchen sink that drains to graywater system.] [Provide sink with disposal
chute to compost bucket under sink.]
2.4.10 Service Sinks
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, [white] vitreous china [ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302
stainless steel] with integral back and wall hanger supports, minimum dimensions of 559
mm wide by 508 mm front to rear, with two supply openings in 254 mm high back.
Provide floor supported wall outlet cast iron P- trap and stainless steel rim guards as
recommended by service sink manufacturer. Provide back mounted washerless service
sink faucets with vacuum breaker and 19 mm external hose threads.
2.4.11 Drinking-Water Coolers
AHRI 1010 with more than a single thickness of metal between the potable water and the
refrigerant in the heat exchanger, wall-hung, bubbler style, air-cooled condensing unit, 5
ml per second minimum capacity, stainless steel splash receptor and basin, and stainless
steel cabinet. Bubblers shall be controlled by push levers or push bars, front mounted or
side mounted near the front edge of the cabinet. Bubbler spouts shall be mounted at
maximum of 914 mm above floor and at front of unit basin. Spouts shall direct water flow
at least 102 mm above unit basin and trajectory parallel or nearly parallel to the front of
unit. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed steel pipe chair carriers.
2.4.12 Wheelchair Drinking Water cooler
AHRI 1010, wall-mounted bubbler style with ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carrier,
air-cooled condensing unit, 5 mL per second minimum capacity, stainless steel splash
receptor, and all stainless steel cabinet, with 686 mm minimum knee clearance from front
bottom of unit to floor and 914 mm maximum spout height above floor. Bubblers shall
also be controlled by push levers, by push bars, or touch pads one on each side or one
on front and both sides of the cabinet.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 26 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.4.13 Plastic Bathtub/Shower Units
IAPMO Z124.1.2 four piece [white] solid acrylic pressure molded fiberglass reinforced
plastic bathtub/shower units. Units shall be scratch resistant, waterproof, and reinforced.
Showerhead water flow rate shall not exceed [126] mL per second when measured at a
flowing water pressure of 552 kPa.
Provide recessed type units approximately 1524
mm wide, 762 mm front to rear, 1829 mm high with 381 mm high rim for through-the-floor
drain installation with unit bottom or feet firmly supported by a smooth level floor. Provide
left or right drain outlet units as required. Units shall have built-in soap dish and minimum
of 305 mm long stainless steel horizontal grab bar located on back wall for standing use.
Units shall meet performance requirements of IAPMO Z124.1.2 and shall be labeled by
NAHB Research Foundation, Inc. for compliance. Install unit in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions. Finish installation by covering unit attachment flanges
with wall board in accordance with unit manufacturer's recommendation. Provide smooth
100 percent silicone rubber [white] bathtub caulk between the unit and the adjacent walls
and floor surfaces.
2.4.14 Plastic Bathtubs
IAPMO Z124.1.2 one piece [white] solid acrylic pressure molded fiberglass reinforced
plastic bathtubs. Bathtubs shall be scratch resistant, waterproof, and reinforced. Provide
recessed type bathtubs approximately 1524 mm wide, 762 mm front to rear, 381 mm high
rim for through-the-floor drain installation with bathtub bottom or feet firmly supported by a
smooth level floor. Provide left or right drain outlet bathtub as required. Bathtubs shall
meet performance requirements of IAPMO Z124.1.2 and shall be labeled by NAHB
Research Foundation, Inc. for compliance. Install bathtub in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions. Finish installation by covering bathtub attachment
flanges with dry-wall in accordance with bathtub manufacturer's recommendation.
Provide smooth 100 percent silicone rubber [white] bathtub caulk between the bathtub
and the adjacent walls and floor surfaces.
2.4.15 Plastic Shower Stalls
IAPMO Z124.1.2 four piece [white] solid acrylic pressure molded fiberglass reinforced
plastic shower stalls. Shower stalls shall be scratch resistant, waterproof, and reinforced.
Showerhead water flow rate shall not exceed [126] mL per second when measured at a
flowing water pressure of 552 kPa.
Provide recessed type shower stalls approximately 914 mm wide, 914 mm front to rear,
1829 mm high, and 125 high mm high curb with shower stall bottom or feet firmly
supported by a smooth level floor. Provide PVC shower floor drains and stainless steel
strainers. Shower stalls shall meet performance requirements of IAPMO Z124.1.2 and
shall be labeled by NAHB Research Foundation, Inc. for compliance. Install shower stall
in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Finish installation by covering
shower stall attachment flanges with dry-wall in accordance with shower stall
manufacturer's recommendation. Provide smooth 100 percent silicone rubber [white]
bathtub caulk between the top, sides, and bottom of shower stalls and bathroom walls
and floors.
2.4.16 Plastic Bathtub Liners
IAPMO Z124.8 one piece [white] plastic bathtub liners. Existing bathtubs shall be
identified and measured to insure proper identification in order that each new bathtub liner
shall be custom molded to fit the exact contours of the existing bathtubs. Provide left or
right drain outlet bathtub liners as required. Bathtub liners shall be inserted over and into
the existing bathtubs without disturbing the existing ceramic tile wainscot walls and
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 27 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
existing floor material. Prepare the existing cast-iron bathtubs, ceramic tile wainscots,
and floor to receive the new bathtub liners in accordance with the bathtub liner
manufacturer's written instructions. Installation personnel shall be trained by the bathtub
liner manufacturer. Seal the bathtub liner to existing bathtub with waterproof adhesive as
required to keep moisture out from behind the bathtub liner. Provide smooth [white]
waterproof bathtub sealant between bathtub drains, bathtub, and bathtub liners. Provide
replacement chromium-plated overflow cover plates and push-pull bathtub drain stopper
assembly. Provide smooth 100 percent silicone rubber [white] bathtub caulk between the
bathtub liner and the adjacent walls and floor surfaces in accordance with the bathtub
liners manufacturer's written instructions.
2.4.17 Plastic Bathtub Wall Surrounds
IAPMO Z124.1.2 three piece [white] sectional pressure molded fiberglass plastic bathtub
wall surrounds suitable for installation with existing bathtubs which are approximately
1524 mm wide by 762 mm front to rear. Wall surrounds shall have built-in soap dish and
minimum of 305 mm long stainless steel horizontal grab bar located on back wall for
standing use. Bathtub wall surrounds shall meet performance requirements of IAPMO
Z124.1.2 and shall be labeled by NAHB Research Foundation, Inc. for compliance. Install
bathtub wall surrounds in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions. Finish
installation by covering bathtub wall surround attachment flanges with dry-wall in
accordance with bathtub wall surround manufacturer's recommendations. Provide
smooth 100 percent silicone rubber [white] bathtub caulk between the bathtubs and the
adjacent walls and floor surfaces.
2.4.18 Precast Terrazzo Shower Floors
Terrazzo shall be made of marble chips cast in white portland cement to produce 25 mPa
minimum compressive strength 7 days after casting. Provide floor or wall outlet copper
alloy body drain cast integral with terrazzo, with polished stainless steel strainers.
2.4.19 Precast Terrazzo Mop Sinks
Terrazzo shall be made of marble chips cast in white portland cement to produce 25 mPa
minimum compressive strength 7 days after casting. Provide floor or wall outlet copper
alloy body drain cast integral with terrazzo, with polished stainless steel strainers.
2.4.20 Bathtubs, Cast Iron
ASME A112.19.1/CSA B45.2, [white] enameled cast iron, recessed type, minimum
dimensions of 1524 mm wide by 762 mm front to rear by 406 mm high with drain outlet for
above-the-floor drain installation. Provide left or right drain outlet bathtub as indicated.
2.4.21 Bathtubs, Porcelain
ASME A112.19.1/CSA B45.2, [white] porcelain bonded to enameling grade metal,
bonded to a structural composite, recessed type, minimum dimensions of 1524 mm wide
by 762 mm front to rear by 406 mm high with drain outlet for above-the-floor drain
installation. Provide left or right drain outlet bathtub as indicated.
2.4.22 Emergency Eyewash and Shower
ANSI/ISEA Z358.1, floor supported free standing unit. Provide deluge shower head, stayopen ball valve operated by pull rod and ring or triangular handle. Provide eyewash and
stay-open ball valve operated by foot treadle or push handle.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 28 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.4.23 Emergency Eye and Face Wash
ANSI/ISEA Z358.1, wall-mounted self-cleaning, nonclogging eye and face wash with
quick opening, full-flow valves, stainless steel eye and face wash receptor. Unit shall
deliver 0.19 L/s of aerated water at 207 kPa (gage) flow pressure, with eye and face wash
nozzles 838 to 1143 mm above finished floor. Provide copper alloy control valves.
Provide an air-gap with the lowest potable eye and face wash water outlet located above
the overflow rim by not less than the International Plumbing Code minimum.
[Provide packaged, UL listed, alarm system; including an amber strobe lamp, horn with
externally adjustable loudness and horn silencing switch, mounting hardware, and
waterflow service within NEMA Type 3 or 4 enclosures[and for explosion proof service
within NEMA Type 7 or 9 enclosures].
2.5
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Backflow prevention devices must be approved by PGC site engineer . the backflow
prevention devices must be listed by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control &
Hydraulic Research, or any other approved testing laboratory having equivalent
capabilities for both laboratory and field evaluation of backflow prevention devices and
assemblies.
Reduced pressure principle assemblies, double check valve assemblies, atmospheric
(nonpressure) type vacuum breakers, and pressure type vacuum breakers shall be meet
the above requirements.
Backflow preventers with intermediate atmospheric vent shall conform to ASSE 1012.
Reduced pressure principle backflow preventers shall conform to ASSE 1013. Hose
connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1011. Pipe applied atmospheric
type vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1001. Pressure vacuum breaker assembly
shall conform to ASSE 1020. Air gaps in plumbing systems shall conform to ASME
A112.1.2.
2.6
DRAINS
2.6.1 Floor and Shower Drains
Floor and shower drains shall consist of a galvanized body, integral seepage pan, and
adjustable perforated or slotted chromium-plated bronze, nickel-bronze, or nickel-brass
strainer, consisting of grate and threaded collar. Floor drains shall be cast iron except
where metallic waterproofing membrane is installed. Drains shall be of double drainage
pattern for embedding in the floor construction. The seepage pan shall have weep holes
or channels for drainage to the drainpipe. The strainer shall be adjustable to floor
thickness. A clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the
seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing membrane shall be
provided when required. Drains shall be provided with threaded connection.
Between the drain outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM
C564 may be installed, provided that the drain is specifically designed for the rubber
gasket compression type joint. Floor and shower drains shall conform to ASME
A112.6.3.]
2.6.1.1 Metallic Shower Pan Drains
Where metallic shower pan membrane is installed, polyethylene drain with corrosionresistant screws securing the clamping device shall be provided. Polyethylene drains
shall have fittings to adapt drain to waste piping. Polyethylene for floor drains shall
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 29 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
conform to ASTM D1248. Drains shall have separate cast-iron "P" trap, circular body,
seepage pan, and strainer, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6.1.2 Drains and Backwater Valves
Drains and backwater valves installed in connection with waterproofed floors or shower
pans shall be equipped with bolted-type device to securely clamp flashing.
2.6.2 Bathtub and Shower Faucets and Drain Fittings
Provide single control pressure equalizing bathtub and shower faucets with body
mounted from behind the wall with threaded connections. Provide ball joint self-cleaning
shower heads. Provide shower heads which deliver a maximum of 0.139 l/s at 551 kPa
per Energy Star requirements. Provide tubing mounted from behind the wall between
bathtub faucets and shower heads and bathtub diverter spouts. Provide separate globe
valves or angle valves with union connections in each supply to faucet.
Provide trip-lever pop-up drain fittings for above-the-floor drain installations. The top of
drain pop-ups, drain outlets, tub overflow outlet, and; control handle for pop-up drain shall
be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Linkage between drain pop-up and popup control handle at bathtub overflow outlet shall be copper alloy or stainless steel.
Provide 40 mm copper alloy adjustable tubing with slip nuts and gaskets between bathtub
overflow and drain outlet; chromium-plated finish is not required.
2.6.3 Area Drains
Area drains shall be plain pattern with polished stainless steel perforated or slotted grate
and bottom outlet. The drain shall be circular or square with a 300 mm nominal overall
width or diameter and 250 mm nominal overall depth. Drains shall be cast iron with
manufacturer's standard coating. Grate shall be easily lifted out for cleaning. Outlet shall
be suitable for inside caulked connection to drain pipe. Drains shall conform to ASME
A112.6.3.
2.6.4 Floor Sinks
Floor sinks shall be [square], with 300 mm nominal overall width or diameter and 250 mm
nominal overall depth. Floor sink shall have an acid-resistant enamel interior finish with
cast-iron body, aluminum sediment bucket, and perforated grate of cast iron in industrial
areas and stainless steel in finished areas. The outlet pipe size shall be as indicated or of
the same size as the connecting pipe.
2.6.5 Pit Drains
Pit drains shall consist of a body, integral seepage pan, and nontilting perforated or
slotted grate. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern suitable for embedding in the
floor construction. The seepage pan shall have weep holes or channels for drainage to
the drain pipe. Membrane or flashing clamping device shall be provided when required.
Drains shall be cast iron with manufacturer's standard coating. Drains shall be circular
and provided with bottom outlet suitable for inside caulked connection, unless otherwise
indicated. Drains shall be provided with separate cast-iron "P" traps, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.6.6 Sight Drains
Sight drains shall consist of body, integral seepage pan, and adjustable strainer with
perforated or slotted grate and funnel extension. The strainer shall have a threaded collar
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 30 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
to permit adjustment to floor thickness. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern
suitable for embedding in the floor construction. A clamping device for attaching flashing
or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or
membrane shall be provided for other than concrete construction. Drains shall have a
galvanized heavy cast-iron body and seepage pan and chromium-plated bronze, nickelbronze, or nickel-brass strainer and funnel combination. Drains shall be provided with
threaded connection and with a separate cast-iron "P" trap, unless otherwise indicated.
Drains shall be circular, unless otherwise indicated. The funnel shall be securely
mounted over an opening in the center of the strainer. Minimum dimensions shall be as
follows:
Area of strainer and collar: 0.023 square meters
Height of funnel: 95 mm
Diameter of lower portion: 50 mm of funnel
Diameter of upper portion:
100 mm of funnel
2.6.7 Roof Drains and Expansion Joints
Roof drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.4, with dome and integral flange, and shall
have a device for making a watertight connection between roofing and flashing. The
whole assembly shall be galvanized heavy pattern cast iron. For aggregate surface
roofing, the drain shall be provided with a gravel stop. On roofs other than concrete
construction, roof drains shall be complete with underdeck clamp, sump receiver, and an
extension for the insulation thickness where applicable. A clamping device for attaching
flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or
membrane shall be provided when required to suit the building construction. Strainer
openings shall have a combined area equal to twice that of the drain outlet. The outlet
shall be equipped to make a proper connection to threaded pipe of the same size as the
downspout. An expansion joint of proper size to receive the conductor pipe shall be
provided. The expansion joint shall consist of a heavy cast-iron housing, brass or bronze
sleeve, brass or bronze fastening bolts and nuts, and gaskets or packing. The sleeve
shall have a nominal thickness of not less than 3.416 mm.
Gaskets and packing shall be close-cell neoprene, O-ring packing shall be close-cell
neoprene of 70 durometer. Packing shall be held in place by a packing gland secured
with bolts.
2.6.8 Swimming Pool [and Spa ]Suction Fittings
Pool water suction fittings in swimming pools [and spas ]shall comply with ASME
A112.19.8 and addenda A112.19.8a. The compliance of the fitting shall include of the
associated drain cover, sump, and hardware. The fitting shall be permanently marked to
indicate compliance with the ASME standard, or permanently marked with the symbol
"VGB 2008".
2.7
SHOWER PAN
Shower pan may be copper, or nonmetallic material.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 31 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.7.1 Plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Shower Pan Material
Material shall be sheet form. The material shall be 1.016 mm minimum thickness of
plasticized polyvinyl chloride or chlorinated polyethylene and shall be in accordance with
ASTM D4551.
2.7.2 Nonplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Shower Pan Material
Material shall consist of a plastic waterproofing membrane in sheet form. The material
shall be 1.016 mm minimum thickness of nonplasticized PVC and shall have the following
minimum properties:
a. or ASTM D638:
Ultimate Tensile Strength: 1.79 MPa
Ultimate Elongation: 398 percent
100 Percent Modulus: 3.07 MPa
b. ASTM D1004:
Tear Strength:
53 kilonewtons per meter
c. ASTM E96/E96M:
Permeance:
0.46 ng per Pa per second per sq meter
d. Other Properties:
Specific Gravity:
1.29
PVC Solvent:
Weldable
Cold Crack:
minus 47 degrees C
Dimensional stability 100 degrees C
Hardness, Shore A:
89
2.8
TRAPS
Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be [plastic per ASTM F409] [or] [copper-alloy
adjustable tube type with slip joint inlet and swivel]. Traps shall be without a cleanout.
[Provide traps with removable access panels for easy clean-out at sinks and lavatories.
]Tubes shall be copper alloy with walls not less than 0.813 mm thick within commercial
tolerances, except on the outside of bends where the thickness may be reduced slightly in
manufacture by usual commercial methods. Inlets shall have rubber washer and copper
alloy nuts for slip joints above the discharge level. Swivel joints shall be below the
discharge level and shall be of metal-to-metal or metal-to-plastic type as required for the
application. Nuts shall have flats for wrench grip. Outlets shall have internal pipe thread,
except that when required for the application, the outlets shall have sockets for solderjoint connections. The depth of the water seal shall be not less than 50 mm. The interior
diameter shall be not more than 3.2 mm over or under the nominal size, and interior
surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. A copper alloy "P" trap assembly
consisting of an adjustable "P" trap and threaded trap wall nipple with cast brass wall
flange shall be provided for lavatories. The assembly shall be a standard manufactured
unit and may have a rubber-gasketed swivel joint.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 32 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.9
INTERCEPTORS
2.9.1 Grease Interceptor
Grease interceptor of the size indicated shall be of reinforced concrete, [or precast
concrete construction] with removable three-section, 9.5 mm checker-plate cover, and
shall be installed outside the building. Interceptors shall be tested and rated in
accordance with PDI G 101. Concrete shall have 21 MPa minimum compressive strength
at 28 days. Provide flow control fitting.
2.9.2 Oil Interceptor
Cast iron or welded steel, coated inside and outside with white acid resistant epoxy, with
internal air relief bypass, bronze cleanout plug, double wall trap seal, removable
combination pressure equalizing and flow diffusing baffle and sediment bucket, horizontal
baffle, adjustable oil draw-off and vent connections on either side, gas and watertight
gasketed nonskid cover, and flow control fitting.
2.9.3 Sand Interceptors
Sand interceptor of the size indicated shall be of reinforced concrete, [or precast concrete
construction] with manufacturer's standard checker-plate cover, and shall be installed
[outside the building][top flush with the floor]. [ Concrete shall have 21 MPa minimum
compressive strength at 28 days.]
2.10
WATER HEATERS
Water heater types and capacities shall be as indicated. Each water heater shall have
replaceable anodes. C. Hot water systems utilizing recirculation systems shall be tied
into building off-hour controls. The thermal efficiencies and standby heat losses shall
conform to TABLE III for each type of water heater specified. The only exception is that
storage water heaters and hot water storage tanks having more than 2000 liters storage
capacity need not meet the standard loss requirement if the tank surface area is insulated
to R-12.5 and if a standing light is not used. Plastic materials polyetherimide (PEI) and
polyethersulfone (PES) are forbidden to be used for vent piping of combustion gases. A
factory pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply to each
water heater.
Expansion tanks shall be specifically designed for use on potable water systems and
shall be rated for 93 degrees C water temperature and 1034 kPa working pressure. The
expansion tank size and acceptance volume shall be [as indicated].
2.10.1 Automatic Storage Type
Heaters shall be complete with [control system, temperature gauge, and pressure
gauge,] and shall have ASME rated combination pressure and temperature relief valve.
2.10.1.1 Electric Type
Electric type water heaters shall conform to UL 174 with dual heating elements. Each
element shall be 4.5 KW. The elements shall be wired so that only one element can
operate at a time.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 33 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.11
HOT-WATER STORAGE TANKS
Hot-water storage tanks shall be constructed by one manufacturer, ASME stamped for
the working pressure, and shall have the National Board (ASME) registration. The tank
shall be glass-lined steel type in accordance with AWWA D100. The heat loss shall
conform to TABLE III as determined by the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - SI. Each
tank shall be equipped with a thermometer, conforming to ASTM E1, Type I, Class 3,
Range C, style and form as required for the installation, and with 175 mm scale.
Thermometer shall have a separable socket suitable for a 20 mm tapped opening. Tanks
shall be equipped with a pressure gauge 155 mm minimum diameter face. Insulation
shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL
SYSTEMS. Storage tank capacity shall be as shown.
2.12
PUMPS
2.12.1 Sump Pumps
Sump pumps shall be of capacities indicated. The pumps shall be of the automatic,
electric motor- driven, submerged type, complete with necessary control equipment and
with a split or solid cast-iron or steel cover plate. The pumps shall be direct-connected by
an approved flexible coupling to a vertical electric motor having a continuous oiling device
or packed bearings sealed against dirt and moisture.
Motors shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled of sizes as indicated and shall be equipped
with an across- the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type [1] [4] enclosure.
Integral size motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Each pump shall be fitted with a high-grade thrust bearing mounted above the floor.
Each shaft shall have an alignment bearing at each end, and the suction inlet shall be
between 75 and 150 mm above the sump bottom. The suction side of each pump shall
have a strainer of ample capacity. A float switch assembly, with the switch completely
enclosed in a NEMA 250, Type [1] [4] enclosure, shall start and stop each motor at
predetermined water levels. Duplex pumps shall be equipped with an automatic
alternator to change the lead operation from one pump to the other, and for starting the
second pump if the flow exceeds the capacity of the first pump. The discharge line from
each pump shall be provided with a union or flange, a nonclog swing check valve, and a
stop valve in an accessible location near the pump.
2.12.2 Circulating Pumps
Domestic hot water circulating pumps shall be electrically driven, single-stage, centrifugal,
with mechanical seals, suitable for the intended service.
Pump and motor shall be
[integrally mounted on a cast-iron or steel subbase,] . The shaft shall be one-piece, heattreated, corrosion-resisting steel with impeller and smooth-surfaced housing of bronze.
Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled and shall have sufficient wattage for the
service required. Each pump motor shall be equipped with an across-the-line magnetic
controller in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with "START-STOP" switch in cover.
Integral size motors shall be premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Pump motors smaller than 746 W shall have integral thermal overload protection in
accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Guards shall
shield exposed moving parts.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 34 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.12.3 Booster Pumps
2.12.3.1 Centrifugal Pumps
Horizontal split-case centrifugal-type booster pumps shall be furnished. The capacities
shall be as shown, and the speed shall not exceed 1800 rpm. Pumps shall have a casing
of close-grained iron or steel with smooth water passages. A gasket shall be provided
between the upper and lower halves of the casing. Suction and discharge connections
shall be flanged. Impellers shall be nonoverloading, bronze, balanced to eliminate
vibration, and shall be keyed to corrosion-resisting steel shafts. The casings shall be
fitted with bronze wearing or sealing rings. Bearings shall be cartridge type, enabling the
entire rotating element to be removed without disturbing alignment or exposing the
bearings to dirt, water, and other foreign matter. Pumps shall be provided with
mechanical seals. Seal boxes shall be machined in the pump casing and at both sides of
the pump, and shall be of sufficient depth to include a conventional bronze seal ring and
rows of shaft packing. Bedplates shall be close-grain cast iron or steel with ribs and lugs,
complete with foundation bolts, and shall have a drip lip with drain hole. Each pump shall
be tested at the manufacturer's plant for operating characteristics at the rated capacity
and under specified operating conditions. Test curves shall be furnished showing
capacity in liters per second, head in meters, efficiency, brake wattage, and operation in
parallel with similar pumps.
Multiple pump installations shall have pump characteristics compatible for operation in
parallel with similar pumps. The electric motor shall be sized for non-overload when
operating at any point along the characteristic curve of the pump. Guards shall shield
exposed belts and moving parts.
2.12.3.2 Controls
Each pump motor shall be provided with enclosed across-the-line-type magnetic
controller complete in a NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure with three position, "HAND-OFFAUTOMATIC," selector switch in cover. Pumps shall be automatically started and
stopped by float or pressure switches, as indicated. The pumps shall start and stop at the
levels and pressures indicated. A multiposition sequence selector switch shall be
provided so that any two pumps may be operated simultaneously beeping a third pump
as a standby.
2.12.4 Flexible Connectors
Flexible connectors shall be provided at the suction and discharge of each pump that is 1
hp or larger. Connectors shall be constructed of neoprene, rubber, or braided bronze,
with Class 150 standard flanges. Flexible connectors shall be line size and suitable for
the pressure and temperature of the intended service.
2.12.5 Sewage Pumps
Provide single type duplex type with automatic controls to alternate the operation from
one pump to the other pump and to start the second pump in the event the first pump
cannot handle the incoming flow. Provide high water alarm and check valve.
2.13
WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM
2.13.1 Constant Speed Pumping System
Constant speed pumping system with pressure-regulating valves shall employ one lead
pump for low flows, and one or more lag pumps for higher flows. Pressure-regulating
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 35 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
valves shall be provided with nonslam check feature. The factory prepiped and prewired
assembly shall be mounted on a steel frame, complete with pumps, motors, and
automatic controls. The system capacity and capacity of individual pumps shall be as
indicated. Current sensing relays shall provide staging of the pumps. The pumps shall be
protected from thermal buildup, when running at no-flow, by a common thermal relief
valve. Pressure gauges shall be mounted on the suction and discharge headers. The
control panel shall bear the UL listing label for industrial control panels and shall be in a
NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. The control panel shall include the following: No-flow
shutdown; 7-day time clock; audiovisual alarm; external resets; manual alternation;
magnetic motor controllers; time delays; transformer; current relays; "HAND-OFFAUTOMATIC" switches for each pump; minimum run timers; low suction pressure cutout;
and indicating lights for power on, individual motor overload, and low suction pressure.
The control circuit shall be interlocked so that the failure of any controller shall energize
the succeeding controller.
2.13.2 Hydro-Pneumatic Water Pressure System
An ASME code constructed tank stamped for 862 kPa water working pressure shall be
provided. The tank shall have a flexible diaphragm made of material conforming to FDA
requirements for use with potable water and shall be factory precharged to meet required
system pressure.
2.13.3 Variable Speed Pumping System
Variable speed pumping system shall provide system pressure by varying speed and
number of operating pumps. The factory prepiped and prewired assembly shall be
mounted on a steel frame complete with pumps, variable speed drives, motors, and
controls. The variable speed drives shall be the oil-filled type capable of power
transmission throughout their complete speed range without vibration, noise, or shock
loading. Each variable speed drive shall be run-tested by the manufacturer for rated
performance, and the manufacturer shall furnish written performance certification.
System shall have suppressors to prevent noise transmission over electric feed lines.
Required electrical control circuitry and system function sensors shall be supplied by the
variable speed drive manufacturer. The primary power controls and magnetic motor
controllers shall be installed in [the controls supplied by the drive manufacturer] . The
sensors shall be located in the system to control drive speed as a function of [constant
system pressure at location indicated]. Connection between the sensors and the variable
speed drive controls shall be accomplished with [telemetry]. Controls shall
be in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures.
2.14
COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
2.14.1 Air Compressors
Air compressor unit shall be a factory-packaged assembly, including [ ] phase, [ ] volt
motor controls, switches, wiring, accessories, and motor controllers, in a NEMA 250,
Type [1] [4] enclosure. Tank-mounted air compressors shall be manufactured to comply
with UL listing requirements. Air compressors shall have manufacturer's name and
address, together with trade name, and catalog number on a nameplate securely
attached to the equipment. Each compressor shall [start and stop automatically at upper
and lower pressure limits of the system] [regulate pressure by constant speed
compressor loading and unloading] [have a manual-off-automatic switch that when in the
manual position, the compressor loads and unloads to meet the demand and, in the
automatic position, a time delay relay shall allow the compressor to operate for an
adjustable length of time unloaded, then stop the unit]. Guards shall shield exposed
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 36 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
moving parts. Each duplex compressor system shall be provided with [automatic]
[manual] alternation system. Each compressor motor shall be provided with an acrossthe-line-type magnetic controller, complete with low-voltage release. An intake air filter
and silencer shall be provided with each compressor. Aftercooler and moisture separator
shall be installed between compressors and air receiver to remove moisture and oil
condensate before the air enters the receiver. Aftercoolers shall be either air- or watercooled, as indicated. The air shall pass through a sufficient number of tubes to affect
cooling. Tubes shall be sized to give maximum heat transfer.
Water to unit shall be controlled by a solenoid or pneumatic valve, which opens when the
compressors start and closes when the compressors shut down. Cooling capacity of the
aftercooler shall be sized for the total capacity of the compressors. Means shall be
provided for draining condensed moisture from the receiver by an automatic float type
trap. Capacities of air compressors and receivers shall be as indicated.
2.14.2 Lubricated Compressors
Compressors shall be two-stage, V-belt drive, capable of operating continuously against
their designed discharge pressure, and shall operate at a speed not in excess of 1800
rpm. Compressors shall have the capacity and discharge pressure indicated.
Compressors shall be assembled complete on a common subbase. The compressor
main bearings shall be either roller or ball. The discharge passage of the high pressure
air shall be piped to the air receiver with a copper pipe or tubing. A pressure gauge
calibrated to 1.03 MPa and equipped with a gauge cock and pulsation dampener shall be
furnished for installation adjacent to pressure switches.
2.14.3 Air Receivers
Receivers shall be designed for 1.38 MPa working pressure. Receivers shall be factory
air tested to 1- 1/2 times the working pressure. Receivers shall be equipped with safety
relief valves and accessories, including pressure gauges and automatic and manual
drains. The outside of air receivers may be galvanized or supplied with commercial
enamel finish. Receivers shall be designed and constructed in accordance with ASME
BPVC SEC VIII D1 and shall have the design working pressures specified herein. A
display of the ASME seal on the receiver or a certified test report from an approved
independent testing laboratory indicating conformance to the ASME Code shall be
provided.
2.14.4 Intake Air Supply Filter
Dry type air filter shall be provided having a collection efficiency of 99 percent of particles
larger than 10 microns. Filter body and media shall withstand a maximum 862 kPa,
capacity as indicated.
2.14.5 Pressure Regulators
The air system shall be provided with the necessary regulator valves to maintain the
desired pressure for the installed equipment. Regulators shall be designed for a
maximum inlet pressure of 862 kPa and a maximum temperature of 93 degrees C.
Regulators shall be single-seated, pilot-operated with valve plug, bronze body and trim or
equal, and threaded connections. The regulator valve shall include a pressure gauge and
shall be provided with an adjustment screw for adjusting the pressure differential from 0
kPa to 862 kPa. Regulator shall be sized as indicated.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 37 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.15
DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE METER
Cold water meters 50 mm and smaller shall be positive displacement type conforming to
AWWA C700. Cold water meters 64 mm and larger shall be turbine type conforming to
AWWA C701. Meter register may be round or straight reading type, [as provided by the
local utility]. Meter shall be provided with a pulse generator, remote readout register and
all necessary wiring and accessories.
2.16
POOL WATER PUMP SAFETY VACUUM RELEASE SYSTEM (SVRS)
Safety vacuum release system (SVRS) shall meet the requirements specified in ASME
A112.19.17, or ASTM F2387, as modified and supplemented by this specification.
System shall include:
Vacuum monitoring at least 60 times per second.
Power supply monitoring at least 50 times per second.
Capable of integration with existing timer box.
Low vacuum sensing and alarm.
Maintenance override.
Power back-up.
Display of error readout.
Turns off power to pump in milliseconds upon detecting sudden vacuum change.
Multiple audible alarm capabilities for multiple harmful situations.
2.17
ELECTRICAL WORK
Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors, motor starters,
and controls as specified herein and in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM. Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral
part of the equipment. Provide [high efficiency type, ]single-phase, fractional-horsepower
alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system, corresponding to
the applications in accordance with NEMA MG 11. [In addition to the requirements of
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, provide polyphase, squirrel-cage
medium induction motors with continuous ratings, including motors that are part of a
system, that meet the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with
NEMA MG 1.] Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to
drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the
motor.
Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Motor duty
requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum
encountered interval between start and stop. Motor torque shall be capable of
accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage
maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Motor bearings shall be fitted
with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.
Controllers and contactors shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls provided.
Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 38 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not
shown, shall be provided. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide
controllers, including the required monitors and timed restart.
Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided under and
conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.18
MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS
2.18.1 Escutcheon Plates
Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors, walls, and ceilings
in exposed spaces. Provide chromium-plated on copper alloy plates or polished stainless
steel finish in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces.
2.18.2 Pipe Sleeves
Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors. Sleeves
are not required where [supply] drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through
concrete floor slabs located on grade, except where penetrating a membrane waterproof
floor.
2.18.2.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete
Provide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves. Sleeves are not
required where drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs
located on grade. Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe
sleeves when cavities in the core- drilled hole are completely grouted smooth.
2.18.2.2 Sleeves Not in Masonry and Concrete
Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves.
2.18.3 Pipe Hangers (Supports)
Provide MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, Type 1 with adjustable type steel support rods,
except as specified or indicated otherwise. Attach to steel joists with Type 19 or 23
clamps and retaining straps. Attach to Steel W or S beams with Type 21, 28, 29, or 30
clamps. Attach to steel angles and vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with
beam clamp channel adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with
drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer. Attach to concrete with Type 18
insert or drilled expansion anchor. Provide Type 40 insulation protection shield for
insulated piping.
2.18.4 Name plates
Provide 3.2 mm thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates, black matte finish with
white center core, for equipment, gages, thermometers, and valves; valves in supplies to
faucets will not require nameplates. Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of
6.4 mm high normal block lettering into the white core. Minimum size of nameplates shall
be 25 by 63 mm. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system. Frame charts
and schedules under glass and place where directed near each system. Furnish two
copies of each chart and schedule.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 39 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.18.5 Labels
Provide labels for sensor operators at flush valves and faucets. Include the following
information on each label:
a. Identification of the sensor and its operation with [graphic] [written] [Braille] description.
b. Range of the sensor.
c. Battery replacement schedule.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 40 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements. Piping located in
shafts that constitute air ducts or that enclose air ducts shall be noncombustible in
accordance with NFPA 90A. Installation of plastic pipe where in compliance with NFPA
may be installed in accordance with PPFA Fire Man. The plumbing system shall be
installed complete with necessary fixtures, fittings, traps, valves, and accessories. Water
and drainage piping shall be extended 1.5 m outside the building, unless otherwise
indicated. A [gate valve] [full port ball valve] [ball valve] and drain shall be installed on the
water service line inside the building approximately 150 mm above the floor from point of
entry.
Piping shall be connected to the exterior service lines or capped or plugged if the exterior
service is not in place. Sewer and water pipes shall be laid in separate trenches, except
when otherwise shown. Exterior underground utilities shall be at least 300 mm below the
[average local frost depth] [finish grade] or as indicated on the drawings. If trenches are
closed or the pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to the service lines,
the location of the end of each plumbing utility shall be marked with a stake or other
acceptable means. Valves shall be installed with control no lower than
the valve body.
3.1.1 Water Pipe, Fittings, and Connections
3.1.1.1 Utilities
The piping shall be extended to fixtures, outlets, and equipment. The hot-water and coldwater piping system shall be arranged and installed to permit draining. The supply line to
each item of equipment or fixture, except faucets, flush valves, or other control valves
which are supplied with integral stops, shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable
isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other
equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to fixtures, faucets, hydrants, shower heads, and
flushing devices shall be anchored to prevent movement.
3.1.1.2 Cutting and Repairing
The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting of construction
shall be avoided. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment as a result of cutting
shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved.
3.1.1.3 Protection of Fixtures, Materials, and Equipment
Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and
equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemicals, and
mechanical injury. Upon completion of the work, the fixtures, materials, and equipment
shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted, and operated. Safety guards shall be provided for
exposed rotating equipment.
3.1.1.4 Mains, Branches, and Runouts
Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be accurately cut and worked into place
without springing or forcing. Structural portions of the building shall not be weakened.
Aboveground piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building, unless otherwise
indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom, or side of
main, using crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions. Supply
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 41 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other
services to permit not less than 12 mm between finished covering on the different
services. Bare and insulated water lines shall not bear directly against building structural
elements so as to transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the
lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless specifically indicated or
approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. Use of bushings
will not be permitted except for use in situations in which standard factory fabricated
components are furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice.
Change in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 100 mm and
smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide sweep bends are
formed. The center-line radius of bends shall be not less than six diameters of the pipe.
Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations will not be
acceptable.
3.1.1.5 Pipe Drains
Pipe drains indicated shall consist of 20 mm hose bibb with renewable seat and [gate] [full
port ball] [ball] valve ahead of hose bibb. At other low points, 20 mm brass plugs or caps
shall be provided. Disconnection of the supply piping at the fixture is an acceptable drain.
3.1.1.6 Expansion and Contraction of Piping
Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of water pipe. Each
hot-water and hot-water circulation riser shall have expansion loops or other provisions
such as offsets, changes in direction, etc., where indicated and/or required. Risers shall
be securely anchored as required or where indicated to force expansion to loops. Branch
connections from risers shall be made with ample swing or offset to avoid undue strain on
fittings or short pipe lengths. Horizontal runs of pipe over 15 m in length shall be
anchored to the wall or the supporting construction about midway on the run to force
expansion, evenly divided, toward the ends. Sufficient flexibility shall be provided on
branch runouts from mains and risers to provide for expansion and contraction of piping.
Flexibility shall be provided by installing one or more turns in the line so that piping will
spring enough to allow for expansion without straining. If mechanical grooved pipe
coupling systems are provided, the deviation from design requirements for expansion and
contraction may be allowed pending approval of Contracting Officer.
3.1.1.7 Thrust Restraint
Plugs, caps, tees, valves and bends deflecting 11.25 degrees or more, either vertically or
horizontally, in waterlines 100 mm in diameter or larger shall be provided with thrust
blocks, where indicated, to prevent movement. Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix
not leaner than: 1 cement, 2-1/2 sand, 5 gravel; and having a compressive strength of
not less than 14 MPa after 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between solid ground and
the fitting to be anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or directed, the base and thrust
bearing sides of the thrust block shall be poured against undisturbed earth. The side of
the thrust block not subject to thrust shall be poured against forms. The area of bearing
will be as shown. Blocking shall be placed so that the joints of the fitting are accessible
for repair. Steel rods and clamps, protected by galvanizing or by coating with bituminous
paint, shall be used to anchor vertical down bends into gravity thrust blocks.
3.1.1.8 Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters
Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall be provided on hot- and cold-water
supplies and shall be located as generally indicated, with precise location and sizing to be
in accordance with PDI WH 201. Water hammer arresters, where concealed, shall be
accessible by means of access doors or removable panels. Commercial-type water
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 42 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
hammer arresters shall conform to ASSE 1010. Vertical capped pipe columns will not be
permitted.
3.1.2 Compressed Air Piping (Non-Oil Free)
Compressed air piping shall be installed as specified for water piping and suitable for 862
kPa working pressure. Compressed air piping shall have supply lines and discharge
terminals legibly and permanently marked at both ends with the name of the system and
the direction of flow.
3.1.3 Joints
Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for
tees will not be permitted. Joints shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and
made for the specific purpose intended.
3.1.3.1 Threaded
Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming to ASME
B1.20.1. Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or with an approved
graphite compound, or with an inert filler and oil, or shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene
tape applied.
3.1.3.2 Mechanical Couplings
Mechanical couplings may be used in conjunction with grooved pipe for aboveground,
ferrous or non- ferrous, domestic hot and cold water systems, in lieu of unions, brazed,
soldered, welded, flanged, or threaded joints.
Mechanical couplings are permitted in accessible locations including behind access
plates. Flexible grooved joints will not be permitted, except as vibration isolators adjacent
to mechanical equipment. Rigid grooved joints shall incorporate an angle bolt pad design
which maintains metal-to-metal contact with equal amount of pad offset of housings upon
installation to ensure positive rigid clamping of the pipe.
Designs which can only clamp on the bottom of the groove or which utilize gripping teeth
or jaws, or which use misaligned housing bolt holes, or which require a torque wrench or
torque specifications will not be permitted.
Rigid grooved pipe couplings shall be for use with grooved end pipes, fittings, valves and
strainers. Rigid couplings shall be designed for not less than 862 kPa service and
appropriate for static head plus the pumping head, and shall provide a watertight joint.
Grooved fittings and couplings, and grooving tools shall be provided from the same
manufacturer. Segmentally welded elbows shall not be used. Grooves shall be prepared
in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's latest published standards. Grooving
shall be performed by qualified grooving operators having demonstrated proper grooving
procedures in accordance with the tool manufacturer's recommendations.
The Contracting Officer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of test to demonstrate
operator's capability, and the test shall be performed at the work site, if practical, or at a
site agreed upon. The operator shall demonstrate the ability to properly adjust the
grooving tool, groove the pipe, and to verify the groove dimensions in accordance with
the coupling manufacturer's specifications.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 43 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.1.3.3 Unions and Flanges
Unions, flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, or
partitions. Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 65 mm and smaller; flanges shall be used
on pipe sizes 80 mm and larger.
3.1.3.4 Grooved Mechanical Joints
Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's instructions.
Grooved fittings, couplings, and grooving tools shall be products of the same
manufacturer. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances specified by
the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured
using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, narrow- land micrometer, or other
method specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended application.
Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded
for each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's
tolerances. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations.
3.1.3.5 Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Vent Pipe
Bell and spigot compression and hubless gasketed clamp joints for soil, waste and vent
piping shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.3.6 Copper Tube and Pipe
a. Brazed. Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2/B2.2M, ASME
B16.50, and CDA A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe sizes. Copper to
copper joints shall include the use of copper-phosphorus or copper-phosphorus-silver
brazing metal without flux. Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass)
shall include the use of flux with either a copper- phosphorus, copper-phosphorussilver or a silver brazing filler metal.
b. Soldered. Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only acceptable for piping
50 mm and smaller. Soldered joints shall conform to ASME B31.5 and CDA A4015.
Soldered joints shall not be used in compressed air piping between the air
compressor and the receiver.
c. Copper Tube Extracted Joint. Mechanically extracted joints shall be made in
accordance with ICC IPC.
d. Press connection. Copper press connections shall be made in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's installation instructions for manufactured rated size. The joints
shall be pressed using the tool(s) approved by the manufacturer of that joint.
Minimum distance between fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
requirements.
3.1.3.7 Plastic Pipe
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement.
PVC and CPVC pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement elastomeric, threading,
(threading of Schedule 80 Pipe is allowed only where required for disconnection and
inspection; threading of Schedule 40 Pipe is not allowed), or mated flanged.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 44 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.1.3.8 Glass Pipe
Joints for corrosive waste glass pipe and fittings shall be made with corrosion-resisting
steel compression-type couplings with acrylonitrile rubber gaskets lined with
polytetrafluoroethylene.
3.1.3.9 Corrosive Waste Plastic Pipe
Joints for polyolefin pipe and fittings shall be made by mechanical joint or electrical fusion
coil method in accordance with ASTM D2657 and ASTM F1290. Joints for filamentwound reinforced thermosetting resin pipe shall be made in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Unions or flanges shall be used where required for
disconnection and inspection.
3.1.3.10 Polypropylene Pipe
Joints for polypropylene pipe and fittings shall be made by heat fusion welding sockettype or butt- fusion type fittings and shall comply with ASTM F2389.
3.1.3.11 Other Joint Methods
3.1.4 Dissimilar Pipe Materials
Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous copper water pipe shall be made with
dielectric unions or flange waterways. Dielectric waterways shall have temperature and
pressure rating equal to or greater than that specified for the connecting piping.
Waterways shall have metal connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping.
Dielectric waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed to
prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric flanges shall meet the
performance requirements described herein for dielectric waterways. Connecting joints
between plastic and metallic pipe shall be made with transition fitting for the specific
purpose.
3.1.5 Corrosion Protection for Buried Pipe and Fittings
Ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pipe, fittings, and joints shall have a protective coating.
Additionally, ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pressure pipe shall have a cathodic
protection system and joint bonding. The cathodic protection system, protective coating
system, and joint bonding for cathodically protected pipe shall be in accordance with
[Section 26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)]
[and] [Section 26 42 17.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (IMPRESSED
CURRENT)] [Section 26 42 13.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY GALVANIC
ANODES] [and] [Section 26 42 19.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY IMPRESSED
CURRENT] [Section 26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL
ANODE)][Section 26 42 19.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY IMPRESSED
CURRENT]. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance with
NACE SP0169 and as otherwise specified. The pipe shall be cleaned and the coating
system applied prior to pipe tightness testing. Joints and fittings shall be cleaned and the
coating system applied after pipe tightness testing. For tape coating systems, the tape
shall conform to AWWA C203 and shall be applied with a 50 percent overlap. Primer
utilized with tape type coating systems shall be as recommended by the tape
manufacturer.
3.1.6 Pipe Sleeves and Flashing
Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent location.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 45 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.1.6.1 Sleeve Requirements
Unless indicated otherwise, provide pipe sleeves meeting the following requirements:
Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient
length to pass through entire thickness of walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors.
A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a waterproofing
clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space between pipe and sleeve.
The seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the
annular space between the pipe and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and
pressure plates. The links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous
rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut.
After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall
cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the
pipe and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the
manufacturer to fit the pipe and sleeve involved.
Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except where indicated or approved.
Rectangular and square openings shall be as detailed. Each sleeve shall extend through
its respective floor, or roof, and shall be cut flush with each surface, except for special
circumstances. Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet areas such as mechanical
equipment rooms, lavatories, kitchens, and other plumbing fixture areas shall extend a
minimum of 100 mm above the finished floor.
Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a minimum of [ 6 mm ][
25 mm ] clearance between bare pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or between
insulation and inside of sleeve. Sleeves in bearing walls and concrete slab on grade
floors shall be steel pipe or cast-iron pipe. Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings may be
steel pipe, cast-iron pipe, galvanized sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal seam, or
plastic.
Except as otherwise specified, the annular space between pipe and sleeve, or between
jacket over insulation and sleeve, shall be sealed as indicated with sealants conforming to
ASTM C920 and with a primer, backstop material and surface preparation as specified in
Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. The annular space between pipe and sleeve,
between bare insulation and sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall not
be sealed for interior walls which are not designated as fire rated.
Sleeves through below-grade walls in contact with earth shall be recessed 12 mm from
wall surfaces on both sides. Annular space between pipe and sleeve shall be filled with
backing material and sealants in the joint between the pipe and [concrete] [masonry] wall
as specified above. Sealant selected for the earth side of the wall shall be compatible
with dampproofing/waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the joint sealant.
Pipe sleeves in fire-rated walls shall conform to the requirements in Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.6.2 Flashing Requirements
Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 4.9 kg per square meter copper
flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be suitably formed, and the
skirt or flange shall extend not less than 200 mm from the pipe and shall be set over the
roof or floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend
up the pipe a minimum of 250 mm. For cleanouts, the flashing shall be turned down into
the hub and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through pitched roofs shall
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 46 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
be flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an adjustable integral flange of adequate
size to extend not less than 200 mm from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the
roofing to provide a watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the bare
pipe or between the flashing and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be sealed as
indicated. Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down into the pipe to form a waterproof
joint. Pipes, up to and including 250 mm in diameter, passing through roof or floor
waterproofing membrane may be installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking
recess, anchor lugs, flashing-clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing
shield shall be fitted into the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing through wall
waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as described above. A waterproofing clamping
flange shall be installed.
3.1.6.3 Waterproofing
Waterproofing at floor-mounted water closets shall be accomplished by forming a flashing
guard from soft-tempered sheet copper. The center of the sheet shall be perforated and
turned down approximately 40 mm to fit between the outside diameter of the drainpipe
and the inside diameter of the cast-iron or steel pipe sleeve. The turned-down portion of
the flashing guard shall be embedded in sealant to a depth of approximately 40 mm; then
the sealant shall be finished off flush to floor level between the flashing guard and
drainpipe. The flashing guard of sheet copper shall extend not less than 200 mm from
the drainpipe and shall be lapped between the floor membrane in a solid coating of
bituminous cement. If cast-iron water closet floor flanges are used, the space between
the pipe sleeve and drainpipe shall be sealed with sealant and the flashing guard shall be
upturned approximately 40 mm to fit the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside
diameter of the water closet floor flange. The upturned portion of the sheet fitted into the
floor flange shall be sealed.
3.1.6.4 Optional Counterflashing
Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and sealing the
annular space between the pipe and flashing or metal-jacket-covered insulation and
flashing, counterflashing may be accomplished by utilizing the following:
a. A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 150 mm in diameter.
b. A tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe.
3.1.6.5 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors
Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items penetrate slab on
grade floors, except at penetrations of floors with waterproofing membrane as specified in
paragraphs Flashing Requirements and Waterproofing, a groove 6 to 13 mm wide by 6 to
10 mm deep shall be formed around the pipe, fitting or drain. The groove shall be filled
with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.1.6.6 Pipe Penetrations
Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall be sealed to prevent
infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.
3.1.7 Fire Seal
Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire-partitions, fire-rated pipe chase walls or floors
above grade, a fire seal shall be provided as specified in Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 47 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.1.8 Supports
3.1.8.1 General
Hangers used to support piping 50 mm and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate
adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. Pipe guides and anchors shall be
installed to keep pipes in accurate alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to
prevent buckling, swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical movement
when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by
variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. In the support of
multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall be used where each
pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of the base support members shall not
exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe
run. Threaded sections of rods shall not be formed or bent.
3.1.8.2 Pipe Supports and Structural Bracing, Seismic Requirements
Piping and attached valves shall be supported and braced to resist seismic loads as
specified in Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIPMENT and [Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT] [Section 22 05 48.00 20 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND
SEISMIC CONTROL] [as shown]. Structural steel required for reinforcement to properly
support piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be provided. Material used
for supports shall be as specified in[ Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL][ Section 05
50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS][ Section 05 51 33 METAL
LADDERS][ Section 05 52 00 METAL RAILINGS][ Section 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS].
3.1.8.3 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS
SP-69, except as modified herein.
a. Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.
b. Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe.
c. Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed.
Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if they otherwise meet
the requirements for type 18 inserts.
d. Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and shall have both
locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer. Field-fabricated Cclamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.
e. Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an added
malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.
f.
Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.
g. Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 100 mm and larger when the
temperature of the medium is 15 degrees C or higher. Type 39 saddles shall be
welded to the pipe.
h. Type 40 shields shall:
(1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 100 mm.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 48 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
(2) Be used on insulated pipe 100 mm and larger when the temperature of the
medium is 15 degrees C or less.
(3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes. High density inserts shall have a
density of 128 kg per cubic meter or greater.
i.
Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a support
shall be installed not over 300 mm from the pipe fitting joint at each change in
direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 1.5 m apart at valves.
Operating temperatures in determining hanger spacing for PVC or CPVC pipe shall
be 49 degrees C for PVC and 82 degrees C for CPVC. Horizontal pipe runs shall
include allowances for expansion and contraction.
j.
Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade, at intervals of
not more than
4.5 m nor more than 2 m from end of risers, and at vent terminations. Vertical pipe
risers shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.
k. Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or graphite
slides shall be provided to allow longitudinal pipe movement. Slide materials shall be
suitable for the system operating temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing
loads encountered. Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed. Where steel
slides do not require provisions for lateral restraint the following may be used:
(1) On pipe 100 mm and larger when the temperature of the medium is 15 degrees C
or higher, a Type 39 saddle, welded to the pipe, may freely rest on a steel plate.
(2) On pipe less than 100 mm a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation,
may freely rest on a steel plate.
(3) On pipe 100 mm and larger carrying medium less that 15 degrees C a Type
40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.
l.
Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the outside diameter of
the insulation.
The insulation shall be continuous through the hanger on all pipe sizes and
applications.
m. Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not desirable, the
type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle, welded to the guide structure and strapped
securely to the pipe. The pipe shall be separated from the slide material by at least
100 mm or by an amount adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater.
n. Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort, cut or abrade the
piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe except where otherwise required in the
control of expansion/contraction.
3.1.8.4 Structural Attachments
Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in concrete
inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and anchors shall be applied
with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports shall not be attached to metal decking.
Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof
decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead
applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 49 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.1.9 Welded Installation
Plumbing pipe weldments shall be as indicated. Changes in direction of piping shall be
made with welding fittings only; mitering or notching pipe to form elbows and tees or other
similar type construction will not be permitted. Branch connection may be made with
either welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings. Branch outlet fittings shall be forged,
flared for improvement of flow where attached to the run, and reinforced against external
strains. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of weld shall conform to
ASME B31.1. Weld defects shall be removed and repairs made to the weld, or the weld
joints shall be entirely removed and rewelded. After filler metal has been removed from
its original package, it shall be protected or stored so that its characteristics or welding
properties are not affected. Electrodes that have been wetted or that have lost any of
their coating shall not be used.
3.1.10 Pipe Cleanouts
Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than
100 mm will not be required. A cleanout installed in connection with cast-iron soil pipe
shall consist of a long-sweep 1/4 bend or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the place
shown. An extra-heavy cast-brass or cast-iron ferrule with countersunk cast-brass head
screw plug shall be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with the floor.
Cleanouts in connection with other pipe, where indicated, shall be T- pattern, 90-degree
branch drainage fittings with cast-brass screw plugs, except plastic plugs shall be
installed in plastic pipe. Plugs shall be the same size as the pipe up to and including 100
mm.
Cleanout tee branches with screw plug shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste
stacks, at the foot of interior downspouts, on each connection to building storm drain
where interior downspouts are indicated, and on each building drain outside the building.
Cleanout tee branches may be omitted on stacks in single story buildings with slab-ongrade construction or where less than 450 mm of crawl space is provided under the floor.
Cleanouts on pipe concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium plated bronze,
nickel bronze, nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover plates. Round
access covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with securing screw. Square
access covers may be provided with matching frames, anchoring lugs and cover screws.
Cleanouts in finished walls shall have access covers and frames installed flush with the
finished wall. Cleanouts installed in finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided
with a chrome-plated cast brass, nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to the plug
or cover frame and set flush with the finished floor. Heads of fastening screws shall not
project above the cover surface. Where cleanouts are provided with adjustable heads,
the heads shall be [cast iron] [or] [plastic].
3.2
WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS
3.2.1 Relief Valves
No valves shall be installed between a relief valve and its water heater or storage tank.
The P&T relief valve shall be installed where the valve actuator comes in contact with the
hottest water in the heater. Whenever possible, the relief valve shall be installed directly
in a tapping in the tank or heater; otherwise, the P&T valve shall be installed in the hotwater outlet piping. A vacuum relief valve shall be provided on the cold water supply line
to the hot-water storage tank or water heater and mounted above and within 150 mm
above the top of the tank or water heater.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 50 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.2.2 Installation of Gas- and Oil-Fired Water Heater
Installation shall conform to NFPA 54 for gas fired and NFPA 31 for oil fired. Storage
water heaters that are not equipped with integral heat traps and having vertical pipe risers
shall be installed with heat traps directly on both the inlet and outlet. Circulating systems
need not have heat traps installed. An acceptable heat trap may be a piping arrangement
such as elbows connected so that the inlet and outlet piping make vertically upward runs
of not less than 600 mm just before turning downward or directly horizontal into the water
heater's inlet and outlet fittings. Commercially available heat traps, specifically designed
by the manufacturer for the purpose of effectively restricting the natural tendency of hot
water to rise through vertical inlet and outlet piping during standby periods may also be
approved.
3.2.3 Heat Traps
Piping to and from each water heater and hot water storage tank shall be routed
horizontally and downward a minimum of 600 mm before turning in an upward direction.
3.2.4 Connections to Water Heaters
Connections of metallic pipe to water heaters shall be made with dielectric unions or
flanges.
3.2.5 Expansion Tank
A pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply between the
water heater inlet and the cold water supply shut-off valve. The Contractor shall adjust
the expansion tank air pressure, as recommended by the tank manufacturer, to match
incoming water pressure.
3.2.6 Direct Fired and Domestic Water Heaters
Notify the Contracting Officer when any direct fired domestic water heater over 117,124.2
Watts is operational and ready to be inspected and certified.
3.3
FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS
Polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to
view. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of
lock-shield, and loose-key pattern stops for supplies with threaded, sweat or solvent weld
inlets shall be furnished and installed with fixtures. Where connections between copper
tubing and faucets are made by rubber compression fittings, a beading tool shall be used
to mechanically deform the tubing above the compression fitting. Exposed traps and
supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall be connected to the rough piping systems at
the wall, unless otherwise specified under the item. Floor and wall escutcheons shall be
as specified. Drain lines and hot water lines of fixtures for handicapped personnel shall
be insulated and do not require polished chrome finish. Plumbing fixtures and
accessories shall be installed within the space shown.
3.3.1 Fixture Connections
Where space limitations prohibit standard fittings in conjunction with the cast-iron floor
flange, special short-radius fittings shall be provided. Connections between earthenware
fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be made gastight and watertight with a closetsetting compound or neoprene gasket and seal. Use of natural rubber gaskets or putty
will not be permitted. Fixtures with outlet flanges shall be set the proper distance from
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 51 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
floor or wall to make a first-class joint with the closet-setting compound or gasket and
fixture used.
3.3.2 Flushometer Valves
Flushometer valves shall be secured to prevent movement by anchoring the long finished
top spud connecting tube to wall adjacent to valve with approved metal bracket.
[Flushometer valves for water closets shall be installed 1 m above the floor, except at
water closets intended for use by the physically handicapped where flushometer valves
shall be mounted at approximately 760 mm above the floor and arranged to avoid
interference with grab bars. In addition, for water closets intended for handicap use, the
flush valve handle shall be installed on the wide side of the enclosure.] [Bumpers for
water closet seats shall be installed on the [wall] [flushometer stop] [flushometer spud].]
3.3.3 Height of Fixture Rims Above Floor
Lavatories shall be mounted with rim 775 mm above finished floor. Wall-hung drinking
fountains and water coolers shall be installed with rim 1020 mm above floor. Wall-hung
service sinks shall be mounted with rim 700 mm above the floor. Installation of fixtures
for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1.
3.3.4 Shower Bath Outfits
The area around the water supply piping to the mixing valves and behind the escutcheon
plate shall be made watertight by caulking or gasketing.
3.3.5 Fixture Supports
Fixture supports for off-the-floor lavatories, urinals, water closets, and other fixtures of
similar size, design, and use, shall be of the chair-carrier type. The carrier shall provide
the necessary means of mounting the fixture, with a foot or feet to anchor the assembly to
the floor slab. Adjustability shall be provided to locate the fixture at the desired height and
in proper relation to the wall. Support plates, in lieu of chair carrier, shall be fastened to
the wall structure only where it is not possible to anchor a floor-mounted chair carrier to
the floor slab.
3.3.5.1 Support for Solid Masonry Construction
Chair carrier shall be anchored to the floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair carrier
cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be imbedded in the masonry wall.
3.3.5.2 Support for Concrete-Masonry Wall Construction
Chair carrier shall be anchored to floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair carrier cannot
be used, a suitable wall plate shall be fastened to the concrete wall using through bolts
and a back-up plate.
3.3.5.3 Support for Steel Stud Frame Partitions
Chair carrier shall be used. The anchor feet and tubular uprights shall be of the heavy
duty design; and feet (bases) shall be steel and welded to a square or rectangular steel
tube upright. Wall plates, in lieu of floor-anchored chair carriers, shall be used only if
adjoining steel partition studs are suitably reinforced to support a wall plate bolted to
these studs.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 52 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.3.5.4 Support for Wood Stud Construction
Where floor is a concrete slab, a floor-anchored chair carrier shall be used. Where entire
construction is wood, wood crosspieces shall be installed. Fixture hanger plates,
supports, brackets, or mounting lugs shall be fastened with not less than No. 10 wood
screws, 6 mm thick minimum steel hanger, or toggle bolts with nut. The wood
crosspieces shall extend the full width of the fixture and shall be securely supported.
3.3.5.5 Wall-Mounted Water Closet Gaskets
Where wall-mounted water closets are provided, reinforced wax, treated felt, or neoprene
gaskets shall be provided. The type of gasket furnished shall be as recommended by the
chair-carrier manufacturer.
3.3.6 Backflow Prevention Devices
Plumbing fixtures, equipment, and pipe connections shall not cross connect or
interconnect between a potable water supply and any source of nonpotable water.
Backflow preventers shall be installed where indicated and in accordance with [ICC IPC]
[ICC IPC] [IAPMO UPC] at all other locations necessary to preclude a cross-connect or
interconnect between a potable water supply and any nonpotable substance. In addition
backflow preventers shall be installed at all locations where the potable water outlet is
below the flood level of the equipment, or where the potable water outlet will be located
below the level of the nonpotable substance. Backflow preventers shall be located so
that no part of the device will be submerged. Backflow preventers shall be of sufficient
size to allow unrestricted flow of water to the equipment, and preclude the backflow of
any nonpotable substance into the potable water system. Bypass piping shall not be
provided around backflow preventers. Access shall be provided for maintenance and
testing. Each device shall be a standard commercial unit.
3.3.7 Access Panels
Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any item requiring
inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that
the concealed items may be serviced, maintained, or replaced. Access panels shall be
as specified in[ Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS][ Section
05 51 33 METAL LADDERS][ Section 05 52 00 METAL RAILINGS][ Section 05 51 00
METAL STAIRS].
3.3.8 Sight Drains
Sight drains shall be installed so that the indirect waste will terminate 50 mm above the
flood rim of the funnel to provide an acceptable air gap.
3.3.9 Traps
Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture shall be doubletrapped. Traps installed on cast-iron soil pipe shall be cast iron. Traps installed on steel
pipe or copper tubing shall be recess-drainage pattern, or brass-tube type. Traps
installed on plastic pipe may be plastic conforming to ASTM D3311. Traps for acidresisting waste shall be of the same material as the pipe.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 53 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.3.10 Shower Pans
Before installing shower pan, subfloor shall be free of projections such as nail heads or
rough edges of aggregate. Drain shall be a bolt-down, clamping-ring type with
weepholes, installed so the lip of the subdrain is flush with subfloor.
3.3.10.1 General
The floor of each individual shower, the shower-area portion of combination shower and
drying room, and the entire shower and drying room where the two are not separated by
curb or partition, shall be made watertight with a shower pan fabricated in place. The
shower pan material shall be cut to size and shape of the area indicated, in one piece to
the maximum extent practicable, allowing a minimum of 150 mm for turnup on walls or
partitions, and shall be folded over the curb with an approximate return of 1/4 of curb
height. The upstands shall be placed behind any wall or partition finish. Subflooring shall
be smooth and clean, with nailheads driven flush with surface, and shall be sloped to
drain. Shower pans shall be clamped to drains with the drain clamping ring.
3.3.10.2 Metal Shower Pans
When a shower pan of required size cannot be furnished in one piece, metal pieces shall
be joined with a flintlock seam and soldered or burned. The corners shall be folded, not
cut, and the corner seam shall be soldered or burned. Pans, including upstands, shall be
coated on all surfaces with one brush coat of asphalt. Asphalt shall be applied evenly at
not less than 1 liter per square meter. A layer of felt covered with building paper shall be
placed between shower pans and wood floors. The joining surfaces of metal pan and
drain shall be given a brush coat of asphalt after the pan is connected to the drain.
3.3.10.3 Nonplasticized Chlorinated Polyethylene Shower Pans
Corners of nonplasticized chlorinated polyethylene shower pans shall be folded against
the upstand by making a pig-ear fold. Hot-air gun or heat lamp shall be used in making
corner folds. Each pig-ear corner fold shall be nailed or stapled 12 mm from the upper
edge to hold it in place. Nails shall be galvanized large-head roofing nails. On metal
framing or studs, approved duct tape shall be used to secure pig-ear fold and membrane.
Where no backing is provided between the studs, the membrane slack shall be taken up
by pleating and stapling or nailing to studding 12 mm from upper edge. To adhere the
membrane to vertical surfaces, the back of the membrane and the surface to which it will
be applied shall be coated with adhesive that becomes dry to the touch in 5 to 10
minutes, after which the membrane shall be pressed into place. Surfaces to be solventwelded shall be clean. Surfaces to be joined with xylene shall be initially sprayed and
vigorously cleaned with a cotton cloth, followed by final coating of xylene and the joining
of the surfaces by roller or equivalent means. If ambient or membrane temperatures are
below 4 degrees C the membrane and the joint shall be heated prior to application of
xylene. Heat may be applied with hot-air gun or heat lamp, taking precautions not to
scorch the membrane. Adequate ventilation and wearing of gloves are required when
working with xylene. Membrane shall be pressed into position on the drain body, and
shall be cut and fit to match so that membrane can be properly clamped and an effective
gasket-type seal provided. On wood subflooring, two layers of 0.73 kg per square meter
dry felt shall be installed prior to installation of shower pan to ensure a smooth surface for
installation.
3.3.10.4 Non plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Shower Pans
Nonplasticized PVC shall be turned up behind walls or wall surfaces a distance of not
less than 150 mm in room areas and 75 mm above curb level in curbed spaces with
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 54 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
sufficient material to fold over and fasten to outside face of curb. Corners shall be pig-ear
type and folded between pan and studs. Only top 25 mm of upstand shall be nailed to
hold in place. Nails shall be galvanized large-head roofing type. Approved duct tape
shall be used on metal framing or studs to secure pig-ear fold and membrane. Where no
backing is provided between studs, the membrane slack shall be taken up by pleating
and stapling or nailing to studding at top inch of upstand. To adhere the membrane to
vertical surfaces, the back of the membrane and the surface to which it is to be applied
shall be coated with adhesive that becomes dry to the touch in 5 to 10 minutes, after
which the membrane shall be pressed into place. Trim for drain shall be exactly the size
of drain opening. Bolt holes shall be pierced to accommodate bolts with a tight fit.
Adhesive shall be used between pan and subdrain. Clamping ring shall be bolted firmly.
A small amount of gravel or porous materials shall be placed at weepholes so that holes
remain clear when setting bed is poured. Membrane shall be solvent welded with PVC
solvent cement. Surfaces to be solvent welded shall be clean (free of grease and grime).
Sheets shall be laid on a flat surface with an overlap of about 50 mm. Top edge shall be
folded back and surface primed with a PVC primer. PVC cement shall be applied and
surfaces immediately placed together, while still wet. Joint shall be lightly rolled with a
paint roller, then as the joint sets shall be rolled firmly but not so hard as to distort the
material. In long lengths, about 600 or 900 mm at a time shall be welded. On wood
subflooring, two layers of 0.73 kg per square meter felt shall be installed prior to
installation of shower pan to ensure a smooth surface installation.
3.4
VIBRATION-ABSORBING FEATURES
Mechanical equipment, including compressors and pumps, shall be isolated from the
building structure by approved vibration-absorbing features, unless otherwise shown.
Each foundation shall include an adequate number of standard isolation units. Each unit
shall consist of machine and floor or foundation fastening, together with intermediate
isolation material, and shall be a standard product with printed load rating. Piping
connected to mechanical equipment shall be provided with flexible connectors. Isolation
unit installation shall limit vibration to [ ] percent of the lowest equipment rpm.
3.5
WATER METER REMOTE READOUT REGISTER
The remote readout register shall be mounted at the location indicated or as directed by
the PGC engineer.
3.6
IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
3.6.1 Identification Tags
Identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved anodized
aluminum, indicating service and valve number shall be installed on valves, except those
valves installed on supplies at plumbing fixtures. Tags shall be 35 mm minimum diameter,
and marking shall be stamped or engraved. Indentations shall be black, for reading
clarity. Tags shall be attached to valves with No. 12 AWG, copper wire, chrome-plated
beaded chain, or plastic straps designed for that purpose.
3.6.2 Pipe Color Code Marking
Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND
COATINGS.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 55 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.6.3 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components
Scheme shall be provided in buildings having suspended grid ceilings. The color coding
scheme shall identify points of access for maintenance and operation of operable
components which are not visible from the finished space and installed in the space
directly above the suspended grid ceiling. The operable components shall include valves,
dampers, switches, linkages and thermostats. The color coding scheme shall consist of a
color code board and colored metal disks. Each colored metal disk shall be
approximately 12 mm in diameter and secured to removable ceiling panels with fasteners.
The fasteners shall be inserted into the ceiling panels so that the fasteners will be
concealed from view. The fasteners shall be manually removable without tools and shall
not separate from the ceiling panels when panels are dropped from ceiling height.
Installation of colored metal disks shall follow completion of the finished surface on which
the disks are to be fastened. The color code board shall have the approximate
dimensions of 1 m width, 750 mm height, and 12 mm thickness. The board shall be
made of wood fiberboard and framed under glass or 1.6 mm transparent plastic cover.
Unless otherwise directed, the color code symbols shall be approximately 20 mm in
diameter and the related lettering in 12 mm high capital letters. The color code board
shall be mounted and located in the mechanical or equipment room. The color code
system shall be as indicated below:
Color
[
3.7
System
]
[
]
Item
[
Location
]
[
]
ESCUTCHEONS
Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated piping,
exposed to view, passes through floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or
equipment rooms. Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to pipe or pipe covering and
shall be satin-finish, corrosion-resisting steel, polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or
polished chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or splitpattern, held in place by internal spring tension or setscrew.
3.8
PAINTING
Painting of pipes, hangers, supports, and other iron work, either in concealed spaces or
exposed spaces, is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.8.1 Painting of New Equipment
New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as
specified herein, and provided under each individual section.
3.8.1.1 Factory Painting Systems
Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification
that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test,
except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test.
Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test the
acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint
shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the
specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 3 mm on either side of the scratch
mark.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 56 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be
less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard factory
painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 50
degrees C, the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.
3.8.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces
Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be
painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt,
rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint,
except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 50 degrees C shall be
cleaned to bare metal.
Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding
coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the
succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray.
a. Temperatures Less Than 50 Degrees C: Immediately after cleaning, the metal
surfaces subject to temperatures less than 50 degrees C shall receive one coat of
pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.0076 mm, one coat
of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.0255 mm; and two coats of
enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.0255 mm per coat.
b. Temperatures Between 50 and 205 Degrees C: Metal surfaces subject to
temperatures between 50 and 205 degrees C shall receive two coats of 205 degrees
C heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 0.05 mm.
c. Temperatures Greater Than 205 Degrees C: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures
greater than 205 degrees C shall receive two coats of 315 degrees C heat-resisting
paint applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.
3.9
TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION
3.9.1 Plumbing System
The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance with [ICC
IPC] [ICC IPC] [IAPMO UPC], except that the drainage and vent system final test shall
include the smoke test. The Contractor has the option to perform a peppermint test in lieu
of the smoke test. If a peppermint test is chosen, the Contractor must submit a testing
procedure to the Contracting Officer for approval.
A. Drainage and Vent Systems Test. The final test shall include a smoke test.
B. Building Sewers Tests.
C. Water Supply Systems Tests.
3.9.1.1 Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies
Backflow prevention assembly shall be tested using gauges specifically designed for the
testing of backflow prevention assemblies.
Backflow prevention assembly test gauges shall be tested annually for accuracy in
accordance with the requirements of State or local regulatory agencies. If there is no
State or local regulatory agency requirements, gauges shall be tested annually for
accuracy in accordance with the requirements of University of Southern California's
Foundation of Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research or the American Water
Works Association Manual of Cross Connection (Manual M-14), or any other approved
testing laboratory having equivalent capabilities for both laboratory and field evaluation of
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 57 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
backflow prevention assembly test gauges. Report form for each assembly shall include,
as a minimum, the following:
Data on Device
Type of Assembly
Manufacturer
Model Number
Serial Number
Size
Location
Test Pressure Readings
Data on Testing Firm
Name
Address
Certified Tester
Certified Tester No.
Date of Test
Serial Number and Test Data of Gauges
If the unit fails to meet specified requirements, the unit shall be repaired and retested.
3.9.1.2 Shower Pans
After installation of the pan and finished floor, the drain shall be temporarily plugged
below the weep holes. The floor area shall be flooded with water to a minimum depth of
25 mm for a period of 24 hours. Any drop in the water level during test, except for
evaporation, will be reason for rejection, repair, and retest.
3.9.1.3 Compressed Air Piping (Nonoil-Free)
Piping systems shall be filled with oil-free dry air or gaseous nitrogen to 1.03 MPa and
hold this pressure for 2 hours with no drop in pressure.
3.9.2 Defective Work
If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or
repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall
be made with new materials. Caulking of screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable.
3.9.3 System Flushing
3.9.3.1 During Flushing
Before operational tests or disinfection, potable water piping system shall be flushed with
[hot] potable water. Sufficient water shall be used to produce a water velocity that is
capable of entraining and removing debris in all portions of the piping system. This
requires simultaneous operation of all fixtures on a common branch or main in order to
produce a flushing velocity of approximately 1.2 meters per second through all portions of
the piping system. In the event that this is impossible due to size of system, the
Contracting Officer (or the designated representative) shall specify the number of
fixturesto be operated during flushing. Contractor shall provide adequate personnel to
monitor the flushing operation and to ensure that drain lines are unobstructed in order to
prevent flooding of the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for any flood damage
resulting from flushing of the system. Flushing shall be continued until entrained dirt and
other foreign materials have been removed and until discharge water shows no
discoloration. All faucets and drinking water fountains, to include any device considered
as an end point device by NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9, shall be flushed a minimum of 1 L per
24 hour period, ten times over a 14 day period.
3.9.3.2 After Flushing
System shall be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed, cleaned, and
replaced. After flushing and cleaning, systems shall be prepared for testing by
immediately filling water piping with clean, fresh potable water. Any stoppage,
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 58 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
discoloration, or other damage to the finish, furnishings, or parts of the building due to the
Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system shall be repaired by the
Contractor. When the system flushing is complete, the hot-water system shall be
adjusted for uniform circulation. Flushing devices and automatic control systems shall be
adjusted for proper operation according to manufacturer's instructions. Comply with
ASHRAE 90.1 - SI for minimum efficiency requirements. Unless more stringent local
requirements exist, lead levels shall not exceed limits established by 40 CFR 141.80
(c)(1). The water supply to the building shall be tested separately to ensure that any lead
contamination found during potable water system testing is due to work being performed
inside the building.
3.9.4 Operational Test
Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, the Contractor shall
subject the plumbing system to operating tests to demonstrate satisfactory installation,
connections, adjustments, and functional and operational efficiency. Such operating tests
shall cover a period of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include the
following information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the system:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Time, date, and duration of test.
Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures.
Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.
Operation of each valve, hydrant, and faucet.
Pump suction and discharge pressures.
Temperature of each domestic hot-water supply.
Operation of each floor and roof drain by flooding with water.
Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer.
Complete operation of each water pressure booster system, including pump start
pressure and stop pressure.
Compressed air readings at each compressor and at each outlet. Each indicating
instrument shall be read at 1/2 hour intervals. The report of the test shall be
submitted in quadruplicate. The Contractor shall furnish instruments, equipment, and
personnel required for the tests; the Government will furnish the necessary water and
electricity.
3.9.5 Disinfection
After all system components are provided and operational tests are complete, the entire
domestic hot- and cold-water distribution system shall be disinfected. Before introducing
disinfecting chlorination material, entire system shall be flushed with potable water until
any entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed.
Water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and AWWA C652
as modified and supplemented by this specification. The chlorinating material shall be
hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. The chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping
system at a constant rate at a concentration of at least 50 parts per million (ppm). Feed a
properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected into the system with a hypochlorinator, or
inject liquid chlorine into the system through a solution-feed chlorinator and booster pump
until the entire system is completely filled.
Test the chlorine residual level in the water at 6 hour intervals for a continuous period of
24 hours. If at the end of a 6 hour interval, the chlorine residual has dropped to less than
25 ppm, flush the piping including tanks with potable water, and repeat the above
chlorination procedures. During the chlorination period, each valve and faucet shall be
opened and closed several times.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 59 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
After the second 24 hour period, verify that no less than 25 ppm chlorine residual remains
in the treated system. The 24 hour chlorination procedure must be repeated until no less
than 25 ppm chlorine residual remains in the treated system.
Upon the specified verification, the system including tanks shall then be flushed with
potable water until the residual chlorine level is reduced to less than one part per million.
During the flushing period, each valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several
times.
Take addition samples of water in disinfected containers, for bacterial examination, at
locations specified by the Contracting Officer Test these samples for total coliform
organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in
accordance with [EPA SM 9223] [AWWA 10084]. The testing method used shall be EPA
approved for drinking water systems and shall comply with applicable local and state
requirements.
Disinfection shall be repeated until bacterial tests indicate the absence of coliform
organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in the samples for at least 2 full
days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been
obtained.
3.9.6 [OPTIONAL DISINFECTION METHOD
Disinfect new potable water piping and affected portions of existing potable water piping
with geothermal water. Geothermal water shall be not less than 90 degrees C and
contact time shall be not less than 30 minutes. After disinfection, thoroughly flush new
portable water piping and affected portions of existing potable water piping with the
chlorinated base water supply for a minimum of two hours.]
3.10
WASTE MANAGEMENT
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Return
solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery and laundering or for proper
disposal. Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and adhesive containers and store in
protected, well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place used sealant
and adhesive tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous waste. Separate
copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste
Management Plan and place in designated areas for reuse.
3.11
POSTED INSTRUCTIONS
Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring and control
diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system, shall be posted where
directed. Condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance
procedures, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation, and procedures
for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as
specified above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams. The
framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems.
3.12
PERFORMANCE OF WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT
Standard rating condition terms are as follows:
EF = Energy factor, minimum overall efficiency.
ET = Minimum thermal efficiency with 21 degrees C delta T.
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 60 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
SL = Standby loss is maximum (Btu/h) based on a 38.9 degree C temperature
difference between stored water and ambient requirements.
V = Rated volume in gallons
Q = Nameplate input rate in kW (Btu/h)
3.12.1 Storage Water Heaters
3.12.1.1 Electric
a. Storage capacity of 227 liters shall have a minimum energy factor (EF) of 0.93 or higher
per FEMP requirements.
b. Storage capacity of 227 liters or more shall have a minimum energy factor (EF) of 0.91
or higher per FEMP requirements.
3.12.1.2 Gas
a. Storage capacity of 189 liters or less shall have a minimum energy factor (EF) of 0.62 or
higher per FEMP requirements.
b. Storage capacity of 75.7 liters - or more and input rating of 22980 W or less: minimum
EF shall be 0.62 - 0.0019V per 10 CFR 430.
c. Rating of less than 22980 W: (75,000 Btu/h) ET shall be 80 percent; maximum SL shall
be (0/800+100x(V^^1/2)), per ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3
3.12.1.3 Oil
a. Storage capacity of 75.7 liters or more and input rating of 30773 W or less: minimum EF
shall be 0.59-0.0019V per 10 CFR 430.
b. Rating of less than 309.75 W/L or input rating more than 30773 W: ET shall be 78
percent; maximum SL shall be (Q/800+100x(V^^1/2)), per ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.
3.12.2 Unfired Hot Water Storage
All volumes and inputs: shall meet or exceed R-12.5.
3.12.3 Instantaneous Water Heater
3.12.3.1 Gas
a. Rating of 309.75 W/L and greater and less than 7.57 L with an input greater than 14.66
kW and less than 58.62 kW shall have a minimum energy factor (EF) of 0.62-0.0019V
per 10 CFR 430.
b. Rating of 309.75 W/L and greater and less than 37.85 L with an input of 58.62 kW and
greater shall have a minimum thermal efficiency (ET) of 80 percent per ANSI
Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3
c. Rating of 309.75 W/L and greater and 37.85 L and greater with an input of 58.62 kW
and greater shall have a minimum thermal efficiency (ET) of 80 percent and the
maximum SL shall be Q/800+110x(V^^1/2)) per ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 61 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.12.3.2 Oil
a. Rating of 309.75 W/L and greater and less than 7.57 L with an input of 61.55 kW
and less shall have an energy factor (EF) of 0.59-0.0019V per 10 CFR 430
b. Rating of 309.75 W/Ll and greater and less than 37.85 L with an input greater than
61.55 kW shall have a minimum thermal efficiency (ET) of 80 percent per ANSI
Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3
c. Rating of 309.75 W/L and 37.85 L and greater with an input of greater than 61.55
kW shall have a minimum thermal efficiency (ET) of 78 percent and the maximum
SL shall be Q/800+110x(V^^1/2)) per ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3
3.12.4 Pool Heaters
a. Gas/oil fuel, capacities and inputs: ET shall be 78 percent per ASHRAE 146.
b. Heat Pump, All capacities and inputs shall meet a COP of 4.0 per ASHRAE 146
3.13
TABLES
TABLE I
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
Ite
Pipe and
SERVIC
SERVI
SERVIC
SERVIC
SERVIC
m
Fitting
EA
CEB
EC
ED
EE
#
Materials
1
Cast iron soil
X
X
X
X
X
pipe and
fittings, hub
and spigot,
ASTM A74
with
compression
gaskets.
Pipe and
fittings shall
be marked
with the
CISPI
trademark.
2
X
X
X
X
Cast iron soil
pipe and
fittings
hubless,
CISPI 301
and ASTM
A888. Pipe
and fittings
shall be
marked with
the CISPI
trademark.
3
X
X
X
Cast iron
drainage
fittings,
threaded,
ASME
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 62 OF 70
SERVIC
EF
PGC-230033-C-P8
4
5
6
7
8
9
B16.12 for
use with Item
10
Cast iron
screwed
fittings
(threaded)
ASME B16.4
for use with
Item 10
Grooved pipe
couplings,
ferrous and
non-ferrous
pipe ASTM
A536 And
ASTM
A47/A47M
Ductile iron
grooved joint
fittings for
ferrous pipe
ASTM A536
and ASTM
A47/A47M
for use with
Item 5
Bronze sand
casting
grooved joint
pressure
fittings for
non-ferrous
pipe ASTM
B584, for use
with Item 5
Wrought
copper
grooved joint
pressure
pressure
fittings for
non-ferrous
pipe ASTM
B75M ASTM
B75 C12200,
ASTM
B152/B152M
, C11000,
ASME
B16.22
ASME
B16.22 for
use with Item
5
Malleable-
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PAGE 63 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
iron threaded
fittings,
galvanized
ASME B16.3
for use with
Item 10
Steel pipe,
seamless
galvanized,
ASTM
A53/A53M,
Type S,
Grade B
Seamless
red brass
pipe, ASTM
B43
Bronzed
flanged
fittings,
ASME
B16.24 for
use with
Items 11 and
14
Cast copper
alloy solder
joint pressure
fittings,
ASME
B16.18for
use with Item
14
Seamless
copper pipe,
ASTM B42
Cast bronze
threaded
fittings,
ASME
B16.15
Copper
drainage
tube, (DWV),
ASTM B306
Wrought
copper and
wrought alloy
solder-joint
drainage
fittings.
ASME
B16.29
Cast copper
alloy solder
joint drainage
fittings,
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X*
X
X*
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PAGE 64 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
19
20
21
22
23
24
DWV, ASME
B16.23
AcrylonitrileButadieneStyrene
(ABS) plastic
drain, waste,
and vent pipe
and fittings
ASTM
D2661,
ASTM F628
Polyvinyl
Chloride
plastic drain,
waste and
vent pipe and
fittings,
ASTM
D2665,
ASTM F891,
(Sch 40)
ASTM F1760
Process
glass pipe
and fittings,
ASTM C1053
High-silicon
content cast
iron pipe and
fittings (hub
and spigot,
and
mechanical
joint), ASTM
A518/A518M
Polypropylen
e (PP) waste
pipe and
fittings,
ASTM D4101
Filamentwound
reinforced
thermosettin
g resin
(RTRP) pipe,
ASTM D2996
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SERVICE:
A - Underground Building Soil, Waste and Storm Drain
B - Aboveground Soil, Waste, Drain In Buildings
C - Underground Vent
D - Aboveground Vent
E - Interior Rainwater Conductors Aboveground
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
X
PAGE 65 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
F - Corrosive Waste And Vent Above And Belowground
* - Hard Temper
TABLE II
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
Item
#
1
Pipe and Fitting Materials
SERVICE
A
SERVICE
B
SERVICE
C
SERVICE
D
a. Galvanized, ASME B16.3 for
use with Item 4a
b. Same as "a" but not
galvanized for use with Item 4b
X
X
X
X
2
Grooved pipe couplings, ferrous
pipe ASTM A536 and ASTM
A47/A47M, non-ferrous pipe,
ASTM A536 and ASTM
A47/A47M
X
X
X
3
Ductile iron grooved joint fittings for
ferrous pipe ASTM A536
and ASTM A47/A47M, for use
with Item 2
X
X
X
4
Steel pipe:
X
X
X
Malleable-iron threaded fittings:
a. Seamless, galvanized,
ASTM A53/A53M, Type S,
Grade B
X
X
X
b. Seamless, black, ASTM
A53/A53M, Type S, Grade B
5
Seamless red brass pipe,
ASTM B43
X
X
X
6
Bronze flanged fittings, ASME
B16.24 for use with Items 5 and
7
X
X
X
7
Seamless copper pipe, ASTM
B42
X
X
X
8
Seamless copper water tube,
ASTM B88, ASTM B88M
X**
X**
9
Cast bronze threaded fittings,
ASME B16.15 for use with Items
5 and 7
X
X
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
X**
X***
X
PAGE 66 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
10
11
12
13
Wrought copper and bronze
solder-joint pressure fittings,
ASME B16.22 for use with
Items 5, 7 and 8
Cast copper alloy solder-joint
pressure fittings, ASME B16.18
for use with Item 8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Bronze and sand castings
groovedjoint pressure fittings for
non-ferrous pipe ASTM B584,
for
use with Item
Polyethylene
(PE)2 plastic pipe,
X
X
X
X
X
Schedules 40 and 80, based on
outside diameter
14
Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe
(SDR-PR), based on controlled
outside diameter, ASTM D3035
X
X
15
Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe
(SIDR-PR), based on controlled
inside diameter, ASTM D2239
X
X
16
Butt fusion polyethylene (PE)
plastic pipe fittings, ASTM
D3261 for use with Items 14,
15, and 16
X
X
17
Socket-type polyethylene fittings
for outside diameter- controlled
polyethylene pipe,
ASTM D2683 for use with Item
15
Polyethylene (PE) plastic
X
X
X
X
18
tubing, ASTM D2737
19
20
Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC) plastic hot and cold
water distribution system,
ASTM
D2846/D2846M
Chlorinated
polyvinyl chloride
X
X
X
X
X
X
(CPVC) plastic pipe, Schedule
40 and 80, ASTM F441/F441M
21
Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC) plastic pipe (SDR-PR)
ASTM F442/F442M
X
X
X
22
Threaded chlorinated polyvinyl
chloride (chloride CPVC) plastic
pipe fittings, Schedule 80, ASTM
F437, for use with Items
20, and 21 chlorinated
Socket-type
polyvinyl chloride (CPVC)
plastic pipe fittings, Schedule
40, ASTM F438 for use with
Items 20, 21, and 22
X
X
X
X
X
X
23
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 67 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
24
25
Socket-type chlorinated
polyvinyl chloride (CPVC)
plastic pipe fittings
Schedule 80, ASTM F439 for
use with Items
20,(PVC)
21, and
22
Polyvinyl
chloride
plastic
X
X
X
X
X
pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and
120, ASTM D1785
26
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
pressure-rated pipe (SDR
Series), ASTM D2241
X
X
27
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic
pipe fittings, Schedule 40, ASTM
D2466
X
X
28
Socket-type polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) plastic pipe fittings,
schedule 80, ASTM D2467 for
use with Items 26 and 27
X
X
29
Threaded polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) plastic pipe fittings,
schedule 80, ASTM D2464
X
X
30
Joints for IPS PVC pipe using
solvent cement, ASTM D2672
X
X
31
Polypropylene (PP) plastic pipe
and fittings; ASTM F2389
X
X
32
Steel pipeline flanges, MSS SP44
X
X
33
Fittings: brass or bronze; ASME
B16.15, and ASME B16.18
ASTM B828
X
X
34
Carbon steel pipe unions,
socket-welding and threaded,
MSS SP-83
X
X
35
Malleable-iron threaded pipe
unions ASME B16.39
X
X
36
Nipples, pipe threaded ASTM
A733
X
X
37
Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX)
Plastic Pipe ASTM F877
X
X
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
X
X
X
X
PAGE 68 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
38
Press Fittings:
A - Cold Water Service Aboveground
B - Hot and Cold Water Distribution 82 degrees C
180 degrees F Maximum Aboveground
C - Compressed Air Lubricated
D - Cold Water Service Belowground
Indicated types are minimum wall thicknesses.
** - Type L - Hard
*** - Type K - Hard temper with brazed joints only or
type K-soft temper without joints in or under floors
**** - In or under slab floors only brazed joints
TABLE III
STANDARD RATING CONDITIONS AND MINIMUM PERFORMANCE RATINGS FOR WATER
HEATING EQUIPMENT
FUEL
STORAGE
CAPACITY
LITERS
INPUT
RATING
TEST
PROCEDURE
REQUIRED
PERFORMANCE
A. STORAGE WATER HEATERS
Elect.
227 max
10 CFR 430
EF = 0.93
Elect.
227 min
10 CFR 430
EF = 0.91
Elect.
75.7 min.
10 CFR 430
EF = 0.93-0.00132V
minimum
Elect.
75.7 min. OR 12 kW min.
ANSI
Z21.10.3/CSA
4.3 (Addenda
B)
10 CFR 430
SL = 20+35x(V^^1/2)
maximum
10 CFR 430
EF = 0.62-0.0019V min
12 kW max.
24 Amps or
less and 250
Volts or less
EF = 0.93-0.00132V
Elect.
Heat
Pump
Gas
189 max
Gas
75.7 min.
22 kW max.
10 CFR 430
EF = 0.80-0.0019V
minimum
Gas
309.75 W/L
max.
22 kW max.
ET= 80 percent; SL =
1.3+38/V max.
Oil
75.7 min.
30.8 kW max.
ANSI
Z21.10.3/CSA
4.3
10 CFR 430
Oil
309.75 W/L
max
30.8 kW
ANSI
Z21.10.3/CSA
4.3
ET = 78 percent; SL =
(Q/800+110x(V^^1/2))
maximum
EF = 0.59-0.0019V min
B. Unfired Hot Water Storage, R = 2.2 minimum
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 69 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
C. Instantaneous Water Heater
Gas
309.75 W/L
min.
14.66 kW
min.
10 CFR 430
EF = 0.62-0.0019V and
7.57 L max 58.62 kW max.
Gas
309.75 W/L
min.
58.62 kW
min.
ET = 80 percent and 37.85
L max 58.62 kW max.
Gas
309.75 W/L
min.
58.62 kW
min.
ANSI
Z21.10.3/CSA
4.3
ANSI
Z21.10.3/CSA
4.3
Oil
309.75 W/L
min.
61.552 kW
max.
10 CFR 430
EF = 0.59-0.0019V and
37.85 L max.
Oil
309.75 W/L
min.
61.552 kW
max.
ANSI
Z21.10.3/CSA
4.3
ET = 80 percent and 37.85
L min. SL +
(Q/800+110x(V^^1/2)
Oil
309.75 W/L
min.
61.552 kW
max.
ANSI
Z21.10.3/CSA
4.3
ET = 78 percent and 37.85
L max SL =
(Q800+110x(V^^1/2))
ET = 80 percent and 37.85
L min. SL +
(Q/800+110x(V^^1/2)
D. Pool Heater
Gas or
Oil
All
All
ASHRAE 146
ET = 78 percent
Heat
Pump
All
TERMS:
All
All
ASHRAE 146
COP = 4.0
EF = Energy factor, minimum overall efficiency.
ET = Minimum thermal efficiency with 21 degrees C delta T.
SL = Standby loss is maximum Watts based on a 38.9 degrees C temperature difference between
stored water and ambient requirements.
V = Rated storage volume in gallons
Q = Nameplate input rate in Watts
END OF SECTION 22 00 00
22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 70 OF 70
PGC-230033-C-P8
SECTION 22 00 70
PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
CONTENTS
PART 1
GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 4
1.1
REFERENCES......................................................................................................... 4
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................ 11
1.2.1 Sustainable Design Requirements ........................................................................... 11
1.2.2 Performance Requirements ................................................................................... 11
1.2.3 Accessibility of Equipment ...................................................................................... 11
1.3
SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................ 11
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE ......................................................................................... 12
1.4.1 Qualifications ......................................................................................................... 12
1.4.2 Welding .................................................................................................................. 12
1.4.3 Regulatory Requirements ....................................................................................... 13
1.4.4 Alternative Qualifications ........................................................................................ 13
1.4.5 Service Support...................................................................................................... 13
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ............................................................... 13
PART 2
PRODUCTS .................................................................................................... 14
2.1
STANDARD PRODUCTS ....................................................................................... 14
2.2
MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE ......................................................................... 14
2.3
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................. 14
2.4
PIPE AND FITTINGS ............................................................................................. 14
2.4.1 Domestic Water Piping ........................................................................................... 14
2.4.2 Deionized Water Piping .......................................................................................... 15
2.4.3 Drainage Piping (Soil, Waste, Vent, Indirect, and Storm) ........................................ 16
2.4.4 Drainage Piping (Corrosive Waste) ........................................................................ 16
2.4.5 Pressure Drainage Piping....................................................................................... 16
2.4.6 Exposed Piping in Finished Areas .......................................................................... 17
2.4.7 Trap Primer Pipe Between Primer Device and Drain .............................................. 17
2.5
PIPE JOINT MATERIALS ....................................................................................... 17
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ............................................................................. 18
2.7
PIPE INSULATION MATERIAL ............................................................................... 18
2.8
PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS ....................................................... 18
2.9
VALVES ................................................................................................................ 18
2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES .......................................................................................... 19
2.10.1 General ................................................................................................................ 19
2.10.2 Flushometer Valves.............................................................................................. 20
2.10.3 Automatic Controls ............................................................................................... 20
2.10.4 Service Sinks ....................................................................................................... 20
2.10.5 Fixture Descriptions ............................................................................................. 20
2.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS ................................................................................... 27
2.12 DRAINS AND BACKWATER VALVES .................................................................... 28
2.12.1 Area Drains .......................................................................................................... 28
2.12.2 Floor and Shower Drains ...................................................................................... 28
2.12.3 Floor Sinks ........................................................................................................... 28
2.12.4 Roof Drains and Expansion Joints ........................................................................ 29
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.12.5 Sight Drains ......................................................................................................... 29
2.12.6 Backwater Valves ................................................................................................. 30
2.13 CLEANOUTS ......................................................................................................... 30
2.14 TRAPS .................................................................................................................. 31
2.14.1 Fixture Traps ........................................................................................................ 31
2.14.2 Drain Traps .......................................................................................................... 31
2.15 TRAP PRIMER ASSEMBLIES ................................................................................ 31
2.16 INTERCEPTORS ................................................................................................... 31
2.16.1 Grease Interceptor ............................................................................................... 31
2.16.2 Oil Interceptor ...................................................................................................... 32
2.17 WATER HEATERS ................................................................................................ 32
2.17.1 Performance of Water Heating Equipment ........................................................... 32
2.17.2 Automatic Storage Type ....................................................................................... 33
2.17.3 Instantaneous Water Heater ................................................................................. 34
2.17.4 Electric Instantaneous Water Heaters (Tankless) ................................................. 34
2.17.5 Relief Valves ........................................................................................................ 34
2.18 HOT-WATER STORAGE TANKS ........................................................................... 34
2.19 PUMPS .................................................................................................................. 35
2.19.1 Sump Pumps........................................................................................................ 35
2.19.2 Hydraulic Elevator Sump Pumps .......................................................................... 35
2.19.3 Circulating Pumps ................................................................................................ 35
2.19.4 Booster Pumps..................................................................................................... 36
2.19.5 Flexible Connectors ............................................................................................. 36
2.19.6 Sewage Pumps .................................................................................................... 36
2.20 WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM ............................................................. 36
2.20.1 Constant Speed Pumping System ........................................................................ 36
2.20.2 Variable Speed Pumping System ......................................................................... 37
2.21 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE METER .................................................................. 37
2.22 COPPER-SILVER IONIZATION SYSTEM ............................................................... 37
2.23 ELECTRICAL WORK ............................................................................................. 38
2.24 FACTORY PAINTING............................................................................................. 38
PART 3
EXECUTION ................................................................................................... 40
3.1
EXAMINATION ...................................................................................................... 40
3.2
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................ 40
3.3
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS ................................................................. 41
3.3.1 General .................................................................................................................. 41
3.3.2 Service Entrance .................................................................................................... 41
3.3.3 Pipe Drains............................................................................................................. 41
3.3.4 Valves .................................................................................................................... 41
3.3.5 Expansion and Contraction of Piping ...................................................................... 41
3.3.6 Thrust Restraint ...................................................................................................... 42
3.3.7 Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters ........................................................... 42
3.3.8 Water Meter Remote Readout Register .................................................................. 42
3.3.9 Backflow Prevention Devices ................................................................................. 42
3.3.10 Copper-Silver Ionization Systems ......................................................................... 43
3.4
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS ............................................................ 43
3.4.1 General .................................................................................................................. 43
3.4.2 Pipe Cleanouts ....................................................................................................... 44
3.4.3 Sight Drains............................................................................................................ 44
3.4.4 Traps ...................................................................................................................... 44
3.5
JOINTS.................................................................................................................. 44
3.5.1 Threaded................................................................................................................ 44
3.5.2 Mechanical Couplings ............................................................................................ 45
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.5.3 Unions and Flanges ............................................................................................... 45
3.5.4 Grooved Mechanical Joints .................................................................................... 45
3.5.5 Cast Iron Soil Pipe .................................................................................................. 45
3.5.6 Copper Tube and Pipe ........................................................................................... 45
3.5.7 Glass Pipe .............................................................................................................. 46
3.5.8 Corrosive Waste Plastic Pipe ................................................................................. 46
3.5.9 Other Joint Methods ............................................................................................... 46
3.6
CORROSION PROTECTION FOR BURIED PIPE AND FITTINGS .......................... 46
3.7
PIPE SLEEVES AND FLASHING ........................................................................... 46
3.7.1 Sleeve Requirements ............................................................................................. 46
3.7.2 Flashing Requirements .......................................................................................... 47
3.7.3 Optional Counterflashing ........................................................................................ 47
3.7.4 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors ............................................................. 48
3.7.5 Pipe Penetrations ................................................................................................... 48
3.7.6 Fire Seal................................................................................................................. 48
3.8
PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS ....................................................... 48
3.8.1 Seismic Requirements ........................................................................................... 49
3.8.2 Structural Attachments ........................................................................................... 50
3.9
FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS ................................................................. 50
3.9.1 Fixture Connections ............................................................................................... 50
3.9.2 Flushometer Valves................................................................................................ 50
3.9.3 Height of Fixture Rims above Floor ........................................................................ 50
3.9.4 Shower Bath Outfits ............................................................................................... 50
3.9.5 Fixture Supports ..................................................................................................... 51
3.9.6 Access Panels........................................................................................................ 51
3.9.7 Shower Pans .......................................................................................................... 51
3.9.8 Escutcheons .......................................................................................................... 52
3.10 WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS ..................................... 52
3.10.1 Relief Valves ........................................................................................................ 52
3.10.2 Connections to Water Heaters .............................................................................. 52
3.10.3 Expansion Tank.................................................................................................... 52
3.11 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS .................................................................................. 53
3.11.1 Identification Tags ................................................................................................ 53
3.11.2 Nameplates .......................................................................................................... 53
3.11.3 Labels .................................................................................................................. 53
3.11.4 Pipe Color Code Marking ..................................................................................... 53
3.11.5 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components ............................ 53
3.12 PAINTING .............................................................................................................. 54
3.12.1 General ................................................................................................................ 54
3.12.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces ........................................................... 54
3.13 VIBRATION-ABSORBING FEATURES ................................................................... 54
3.14 TRAINING ............................................................................................................. 54
3.15 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS ..................................................................................... 55
3.16 TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION ............................................................... 55
3.16.1 Plumbing System ................................................................................................. 55
3.16.2 Defective Work ..................................................................................................... 56
3.16.3 System Flushing ................................................................................................... 57
3.16.4 Operational Test ................................................................................................... 57
3.16.5 Disinfection........................................................................................................... 58
3.17 WASTE MANAGEMENT ........................................................................................ 58
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
1. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
a. ANSI Z21.10.1/CSA 4.1 (2009; Addenda A 2009; Addenda B 2011) Gas Water
Heaters Vol. I, Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings of 75,000 Btu per Hour
or Less
b. ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 (2011) Gas Water Heaters Vol.III, Storage Water
Heaters with Input Ratings above 75,000 Btu per Hour, Circulating and
Instantaneous
c.
ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 (1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R 2004) Relief
Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems
2. AMERICAN
SOCIETY
OF
HEATING,
CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
REFRIGERATING
AND
AIR-
a. ASHRAE 90.1 - SI(2010; Errata 2011; INT 2-12 2011; Errata 2011, Addenda A,
B, C, G, H, J, K, O, P, S, Y, Z, BZ, CG, CI, AND DS 2012, INT 13 2012; Errata
2012, Errata 2012, Errata 2012, Errata 2012) Energy Standard for Buildings
Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings
3. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)
a. ASSE 1001 (2008) Performance Requirements for Atmospheric Type Vacuum
Breakers (ANSI approved 2009)
b. ASSE 1003 (2009) Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing
Valves for Domestic Water Distribution Systems - (ANSI approved 2010)
c. ASSE 1010 (2004) Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters
(ANSI approved 2004)
d. ASSE 1011 (2004; Errata 2004) Performance Requirements
Connection Vacuum Breakers (ANSI approved 2004)
for
Hose
e. ASSE 1012 (2009) Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventer with an
Intermediate Atmospheric Vent - (ANSI approved 2009)
f.
ASSE 1013 (2009) Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure
Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle
Backflow Preventers - (ANSI approved 2010)
g. ASSE 1018 (2001) Performance Requirements for Trap Seal Primer Valves Potable Water Supplied (ANSI Approved 2002
h. ASSE 1020 (2004; Errata 2004; Errata 2004) Performance Requirements for
Pressure Vacuum Breaker Assembly (ANSI Approved 2004)
i.
ASSE 1037 (1990) Performance Requirements
Devices (Flushometers) for Plumbing Fixtures
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
for
Pressurized
Flushing
PAGE 4 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
4. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
a. AWWA 10084 (2005) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and
Wastewater
b.
AWWA B300 (2010; Addenda 2011) Hypochlorites c.
Liquid Chlorine
AWWA B301 (2010)
d. AWWA C203 (2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water
Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot-Applied
e. AWWA C606 (2011) Grooved and Shouldered Joints
f.
AWWA C651 (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains
g. AWWA C652 (2011) Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities
h. AWWA C700 (2009) Standard for Cold Water Meters - Displacement Type,
Bronze Main Case
i.
AWWA C701 (2007) Standard for Cold-Water Meters - Turbine Type for
Customer Service
j.
AWWA D100 (2011) Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage
5. AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
a.
AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2011) Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze
Welding
b.
AWS B2.1/B2.1M (2009) Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance
Qualification
c.
AWS B2.2/B2.2M (2010) Specification for Brazing Procedure and Performance
Qualification
6. ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
a. ASME A112.1.2 (2012) Standard for Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems (For
Plumbing Fixtures and Water-Connected Receptors)
b. ASME A112.14.1 (2003; R 2008) Backwater Valves
c.
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 (2008; Update 1 2009; Update 2 2011) Standard
for Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for Water
Closets and Urinals
d.
ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 (2008; Update 1 2009; Update 2 2011) Stainless
Steel Plumbing Fixtures
e. ASME A112.36.2M
f.
(1991; R 2008) Cleanouts
ASME A112.6.1M (1997; R 2008) Floor Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor
Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use
g. ASME A112.6.3 (2001; R 2007) Standard for Floor and Trench Drains
h. ASME A112.6.4 (2003: R 2008) Roof, Deck and Balcony Drains
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
i.
ASME B1.20.2M (2006; R 2011) Pipe Threads, 60 Deg. General Purpose
(Metric)
j.
ASME B16.18 (2012) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
k. ASME B16.21 (2011) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges
l.
ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2010) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy
Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
m. ASME B16.23 (2011) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV
n. ASME B16.29 (2007) Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint
Drainage Fittings – DWV
o. ASME B16.34 (2009; Supp 2010) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End
p. ASME B16.5 (2009) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS
24 Metric/Inch Standard
q. ASME B31.1 (2010) Power Piping
r.
ASME B31.5 (2010) Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components
s. ASME B40.100 (2005; R 2010) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
t.
ASME BPVC SEC IV (2010) BPVC Section IV-Rules for Construction of Heating
Boilers
u. ASME BPVC SEC IX (2010)
Qualifications
v.
BPVC Section
IX-Welding
and
Brazing
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1(2010) BPVC Section VIII-Rules for Construction of
Pressure Vessels Division 1
w. ASME CSD-1 (2012) Control and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers
7.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
a. ASTM A105/A105M
(2011a) Standard
Forgings for Piping Applications
Specification
for
Carbon
Steel
b. ASTM A183 (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track
Bolts and Nuts
c.
ASTM A193/A193M (2012) Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel
and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service and
Other Special Purpose Applications
d. ASTM A47/A47M (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for Ferritic
Malleable Iron Castings
e. ASTM A515/A515M
(2010) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel
Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service
f.
ASTM A516/A516M
(2010) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel
Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
g.
ASTM A518/A518M
(1999; R 2008) Standard
Corrosion- Resistant High-Silicon Iron Castings
h.
ASTM A53/A53M (2012) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot- Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
i.
ASTM A536 (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
j.
ASTM A74 (2009) Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
k.
ASTM A861 (2004; R 2008) Standard Specification for High-Silicon Iron
Pipe and Fittings
l.
ASTM A888 (2011) Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe
and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping
Applications
m.
ASTM B111/B111M (2011) Standard Specification for
Copper- Alloy Seamless Condenser Tubes and Ferrule Stock
Copper
and
n.
ASTM B117 (2011)
(Fog) Apparatus
Salt
Spray
o.
ASTM B152/B152M (2009) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet,
Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar
Standard
Practice
for
Specification
Operating
for
p. ASTM B306 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)
q. ASTM B32 (2008) Standard Specification for Solder Metal
r.
ASTM B36/B36M (2008a) Standard Specification for Brass Plate, Sheet,
Strip, and Rolled Bar
s.
ASTM B370 (2011e1) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip
for Building Construction
t.
ASTM B584 (2011) Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings
for General Applications
u. ASTM B75 (2002; R 2010) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper
Tube
v.
ASTM B75M (1999; R 2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper
Tube (Metric)
w. ASTM B813
(2010) Standard Specification for
Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube
Liquid and Paste
x. ASTM B88 (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
y.
ASTM B88M (2005; R 2011) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Water Tube (Metric)
z.
ASTM C1053 (2000; R 2010) Standard Specification for Borosilicate Glass
Pipe and Fittings for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Applications
aa. ASTM C564 (2011) Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
bb. ASTM C920 (2011) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
cc. ASTM D2000 (2012) Standard
Products in Automotive Applications
Classification
System
for
Rubber
dd. ASTM D2657 (2007) Heat Fusion Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings
ee. ASTM D2822/D2822M (2005e1; R 2011) Asphalt Roof Cement
ff. ASTM D2846/D2846M
(2009be1)
Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems
gg. ASTM D3139 (1998; R 2011) Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using
Flexible Elastomeric Seals
hh. ASTM D3212 (2007) Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and
Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ii. ASTM D3311 (2011) Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns
jj. ASTM D4101 (2011) Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection
and Extrusion Materials
kk. ASTM D635
(2010) Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning
and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal
Position
ll. ASTM E1 (2007) Standard
Glass Thermometers
mm. ASTM F1290
and Fittings
Specification for
ASTM Liquid-in-
(1998a; R 2011) Electrofusion Joining Polyolefin Pipe
nn. ASTM F1412 (2009) Standard Specification for Polyolefin Pipe and
Fittings for Corrosive Waste Drainage Systems
oo. ASTM F2618 (2009) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and Fittings for Chemical Waste Drainage Systems
pp. ASTM F477 (2010) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets)
for Joining Plastic Pipe
8.
9.
CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)
a.
CISPI 301 (2009) Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary
and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications
b.
CISPI 310 (2011) Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping
Applications
COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)
a. CDA A4015 (1994; R 1995) Copper Tube Handbook
10.
FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC
RESEARCH (FCCCHR)
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
a. FCCCHR Manual (1988e9) Manual of Cross-Connection Control
11.
INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION
OFFICIALS (IAPMO)
OF
PLUMBING
AND
MECHANICAL
a. IAPMO Z124.1.2 (2005) Plastic Bathtub and Shower Units
b. IAPMO Z124.5 (2006) Plastic Toilet (Water Closet) Seats
12.
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)
a. ICC A117.1 (2009) Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities
b. ICC IPC
13.
(2009) International Plumbing Code
INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA)
a. ANSI/ISEA Z358.1 (2009) American National Standard for Emergency
Eyewash and Shower Equipment
14.
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND
FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)
a. MSS SP-110 (2010) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder
Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends
b. MSS SP-25 (2008) Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges
and Unions
c. MSS SP-58 (2009) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and
Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation
d. MSS SP-67 (2011) Butterfly Valves
e. MSS SP-69 (2003) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application
(ANSI Approved American National Standard)
f.
MSS SP-70 (2011) Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
g. MSS SP-71 (2011) Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded
Ends
h. MSS SP-72 (2010a) Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for
General Service
i.
MSS SP-78 (2011) Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
j.
MSS SP-80 (2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves
k. MSS SP-85 (2011) Gray Iron Globe & Angle Valves Flanged and Threaded
Ends
15.
NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)
a. NACE SP0169 (1992; R 2007) Control of External Corrosion on Underground
or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems
16.
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
a. NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 9 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
b. NEMA MG 1 (2011) Motors and Generators
c. NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for Selection and
Use of Single Phase Motors
17.
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
a. NFPA 90A(2012) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
18.
NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)
a. NSF/ANSI 14 (2012) Plastics Piping System Components and Related
Materials
b. NSF/ANSI 61 (2011; Addenda 2012) Drinking Water System Components
- Health Effects
19.
PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA)
a. PPFA Fire Man (2010)
Construction
20.
Firestopping: Plastic
Pipe
in
Fire
Resistive
PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)
a. PDI G 101 (2010) Testing and Rating Procedure for Hydro Mechanical
Grease Interceptors with Appendix of Installation and Maintenance
b. PDI WH 201 (2010) Water Hammer Arresters Standard
21.
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)
a. SAE J1508 (2009) Hose Clamp Specifications
22.
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
a. PL 93-523 (1974; A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act
23.
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
a. 10 CFR 430 Energy Conservation Program for Consumer Products
b. 40 CFR 143 National Secondary Drinking Water Regulations
c. PL 102-486 (1992) Residential Energy Efficiency Ratings
24.
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
a. UL 174 (2004; Reprint Jul 2011) Household Electric Storage Tank Water
Heaters
b. UL 1951 (2011) Electric Plumbing Accessories
c. UL 499 (2005; Reprint Apr 2012) Electric Heating Appliances
d. UL 508 (1999; Reprint Apr 2010) Industrial Control Equipment
e. UL 732 (1995; Reprint Apr 2010) Oil-Fired Storage Tank Water Heaters
f.
25.
UL 778 (2010; Reprint May 2012) Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps
UNIFIED PLUMBING CODE OF ABU DHABI (PCAD)
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 10 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
26.
1.2
ESTIDAMA BY URBAN PLANNING COUNCIL OF ABU DHABI (UPC)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide complete and operable plumbing systems including sanitary and storm drainage,
domestic water, plumbing fixtures, valves, pumps, water heaters, supports, and all
associated appurtenances.
1.2.1 Sustainable Design Requirements
Follow and comply with sustainability requirement program (ESTIDAMA) issued by Abu
Dhabi planning Council (UPC). Nevertheless applying for Pearl rating is not required
1.2.2 Performance Requirements
1.2.2.1 Cathodic Protection and Pipe Joint Bonding
Provide cathodic protection and pipe joint bonding systems in accordance with [Section
26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)] [and]
[Section 26 42 17.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (IMPRESSED
CURRENT)] [Section 26 42 13.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY GALVANIC
ANODE] [and] [Section 26 42 19.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY IMPRESSED
CURRENT] and Section 26 42 19.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY IMPRESSED
CURRENT).
1.2.2.2 Plumbing Fixtures
Water flow and consumption rates shall, at a minimum, comply with requirements
Uniform Plumbing Code of Abu Dhabi, CMW standards, and in PL 102-486.
1.2.3 Accessibility of Equipment
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and
repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, and equipment requiring access, in
locations freely accessible through access doors.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
A. SD-02 Shop Drawings
1. Plumbing System;
B. SD-03 Product Data
1. Pipe and Fittings
2. Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
3. Valves
4. Plumbing Fixtures
5. Backflow Preventers
6. Drains and Backwater Valves
7. Cleanouts
8. Interceptors
9. Water Heaters
10. Storage Tanks
11. Pumps
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 11 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
12. Water Pressure Booster System
13. Water Service Meter
14. Copper-silver Ionization System
15. Vibration-Absorbing Features
16. Plumbing System
C. SD-06 Test Reports
1. Tests, Flushing and Disinfection
2.Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies.
D. SD-07 Certificates
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Materials and Equipment
Welding
Bolts
EPA registration for Copper-Silver Ionization
NSF certification for Copper-Silver Ionization
E. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
1. Plumbing System
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Qualifications
a. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacturers shall be regularly engaging in the
manufacturing, supplying, and servicing of specified products and equipment, as
well as, providing engineering and/or start-up services as specified. Provide
evidence demonstrating compliance for a minimum of 5 years, and on 5 projects of
similar complexity.
b. Installer qualifications: Installer shall be licensed, and shall provide evidence of the
successful completion of at least five projects of equal or greater size and
complexity. Provide tradesmen skilled in the appropriate trade. Installation of the
following items/systems shall be done by authorized representatives of respective
manufacturers:
1. Water Pressure Booster Pump System.
2. Copper-silver Ionization System.
1.4.2 Welding
Weld piping in accordance with qualified procedures using performance-qualified welders
and welding operators. Submit a list of names and identification symbols of qualified
welders and welding operators. Provide documentation that welders, and welding
operators are certified in accordance with American Welding Society Standard AWS
B2.1/B2.1M. Qualify procedures and welders in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX.
Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by
another employer, may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1. Notify PGC site
engineer 24 hours in advance of tests, and perform the tests at the work site if practicable.
Welders or welding operators shall apply their assigned symbols near each weld they make
as a permanent record.] [Welding and nondestructive testing procedures are specified in
Section 40 05 13.96 WELDING PROCESS PIPING.] [Weld structural members in
accordance with Section 05 05 23 WELDING, STRUCTURAL.]
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 12 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
1.4.3 Regulatory Requirements
1.4.3.1 UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE OF ABU DHABI1.4.3.1 Sub Title
Uniform Plumbing Code of Abu Dhabi shall be considered the primary ruling Code,
plumbing works shall comply with this code.
1.4.3.2 International Code Council (ICC) Codes
Unless otherwise required herein, perform plumbing work in accordance with the ICC
IPC.
a. For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions shall be
considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference
to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean PGC site engineer.
b. For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1,
"Administrator," do not apply. . References in the ICC Codes to sections of
Chapter 1 shall be applied appropriately by PGC site engineer .
1.4.3.3 Referenced Publications
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be
mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it
appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction",
or words of similar meaning, to mean PGC.
1.4.4 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified
record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the
manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.
1.4.5 Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of
qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their
addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient
to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a
regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during
installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by
PGC site engineer. Replace damaged or defective items.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 13 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
STANDARD PRODUCTS
Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products. Specified equipment shall
essentially duplicate equipment that has performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to
bid opening. Provide standard products that have been in satisfactory commercial or
industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall
have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.
2.2
MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address,
model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate
of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. See also paragraph "Nameplates" in PART
3.
2.3
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Submit manufacturer's catalog data with highlighting to show model, size, options, etc., that
are intended for consideration. Provide adequate data to demonstrate compliance with
contract requirements. Submit certificate stating that the design, fabrication, and
installation conform to the code,
a. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement shall meet NSF/ANSI 14 and shall be NSF
listed for the service intended. ." Polypropylene pipe and fittings shall conform to
dimensional requirements of Schedule 40, Iron Pipe size. Plastic pipe shall not be
installed in air plenums. .
b. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be installed underground, under concrete floor
slabs, or in crawl spaces below kitchen floors.
d. Select steel pipe schedules based on service requirements. Pipe fittings shall be
compatible with the applicable pipe materials. Pipe threads (except dry seal) shall
conform to ASME B1.20.2M. Grooved pipe couplings and fittings shall be from the
same manufacturer.
e. Material or equipment containing lead shall not be used in any potable water system. In
line devices such as water meters, building valves, check valves, meter stops, valves,
fittings and back flow preventers shall comply with PL 93-523 and NSF/ANSI 61,
Section 8. End point devices such as water coolers, lavatory faucets, kitchen and bar
faucets, ice makers, supply stops and end point control valves used to dispense water
for drinking shall meet the requirements of NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9.
2.4
PIPE AND FITTINGS
2.4.1 Domestic Water Piping
Domestic water piping at service entrance (from 300 mm inside building to 1525 mm
outside): Same as indicated for outside utilities.
a. 50 mm and smaller after service entrance above grade:
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 14 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
(1) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88M, type L, with soldered joints and wrought
copper ASME B16.22 or cast brass ASME B16.18 fittings.
(2) Copper tube extracted branch taps with brazed joints are acceptable where the
tapped pipe is at least 25 mm diameter and where branch is at least 2 pipe sizes
smaller.
(3) Press fittings for Copper Pipe and Tube: Copper press fittings shall conform to the
material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. Sealing
elements for copper press fittings shall be EPDM, FKM or HNBR. Sealing elements
shall be factory installed or an alternative supplied fitting manufacturer. Sealing
element shall be selected based on manufacturer's approved application
guidelines.
b. Below grade:
(1) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88M, type K soft, with brazed joints and wrought
copper ASME B16.22 fittings.
(2) Where below-grade run of piping is shorter than 15 m, below-grade joints are not
acceptable.
c. 65 to 100 mm after service entrance:
(1) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88M, type L, with soldered joints and wrought
copper ASME B16.22 or cast brass ASME B16.18 fittings.
(2) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88M, type L, with roll-groove joints and
manufactured grooved fittings conforming to ASTM B75 C12200 or ASTM
B152/B152M C1100 and ASME B16.22 for wrought copper, or per ASTM B584
copper alloy CDA 836 (85-5-5-5) per ASME B16.18.
d. 125 mm and larger after service entrance:
(1) Seamless or welded, hot-dipped galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A53/A53M or
ASTM B36/B36M with roll grooved joints and galvanized, malleable-iron, grooved
fittings and couplings.
(2) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88M, type L, with soldered joints and wrought
copper ASME B16.22 fittings.
(3) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88M, type L, with roll-groove joints and
manufactured grooved fittings conforming to ASTM B75 C12200 or ASTM
B152/B152M C1100 and ASME B16.22 for wrought copper, or per ASTM B584
copper alloy CDA 836 (85-5-5-5) per ASME B16.18.
(4)
[Connections to existing galvanized piping:
mechanical plain-end, or flanged.]
Threaded, mechanical groove,
2.4.2 Deionized Water Piping
CPVC Plastic Pipe, Fittings, and Solvent Cement: ASTM D2846/D2846M, Schedule 40
CPVC. Provide transition union connections or threaded gate valve between copper tubing
and chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) piping. Provide male threaded adapters with
PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene) pipe thread paste for threaded connections to valves,
strainers, and equipment.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 15 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.4.3 Drainage Piping (Soil, Waste, Vent, Indirect, and Storm)
a. Above grade:
(1) Cast-iron conforming to ASTM A74, hubbed pipe and fittings with ASTM C564
elastomeric push joints.
(2) Cast-iron conforming to CISPI 301 or ASTM A888, hubless pipe, fittings, and CISPI
310 elastomeric sealing sleeves with stainless-steel or cast iron clamps.
(3) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B306, type DWV or heavier, with soldered joints
and wrought copper ASME B16.29 or cast brass ASME B16.23 drainage and vent
fittings. Piping within MRI shielding shall be copper.
(4) Seamless or welded, hot-dipped galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A53/A53M or
ASTM B36/B36M, cast iron drainage type fittings, galvanized malleable vent fittings
and threaded joints.
b. Below grade: Cast-iron conforming to ASTM A74, hubbed pipe and fittings with
ASTM C564 elastomeric push joints.
2.4.4 Drainage Piping (Corrosive Waste)
a. Above grade:
(1) Corrosive waste borosilicate glass conforming to ASTM C1053, with mechanical
joints and borosilicate glass fittings.
(2) Corrosive waste cast iron (14 percent silica) pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM
A518/A518M and ASTM A861. Mechanical joints, and bell and spigot joints are
acceptable in exposed (accessible) locations. Bell and spigot joints only are
acceptable in concealed (non-accessible) locations.
(3) Corrosive waste Schedule 40 fire retardant polypropylene DWV pipe and fittings
conforming to ASTM D4101, ASTM F1412, ASTM D635, and ASTM D3311.
Mechanical joints, and fused joints are acceptable in exposed (accessible)
locations. Fused joints only are acceptable in concealed (non-accessible)
locations.]
(4) Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Chemical DWV piping system complying with ASTM
F2618 and socket (solvent cement) joints.
b. Below grade:
(1) Corrosive waste cast iron (14 percent silica) pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM
A518/A518M and ASTM A861, with bell and spigot joints.
(2) Corrosive waste Schedule 80 polypropylene DWV pipe and fittings conforming with
ASTM D4101 and ASTM D3311 with fused joints.]
(3) Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Chemical DWV piping system complying with ASTM
F2618 and socket (solvent cement) joints.
2.4.5 Pressure Drainage Piping
a. Cast iron pressure pipe and fittings, with mechanical joints.
b. Galvanized steel, cast iron drainage fittings with threaded joints.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 16 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.4.6 Exposed Piping in Finished Areas
a. Chrome or nickel plated brass to wall or floor.
b. Piping 50 mm and larger may be provided with chrome or nickel plated brass sleeves to
cover pipe and fittings in lieu of plating.
2.4.7 Trap Primer Pipe Between Primer Device and Drain
a. Above grade: Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88M, type K or L, with soldered joints
and wrought copper ASME B16.22 or cast brass ASME B16.18 fittings.
b. Below grade: Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88M, type K soft, with soldered joints
and wrought copper ASME B16.22 or cast brass ASME B16.18 fittings.
2.5
PIPE JOINT MATERIALS
Grooved pipe and hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be used underground. Solder
containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe. Mark cast iron soil pipe and fittings with
the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. Joints and gasket materials
shall conform to the following:
a. Coupling for Cast-Iron Pipe: for hub and spigot type ASTM A74, AWWA C606. For
hubless type: CISPI 310
b. Coupling for Steel Pipe: AWWA C606.
c. Couplings for Grooved Pipe: [Ductile Iron ASTM A536 (Grade 65-45-12)] [Malleable
Iron ASTM A47/A47M, Grade 32510]. [Copper ASTM A536].
d. Flange Gaskets: Gaskets shall be made of non-asbestos material in accordance with
ASME B16.21. Gaskets shall be flat, 1.6 mm thick, and contain Aramid fibers bonded
with Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) or Nitro Butadiene Rubber (NBR). Gaskets shall
be the full face or self centering flat ring type. Gaskets used for hydrocarbon service
shall be bonded with NBR.
e. Brazing Material: Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP-5.
f. Brazing Flux: Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for use with brazing
material. Flux shall be as follows: lead-free; have a 100 percent flushable residue;
contain slightly acidic reagents; contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides.
g. Solder Material: Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B32 and be Code approved "Lead
Free" having a chemical composition equal to or less than 0.2 percent lead.
h. Solder Flux: Flux shall be liquid form, non-corrosive, Code approved "Lead Free" and
conforms to ASTM B813, Standard Test 1.
i. PTFE Tape: PTFE Tape, for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe.
j. Rubber Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil-Pipe and Fittings (hub and spigot type and hubless
type): ASTM C564.
k. Rubber Gaskets for Grooved Pipe: ASTM D2000, maximum temperature 110
degreesC.
l. Flexible Elastomeric Seals: ASTM D3139, ASTM D3212 or ASTM F477.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 17 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
m. Bolts and Nuts for Grooved Pipe Couplings: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A183.
n. Flanged fittings including flanges, bolts, nuts, bolt patterns, etc., shall be in accordance
with ASME B16.5 class 150 and shall have the manufacturer's trademark affixed in
accordance with MSS SP-25. Flange material shall conform to ASTM A105/A105M.
Blind flange material shall conform to ASTM A516/A516M cold service and ASTM
A515/A515M for hot service. Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength with
material conforming to ASTM A193/A193M. Submit written certification by the bolt
manufacturer that the bolts furnished comply with the specified requirements.
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following:
a. Water Hammer Arrester: PDI WH 201. [Water hammer arrester shall be [diaphragm] ]
b. Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction: ASTM B370.
c. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D2822/D2822M.
d. Hose Clamps: SAE J1508.
e. Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures: ASME A112.6.1M.
f. Metallic Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M.
g. Plumbing Fixture Setting Compound: A preformed flexible ring seal molded from
hydrocarbon wax material. The seal material shall be nonvolatile nonasphaltic and
contain germicide and provide watertight, gastight, odorproof and verminproof
properties.
h. Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines: AWWA C203.
i. Hypochlorites: AWWA B300.
j. Liquid Chlorine: AWWA B301.
k. Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element: ASME B40.100.
l. Thermometers: ASTM E1. Mercury shall not be used in thermometers.
2.7
PIPE INSULATION MATERIAL
Provide insulation as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
2.8
PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS
Provide pipe hangers, inserts, and supports conforming to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
Hangers in MRI Suite shall be non-ferrous (copper, aluminum, stainless steel).
2.9
VALVES
Provide valves on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves 65 mm and smaller shall be
bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and solder-type connections for tubing. Valves 80
mm and larger shall have flanged iron bodies and bronze trim. Pressure ratings shall be
based upon the application. Grooved end valves may be provided if the manufacturer
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 18 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
certifies that the valves meet the performance requirements of applicable MSS standard.
Valves shall conform to the following standards:
Description
Standard
Butterfly Valves
MSS SP-67
Cast-Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
MSS SP-70
Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
MSS SP-71
Ball Valves with Flanged Butt-Welding Ends for General Service
MSS SP-72
Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and
Flared Ends
Cast-Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
MSS SP-110
Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves
MSS SP-80
Steel Valves, Socket Welding and Threaded Ends
ASME B16.34
Cast-Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
MSS SP-85
Backwater Valves
ASME A112.14.1
Vacuum Relief Valves
ANSI Z21.22/CSA
4.4
ASSE 1003
Water Pressure Reducing Valves
MSS SP-78
Water Heater Drain Valves
ASME BPVC SEC
IV, Part HLW-810
Trap Seal Primer Valves
ASSE 1018
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply
Systems
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves
for Automatically Fired Hot Water Boilers
ANSI Z21.22/CSA
4.4
ASME CSD-1 Safety
Code, Part CW,
Article 5
2.10
PLUMBING FIXTURES
2.10.1 General
Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ICC IPC. Fixtures for use by
the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1. Provide vitreous china
fixtures that are nonabsorbent, hard-burned, and vitrified throughout the body. No fixture
will be accepted that shows cracks, crazes, blisters, thin spots, or other flaws. Equip
fixtures with appurtenances such as traps, faucets, stop valves, and drain fittings. Each
fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the drainage system shall be
equipped with a trap. Brass expansion or toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be
provided for supports, and polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be
provided where exposed to view. Fixtures with the supply discharge below the rim shall be
equipped with backflow preventers. Internal parts of flush and/or flushometer valves,
shower mixing valves, shower head face plates, ] [shall be copper alloy with all visible
surfaces chrome plated].[ Plastic in contact with hot water shall be suitable for 82 degrees
C water temperature.] Maximum allowable lead content in wetted surfaces of pipes, pipe
fittings, plumbing fittings and fixtures, as determined by a weighted average shall not
exceed 0.25 percent.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 19 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.10.2 Flushometer Valves
Provide flushometer valves with an ADA compliant, metal oscillating, non-hold-open
handle, backcheck angle control stop, and vacuum breaker. Flushometer valves shall be
either a large diaphragm, or fixed volume piston type with filtered metering bypass. Valve
shall not be able to be converted externally or internally to exceed a low consumption flush.
Handle packing, main seat, stop seat and vacuum breaker shall be molded from a
chloramine resistant rubber compound. Provide valve body, cover, tailpiece and control
stop in conformance with ASTM Alloy Classification for semi-red brass. All exposed
surfaces shall be chrome plated. Handle shall have factory applied antimicrobial coating.
Flushometer valves shall conform to ASSE 1037.
2.10.3 Automatic Controls
Where specified with a fixture, provide automatic, sensor operated faucets complying with
ASSE 1037 and UL 1951. Faucet systems shall consist of solenoid-activated valves with
light beam sensors.
2.10.4 Service Sinks
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china with integral back and wall hanger
supports, minimum dimensions of 559 mm wide by 508 mm front to rear, with two supply
openings in 254 mm high back. Provide floor supported wall outlet cast iron P-trap and
stainless steel rim guards as recommended by service sink manufacturer. Provide back
mounted washerless service sink faucets with vacuum breaker and 19 mm external hose
threads.
2.10.5 Fixture Descriptions
2.10.5.1 Electric Water Coolers
Provide self-contained, mechanically refrigerated electric water coolers with more than
a single thickness of metal between the potable water and the refrigerant in the heat
exchanger, wall-hung, bubbler style, air-cooled condensing unit, stainless steel splash
receptor and basin, and stainless steel cabinet. Provide 8.4 mL/s minimum capacity of
10 degrees C water when supplied with 27 degrees C inlet water and a 32 degrees C
room temperature. Control bubblers by push levers or push bars, front mounted or side
mounted near the front edge of the cabinet. Bubbler spouts shall be mounted at
maximum of 914 mm above floor and at front of unit basin with 686 mm minimum knee
clearance from bottom of unit to finished floor. Spouts shall direct water flow at least
102 mm above unit basin and trajectory parallel or nearly parallel to the front of unit.
Provide chrome plated 10 mm OD soft-copper tube supplies with set-screw
escutcheons, and loose key stops. Provide chrome plated 32 x 40 mm semi-cast Ptrap with cleanout with 1.1 x 38 mm chrome plated copper tube trap arm with set-screw
escutcheon. Provide filters for chlorine in supply piping to faucets. Provide ASME
A112.6.1M concealed steel pipe chair carriers.
a. EWC-1 (JSN R2201): Accessible (forward facing), dual-level, recessed, brushed
stainless steel, recessed refrigeration unit, dual level extensions with oval
receptors, access panel cover, rounded corners, rounded edges, designed to
eliminate splashing and standing waste water. Provide self- closing, semi-circular
push bars with full 180 degree activation.
b.
EWC-2 (Similar to JSN R2202):
refrigerated.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Self-contained, wall hung, mechanically
PAGE 20 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.10.5.2 Emergency Fixtures
Provide copper alloy control valves. Provide an air-gap with the lowest potable eye and
face wash water outlet located above the overflow rim by not less than the International
Plumbing Code minimum. [Provide a pressure-compensated tempering valve, with
leaving water temperature setpoint adjustable throughout the range 16 to 35 degrees
C.] [Provide packaged, UL listed, alarm system; including an amber strobe lamp, horn
with externally adjustable loudness and horn silencing switch, mounting hardware, and
waterflow service within NEMA Type 3 or 4 enclosures[ and for explosion proof service
within NEMA Type 7 or 9 enclosures].]
a. EW-1 (Similar to JSN P1960): Eye/face wash, ANSI/ISEA Z358.1, deck-mounted,
swing down, self- cleaning, non-clogging eye and face wash with quick opening,
full-flow valve. Spray heads swing down from storage to operational position
activating water flow. Coordinate configuration with sink faucet location. Unit shall
deliver 0.19 L/s of aerated water at 207 kPa flow pressure.
b. EW-2 (JSN P2000): Eye/face wash, ANSI/ISEA Z358.1, wall-mounted selfcleaning, non-clogging eye and face wash with quick opening, full-flow valves,
corrosion-resisting steel eye and face wash receptor. Unit shall deliver 0.19 L/s of
aerated water at 207 kPa flow pressure, with eye and face wash nozzles 838 to
1143 mm above finished floor. Provide 32 mm standard chrome drain fitting.
c. ES-1 (Similar to JSN P5210): Combination drench shower and eye/face wash,
ANSI/ISEA Z358.1. All exposed surfaces shall be stainless steel. Recessed
eye/face wash and shower actuator assembly. Eye/face wash, swing down, selfcleaning, non-clogging eye and face wash with quick opening, full- flow valve.
Spray heads swing down from storage to operational position activating water flow.
Eye/face wash shall deliver 0.19 L/s of aerated water at 207 kPa 30 psi flow
pressure. Shower head shall be a minimum of 203 mm diameter
Shower valve
shall be 25 mm IPS brass stay-open valve with stainless steel "panic bar" actuator.
Shower shall deliver 1.89 L/s flow and 508 mm pattern at 1524 mm above floor.
Eye/face wash and shower actuator shall be mounted in [combined] stainless steel
fully recessed cabinet with flanged rim and suitable for mounting in 92 mm stud
wall. [This unit shall be suitable for and installed for handicap access.]
d. ES-2 (JSN P5210): Combination drench shower and eye/face wash, ANSI/ISEA
Z358.1. Components shall be mounted on a minimum 32 mm diameter [stainless
steel] [ pipe stanchion with floor flange. Provide chrome plated split ring support to
adjacent wall surface 305 mm below shower arm connection. Eye/face wash,
swing down, self-cleaning, non-clogging eye and face wash with quick opening, 13
mm IPS chrome-plated brass full-flow push to activate stay-open valve. Eye/face
wash shall deliver 0.19 L/s of aerated water at 207 kPa flow pressure. Shower
head shall be a minimum of 203 mm diameter. Shower valve shall be 25 mm IPS
chrome-plated brass stay-open valve with stainless steel actuating arm and pull
rod. Shower shall deliver 1.89 L/s flow and 508 mm pattern at 1524 mm above
floor. [This unit shall be suitable for and installed for handicap access.]
2.10.5.3 Lavatories
a. Provide ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, integral back type wall
hung lavatories with supply openings for use with top mounted faucet, and
openings for concealed arm carrier installation. Provide chrome plated 10 mm OD
soft-copper tube supplies with set-screw escutcheons, and loose key stops.
Provide chrome plated 32 x 40 mm semi-cast P-trap with cleanout with 1.1 x 38
mm chrome plated copper tube trap arm with set-screw escutcheon. Provide
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 21 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe supports and
concealed arms for the lavatory. Mount lavatory with the front rim 787 mm above
the floor, except 864 mm above floor and with 737 mm minimum clearance from
bottom of the front rim to floor for accessible lavatories.
(1) L-1 (Similar to JSN P3200): 508 x 457 mm. Fixture shall be equipped with,
electronic infra- red operated 100 mm centerset combination faucet with
aerator, drain fitting with grid strainer, "P" trap, and angle or straight stop
valves. Automatic water flow starts electronically by proximity of individual.
Provide wiring box, 120/24 volt solenoid remote mounted transformer.
Transformer may be sized for multiple adjacent lavatories.] Flow shall be
limited to 0.03 L/s at a flowing pressure of 549 kPa.
(2) L-2: Same as L-1 except accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1. Provide
accessible protection on exposed water supplies and "P" trap and drain piping.
(3) L-3 (Similar to JSN P3100): 508 x 610 mm. Fixture shall be equipped with
combination faucet, elevated gooseneck spout with laminar flow outlet, 100 mm
wrist action handles, drain fitting with grid strainer, "P" trap, and angle or
straight stop valves. Faucet body shall not have a pop-up drain rod hole.
Plugged holes are not acceptable. The flow shall be limited to 0.09 L/s at a
flowing water pressure of 549 kPa.
(4) L-4: Same as L-3 except accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1. Provide
accessible protection on exposed water supplies and "P" trap and drain piping.
(5) L-5 (Similar to JSN P3100): 508 x 610 mm. Fixture shall be equipped with
combination faucet, elevated gooseneck spout with laminar flow outlet, 100 mm
wrist action handles, drain fitting with grid strainer, "P" trap, and angle or
straight stop valves. Faucet body shall not have a pop-up drain rod hole.
Plugged holes are not acceptable. The flow shall be limited to 0.09 L/s at a
flowing water pressure of 549 kPa. Accessible mounting height per ICC
A117.1. Provide accessible protection on exposed water supplies and "P" trap
and drain piping.
b. ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, self-rimming counter-mounted
lavatories with supply openings for use with top mounted faucet. Furnish template
and mounting kit by lavatory manufacturer. Provide chrome plated 10 mm OD softcopper tube supplies with set-screw escutcheons, and loose key stops. Provide
chrome plated 32 x 40 mm semi-cast P-trap with cleanout with 1.1 x 38 mm
chrome plated copper tube trap arm with set-screw escutcheon.
(1) L-6 (Similar to JSN P3070): 508 x 457 mm. Fixture shall be equipped with,
electronic infra- red operated 100 mm centerset combination faucet with
aerator, drain fitting with grid strainer, "P" trap, and angle or straight stop
valves. Automatic water flow starts electronically by proximity of individual.
Provide wiring box, 120/24 volt solenoid remote mounted transformer.
Transformer may be sized for multiple adjacent lavatories. [Provide either a
battery operated unit or a solar powered unit with battery backup.] Flow shall
be limited to 0.03 L/s at a flowing pressure of 549 kPa 80 psi.
(2) L-7: Same as L-6 except provide accessible protection on exposed water
supplies and "P" trap and drain piping.
(3) L-8 (Similar to JSN P3070): 508 x 457 mm. Fixture shall be equipped with 100
mm centerset combination faucet with laminar flow outlet, elevated gooseneck
spout with laminar flow outlet, 100 mm wrist action handles, drain fitting with
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 22 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
grid strainer, "P" trap, and angle or straight stop valves. Faucet body shall not
have a pop-up drain rod hole. Plugged holes are not acceptable. Flow shall be
limited to 0.09 L/s at a flowing pressure of 549 kPa. Accessible mounting height
per ICC A117.1. Provide accessible protection on exposed water supplies and
"P" trap and drain piping.
2.10.5.4 Mop Service Basin
a. [Provide terrazzo mop sinks made of marble chips cast in white portland cement to
produce 25 MPa minimum compressive strength 7 days after casting. Provide floor
or wall outlet copper alloy body drain cast integral with terrazzo, with polished
stainless steel strainers.]
b. MS-1 (JSN P4700): 914 x 610 x 254 mm, [molded polyester/fiberglass product,
built under heat and pressure, resulting in a one-piece, homogeneous product]
[precast terrazzo] with service faucet, hose, hose racket, and mop hanger.
2.10.5.5 Plaster Traps
a. PT-1 (JSN P7600): Large, 406 mm high by 356 mm wide by 356 mm long; shall
have heavy gray cast-iron body, white porcelain-enamel inside and outside;
clamps, cage of heavy galvanized material, and brass screens; with 50 mm long
inlet and 50 mm high outlet fitted with hood seal.
b. PT-2 (JSN P7650): Small, 254 mm high by 152 mm wide by 152 mm long; shall be
cast aluminum, rectangular with solid top and hinged bottom having integral baffles
and 6 mm drain plug; bolted bottom shall provide easy access for removal of
screens for cleaning and recovery of items in sediment bucket.
2.10.5.6 Showers
Provide single control pressure equalizing shower valves with body mounted from
behind the wall with threaded connections. Provide tubing mounted from behind the
wall between faucets and shower assembly. Provide separate globe valves or angle
valves with union connections in each supply to faucet. The top of drain outlets shall be
chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. [ ] [ ]
a. SH-1 (JSN P5040): Wall mounted detachable spray assembly, 600 mm wall bar,
elevated vacuum breaker, supply elbow and flange and valve. All external trim,
chrome plated metal. Plastic shower head with flow control to limit discharge to
0.110 L/s, 1500 mm length of rubber lined corrosion resistant steel, chrome plated
metal flexible, or white vinyl reinforced hose and supply wall elbow. Design
showerhead to fit in palm of hand. Provide corrosion resistant steel or chrome
plated metal wall bar with an adjustable swivel hanger for showerhead. Fasten wall
bar securely to wall for hand support. Combination thermostatic and pressure antiscald balancing valve, with chrome plated metal lever type operating handle
adjustable for rough-in variations and chrome plated metal or corrosion resistant
steel face plate. Valve body shall be any suitable copper alloy. Internal parts shall
be copper, nickel alloy, corrosion resistant steel or thermoplastic material. Valve
inlet and outlet shall be 13 mm IPS. Provide external screwdriver check stops,
vacuum breaker and temperature limit stops. Set stops for a maximum
temperature of 40 degrees C. All exposed fasteners shall be vandal resistant.
Valve shall provide a minimum of 0.379 L/s at 310 kPa pressure drop.
b. SH-2 (Similar to JSN P5040): Wall mounted, shower head connected to shower
arm. All external trim shall be chrome plated metal. Chrome plated metal head,
adjustable ball joint, self cleaning with automatic flow control device to limit
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 23 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
discharge to not more than 0.110 L/s. Body, internal parts of shower head and flow
control fittings shall be copper alloy or corrosion resistant steel. Install showerhead
1800 mm above finished floor. Combination thermostatic and pressure anti-scald
balancing valve, with chrome plated metal lever with adjustment for rough-in
variations, type operating handle and chrome plated brass or corrosion resistant
steel face plate. Valve body shall be any suitable copper alloy. Internal parts shall
be copper, nickel alloy, corrosion resistant steel or thermoplastic material. Valve
inlet and outlet shall be 13 mm IPS. Provide external screwdriver check stops, and
temperature limit stops. Set stops for a maximum temperature of 40 degrees C.
Install valve 1370 mm from bottom of shower receptor. All exposed fasteners shall
be vandal resistant. Valve shall provide a minimum of 0.379 L/s at 310 kPa
pressure drop.
c. SH-3 (JSN P5350): Psychiatric patient, vandal-resistant with thermostatic valve in
cabinet; shower head shall be designed for prison use. Fixture shall have smooth
surfaces with no projection that can be used as a catch or hook; shall have flat
back arranged for bolting directly to the wall; shall be tapped for 13 mm pipe
connection to tempered water line; the head shall have a tamperproof removable
face not less than 90 mm diameter; and the shower head shall be installed not less
than 1829 mm above the floor and shall deliver the spray within a 900 mm circle.
Flow shall be limited to 0.16 L/s at a flowing water pressure of 549 kPa.
d. Shower enclosures
Cabinet shall be reinforced acrylic conforming to IAPMO
Z124.1.2. e. Shower Pan: Sheet copper shall be 4.9 kg per square meter weight.
2.10.5.7 Sinks
Provide ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4, Type 302(18-8) or 304(18-8) stainless steel
sinks with integral mounting rim for flush installation, with undersides fully sound
deadened, with supply openings for use with top mounted faucet, and with 89 mm drain
outlet. Sink depth less than or equal to 250 mm shall be 18 gage. Sink depth greater
than 250 mm shall be 16 gage. Provide aerator with faucet. Water flow rate shall not
exceed 90 mL per second when measured at a flowing water pressure of 414 kPa.
Provide chrome plated 10 mm OD soft-copper tube supplied with set-screw
escutcheons, and loose key stops. Provide chrome plated 40 mm semi-cast P-trap with
cleanout with 1.1 x 38 mm chrome plated copper tube trap arm with set-screw
escutcheon. Provide separate 38 mm P-trap and drain piping to vertical vent piping
from each compartment. Coordinate hole quantities, locations, and centerings with
faucet types indicated in fixture descriptions. Provide exact numbers of holes
necessary. Use of faucet hole covers is not acceptable. Dimensions given are overall,
and bowl in the following order: front to back, left to right, depth. ] Sinks located in
casework designated as handicap accessible shall be same as specified except the
basin depth shall not be greater than 165 mm and the drain outlet shall be located to
the rear of the basin.
a. S-1 (JSN CS010): Single bowl, counter-mounted, 460 x 380 x 165 mm, bowl 305 x
305 x 165 mm. Drain outlet shall be located to the rear of the basin. Faucet shall
be 100 mm centerset with two 100 mm wristblades and 125 mm diameter fixed
gooseneck spout.
b. S-2 (JSN CS080): Single bowl, counter-mounted, 508 x 560 x 190 mm, bowl 355 x
457 x 190 mm. Faucet shall be 100 mm centerset with two 100 mm wristblades
and 125 mm diameter fixed gooseneck spout.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 24 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
c. S-3 (JSN CS090): Single bowl, counter-mounted, 560 x 560 x 190 mm, bowl 406 x
480 x 190 mm. Faucet shall be 100 mm centerset with two 100 mm wristblades
and 125 mm diameter fixed gooseneck spout.
d. S-4 (JSN CS140): Single bowl, counter-mounted, 560 x 430 x 254 mm, bowl 400 x
355 x 254 mm. Faucet shall be 100 mm centerset with two 100 mm wristblades
and 125 mm diameter fixed gooseneck spout.
e. S-5 (JSN CS150): Single bowl, counter-mounted, 560 x 560 x 254 mm, bowl 406 x
408 x 254 mm. Faucet shall be 100 mm centerset with two 100 mm wristblades
and 125 mm diameter fixed gooseneck spout.
f. S-6 (JSN CS180): Single bowl, counter-mounted, 560 x 635 x 305 mm, bowl 400 x
560 x 305 mm. Faucet shall be 100 mm centerset with two 100 mm wristblades
and 125 mm diameter fixed gooseneck spout.
g. S-7 (JSN CS200): Single bowl, counter-mounted, 560 x 787 x 305 mm, bowl 400 x
711 x 305 mm. Faucet shall be 100 mm centerset with two 100 mm wristblades
and 125 mm diameter fixed gooseneck spout.
h. S-8 (JSN CS230): Double bowl, counter-mounted, 560 x 840 x 254 mm, each bowl
400 x 355 x 254 mm. Faucet shall be 200 mm spread, single handle, swing spout.
i. S-9 (JSN CS250): Single bowl, counter-mounted, 380 x 380 x 150 mm, bowl 230 x
305 x 150 mm. Faucet shall be 100 mm centerset with two 100 mm wristblades
and 125 mm diameter fixed gooseneck spout.
j. S-10 (JSN P3520): Sink, plaster, 560 x 760 x 241 mm; vitreous china; faucet with 51
mm spray, 150 mm handles, screwdriver stops, grid drain 40 mm tailpieces, 51 mm
O.D. drain connection to trap and wall; plaster-interceptor trap (PT-1), space shall
be left above for removal of screens. Provide with floor-mounted heavy-duty type
sink carrier with acid-resisting white coated exposed arms and hanger support
plate.
2.10.5.8 Sink, Flushing Rim
SF-1 (JSN P6350): 760 x 510 x 460 mm; vitreous china with an integral flushing rim to
include faucet with fork brace 150 mm handles, 260 mm wall to spout outlet, and plain
end spout with bucket hook; stainless steel spring type front and side rim guards and
100 mm outlet. Provide flushometer valve. Provide 254 mm high terrazzo base.
2.10.5.9 Sink, Surgeons Scrub
a. SSS-1 (JSN P6980): Three station, wall-mounted, gooseneck spouts, knee push
controls. Construction shall be of seamless welded 16 gauge, Type 304, stainless
steel. Cabinet shall be sound-deadened with a fire-resistant material. Unit shall be
wall mounted using a mounting carrier. Front panels shall be easily removed for
access to the water control valves, waste connections, stops and strainers. Sink
bottoms shall be sloping to minimize splashing and a 40 mm OD tailpiece with an
80 mm flat strainer drain. Provide each compartment (station) with a gooseneck
assembly with a 40 mm sprayhead that can be removed for sterilization. Provide
adjustable thermostatic mixing valve with anti-scald feature for each compartment
and controlled from the top mounted control panel. Provide mechanical pilot type
water control valves for each compartment actuated by one push of a kneeoperated front panel and turned off by a second push. Plastic splash shield shall
be provided between compartments. Provide knee-controlled soap dispensers at
each compartment.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 25 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
b. SSS-2 (Similar to JSN P6990): Three station, wall-mounted, gooseneck spouts,
electronically timed with long (10 minute) and short (3, 4, 5 minute) cycles.
Construction shall be of seamless welded 16 gauge, Type 304, stainless steel.
Cabinet shall be sound-deadened with a fire-resistant material. Unit shall be wall
mounted using a mounting carrier. Front panels shall be easily removed for access
to the water control valves, waste connections, stops and strainers. Sink bottoms
shall be sloping to minimize splashing and a 40 mm OD tailpiece with an 80 mm
flat strainer drain. Provide each compartment (station) with a gooseneck assembly
with a 40 mm sprayhead that can be removed for sterilization. Provide adjustable
thermostatic mixing valve with anti-scald feature for each compartment and
controlled from the top mounted control panel. Control shall be watertight and top
mounted. Timing device shall be internal to reduce tampering. Plastic splash shield
shall be provided between compartments. Provide foot-controlled soap dispensers
at each compartment. Sink shall include 120 volt, 2 ampere power to an internal
junction box.]
2.10.5.10 Urinals
a. Provide ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, wall-mounted, wall
outlet, urinals with integral trap, drain line connection, and extended side shields.
The trap design shall comply with the IPC. Install urinal rim 610 mm above the
floor at non-accessible locations. Urinals installed in compliance with ADA
requirements shall be mounted with the rim 430 mm above the floor. Provide
ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers. Urinals equipped with flush valves
shall have a flushing volume of the urinal and flush valve combination not
exceeding the fixture design rating. Mount flush valves not less than 279 mm
above the fixture.
(1) U-1 (Similar to JSN P8100): High efficiency washout for solenoid valve. The
maximum water use allowed shall be 0.47 L per flush at a flowing water
pressure of 549 kPa. Flushing cycle shall be activated by an electronic infrared
sensor operated by proximity of individual. [Provide wiring box, 120/24 volt
solenoid, and transformer.] [ ]
(2) U-2: Same as U-1 except accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1.
(3) U-3: (Similar to JSN P8100): High efficiency washout for solenoid valve. The
maximum water use allowed shall be 1.9 L per flush at a flowing water pressure
of 549 kPa. Flushing cycle shall be activated by an electronic infrared sensor
operated by proximity of individual. [Provide wiring box, 120/24 volt solenoid,
and transformer.]
(4) U-4: Same as U-3 except accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1.
(5) U-5 (Similar to JSN P8150): Waterless. Sealed replaceable cartridge or
integral liquid seal trap shall use a biodegradable liquid to provide the seal and
maintain a sanitary and odor- free environment. Mechanical seal trap not
permitted. Slope the sanitary sewer branch line a minimum of 6 mm per 300
mm. Drain lines that connect to the urinal outlet shall not be made of copper.
Manufacturer shall provide an operating manual and onsite training for the
proper care and maintenance of the urinal.
(6) U-6: Same as U-5 except accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1.
2.10.5.11 Water Closets
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 26 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
a. Provide ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, elongated bowl, wallhung water closets. The trap design shall comply with the IPC. Install top of toilet
seat 356 to 381 mm, above the floor at non-accessible locations. Water closets
installed in compliance with ADA requirements shall be mounted with rim of seat
432 to 483 mm above the floor. Water closets equipped with flush valves shall
have a flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination not
exceeding the fixture design rating. Water flushing volume of the water closet and
flush valve combination shall not exceed 6 liters per flush. Seat shall conform to
IAPMO Z124.5. Mount flush valves not less than 279 mm above the fixture.
Mounted height of flush valve shall not interfere with the hand rail in ADA stalls.
Provide ASME A112.6.1M heavy duty 227 kg capacity chair carriers.
(1) WC-1 (Similar to JSN P9050): Siphon-jet for direct flushometer valve.
Flushometer valve shall be dual-flush type. Flushing cycle shall be activated by
an electronic infrared sensor operated by proximity of individual. [Provide
wiring box 120/24 volt solenoid and transformer.] The maximum water use
allowed shall be 6 liters per flush when sensor indicates user has been in
proximity for approximately a minute or more and 4 liters per flush when user is
in proximity for less than a minute.
(2) WC-2 (Similar to JSN P9050): Same as WC-1 except accessible mounting
height per ICC A117.1 Provide riser with grab bar offset.
(3) WC-3 (Similar to JSN P9000): High efficiency (HET), siphon-jet for flushometer
valve. High efficiency washout for solenoid valve. The maximum water use
allowed shall be 4.8 L per flush at a flowing water pressure of 549 kPa.
Flushing cycle shall be activated by an electronic infrared sensor operated by
proximity of individual. Provide wiring box, 120/24 volt solenoid, and
transformer
(4) WC-4 (Similar to JSN P9050): Same as WC-3 except accessible mounting
height per ICC A117.1. Provide riser with grab bar offset.
(5) WC-5 (Similar to JSN P9050): Siphon jet with bowl provided with lugs or slots
for holding bedpan. Bedpan cleaner (P1150) shall be for mounting on water
closet having exposed flush valve; provided with wall support bracket; and
brass valve body having a taper machined type leakproof, raise and lower
spray arm; and using one-third of flush water volume to rinse pan, balance to
flush waste.
(6) WC-6 (Similar to JSN P9050): Same as WC-5 except accessible mounting
height per ICC A117.1. Provide riser with grab bar offset.
2.10.5.12 Hose Bibbs and Hydrants
a. HB-1: Hose bibb with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer, brass construction with
19 mm male inlet threads, hexagon shoulder, and 19 mm hose connection. Handle
shall be securely attached to stem.
2.11
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Backflow preventers shall be approved and listed by the Foundation for Cross-Connection
Control & Hydraulic Research. Reduced-pressure principle assemblies, double check
valve assemblies, atmospheric (nonpressure) type vacuum breakers, and pressure type
vacuum breakers shall be tested, approved, and listed in accordance with FCCCHR
Manual. Backflow preventers with intermediate atmospheric vent shall conform to ASSE
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 27 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
1012. Reduced pressure principle backflow preventers shall conform to ASSE 1013. Hose
connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1011. Pipe applied atmospheric type
vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1001. Pressure vacuum breaker assembly shall
conform to ASSE 1020. Air gaps in plumbing systems shall conform to ASME A112.1.2.
2.12
DRAINS AND BACKWATER VALVES
Drains and backwater valves installed in connection with waterproofed floors or shower
pans shall be equipped with bolted-type device to securely clamp flashing.
2.12.1 Area Drains
a.
Provide area drains with coated [galvanized] cast iron bodies for embedding in the floor
construction. The grate/strainer shall be plain pattern perforated or slotted. Provide
with threaded outlet connection. Between the outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene rubber
gasket conforming to ASTM C564 may be installed, provided that the drain is
specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type joint. Drain shall conform
to ASME A112.6.3. Grate/strainer weight loading classification is based on ASME
A112.6.3. Dimensions are nominal.
b. AD-1: 300 mm overall [width], 200 mm diameter grate, 150 mm depth, with [removable] ,
light-duty cast iron grate with minimal free area of 2 times free area of outlet pipe size.
Provide with backwater valve.
2.12.2 Floor and Shower Drains
Provide floor and shower drains with coated [galvanized] cast iron bodies, double drainage
pattern for embedding in the floor construction, and seepage pan having weep holes or
channels for drainage to the drainpipe. The grate/strainer shall be adjustable to floor
thickness. Provide an integral clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing
membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing membrane
when required. Provide with threaded outlet connection. Between the outlet and waste
pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C564 may be installed, provided that
the drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type joint.
Floor and shower drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.3. Grate/strainer weight loading
classification is based on ASME A112.6.3. Dimensions are nominal. Provide drain with
trap primer connection, trap primer, and connection piping.
a. FD-1: 300 mm diameter flashing collar, 100 mm deep body and 200 mm diameter
removable, non- tilt heavy-duty cast iron grate with minimal free area of 1.5 times free
area of outlet pipe size.
b. FD-2: 250 mm diameter invertible flashing collar, 50 mm deep body, and minimum 150
mm [square] [ ] removable, secured, light-duty nickel bronze strainer with minimum free
area of 1.5 times free area of outlet pipe size.
[c. FD-3: 300 mm diameter flashing collar, 50 mm deep body, and 200 mm diameter non-tilt
heavy- duty cast iron grate with minimal free area of 1.5 times free area of outlet pipe
size. Provide with 400 mm diameter isolation floor drain body with flange, integral
clamping collar, and standpipe.]
2.12.3 Floor Sinks
Provide floor sinks with coated [galvanized] cast iron bodies, with acid-resisting interior,
and double drainage pattern for embedding in the floor construction, and seepage pan
having weep holes or channels for drainage to the drainpipe. Provide an integral clamping
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 28 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without
damaging the flashing or waterproofing membrane when required. Provide with threaded
outlet connection. Between the outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket
conforming to ASTM C564 may be installed, provided that the drain is specifically designed
for the rubber gasket compression type joint. Floor sinks shall conform to ASME A112.6.3.
Provide aluminum sediment bucket. Grate/strainer weight loading classification is based
on ASME A112.6.3. Dimensions are nominal. Full grate free area shall be a minimum of
1.5 times the free area of the outlet pipe size. [Provide drain with trap primer connection,
trap primer, and connection piping.]
a. FS-1: 300 mm square top, 250 mm deep with 3/4 light-duty nickel bronze grate.
b. FS-2: 300 mm diameter top, 250 mm deep with 3/4 light-duty nickel bronz grate.
c. FS-3: 300 mm square top, 250 mm deep [with] [3/4] [light-duty acid-resisting] ] [grate].
d. FS-4: 300 mm diameter top, 250 mm deep [with] [3/4] [light-duty acid-resisting] [grate].
e. FS-5: 300 mm square top, 250 mm deep with stainless steel rim and [3/4] [light-duty
stainless steel] [grate].
2.12.4 Roof Drains and Expansion Joints
Roof drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.4, with dome and integral flange, and shall
have a device for making a watertight connection between roofing and flashing. Provide
roof drains designated as secondary (emergency) overflow drains with 50 mm high dam.
The whole assembly shall be [galvanized] heavy pattern cast iron including the dome
strainer. Provide drain with a gravel stop. On roofs other than concrete construction,
drains shall be complete with underdeck clamp, sump receiver, and an extension for the
insulation thickness where applicable. Provide a clamping device for attaching flashing or
waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or membrane
when present. Strainer openings shall have a combined area equal to twice that of the
drain outlet. The outlet shall be equipped to make a proper connection to threaded pipe of
the same size as the rain leader. An expansion joint of proper size to receive the rain
leader shall be provided.
The expansion joint shall consist of a heavy cast-iron housing, brass or bronze sleeve,
brass or bronze fastening bolts and nuts, and gaskets or packing. The sleeve shall have a
nominal thickness of not less than 3.416 mm. Gaskets and packing shall be close-cell
neoprene, O-ring packing shall be close- cell neoprene of 70 durometer. Packing shall be
held in place by a packing gland secured with bolts.
a. RD-1: 400 to 500 mm diameter flashing clamp, 280 to 350 mm diameter by 125 mm high
dome strainer.
b. RD-2: 400 to 500 mm diameter flashing clamp, 280 to 350 mm diameter by 125 mm high
dome strainer. Provide minimum 50 mm high internal or external water dam.
2.12.5 Sight Drains
a. Provide sight drains with coated [galvanized] cast iron bodies, double drainage pattern for
embedding in the floor construction, and seepage pan having weep holes or channels for
drainage to the drainpipe. The grate/strainer shall be adjustable to floor thickness.
Provide an integral clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to
the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing membrane when
required. Provide with threaded outlet connection. Between the outlet and waste pipe, a
neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C564 may be installed, provided that the
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 29 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type joint. Floor and
shower drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.3. Grate/strainer weight loading
classification is based on ASME A112.6.3. Dimensions are nominal. [Provide drain with
trap primer connection, trap primer, and connection piping.]
b. SD-1: 250 mm diameter invertible flashing collar, 50 mm deep body, and minimum 150
mm [square] [diameter] removable, secured, light-duty nickel bronze strainer with
minimum free area of 1.5 times free area of outlet pipe size with funnel extension.
Provide minimum funnel dimensions as follows:
(1) Height of funnel 95 mm.
(2) Diameter of lower portion of funnel 50 mm.
(3) Diameter of upper portion of funnel 100 mm.
2.12.6 Backwater Valves
Backwater valves shall be either separate from the floor drain or a combination floor drain,
P-trap, and backwater valve, as shown. Valves shall have cast-iron bodies with cleanouts
large enough to permit removal of interior parts. Valves shall be of the flap type, hinged or
pivoted, with revolving disks.
Hinge pivots, disks, and seats shall be nonferrous metal. Disks shall be slightly open in a
no-flow no- backwater condition. Cleanouts shall extend to finished floor and be fitted with
threaded countersunk plugs.
2.13
CLEANOUTS
a. Provide cleanouts with coated cast-iron bodies (unless otherwise noted) with extra-heavy,
threaded, tapered, brass plug with solid hexagonal nut and American Standard pipe
threads. Provide flashing collars and clamps for cleanout bodies being installed in floors
with finishes installed over waterproofing. Cleanouts on piping completely accessible
from within pipe chases do not require covers. Cleanouts in exposed piping in
equipment rooms do not require covers.
b. Provide interior floor-mounted cleanouts with a two-piece, threaded, adjustable housing.
Provide top and cover based on floor finish:
(1) Resilient tile and sheet finish: Round flange top with scoriated cover.
(2) Ceramic tile finish: Square flange top with scoriated cover.
(3) Poured finish: Round, wide-flange top with scoriated cover.
(4) Carpet finish: Round top with standard top tapped for carpet-marker bolt.
(5) Terrazzo finish: Round top with recessed-for-terrazzo cover.
(6) Quarry tile finish: Square, heavy-duty top with heavy-duty scoriated cover.
(7) Concrete finish (unfinished areas): Heavy, round frame; satin-bronze, scoriated
tractor top, ANSI heavy duty load class.
c. Provide isolation cleanouts with a lower and an upper flashing collar, flashing clamps with
seepage openings, and adjustable ferrule with 100 mm diameter bronze top. Ferrule
shall be tapped for cleanout plug. Seal ferrule to lower clamping collar with press-fit
neoprene gasket. Seal cleanout plug with neoprene gasket.]
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 30 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.14
TRAPS
2.14.1 Fixture Traps
Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be copper-alloy adjustable tube type with slip joint
inlet and swivel. . [Provide traps with removable access panels for easy clean-out at sinks
and lavatories.] Tubes shall be copper alloy with walls not less than 0.813 mm thick within
commercial tolerances, except on the outside of bends where the thickness may be
reduced slightly in manufacture by usual commercial methods. Inlets shall have rubber
washer and copper alloy nuts for slip joints above the discharge level. Swivel joints shall
be below the discharge level and shall be of metal-to-metal type as required for the
application. Nuts shall have flats for wrench grip. Outlets shall have internal pipe thread,
except that when required for the application, the outlets shall have sockets for solder-joint
connections. The depth of the water seal shall be not less than 50 mm and not more than
100 mm. The interior diameter shall be not more than 3.2 mm over or under the nominal
size, and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. A copper alloy "P" trap
assembly consisting of an adjustable "P" trap and threaded trap wall nipple with cast brass
wall flange shall be provided for lavatories. The assembly shall be a standard
manufactured unit and may have a rubber-gasketed swivel joint.
2.14.2 Drain Traps
Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be cast iron, one piece pattern, deep seal with depth
of water seal of 100 mm. The interior diameter shall be not more than 3.2 mm over or
under the nominal size, and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. The
trap assembly shall be a standard manufactured unit. Traps for drains located in fan and
plenum housings shall maintain seal against the static pressure.
2.15
TRAP PRIMER ASSEMBLIES
Provide fully automatic trap primer assemblies, factory assembled and prepiped and
including 19 mm NPT female inlet, bronze body 19 mm female NPT ball valve, 19 mm
water hammer arrester, ASSE 1001 atmospheric vacuum breaker, and ASTM B88 19 mm
Type L copper tubing distribution manifold. Distribution manifold shall be calibrated to
provide equal water distribution to each trap. Provide minimum supply of 60 mL of water to
each trap. Provide manifold with 16 mm x 15 mm compression fitting outlets. All solder
joints shall be made with lead free solder. Provide electronic assembly tested and certified
per UL 73 and including circuit breaker, 5 second dwell function, manual override, 24 hour
geared timer, and solenoid valve. Provide single point water supply and power supply
connections. .
2.16
INTERCEPTORS
2.16.1 Grease Interceptor
Grease interceptor of the size indicated shall be of reinforced concrete, [or precast
concrete construction] [ with removable three-section, 9.5 mm checker-plate cover, and
shall be installed outside the building. Steel grease interceptor shall be installed in a
concrete pit and shall be epoxy- coated to resist corrosion as recommended by the
manufacturer. Interceptors shall be tested and rated in accordance with PDI G 101.
Concrete shall have 21 MPa minimum compressive strength at
28 days. Provide flow control fitting.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 31 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.16.2 Oil Interceptor
Cast iron or welded steel, coated inside and outside with white acid resistant epoxy, with
internal air relief bypass, bronze cleanout plug, double wall trap seal, removable
combination pressure equalizing and flow diffusing baffle and sediment bucket, horizontal
baffle, adjustable oil draw-off and vent connections on either side, gas and watertight
gasketed nonskid cover, and flow control fitting.
2.17
WATER HEATERS
Provide water heaters with replaceable anodes. Each primary water heater shall have
controls with an adjustable range that includes 32 to 71 degrees C. Each gas-fired water
heater and booster water heater shall have controls with an adjustable range that includes
49 to 82 degrees C. Hot water systems utilizing recirculation systems shall be tied into
building off-hour controls. The thermal efficiencies and standby heat losses shall conform
to or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - SI, or 10 CFR 430 whichever is the most
stringent for each type of water heater specified. The only exception is that storage water
heaters and hot water storage tanks having more than 2000 liters storage capacity need
not meet the standard loss requirement if the tank surface area is insulated to R-12.5 and if
a standing light is not used. Plastic materials, polyetherimide (PEI) and polyethersulfone
(PES), are forbidden to be used for vent piping of combustion gases. A factory precharged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply to each water heater.
Expansion tanks shall be specifically designed for use on potable water systems and shall
be rated for 93 degrees C water temperature and 1034 kPa working pressure.
2.17.1 Performance of Water Heating Equipment
Standard rating condition terms are as follows:
EF = Energy factor, overall efficiency.
ET = Thermal efficiency with 21 degrees C delta T.
EC = Combustion efficiency, 100 percent - flue loss when smoke = 0 (trace is
permitted).
SL = Standby loss in W/0.093 sq. m. based on 27 degrees C delta T, or in percent per
hour based on nominal 38 degrees C delta T.
HL = Heat loss of tank surface area.
V = Storage volume in liters
2.17.1.1 Storage Water Heaters
a. Electric:
(1) Storage capacity of 454 liters or less, and input rating of 12 kW or less:
minimum energy factor (EF) shall be 0.93-0.00132V per 10 CFR 430.
(2) Storage capacity of more than 454 liters or input rating more than 12
kW: maximum SL shall be 0.2931(20+35 V), W per ANSI
Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 32 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
b. Gas:
(1) Storage capacity of 379 liters or less, and input rating of 21980 W or
less: minimum EF shall be 0.62-0.0019V per 10 CFR 430.
(2) Storage capacity of more than 379 liters or input rating more than 21980
W: Et shall be 80 percent; maximum SL shall be 0.2931(Q/800+110 V),
W per ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.
c. Oil:
(1) Storage capacity of 189 liters or less and input rating of 30773 W or
less: minimum EF shall be 0.59-0.0019V per 10 CFR 430.
(2) Storage capacity of more than 189 liters or input rating more than 30773
W: Et shall be 78 percent; maximum SL shall be 0.2931(Q/800+110 V),
W per ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.
2.17.1.2 Unfired Hot Water Storage
All volumes and inputs: tank surface shall be thermally insulated to R12.5 per ASHRAE
90.1 - SI.
2.17.2 Automatic Storage Type
Provide heaters complete with [ ] [control system, temperature gauge, and pressure
gauge,] and ASME rated combination pressure and temperature relief valve.
2.17.2.1 Oil-Fired Type
Provide oil-fired type water heaters conforming to UL 732.
2.17.2.2 Gas-Fired Type
Provide gas-fired water heaters conforming to ANSI Z21.10.1/CSA 4.1 when input is 22
KW or less, or ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 for heaters with input greater than 22 KW.
2.17.2.3 Electric Type
Provide electric type water heaters conforming to UL 174 with dual heating elements.
Each element shall be 4.5 KW. The elements shall be wired for non-simultaneous
operation so that only one element can operate at a time.
2.17.2.4 Indirect Heater Type
Steam and high temperature hot water (HTHW) heaters with storage system shall be
the assembled product of one manufacturer, and be ASME tested and "U" stamped to
code requirements under ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1. The storage tank shall be as
specified in paragraph HOT-WATER STORAGE TANKS. The heat exchanger shall be
double wall type that separates the potable water from the heat transfer medium with a
space vented to the atmosphere in accordance with ICC IPC.
a.
HTHW Energy Source: The heater element shall have a working pressure of 2758
kPa with water at a temperature of 204 degrees C. The heating surface shall be
based on 0.093 square meter of heating surface to heat 76 liters or more of water
in 1 hour from 4 to 82 degrees C using hot water at a temperature of 178 degrees
C. Carbon steel heads shall be used. Tubing shall conform to ASTM
B111/B111M, Copper Alloy No. 706 (90-10 copper-nickel). Heating elements shall
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 33 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
withstand an internal hydrostatic pressure of 4137 kPa for not less than 15
seconds without leaking or any evidence of damage.
b.
Steam Energy Source: The heater element shall have a working pressure of 1034
kPa with steam at a temperature of 185 degrees C. The heating surface shall be
based on 0.093 square meter of heating surface to heat 76 liters or more of water
in 1 hour from 4 to 82 degrees C using steam at atmospheric pressure. [ ]
[bronze] heads shall be used. Tubing shall be light-drawn copper tubing
conforming to ASTM B75M. Heating elements shall withstand an internal
hydrostatic pressure of 1551 kPa for not less than 15 seconds without leaking or
any evidence of damage.
2.17.3 Instantaneous Water Heater
Heater shall be crossflow design with service water in the coil and [hot water] in the shell.
An integral internal controller shall be provided, anticipating a change in demand so that
the final temperature can be maintained under all normal load conditions when used in
conjunction with [ ] [pilot-operated temperature control system]. Normal load conditions
shall be as specified by the manufacturer for the heater. Unit shall be manufactured in
accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1, and shall be certified for 1.03 MPa working
pressure in the shell and 1.03 MPa working pressure in the coils. Shell shall be carbon
steel with copper lining. Heads shall be ] [bronze] [ ]. Coils shall be ] [copper-nickel].
Shell shall have metal sheathed fiberglass insulation, combination pressure and
temperature relief valve, and thermometer. Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23
07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
2.17.4 Electric Instantaneous Water Heaters (Tankless)
UL 499 and UL listed flow switch activated, tankless electric instantaneous water heater for
wall mounting below sink or lavatory.
2.17.5 Relief Valves
Water heaters and hot water storage tanks shall have a combination pressure and
temperature (P&T) relief valve. The pressure relief element of a P&T relief valve shall have
adequate capacity to prevent excessive pressure buildup in the system when the system is
operating at the maximum rate of heat input. The temperature element of a P&T relief
valve shall have a relieving capacity which is at least equal to the total input of the heaters
when operating at their maximum capacity. Relief valves shall be rated according to ANSI
Z21.22/CSA 4.4. Relief valves for systems where the maximum rate of heat input is less
than 59 kW shall have 20 mm minimum inlets, and 20 mm outlets. Relief valves for
systems where the maximum rate of heat input is greater than 59 kW shall have 25 mm
minimum inlets, and 25 mm outlets. The discharge pipe from the relief valve shall be the
size of the valve outlet.
2.18
HOT-WATER STORAGE TANKS
Hot-water storage tanks shall be constructed by one manufacturer, ASME stamped for the
working pressure, and shall have the National Board (ASME) registration. The tank shall
be cement-lined or glass-lined steel type in accordance with AWWA D100. The heat loss
shall conform to TABLE III as determined by the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - SI. Each
tank shall be equipped with a thermometer, conforming to ASTM E1, Type I, Class 3,
Range C, style and form as required for the installation, and with 175 mm scale.
Thermometer shall have a separable socket suitable for a 19 mm tapped opening. Tanks
shall be equipped with a pressure gauge 155 mm minimum diameter face. Insulation shall
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 34 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL
SYSTEMS. Storage tank capacity shall be as shown.
2.19
PUMPS
2.19.1 Sump Pumps
Provide sump pumps of the automatic, electric motor-driven, submerged type, complete
with necessary control equipment and with a split or solid cast-iron or steel cover plate.
The pumps shall be direct-connected by an approved flexible coupling to a vertical electric
motor having a continuous oiling device or packed bearings sealed against dirt and
moisture. Motors shall be totally enclosed, fan- cooled of sizes as indicated and shall be
equipped with an across-the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure.
Each pump shall be fitted with a high-grade thrust bearing mounted above the floor. Each
shaft shall have an alignment bearing at each end, and the suction inlet shall be between
75 and 150 mm above the sump bottom. The suction side of each pump shall have a
strainer of ample capacity. A float switch assembly, with the switch completely enclosed in
a NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure, shall start and stop each motor at predetermined water
levels. Duplex pumps shall be equipped with an automatic alternator to change the lead
operation from one pump to the other, and for starting the second pump if the flow exceeds
the capacity of the first pump. The discharge line from each pump shall be provided with a
union or flange, a nonclog swing check valve, and a stop valve in an accessible location
near the pump.
2.19.2 Hydraulic Elevator Sump Pumps
Provide sump pump and control system capable of pumping water while containing oil.
The system shall function automatically and shall provide for an alarm in the event of the
presence of oil in the sump, high liquid in the sump, or high amps or a locked rotor
condition. An alarm that sounds only in the event of a high liquid condition shall not be
acceptable. Provide submersible type pump. Pump shall be approved to UL 778
standards and shall include thermal and overload protection. Provide motor capable of
operating continuously or intermittently. Provide motor housing constructed of 304
stainless steel, and mechanical seals housed in a separate oil-filled compartment. Provide
controls approved to UL 508 standards and housed in a NEMA 4X enclosure with stainless
steel hinged hardware. The controls shall include dual relays with variable sensitivity
settings, magnetic contactor with separate over-current relay, self-cleaning stainless steel
sensor probe, high decibel warning horn with illuminated red light and alarm silencing
switch, dual floats, clearly marked terminal board and remote monitoring contact. All
cables between the pump and control unit shall be a minimum of 4.9 meters long and the
cable and plug from the control unit shall be a minimum of 2.5 meters long. The control
unit, pump, floats, and sensor probe shall be factory assembled as a complete, ready to
use system and shall be tested and approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory
such as ENTELA.
2.19.3 Circulating Pumps
Provide electrically driven, single-stage, centrifugal domestic hot water circulating pumps
with mechanical seals, suitable for the intended service. Revolutions per minute shall not
exceed 3000. Pump and motor shall be integrally mounted on a cast-iron or steel
subbaseThe shaft shall be one- piece, heat-treated, corrosion-resisting steel with impeller
and smooth-surfaced housing of bronze. Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled and
shall have sufficient wattage (horsepower) for the service required. Each pump motor shall
be equipped with an across-the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure
with "START-STOP" switch in cover. Pump motors smaller than 746 watts shall have
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 35 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
integral thermal overload protection in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Guards shall shield exposed moving parts.
2.19.4 Booster Pumps
2.19.4.1 Centrifugal Pumps
Provide horizontal split-case centrifugal-type booster pumps. Revolutions per minute
shall not exceed 1800. Pumps shall have a casing of close-grained iron or steel with
smooth water passages. A gasket shall be provided between the upper and lower
halves of the casing. Suction and discharge connections shall be flanged. Impellers
shall be nonoverloading, bronze, balanced to eliminate vibration, and shall be keyed to
corrosion-resisting steel shafts. The casings shall be fitted with bronze wearing or
sealing rings. Bearings shall be cartridge type, enabling the entire rotating element to
be removed without disturbing alignment or exposing the bearings to dirt, water, and
other foreign matter. Pumps shall be provided with mechanical seals. Seal boxes shall
be machined in the pump casing and at both sides of the pump, and shall be of
sufficient depth to include a conventional bronze seal ring and rows of shaft packing.
Bedplates shall be close-grain cast iron or steel with ribs and lugs, complete with
foundation bolts, and shall have a drip lip with drain hole. Each pump shall be tested at
the manufacturer's plant for operating characteristics at the rated capacity and under
specified operating conditions. Test curves shall be furnished showing capacity in liters
per second, head in meters, efficiency, brake wattage, and operation in parallel with
similar pumps. Multiple pump installations shall have pump characteristics compatible
for operation in parallel with similar pumps. The electric motor shall be sized for nonoverload when operating at any point along the characteristic curve of the pump.
Guards shall shield exposed belts and moving parts.
2.19.4.2 Controls
Provide each pump motor with enclosed across-the-line-type magnetic controller
complete in a NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure with three position, "HAND-OFFAUTOMATIC," selector switch in cover. Pumps shall be automatically started and
stopped by float or pressure switches. The pumps shall start and stop at the levels and
pressures indicated. A multiposition sequence selector switch shall be provided so that
any two pumps may be operated simultaneously keeping a third pump as a standby.
2.19.5 Flexible Connectors
Provide flexible connectors at the suction and discharge of each pump that is 746 watts or
larger. Connectors shall be constructed of neoprene, rubber, or braided bronze, with Class
150 standard flanges. Flexible connectors shall be line size and suitable for the pressure
and temperature of the intended service.
2.19.6 Sewage Pumps
Provide duplex type with automatic controls to alternate the operation from one pump to the
other pump and to start the second pump in the event the first pump cannot handle the
incoming flow. Provide high water alarm and check valve.
2.20
WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM
2.20.1 Constant Speed Pumping System
Provide constant speed pumping system with pressure-regulating valves employing one
lead pump for low flows, and one or more lag pumps for higher flows. Pressure-regulating
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 36 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
valves shall be provided with nonslam check feature. Provide factory prepiped and
prewired assembly mounted on a steel frame, complete with pumps, motors, automatic
controls, and ASME code constructed hydro- pneumatic tank. Current sensing relays shall
provide staging of the pumps. The pumps shall be protected from thermal buildup, when
running at no-flow, by a common thermal relief valve. Pressure gauges shall be mounted
on the suction and discharge headers. The control panel shall bear the UL listing label for
industrial control panels and shall be in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. The control panel
shall include the following: no-flow shutdown; 7-day time clock; audiovisual alarm; external
resets; manual alternation; magnetic motor controllers; time delays; transformer; current
relays; "HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC" switches for each pump; minimum run timers; low
suction pressure cutout; and indicating lights for power on, individual motor overload, and
low suction pressure. The control circuit shall be interlocked so that the failure of any
controller shall energize the succeeding controller. Provide an ASME code constructed
hydro-pneumatic tank stamped for 862 kPa water working pressure. The tank shall have a
flexible diaphragm made of material conforming to FDA requirements for use with potable
water and shall be factory precharged to meet required system pressure.
2.20.2 Variable Speed Pumping System
Variable speed pumping system shall provide system pressure by varying speed and
number of operating pumps. The factory prepiped and prewired assembly shall be
mounted on a steel frame complete with pumps, variable speed drives, motors, automatic
controls, and ASME code constructed hydro-pneumatic tank. The variable speed drives
shall be the oil-filled type capable of power transmission throughout their complete speed
range without vibration, noise, or shock loading. Each variable speed drive shall be runtested by the manufacturer for rated performance, and the manufacturer shall furnish
written performance certification. System shall have suppressors to prevent noise
transmission over electric feed lines. Required electrical control circuitry and system
function sensors shall be supplied by the variable speed drive manufacturer. The primary
power controls and magnetic motor controllers shall be installed in [the controls supplied by
the drive manufacturer. The sensors shall be located in the system to control drive speed
as a function of [constant pump discharge pressure] [ ]. Connection between the sensors
and the variable speed drive controls shall be accomplished with [hydraulic sensing lines] [
]. Controls shall be in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures. Provide an ASME code constructed
hydro-pneumatic tank stamped for 862 kPa water working pressure. The tank shall have a
flexible diaphragm made of material conforming to FDA requirements for use with potable
water and shall be factory precharged to meet required system pressure.
2.21
DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE METER
Cold water meters 50 mm and smaller shall be positive displacement type conforming to
AWWA C700. Cold water meters 65 mm and larger shall be turbine type conforming to
AWWA C701. Meter register may be round or straight reading type, as provided by the
local utility. Meter shall be provided with a pulse generator, remote readout register and all
necessary wiring and accessories.
2.22
COPPER-SILVER IONIZATION SYSTEM
a. Provide a complete copper-silver ionization system consisting of a controller, electrode
cell(s), and flow meter.
b. Provide a microprocessor-based controller that automatically controls the rate of copper
and silver ion release. Controller must be able to generate a minimum concentration of
0.25 mg/L copper on a continuous basis. Controller shall perform under all types of
water conditions without limiting its current due to lack of voltage. Controller shall
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 37 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
operate primarily in proportional copper and silver ion level control mode to prevent over
or under ionization, and shall be capable of operating in secondary control modes, to
include continuous, timer, and flow switch. Controller shall incorporate anti-scaling
features.
c. Provide on-board and remote alarm connection capabilities. Provide auxiliary contacts for
remote monitoring capability. Controller shall conform to UL 508 for Industrial Control
Panels.
d. Provide electrode cell(s) incorporating reduced scaling features. Housing shall be CPVC,
epoxy coated aluminum, or Schedule 40 stainless steel. Provide with electrical quick
connections. Provide sacrificial electrodes of an extruded alloy of 99.99 percent pure
copper and 99.99 percent pure medical grade silver, with minimum ratio of 30 percent
silver to 70 percent copper.
e. Provide a flow meter with a transmitter that displays the flow rate and total water usage.
Provide clamp on transducers (non pipe invasive) with a flow response time of 0.3
seconds and flow sensitivity of 0.0003 m/s.
g. Submit written NSF certification for Copper-Silver Ionization that the system (or
components in contact with potable water) are certified.
2.23
ELECTRICAL WORK
a. Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors, motor starters,
and controls as specified herein and in Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM. Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral
part of the equipment. Provide [high efficiency type,] single-phase, fractionalhorsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system,
corresponding to the applications in accordance with NEMA MG 11. [In addition to the
requirements of Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, provide
polyphase, squirrel-cage medium induction motors with continuous ratings, including
motors that are part of a system, that meet the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency
motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1.] Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG
1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the
nameplate rating of the motor.
b. Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Motor duty
requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum
encountered interval between start and stop. Motor torque shall be capable of
accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage
maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Motor bearings shall be fitted
with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.
c. Controllers and contactors shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls provided.
Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation
specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not
shown, shall be provided. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide
controllers, including the required monitors and timed restart.
d. Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided under and
conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.24
FACTORY PAINTING
a. Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification
that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test,
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 38 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog
test. Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test the
acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the
paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion;
and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 3 mm on either side of
the scratch mark.
b. The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be
less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard
factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures
above 50 degrees C, the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature
service.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 39 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise
the PGC site engineer of any discrepancy before performing any work.
3.2
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
a. Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements. [ ] Piping
located in shafts that constitute air ducts or that enclose air ducts shall be
noncombustible in accordance with NFPA 90A. [Installation of plastic pipe where in
compliance with NFPA may be installed in accordance with PPFA Fire Man.] The
plumbing system shall be installed complete with necessary fixtures, fittings, traps,
valves, and accessories. Piping shall be concealed wherever possible. Under no
circumstances reduce pipe size on Contract Documents without written consent of
Contracting Officer. Extend water and drainage piping 1525 mm outside the building,
unless otherwise indicated. A [OS&Y valve] [ ] and drain shall be installed on the water
service line inside the building approximately 150 mm above the floor from point of entry.
Piping shall be connected to the exterior service lines or capped or plugged if the exterior
service is not in place. Sewer and water pipes shall be laid in separate trenches, except
when otherwise shown. Exterior underground utilities shall be at least 500 mm below
finish grade . If trenches are closed or the pipes are otherwise covered before being
connected to the service lines, the location of the end of each plumbing utility shall be
marked with a stake or other acceptable means. Valves shall be installed with control no
lower than the valve body.
b. Provide piping to fixtures, outlets, and equipment requiring drainage, vent, and water
utilities. The hot-water and cold-water piping system shall be arranged and installed to
permit draining. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture, except faucets,
flush valves, or other control valves which are supplied with integral stops, shall be
equipped with a shutoff valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance
without interfering with operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to
fixtures, faucets, hydrants, shower heads, and flushing devices shall be anchored to
prevent movement.
c. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting of construction
shall be avoided. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment as a result of cutting
shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved.
d. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and
equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemicals, and
mechanical injury. Upon completion of the work, the fixtures, materials, and equipment
shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted, and operated. Safety guards shall be provided for
exposed rotating equipment.
e. Branch sizes to individual fixtures shall be as scheduled. Consult manufacturer's data,
Architectural drawings, and/or Plumbing drawings of rooms containing equipment and
plumbing fixtures prior to roughing in piping. Stub piping through wall directly behind
equipment item, or fixture being served. Connect equipment furnished by Owner or other
divisions of the specification in accordance with this section.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 40 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.3
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS
3.3.1 General
Pipe shall be accurately cut and worked into place without springing or forcing. Structural
portions of the building shall not be weakened. Aboveground piping shall run parallel with
the lines of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may
be taken from top, bottom, or side of main, using crossover fittings required by structural or
installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance
from other work and other services to permit not less than 13 mm between finished
covering on the different services. Bare and insulated water lines shall not bear directly
against building structural elements so as to transmit sound to the structure or to prevent
flexible movement of the lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless
specifically indicated or approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing
fittings. Use of bushings will not be permitted except for use in situations in which standard
factory fabricated components are furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation
practice. Change in direction shall be made with fittings.
3.3.2 Service Entrance
Provide service entrance installation through [ ] [slab on grade with reaction anchor at
buried elbow where water service pipe turns up below floor. Terminate end of exterior
piping material with flange connection and tie flange back to buried elbow with tie rods of
same diameter as flange bolts. Provide minimum of one tie rod for each two flange bolt
holes. Provide permanent corrosion protection for below-grade tie rods.]
3.3.3 Pipe Drains
Pipe drains shall consist of 19 mm hose bibb with renewable seat and [gate] [ ] valve
ahead of hose bibb. At other low points, 19 mm brass plugs or caps shall be provided.
Disconnection of the supply piping at the fixture is an acceptable drain.
3.3.4 Valves
Provide manual isolation valves at base of risers, on branch runouts from piping mains, on
each branch serving a rest room, on each branch serving an equipment item, and on each
branch to hose bibb or wall hydrant. [Wire isolation valves on emergency fixture supply
open and tag "Do Not Close".] Balance hot water circulation system.
3.3.5 Expansion and Contraction of Piping
Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of water pipe. Each
hot-water and hot-water circulation riser shall have expansion loops or other provisions
such as offsets, changes in direction, or manufactured expansion fittings. Risers shall be
securely anchored to force expansion to loops. Branch connections from risers shall be
made with ample swing or offset to avoid undue strain on fittings or short pipe lengths.
Horizontal runs of pipe over 15 m in length shall be anchored to the wall or the supporting
construction about midway on the run to force expansion, evenly divided, toward the ends.
Sufficient flexibility shall be provided on branch runouts from mains and risers to provide for
expansion and contraction of piping. Flexibility shall be provided by installing one or more
turns in the line so that piping will spring enough to allow for expansion without straining. If
mechanical grooved pipe coupling systems are provided, the deviation from design
requirements for expansion and contraction may be allowed pending approval of PGC site
engineer .
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 41 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.3.6 Thrust Restraint
Plugs, caps, tees, valves and bends deflecting 11.25 degrees or more, either vertically or
horizontally, in waterlines 100 mm in diameter or larger shall be provided with thrust blocks,
to prevent movement. Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than: 1
cement, 2.5 sand, 5 gravel; and having a compressive strength of not less than 14 MPa
after 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between solid ground and the fitting to be
anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or directed, the base and thrust bearing sides of the
thrust block shall be poured against undisturbed earth. The side of the thrust block not
subject to thrust shall be poured against forms. The area of bearing will be as shown.
Blocking shall be placed so that the joints of the fitting are accessible for repair. Steel rods
and clamps, protected by galvanizing or by coating with bituminous paint, shall be used to
anchor vertical down bends into gravity thrust blocks.
3.3.7 Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters
Provide commercial-type water hammer arresters on hot- and cold-water supplies.
Arresters shall be located as generally indicated, with precise location and sizing to be in
accordance with PDI WH 201 Sizing and Placement Data. Water hammer arresters, where
concealed, shall be accessible by means of access doors or removable panels.
Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall conform to ASSE 1010. Vertical capped
pipe columns (air chambers) shall not be permitted.
3.3.8 Water Meter Remote Readout Register
a. Provide true absolute remote readout encoder register providing direct electronic transfer
of meter reading information from water meter to automatic meter reading device. The
remote register shall be mounted at the location indicated, or as directed by PGC
engineer .
b. Provide permanently sealed register to exclude dirt and/or moisture infiltration. Provide
with a straight reading odometer-type display, and 360 degree test circle with center
sweep hand and low flow (leak) detector. Provide tamperproof locking feature to resist
tampering with the register. Provide factory potted moisture resistant wire assembly for
pit applications.
c. Provide registers with full 6-wheel encoding, and a 6-wheel odometer assembly for direct
manual reading. The register shall transmit data using open architecture variable length
protocol in ASCII format (American Standard Code for Information Interchange). Provide
with capacity of remote installation up to 90 meters to an outside wall mounted touch
pad.
d. The register shall use an absolute encoder to directly read the actual position of the index
odometer wheels, when interrogated by a reading device. The reading device shall
provide all necessary power. Pulse outputs and/or memory shall not require
programming. The register shall not require battery power to operate. When a reading
device interrogates the register, the translator encoder shall communicate to the device
in ASCII computer language the absolute meter reading, and an eight-digit identification
number. Any error or nonread shall be immediately indicated by the meter reading
equipment.
3.3.9 Backflow Prevention Devices
Plumbing fixtures, equipment, and pipe connections shall not cross connect or interconnect
between a potable water supply and any source of nonpotable water. Backflow preventers
shall be installed where indicated and in accordance with [ICC IPC] at all other locations
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 42 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
necessary to preclude a cross- connect or interconnect between a potable water supply
and any nonpotable substance. In addition backflow preventers shall be installed at all
locations where the potable water outlet is below the flood level of the equipment, or where
the potable water outlet will be located below the level of the nonpotable substance.
Backflow preventers shall be located so that no part of the device will be submerged.
Backflow preventers shall be of sufficient size to allow unrestricted flow of water to the
equipment, and preclude the backflow of any nonpotable substance into the potable water
system. Bypass piping shall not be provided around backflow preventers. Access shall be
provided for maintenance and testing. Each device shall be a standard commercial unit.
Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention devices shall be installed horizontally and
located in an accessible location not more than 1219 mm above finished floor. Pipe drain
from reduced pressure principle backflow prevention devices to the exterior, or a floor drain
of adequate capacity, or a mop sink.
3.3.10 Copper-Silver Ionization Systems
a. System Bypass: Provide 3 valve bypass around system.
b. Testing: Provide one year of laboratory testing from [ 3 ] distal sites for copper and
silver ion levels to demonstrate appropriate levels for copper and silver. Copper level
shall be 0.2 to 0.4 mg/L over baseline not to exceed Safe Drinking Water Act (40 CFR
143) level of 1.0 mg/L (1.3 mg/L is enforceable limit by EPA unless the applicable State
has established a lower level). Silver level shall be 0.03 to 0.05 mg/L over baseline not
to exceed Safe Drinking Water Act (40 CFR 143) of 0.1 mg/L (no maximum enforceable
limit). Provide one test per quarter during the first year following Government
acceptance of the facility. Provide factory test certifications attesting unit performance is
meeting the requirements of this specification.
3.4
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
3.4.1 General
a. Provide wye fittings and eighth bends, or combination wye and eighth fittings at changes
of direction and junctions. Sanitary tee fittings shall only be used in vertical pipe.
Sanitary crosses are not permitted. Provide P-trap for each direct waste-pipe connection
to equipment. Provide ice makers with an indirect drain consisting of either a floor sink
or a dedicated, under-counter P-trap. Provide air gaps at indirect drains.
b. Install horizontal soil, waste, and storm piping with the following minimum slopes; 75 mm
and smaller pipes shall be 19 mm/m; 100 mm to 150 mm shall be 10 mm/m; 200 mm
and larger pipes: 5 mm/m. Slopes indicated on plans override those indicated here.
c. Provide vent stacks parallel to soil and waste stacks to receive branch vents from fixtures.
Each vent stack shall originate from a soil or waste stack at its base. To permit proper
flashing, offset through-the-roof piping away from walls on roof before passing through
roof. Carry vent stacks 100 mm and larger full size through roof. Install vent lines so
they will drain and not trap water. Where possible combine soil, waste or vent stacks
before passing through roof to minimize roof openings. Where minimum vent-throughroof size is larger than vent size, provide increaser a minimum of 305 mm below roof
line.
d. Provide drip pans under drainage piping installed over critical areas to include but not
limited to: operating rooms, recovery rooms, delivery rooms, nurseries, food preparation
areas, food serving areas, food storage areas, central service areas, and electronic data
processing areas. Provide drain piping from drip pans. Discharge drain piping to drain
in exposed area.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 43 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
e. Installed piping shall not be insulated, concealed, or furred around until it has been tested
to satisfaction of PGC engineer . If inspection or test indicates defects, replace such
defective work or material and repeat inspection and tests. Repairs shall be made with
new materials. Peening and chiseling of holes or screwed joints is not allowed.
3.4.2 Pipe Cleanouts
Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than
100 mm will not be required. A cleanout installed in connection with cast-iron soil pipe shall
consist of a long-sweep 1/4 bend or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the location shown.
An extra-heavy cast-brass or cast- iron ferrule with countersunk cast-brass head screw
plug shall be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with the floor. Cleanouts
in connection with other pipe shall be T-pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with
cast-brass screw plugs[, except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe]. Plugs shall
be the same size as the pipe up to and including 100 mm. Cleanout tee branches with
screw plug shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste stacks, at the foot of interior
downspouts, on each connection to building storm drain where interior downspouts are
indicated, and on each building drain outside the building. Cleanout tee branches may be
omitted on stacks in single story buildings with slab-on-grade construction or where less
than 450 mm of crawl space is provided under the floor. Cleanouts on pipe concealed in
partitions shall be provided with chromium plated bronze, nickel bronze, nickel brass or
stainless steel flush type access cover plates. Round access covers shall be provided and
secured to plugs with securing screw. Square access covers may be provided with
matching frames, anchoring lugs and cover screws. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have
access covers and frames installed flush with the finished wall. Cleanouts installed in
finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with a chrome-plated cast brass,
nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to the plug or cover frame and set flush with
the finished floor. Heads of fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface.
Where cleanouts are provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be cast iron. Provide
cleanout extensions through floor above where cleanouts are required in piping above
critical areas, or to an accessible location outside of critical area.
3.4.3 Sight Drains
Sight drains shall be installed so that the indirect waste will terminate 50 mm above the
flood rim of the funnel to provide an acceptable air gap.
3.4.4 Traps
Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture shall be doubletrapped. Traps installed on cast-iron soil pipe shall be cast iron. Traps installed on steel
pipe or copper tubing shall be recess-drainage pattern, or brass-tube type.[ Traps installed
on plastic pipe may be plastic conforming to ASTM D3311.] Traps for acid-resisting waste
shall be of the same material as the pipe.
3.5
JOINTS
Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for
tees will not be permitted. Joints shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and
made for the specific purpose intended.
3.5.1 Threaded
Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming to ASME
B1.20.2M. Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or with an approved
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 44 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
graphite compound, or with an inert filler and oil, or shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene
tape applied.
3.5.2 Mechanical Couplings
Grooved mechanical joints shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's
instructions. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances specified by the
coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using
a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, or narrow-land micrometer. Groove width and
dimension of groove from end of the pipe shall be measured and recorded for each change
in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances.
Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations, such as behind solid walls or
ceilings, unless an access panel is shown on the drawings for servicing or adjusting the
joint.
3.5.3 Unions and Flanges
Unions, flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, or
partitions.
Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 65 mm and smaller; flanges shall be used on pipe sizes
80 mm and larger.
3.5.4 Grooved Mechanical Joints
Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's instructions. Grooved
fittings, couplings, and grooving tools shall be products of the same manufacturer. Pipe
and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances specified by the coupling
manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a
"go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, narrow- land micrometer, or other method
specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended application. Groove
width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded for each
change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances.
Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations.
3.5.5 Cast Iron Soil Pipe
Bell and spigot compression and hubless gasketed clamp joints for soil, waste and vent
piping shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.5.6 Copper Tube and Pipe
a. Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2/B2.2M and CDA A4015 with
flux and are acceptable for all pipe sizes. Copper to copper joints shall include the use of
copper-phosphorus or copper-phosphorus-silver brazing metal without flux. Brazing of
dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall include the use of flux with a copperphosphorus, copper-phosphorus-silver or a silver brazing filler metal.
b. Soldered joints shall be made with flux. Soldered joints shall conform to ASME B31.5
and CDA A4015.
c. Mechanically extracted joints shall be made in accordance with ICC IPC.
d. Press connection. Copper press connections shall be made in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions for manufactured rated size. The joints shall be
pressed using the tool(s) approved by the manufacturer of that joint. Minimum distance
between fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 45 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.5.7 Glass Pipe
Joints for corrosive waste glass pipe and fittings shall be made with corrosion-resisting
steel compression-type couplings with acrylonitrile rubber gaskets lined with
polytetrafluoroethylene.
3.5.8 Corrosive Waste Plastic Pipe
Joints for polypropylene pipe and fittings shall be made by mechanical joint or electrical
fusion coil method in accordance with ASTM D2657 and ASTM F1290.
3.5.9 Other Joint Methods
Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous copper water pipe shall be made with
dielectric unions or flange waterways. Dielectric waterways shall have temperature and
pressure rating equal to or greater than that specified for the connecting piping.
Waterways shall have metal connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping.
Dielectric waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed to
prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric flanges shall meet the
performance requirements described herein for dielectric waterways. Connecting joints
between plastic and metallic pipe shall be made with transition fitting for the specific
purpose.
3.6
CORROSION PROTECTION FOR BURIED PIPE AND FITTINGS
Ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pipe, fittings, and joints shall have a protective coating.
Additionally, ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pressure pipe shall have a cathodic protection
system and joint bonding. The cathodic protection system, protective coating system, and
joint bonding for cathodically protected pipe shall be in accordance with [Section 26 42
14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)] [and] [Section 26
42 17.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (IMPRESSED CURRENT)] . Coatings
shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance with NACE SP0169 and as
otherwise specified. The pipe shall be cleaned and the coating system applied prior to pipe
tightness testing. Joints and fittings shall be cleaned and the coating system applied after
pipe tightness testing. For tape coating systems, the tape shall conform to AWWA C203
and shall be applied with a 50 percent overlap. Primer utilized with tape type coating
systems shall be as recommended by the tape manufacturer.
3.7
PIPE SLEEVES AND FLASHING
Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent location.
3.7.1 Sleeve Requirements
Pipes passing through concrete or masonry walls or concrete floors or roofs shall be
provided with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction. Sleeves are not
required for supply, drainage, waste and vent pipe passing through concrete slab on grade,
except where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor. A modular mechanical type
sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a waterproofing clamping flange and caulking
and sealing of annular space between pipe and sleeve.
The seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the
annular space between the pipe and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and
pressure plates. The links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous
rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut. After
the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall cause the
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 46 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the
sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the
pipe and sleeve involved. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except
where indicated or approved. Rectangular and square openings shall be as detailed. Each
sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, or roof, and shall be cut flush with each
surface, except for special circumstances. Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet
areas such as mechanical equipment rooms, lavatories, kitchens, and other plumbing
fixture areas shall extend a minimum of 100 mm above the finished floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a minimum of 6 mm clearance between bare
pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or between insulation and inside of sleeve. Sleeves
in bearing walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall be steel pipe or cast-iron pipe.
Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings may be steel pipe, cast-iron pipe, galvanized sheet
metal with lock-type longitudinal seam, or plastic. Except as otherwise specified, the
annular space between pipe and sleeve, or between jacket over insulation and sleeve,
shall be sealed with sealants conforming to ASTM C920 and with a primer, backstop
material and surface preparation as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. The
annular space between pipe and sleeve, between bare insulation and sleeve or between
jacket over insulation and sleeve shall not be sealed for interior walls which are not
designated as fire rated. Sleeves through below-grade walls in contact with earth shall be
recessed 13 mm from wall surfaces on both sides. Annular space between pipe and
sleeve shall be filled with backing material and sealants in the joint between the pipe and
[concrete] [ ] wall as specified above. Sealant selected for the earth side of the wall shall
be compatible with dampproofing/waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the
joint sealant.
Pipe sleeves in fire-rated walls shall conform to the requirements in Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING.
3.7.2 Flashing Requirements
Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 4.9 kg per square meter copper
flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be suitably formed, and the
skirt or flange shall extend not less than 200 mm from the pipe and shall be set over the
roof or floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend
up the pipe a minimum of 250 mm. For cleanouts, the flashing shall be turned down into
the hub and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through pitched roofs shall be
flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an adjustable integral flange of adequate size to
extend not less than 200 mm from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to
provide a watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the bare pipe or
between the flashing and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be sealed as indicated.
Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down into the pipe to form a waterproof joint. Pipes,
up to and including 250 mm in diameter, passing through roof or floor waterproofing
membrane may be installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs,
flashing-clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing shield shall be fitted
into the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing through wall waterproofing membrane shall
be sleeved as described above. A waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed.
3.7.3 Optional Counterflashing
Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and sealing the
annular space between the pipe and flashing or metal-jacket-covered insulation and
flashing, counterflashing may be accomplished by utilizing the following:
a. A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 150 mm in diameter.
b. A tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 47 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.7.4 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors
Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items penetrate slab on grade
floors, except at penetrations of floors with waterproofing membrane as specified in
paragraphs Flashing Requirements and Waterproofing, a groove 6 to 13 mm wide by 6 to
10 mm deep shall be formed around the pipe, fitting or drain. The groove shall be filled
with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92
00 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.7.5 Pipe Penetrations
Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall be sealed to prevent
infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.
3.7.6 Fire Seal
Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire-partitions, fire-rated pipe chase walls or floors
above grade, a fire seal shall be provided as specified in Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING.
3.8
PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS
Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS
SP-69, except as modified herein.
a. Type 1, provide with adjustable type steel support rods.
b. Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.
c. Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe.
d. Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed.
Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if they otherwise meet the
requirements for type 18 inserts.
e. Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be used for attachment to steel joists and shall be
torqued per MSS SP-69. Provide both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the
manufacturer. Field-fabricated C- clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.
f. Type 20 attachments shall be used on steel angles and vertical web steel channels and
shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter. Attach to
horizontal web steel channel with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer.
g. Type 21, 28, 29, and 30 clamps shall be used for attachment to steel W or S beams.
h. Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.
i. Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 100 mm and larger when the
temperature of the medium is 15 degrees C or higher. Type 39 saddles shall be welded
to the pipe.
j. Type 40 shields shall:
(1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 100 mm.
(2) Be used on insulated pipe 100 mm and larger when the temperature of the medium
is 15 degrees C or less.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 48 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
(3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes. High density inserts shall have a density
of 128 kg per cubic meter or greater.
k. Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a support shall
be installed not over 300 mm from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the
piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 1.5 m apart at valves. Operating
temperatures in determining hanger spacing for PVC or CPVC pipe shall be 49 degrees
C for PVC and 82 degrees C for CPVC. Horizontal pipe runs shall include allowances
for expansion and contraction.
l. Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade, at intervals of not
more than 4.5 m nor more than 2 m from end of risers, and at vent terminations. Vertical
pipe risers shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.
m. Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or graphite slides
shall be provided to allow longitudinal pipe movement. Slide materials shall be suitable
for the system operating temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads
encountered. Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed. Where steel slides do not
require provisions for lateral restraint the following may be used:
(1) On pipe 100 mm and larger when the temperature of the medium is 15 degrees C
or higher, a Type 39 saddle, welded to the pipe, may freely rest on a steel plate.
(2) On pipe less than 100 mm a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation,
may freely rest on a steel plate.
(3) On pipe 100 mm and larger carrying medium less than 15 degrees C a Type
40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.
n. Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the outside diameter of the
insulation. The insulation shall be continuous through the hanger on all pipe sizes and
applications.
o. Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not desirable, the
type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle, welded to the guide structure and strapped
securely to the pipe. The pipe shall be separated from the slide material by at least 100
mm or by an amount adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater.
p. Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort, cut or abrade the
piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe except where otherwise required in the
control of expansion/contraction.
q. Hangers used to support piping 50 mm and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate
adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. Pipe guides and anchors shall
be installed to keep pipes in accurate alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and
to prevent buckling, swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical movement
when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by
variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. In the support of
multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall be used where each
pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of the base support members shall not
exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple
pipe run. Threaded sections of rods shall not be formed or bent.
3.8.1 Seismic Requirements
Piping and attached valves shall be supported and braced to resist seismic loads as
specified in Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 49 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
EQUIPMENT and [Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT] [as shown]. Structural steel required for reinforcement to properly support
piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be provided. Material used for
supports shall be as specified in[ Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL] and [ Section
05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS].
3.8.2 Structural Attachments
Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in concrete inserts,
built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a
safety factor not less than 5. Supports shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports
shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless
approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead applications shall be
constructed of ferrous materials only.
3.9
FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS
Polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to
view. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lockshield, and loose-key pattern stops for supplies with threaded, sweat or solvent weld inlets
shall be furnished and installed with fixtures. Where connections between copper tubing
and faucets are made by rubber compression fittings, a beading tool shall be used to
mechanically deform the tubing above the compression fitting. Exposed traps and supply
pipes for fixtures and equipment shall be connected to the rough piping systems at the wall,
unless otherwise specified under the item. Drain lines and hot water lines of fixtures for
handicapped/accessible fixtures shall be insulated and do not require polished chrome
finish. Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall be installed within the space shown.
3.9.1 Fixture Connections
Connections between earthenware fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be made gastight
and watertight with a closet-setting compound or neoprene gasket and seal. Use of natural
rubber gaskets or putty will not be permitted. Fixtures with outlet flanges shall be set the
proper distance from floor or wall to make a first-class joint with the closet-setting
compound or gasket and fixture used.
3.9.2 Flushometer Valves
Flushometer valves shall be secured to prevent movement by anchoring the long finished
top spud connecting tube to wall adjacent to valve with approved metal bracket.
Flushometer valves for water closets shall be arranged to avoid interference with grab bars.
In addition, for water closets intended for handicap use, the flush valve handle shall be
installed on the wide side of the enclosure. Bumpers for water closet seats shall be
installed on the wall.
3.9.3 Height of Fixture Rims above Floor
Unless otherwise noted, mounting heights shall be as indicated. Installation of fixtures for
use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1.
3.9.4 Shower Bath Outfits
The area around the water supply piping to the mixing valves and behind the escutcheon
plate shall be made watertight by caulking or gasketing.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 50 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.9.5 Fixture Supports
Fixture supports for off-the-floor lavatories, urinals, water closets, and other fixtures of
similar size, design, and use, shall be of the chair-carrier type. The carrier shall provide the
necessary means of mounting the fixture, with a foot or feet to anchor the assembly to the
floor slab. Adjustability shall be provided to locate the fixture at the desired height and in
proper relation to the wall. Support plates, in lieu of chair carrier, shall be fastened to the
wall structure only where it is not possible to anchor a floor-mounted chair carrier to the
floor slab.
3.9.5.1 Support for Solid Masonry Construction
Chair carrier shall be anchored to the floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair carrier
cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be imbedded in the masonry wall.
3.9.5.2 Support for Concrete-Masonry Wall Construction
Chair carrier shall be anchored to floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair carrier
cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be fastened to the concrete wall using
through bolts and a back-up plate.
3.9.5.3 Support for Steel Stud Frame Partitions
Chair carrier shall be used. The anchor feet and tubular uprights shall be of the heavy
duty design; and feet (bases) shall be steel and welded to a square or rectangular steel
tube upright. Wall plates, in lieu of floor-anchored chair carriers, shall be used only if
adjoining steel partition studs are suitably reinforced to support a wall plate bolted to
these studs.
3.9.5.4 Support for Wood Stud Construction
Where floor is a concrete slab, a floor-anchored chair carrier shall be used. Where
entire construction is wood, wood crosspieces shall be installed. Fixture hanger plates,
supports, brackets, or mounting lugs shall be fastened with not less than No. 10 wood
screws, 6 mm thick minimum steel hanger, or toggle bolts with nut. The wood
crosspieces shall extend the full width of the fixture and shall be securely supported.
3.9.5.5 Wall-Mounted Water Closet Gaskets
Where wall-mounted water closets are provided, reinforced wax, treated felt, or
neoprene gaskets shall be provided. The type of gasket furnished shall be as
recommended by the chair-carrier manufacturer.
3.9.6 Access Panels
Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any item requiring
inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that the
concealed items may be serviced, maintained, or replaced. Access panels shall be as
specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
3.9.7 Shower Pans
Before installing shower pan, subfloor shall be free of projections such as nail heads or
rough edges of aggregate. Drain shall be a bolt-down, clamping-ring type with weepholes,
installed so the lip of the subdrain is flush with subfloor.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 51 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.9.7.1 General
The floor of each individual shower, the shower-area portion of combination shower and
drying room, and the entire shower and drying room where the two are not separated
by curb or partition, shall be made watertight with a shower pan fabricated in place.
The shower pan material shall be cut to size and shape of the area indicated, in one
piece to the maximum extent practicable, allowing a minimum of 150 mm for turnup on
walls or partitions, and shall be folded over the curb with an approximate return of 1/4 of
curb height. The upstands shall be placed behind any wall or partition finish.
Subflooring shall be smooth and clean, with nailheads driven flush with surface, and
shall be sloped to drain. Shower pans shall be clamped to drains with the drain
clamping ring.
3.9.7.2 Metal Shower Pans
When a shower pan of required size cannot be furnished in one piece, metal pieces
shall be joined with a flatlock seam and soldered or burned. The corners shall be
folded, not cut, and the corner seam shall be soldered or burned. Pans, including
upstands, shall be coated on all surfaces with one brush coat of asphalt. Asphalt shall
be applied evenly at not less than 1 liter per square meter. A layer of felt covered with
building paper shall be placed between shower pans and wood floors. The joining
surfaces of metal pan and drain shall be given a brush coat of asphalt after the pan is
connected to the drain.
3.9.8 Escutcheons
Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated piping,
exposed to view, passes through floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or
equipment rooms. Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to pipe or pipe covering and
shall be satin-finish, corrosion-resisting steel, polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or
polished chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be one-piece held in place by
setscrew.
3.10
WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS
3.10.1 Relief Valves
No valves shall be installed between a relief valve and its water heater or storage tank.
The pressure and temperature relief valve shall be installed where the valve actuator
comes in contact with the hottest water in the heater. Whenever possible, the relief valve
shall be installed directly in a tapping in the tank or heater; otherwise, the pressure and
temperature valve shall be installed in the hot-water outlet piping. A vacuum relief valve
shall be provided on the cold water supply line to the hot-water storage tank or water
heater and mounted above and within 150 mm above the top of the tank or water heater.
3.10.2 Connections to Water Heaters
Connections of metallic pipe to water heaters shall be made with dielectric unions or
flanges.
3.10.3 Expansion Tank
A pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply between the
water heater inlet and the cold water supply shut-off valve. Adjust the expansion tank air
pressure, as recommended by the tank manufacturer, to match incoming water pressure.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 52 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.11
IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
3.11.1 Identification Tags
Identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved anodized
aluminum, indicating service and valve number shall be installed on valves, except those
valves installed on supplies at plumbing fixtures. Tags shall be 35 mm minimum diameter,
and marking shall be stamped or engraved. Indentations shall be black, for reading clarity.
Tags shall be attached to valves with No.12 AWG, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded
chain, or plastic straps designed for that purpose.
3.11.2 Nameplates
Provide 3.2 mm thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates, black matte finish with white
center core, for equipment, gages, thermometers, and valves; valves in supplies to faucets
will not require nameplates. Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 6.4 mm
high normal block lettering into the white core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be 25 by
63 mm. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system. Frame charts and
schedules under glass and place where directed near each system. Furnish two copies of
each chart and schedule.
3.11.3 Labels
Provide labels for sensor operators at flush valves and faucets. Include the following
information on each label:
a. Identification of the sensor and its operation with graphic description.
b. Range of the sensor.
c. Battery replacement schedule.
3.11.4 Pipe Color Code Marking
Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND
COATINGS.
3.11.5 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components
Scheme shall be provided in buildings having suspended grid ceilings. The color coding
scheme shall identify points of access for maintenance and operation of operable
components which are not visible from the finished space and installed in the space directly
above the suspended grid ceiling. The operable components shall include valves. The
color coding scheme shall consist of a color code board and colored metal disks. Each
colored metal disk shall be approximately 10 mm in diameter and secured to removable
ceiling panels with fasteners. The fasteners shall be inserted into the ceiling panels so that
the fasteners will be concealed from view. The fasteners shall be manually removable
without tools and shall not separate from the ceiling panels when panels are dropped from
ceiling height. Installation of colored metal disks shall follow completion of the finished
surface on which the disks are to be fastened. The color code board shall have the
approximate dimensions of 1 m width, 750 mm height, and 13 mm thickness. The board
shall be made of wood fiberboard and framed under glass or 1.6 mm transparent plastic
cover. Unless otherwise directed, the color code symbols shall be approximately 19 mm in
diameter and the related lettering in 13 mm high capital letters. The color code board shall
be mounted and located in the mechanical or equipment room. The color code system
shall be as indicated below:
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 53 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
Col
[ or
3.12
System
]
[
]
Item
[
]
Location
[
]
PAINTING
3.12.1 General
Painting of pipes, hangers, supports, and other iron work, either in concealed spaces or
exposed spaces, is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. New
equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as specified
herein or in PART 2 paragraph FACTORY PAINTING, and provided under each individual
section.
3.12.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces
a. Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be
painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt,
rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint,
except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 50 degrees C shall be
cleaned to bare metal.
b. Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding
coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the
succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray.
(1) Temperatures Less Than 50 Degrees C: Immediately after cleaning, the metal
surfaces shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry
film thickness of 0.0076 mm, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.0255 mm; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.0255 mm per coat.
(2) Temperatures Between 50 and 205 Degrees C: Metal surfaces shall receive two
coats of 205 degrees C heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum
thickness of 0.05 mm.
(3) Temperatures Greater Than 205 Degrees C: Metal surfaces shall receive two
coats of 315 degrees C heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film
thickness of 0.05 mm.
3.13
VIBRATION-ABSORBING FEATURES
Mechanical equipment, including pumps, shall be isolated from the building structure by
approved vibration-absorbing features, unless otherwise shown. Each foundation shall
include an adequate number of standard isolation units. Each unit shall consist of machine
and floor or foundation fastening, together with intermediate isolation material, and shall be
a standard product with printed load rating. Piping connected to mechanical equipment
shall be provided with flexible connectors.
Submit details of vibration-absorbing features, including arrangement, foundation plan,
dimensions and specifications.
3.14
TRAINING
a. Provide the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated
User personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety
requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be thoroughly
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 54 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as
practical operation and maintenance work.
b. Instruction shall be given during the time coordinated and agreed with PGC engineer and
User.
c. When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under
the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating
personnel with the changes or modifications.
3.15
POSTED INSTRUCTIONS
Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring and control
diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system, shall be posted where
directed. Condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance
procedures, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation, and procedures for
safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as
specified above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams. The
framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems.
3.16
TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION
Submit test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each
component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified
performance criteria, completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall
indicate the final position of controls.
3.16.1 Plumbing System
The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance with [ICC
IPC], except that the drainage and vent system final test shall include the smoke test. The
Contractor has the option to perform a peppermint test in lieu of the smoke test. If a
peppermint test is chosen, submit a testing procedure to PGC engineer for approval.
a. Drainage and Vent Systems Test. The final test shall include a smoke test.
b. Building Sewers Tests.
c. Water Supply Systems Tests.
3.16.1.1 Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies
Backflow prevention assembly shall be tested using gauges specifically designed for
the testing of backflow prevention assemblies. Certification of proper operation shall
be as accomplished in accordance with state regulations by an individual certified by
the state to perform such tests. If no state requirement exists, have the
manufacturer's representative test the device, to ensure the unit is properly installed
and performing as intended. Submit written documentation of the tests performed
and signed by the individual performing the tests. Gauges shall be tested annually for
accuracy in accordance with the University of Southern California's Foundation of
Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research or the American Water Works
Association Manual of Cross Connection (Manual M-14). Report form for each
assembly shall include, as a minimum, the following:
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 55 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
Data on Device
Data on Testing Firm
Type of Assembly
Name
Manufacturer
Address
Model Number
Certified Tester
Serial Number
Certified Tester No.
Size
Date of Test
Location
Test Pressure Readings
Serial Number and Test Data of Gauges
If the unit fails to meet specified requirements, the unit shall be repaired and retested.
3.16.1.2 Shower Pans
After installation of the pan and finished floor, the drain shall be temporarily plugged
below the weep holes. The floor area shall be flooded with water to a minimum depth
of 25 mm for a period of 24 hours. Any drop in the water level during test, except for
evaporation, will be reason for rejection, repair, and retest.
3.16.1.3 Submittal Requirements
Submit the following:
Detail drawings for the complete plumbing system including piping layouts and
locations of connections; dimensions for roughing-in, foundation, and support points;
schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams or connection and interconnection
diagrams. Detail drawings shall indicate clearances required for maintenance and
operation. Where piping and equipment are to be supported other than as indicated,
details shall include loadings and proposed support methods. Plan, elevation, view,
and detail drawings, shall be drawn to scale.
Diagrams, instructions, and other sheets proposed for posting. Manufacturer's
recommendations for the installation of bell and spigot and hubless joints for cast iron
soil pipe.
Manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
DATA.
3.16.2 Defective Work
If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or
repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall
be made with new materials. Caulking of screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 56 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.16.3 System Flushing
3.16.3.1 During Flushing
Before operational tests or disinfection, potable water piping system shall be flushed
with [ ] potable water. Sufficient water shall be used to produce a water velocity that
is capable of entraining and removing debris in all portions of the piping system. This
requires simultaneous operation of all fixtures on a common branch or main in order
to produce a flushing velocity of approximately 1.2 meters per second through all
portions of the piping system. In the event that this is impossible due to size of
system, PGC engineer shall specify the number of fixtures to be operated during
flushing. Provide adequate personnel to monitor the flushing operation and to ensure
that drain lines are unobstructed in order to prevent flooding of the facility. Contractor
is responsible for any flood damage resulting from flushing of the system. Flushing
shall be continued until entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed
and until discharge water shows no discoloration. [All faucets and drinking water
fountains, to include any device considered as an end point device by NSF/ANSI 61,
Section 9, shall be flushed a minimum of 1 L per 24 hour period, ten times over a 14
day period.]
3.16.3.2 After Flushing
System shall be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed, cleaned,
and replaced. After flushing and cleaning, systems shall be prepared for testing by
immediately filling water piping with clean, fresh potable water. Any stoppage,
discoloration, or other damage to the finish, furnishings, or parts of the building due to
the Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system shall be repaired. When
the system flushing is complete, the hot-water system shall be adjusted for uniform
circulation. Flushing devices and automatic control systems shall be adjusted for
proper operation according to manufacturer's instructions. Comply with ASHRAE
90.1 - SI for minimum efficiency requirements. The water supply to the building shall
be tested separately to ensure that any lead contamination found during potable
water system testing is due to work being performed inside the building.]
3.16.4 Operational Test
Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, subject the plumbing
system to operating tests to demonstrate satisfactory installation, connections,
adjustments, and functional and operational efficiency. Such operating tests shall cover a
period of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include the following information
in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the system:
a. Time, date, and duration of test.
b. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures.
c. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.
d. Operation of each valve, hydrant, and faucet.
e. Pump suction and discharge pressures.
f. Temperature of each domestic hot-water supply.
g. Operation of each floor and roof drain by flooding with water.
h. Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer.
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 57 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
i. Complete operation of each water pressure booster system, including pump start pressure
and stop pressure.
3.16.5 Disinfection
After operational tests are complete, disinfect the entire domestic hot- and cold-water
distribution system. Flush the system as specified, before introducing chlorinating material.
The chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. Except as herein
specified, water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and
AWWA C652. The chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping system at a
constant rate at a concentration of at least 50 parts per million (ppm). Use a properly
adjusted hypochlorite solution injected into the main with a hypochlorinator, or liquid
chlorine injected into the main through a solution-feed chlorinator and booster pump. If
after the 24 hour and 6 hour holding periods, the residual solution contains less than 25
ppm and 50 ppm chlorine respectively, flush the piping and tank with potable water, and
repeat the above procedures until the required residual chlorine levels are satisfied. The
system, including the tanks, shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual
chlorine level is reduced to less than one part per million. During the flushing period each
valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times. Samples of water in
disinfected containers shall be obtained from several locations selected by the Contracting
Officer. The samples of water shall be tested for total coliform organisms (coliform
bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance with AWWA
10084. The testing method used shall be either the multiple-tube fermentation technique or
the membrane-filter technique. Disinfection shall be repeated until tests indicate the
absence of coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in the
samples for at least 2 full days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory
bacteriological results have been obtained.
3.17
WASTE MANAGEMENT
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Return
solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery and laundering or for proper disposal.
Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected,
well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place used sealant and adhesive
tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous waste. Separate copper and
ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan and place in
designated areas for reuse.
END OF SECTION 22 00 70
22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 58 OF 58
PGC-230033-C-P8
22 07 19
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 3
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................. 4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 4
SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 5
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................... 5
PART 2
PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................... 6
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS .......................................................................................... 6
2.1.1 Mineral Fiber Insulation .............................................................................................. 6
2.1.2 Cellular Elastomer Insulation .................................................................................... 6
2.1.3 Cellular Glass Insulation ........................................................................................... 6
2.1.4 Calcium Silicate Insulation ........................................................................................ 6
2.1.5 Fiberglass Insulation ................................................................................................. 7
2.1.6 Polyisocyanurate Pipe Insulation .............................................................................. 7
2.1.7 Pipe Barrel ................................................................................................................ 7
2.1.8 Pipe Fittings .............................................................................................................. 7
2.1.9 Flexible Blankets ....................................................................................................... 7
2.2
ADHESIVES ................................................................................................................ 7
2.2.1 Cloth Adhesives ........................................................................................................ 7
2.2.2 Vapor-Barrier Material Adhesives.............................................................................. 7
2.2.3 Cellular Elastomer Insulation Adhesive ..................................................................... 7
2.3
CAULKING .................................................................................................................. 7
2.4
CORNER ANGLES ...................................................................................................... 8
2.5
JACKETING................................................................................................................. 8
2.6.1 Aluminum Jacket....................................................................................................... 8
2.6.2 Asphalt-Saturated Felt .............................................................................................. 8
2.6.3 Stainless Steel Jacket ............................................................................................... 8
2.6.4 Glass Cloth Jacket .................................................................................................... 8
2.6.5 PVC Jacket ............................................................................................................... 8
2.6
COATINGS .................................................................................................................. 8
2.7.1 Outdoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing ............................................................................... 8
2.7.2 Indoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing .................................................................................. 9
2.7.3 Outdoor and Indoor Nonvapor-Barrier Finishing (NBF) ............................................. 9
2.7.4 Cellular-Elastomer Insulation Coating ....................................................................... 9
2.7.5 Coating Color ............................................................................................................ 9
2.7
TAPE ........................................................................................................................... 9
2.8
DUAL-TEMPERATURE (HOT- AND CHILLED-) WATER PIPING ............................... 9
2.9
HOT-WATER, STEAM, AND CONDENSATE-RETURN PIPING ................................. 9
2.10 COLD-WATER AND CONDENSATE-DRAIN PIPING .................................................. 9
2.11 REFRIGERANT SUCTION PIPING ........................................................................... 10
2.12 COOLING-TOWER CIRCULATING WATER PIPING ................................................ 10
2.13 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING, 2.4 MEGAPASCAL ....................................... 10
2.14 HOT WATER HEATING CONVERTER ..................................................................... 10
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 15
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
CHILLED-WATER AND DUAL-TEMPERATURE PUMPS ......................................... 10
LOW-PRESSURE STEAM AND CONDENSATE, WEATHER-EXPOSED ................. 10
STEAM & CONDENSATE, WEATHER-EXPOSED, 861 KILOPASCAL ..................... 10
STEAM & CONDENSATE, WEATHER-EXPOSED, 2.4 MEGAPASCAL ................... 10
PART 3
EXECUTION ....................................................................................................... 11
3.1
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION SYSTEMS ........................................................... 11
3.2
SYSTEM TYPES ....................................................................................................... 11
3.2.1 Type T-1, Mineral Fiber with Vapor-Barrier Jacket .................................................. 11
3.2.2 Type T-2, Mineral Fiber with Glass Cloth Jacket ..................................................... 12
3.2.3 Type T-3, Cellular Elastomer................................................................................... 12
3.2.4 Type T-4, Cellular Glass with Vapor-Barrier Jacket ................................................. 13
3.2.5 Type T-5, Calcium Silicate with Glass Cloth Jacket (Piping).................................... 13
3.2.6 Type T-6, Mineral Fiber with Aluminum Jacket ........................................................ 14
3.2.7 Type T-7, Calcium Silicate with Glass Cloth Jacket (Surfaces) ............................... 15
3.2.8 Type T-9, Cellular Elastomer................................................................................... 15
3.2.9 Type T-10, Mineral-Fiber Fill ................................................................................... 15
3.2.10 Type T-17, Calcium Silicate Weatherproof Jacket ................................................. 15
3.3
ACCEPTANCE .......................................................................................................... 15
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 15
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
1.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
a.
ASTM A167 (2011) Standard Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
b.
ASTM A240/A240M (2012) Standard Specification for Chromium
and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure
Vessels and for General Applications
c.
ASTM B209M
(2010) Standard Specification for Aluminum and
Aluminum- Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric)
d.
ASTM C1136 (2010) Standard Specification for
Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation
e.
ASTM C195 (2007) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal
Insulating Cement
f.
ASTM C449 (2007) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber HydraulicSetting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement
g.
ASTM C533 (2011) Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and
Pipe Thermal Insulation
h.
ASTM C534/C534M (2011) Standard Specification for Preformed
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular
Form
i.
ASTM C547 (2012) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe
Insulation
j.
ASTM C552 (2007) Standard
Glass Thermal Insulation
k.
ASTM C553 (2011) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket
Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications
l.
ASTM C591 (2011) Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed
Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation
m.
ASTM C592 (2010) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket
Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered)
(Industrial Type)
n.
ASTM C795 (2008) Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for
Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel
o.
ASTM C916 (1985; R 2007) Standard Specification for Adhesives for
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Specification for
Flexible,
Low
Cellular
PAGE 3 OF 15
PGC-230033-C-P8
Duct Thermal Insulation
2.
p.
ASTM C920 (2011) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
q.
ASTM C921 (2010)
Standard
Practice
for
Determining
Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation
r.
ASTM D226 (2009) Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic
Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
s.
ASTM D579 (2010) Standard Specification for Greige Woven Glass
Fabrics
t.
ASTM E84
(2012) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials
u.
ASTM E96/E96M
(2010) Standard
Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
Test
Methods
for
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
a. NFPA 220
(2012) Standard on Types of Building Construction
b. NFPA 255
(2006) Standard
Method
of
Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
3.
the
Test
of
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)
a. SAE AMS 3779 (1990; Rev A; R 1994) Tape Adhesive, Pressure
Sensitive Thermal Radiation Resistant, Aluminum Foil/Glass Cloth
4.
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
a. FED-STD-595 (Rev
Procurement
5.
C;
Notice
1)
Colors
Used
in
Government
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
a. LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and Environmental
Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEEDNC)
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION AND EXHAUST
SYSTEMS applies to work specified in this section.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Provide noncombustible thermal-insulation system materials, as defined by NFPA 220.
Provide adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-insulation materials,
except cellular elastomers, with a flame-spread classification (FSC) of [25 or less] , and a
smoke-developed classification (SDC) of [50 or less] . Determine these maximum values
in accordance with [ASTM E84] [NFPA 255]. Provide coatings and sealants that are
nonflammable in their wet state.
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 15
PGC-230033-C-P8
Provide adhesives, coatings, and sealants with published or certified temperature ratings
suitable for the entire range of working temperatures normal for the surfaces to which
they are to be applied.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
A. SD-02 Shop Drawings
1.
Installation Drawings
B. SD-03 Product Data
1.
Adhesives
2.
Coatings
3.
Insulating Cement
4.
Insulation Materials
5.
Jacketing
6.
Tape
C. SD-07 Certificates
1. Recycled Materials
D. SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
1. Installation Manual
1.5
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Submit installation drawings for pipe insulation, conforming with the adhesive
manufacturer's written instructions for installation. Submit installation manual clearly
stating the manufacturer's instructions for insulation materials
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 15
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
a. Adhesives
b. Coatings
c. Insulating Cement
d. Insulation Materials
e. Jacketing
f. Tape
Provide compatible materials which do not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise
attack surfaces to which applied, in either the wet or dry state. Meet ASTM C795
requirements for materials to be used on stainless steel surfaces. Provide materials that
are asbestos free and conform to the following.
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
Provide materials with maximum value conductance as tested at any point, not an
average. Replace or augment insulation conductance found by test to exceed the
specified maximum by an additional thickness to bring it to the required maximum
conductance and a complete finishing system.
2.1.1 Mineral Fiber Insulation
Provide mineral fiber insulation conforming to [ASTM C592] [ASTM C553] [ASTM C547]
and be suitable for surface temperatures up to 188 degrees C, and not less than [64.1]
kilograms per cubic meter density with thermal conductivity not greater than [0.037] watt
per meter per degree Kelvin at 66 degrees C mean.
Mineral fiber pipe wrap insulation having an insulating efficiency not less than that of the
specified thickness of fibrous glass pipe insulation may be provided in lieu of fibrous
glass pipe insulation for pipe sizes 250 mm and larger.
2.1.2 Cellular Elastomer Insulation
Provide cellular elastomer insulation conforming to ASTM C534/C534M, ensuring the
water vapor permeability does not exceed [0.44] nanogram per second per pascal
mercury pressure difference for
25 millimeter thickness of cellular elastomer.
2.1.3 Cellular Glass Insulation
Conform to ASTM C552, Type II, Grade 2, pipe covering for Cellular Glass. Substitutions
for this material are not permitted. Ensure minimum thickness is not less than 38 mm.
2.1.4 Calcium Silicate Insulation
Conform to ASTM C533. Ensure the apparent thermal conductivity does not exceed
[0.078] watt per meter per degree K at 93 degrees C mean.
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 15
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.1.5 Fiberglass Insulation
Conform to ASTM C547. Ensure the apparent thermal conductivity does not exceed
[0.078] watt per meter per degree K at 93 degrees C mean.
Fiber glass pipe insulation having an insulating efficiency not less than that of the
specified thickness of mineral fiber pipe insulation may be provided in lieu of mineral fiber
pipe insulation for aboveground piping.
2.1.6 Polyisocyanurate Pipe Insulation
Conform to ASTM C591 for polyisocyanurate, minimum density of 27.20 kilograms per
cubic meter (kg/cu m).
2.1.7 Pipe Barrel
Pipe barrel insulation shall be Type II, Molded, Grade A or Type III, Precision V-Groove,
Grade A for use at temperatures up to and including 650 degrees C.
2.1.8 Pipe Fittings
Provide molding pipe fitting insulation covering for use at temperatures up to and
including 650 degrees C.
2.1.9 Flexible Blankets
Provide flexible blankets and felts for use at temperatures up to and including 177
degrees C minimum 16 kilogram per cubic meter density. Ensure thermal conductivity is
no greater than [0.26] [0.038] watt per meter per degree K at 24 degrees C mean.
2.2
ADHESIVES
2.2.1 Cloth Adhesives
Provide adhesives for adhering, sizing, and finishing lagging cloth, canvas, and openweave glass cloth with a pigmented polyvinyl acetate emulsion conforming to the
requirements of ASTM C916, Type I.
2.2.2 Vapor-Barrier Material Adhesives
Provide adhesives for attaching laps of vapor-barrier materials and presized glass cloth
for attaching insulation to itself, to metal, and to various other substrates, of
nonflammable solvent-base, synthetic- rubber type conforming to the requirements of
ASTM C916, Type I, for attaching fibrous-glass insulation to metal surfaces.
2.2.3 Cellular Elastomer Insulation Adhesive
For cellular elastomer insulation adhesive, provide a solvent cutback chloroprene
elastomer conforming to ASTM C916, Type I, and be of a type approved by the
manufacturer of the cellular elastomer for the intended use.
2.3
CAULKING
Provide elastomeric joint sealant for caulking specified insulation materials in accordance
with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A.
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 15
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.4
CORNER ANGLES
Provide nominal 0.41 millimeter aluminum 25 by 25 millimeter corner angle piping
insulation with factory applied kraft backing. Ensure aluminum conforms to ASTM
B209M, Alloy [3105] .
2.5
JACKETING
2.5.1 Aluminum Jacket
Provide aluminum jackets conforming to ASTM B209M, Temper H14, minimum thickness
of 0.41 mm, with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside
surface. Provide smooth surface jackets for jacket outside diameters less than 200 mm.
Provide corrugated surface jackets for jacket outside diameters 200 mm and larger.
Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 13 mm. Provide factory prefabricated
aluminum covers for insulation on fittings, valves, and flanges.[ Provide aboveground
jackets and bands with factory-applied baked-on semigloss brown color conforming to
Federal Standard FED-STD-595, "Colors," color chip number 20062.]
2.5.2 Asphalt-Saturated Felt
Provide asphalt-saturated felt conforming to ASTM D226, without perforations, minimum
weight of 0.49 kilograms per square meter.
2.5.3 Stainless Steel Jacket
Provide stainless steel jackets conforming to ASTM A167 or ASTM A240/A240M; Type
304, minimum thickness of 0.25 mm, smooth surface with factory-applied polyethylene
and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside surface. Provide stainless steel bands,
minimum width of 13 mm. Provide factory prefabricated stainless steel covers for
insulation on fittings, valves, and flanges.
2.5.4 Glass Cloth Jacket
Provide plain-weave glass cloth conforming to ASTM D579, Style 141, weighing not less
than 0.25 kilogram/square meterbefore sizing. Factory apply cloth wherever possible.
Provide leno weave glass reinforcing cloth, 26-end and 12-pick thread conservation, with
a warp and fill tensile strength of 7.9 and 5.3 kilonewton per meter of width, respectively,
and a weight of not less than 0.51 kilogram per square meter.
2.6.5 PVC Jacket
Provide 0.25 millimeter thick, factory-premolded, [pipe-barrel sheeting vapor-barrier
jacketing] polyvinylchloride that is self-extinguishing, high-impact strength, moderate
chemical resistance with a permeability rating of 0.574 nanogram per pascal per second
per square meter of mercury pressure difference, determined in accordance with ASTM
E96/E96M. Provide manufacturer's standard solvent- weld type vapor-barrier joint
adhesive.
Conform to ASTM C1136 for, Type I, low-vapor transmission, high-puncture resistance
vapor barrier for use on insulation for piping, ducts, and equipment.
2.6
COATINGS
2.7.1 Outdoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing
For coatings for outdoor vapor-barrier finishing of insulation surfaces, such as fittings and
elbows, provide a nonasphaltic, hydrocarbon polymer, solvent-base mastic containing a
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 15
PGC-230033-C-P8
blend of nonflammable solvents. Conform to the requirements of ASTM C1136 and
ASTM C921 for coatings.
2.7.2 Indoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing
Provide pigmented resin and solvent compound coatings for indoor vapor-barrier finishing
of insulation surfaces conforming to ASTM C1136, Type II.
2.7.3 Outdoor and Indoor Nonvapor-Barrier Finishing (NBF)
Provide pigmented polymer-emulsion type NBF recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer for outdoor and indoor NBF coating of insulation surfaces for the surface to
be coated and applied to specified dry-film thickness.
2.7.4 Cellular-Elastomer Insulation Coating
Provide a polyvinylchloride lacquer approved by the manufacturer of the cellular
elastomer finish coating.
2.7.5 Coating Color
Provide as specified by PGC engineer for the coating color.
2.7
TAPE
Provide a knitted elastic cloth glass lagging specifically suitable for continuous spiral
wrapping of insulated pipe bends and fittings and produce a smooth, tight, wrinkle-free
surface. Conform to requirements of SAE AMS 3779, SAE AMS 3779, ASTM D579, and
ASTM C921 for tape, weighing not less than [0.339] kilogram per square meter.
2.8
DUAL-TEMPERATURE (HOT- AND CHILLED-) WATER PIPING
Provide [mineral fiber with vapor barrier jacket, Type T-1 insulation, with a thickness of
not less than
25mm Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, and flanges.
2.9
HOT-WATER, STEAM, AND CONDENSATE-RETURN PIPING
Provide mineral fiber insulation with glass cloth jacket, Type T-2, with a thickness of not
less than
25mm. Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, flanges, and
miscellaneous surfaces.
2.10
COLD-WATER AND CONDENSATE-DRAIN PIPING
Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, flanges, and miscellaneous
surfaces.
[Provide 10 millimeter mineral fiber insulation with glass cloth jacket, Type T-2, with a
thickness of not less than 25mm.]
[ Provide cellular-elastomer insulation conforming to ASTM C534/C534M, with watervapor permeability not exceeding 5.74 nanograms per pascal per second per square
meter pressure-differential for 25 millimeter thickness.]
[ Provide flexible unicellular-elastomeric thermal insulation for cold water piping, Type T3, with a thickness of [15] millimeter per calculation. Use expanded, closed-cell pipe
insulation only aboveground, not for underground piping.
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 9 OF 15
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.11
REFRIGERANT SUCTION PIPING
Provide cellular-elastomer insulation, Type T-3, with a nominal thickness of20 millimeter.
Insulate surfaces, including valve, fittings, unions, and flanges.
2.12
COOLING-TOWER CIRCULATING WATER PIPING
Provide cellular-elastomer insulation, Type T-3, with a thickness of not less than 25mm .
Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, flanges, and miscellaneous
surfaces.
Provide mineral fiber insulation with aluminum jacket, Type T-6, with a thickness of not
less than 25mm. Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, flanges, and
miscellaneous surfaces.
2.13
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING, 2.4 MEGAPASCAL
Provide calcium silicate insulation with glass cloth jacket, Type T-5, with a thickness of
not less than 25mm which is based on an 27 degrees C ambient temperature in still air
with an insulation "K" factor of 0.37 at 93 degrees C mean temperature:
2.14
HOT WATER HEATING CONVERTER
Provide calcium silicate insulation with glass cloth jacket, Type T-7, with a thickness of 40
millimeter.
2.15
CHILLED-WATER AND DUAL-TEMPERATURE PUMPS
Provide cellular elastomer insulation, Type T-9, with a thickness of 25 millimeter. Cover
surfaces subject to condensation, and provide a vapor-barrier coating.
2.16
LOW-PRESSURE STEAM AND CONDENSATE, WEATHER-EXPOSED
Provide calcium silicate insulation with weatherproof jacket, Type T-17, with a thickness
of not less than 25mm . Insulate all systems.
2.17
STEAM & CONDENSATE, WEATHER-EXPOSED, 861 KILOPASCAL
Provide calcium silicate insulation with weatherproof jacket, Type T-17, with a thickness
not less than 25mm. Insulate all system surfaces.
2.18
STEAM & CONDENSATE, WEATHER-EXPOSED, 2.4 MEGAPASCAL
Provide calcium silicate insulation with weatherproof jacket, Type T-17, with a thickness
not less than 25mm . Insulate all system surfaces
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 10 OF 15
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION SYSTEMS
Install smooth and continuous contours on exposed work. Smoothly and securely paste
down cemented laps, flaps, bands, and tapes. Apply adhesives on a full-coverage basis.
Apply insulation only to system or component surfaces that have been tested and
approved.
Install insulation lengths tightly butted against each other at joints. Where lengths are
cut, provide smooth and square and without breakage of end surfaces. Where insulation
terminates, neatly taper and effectively seal ends, or finish as specified. Direct
longitudinal seams of exposed insulation away from normal view.
Apply materials in conformance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.
Clean surfaces free of oil and grease before insulation adhesives or mastics are applied.
Provide solvent cleaning required to bring metal surfaces to such condition.
Submit installation drawings for pipe insulation, conforming with the adhesive
manufacturer's written instructions for installation. Submit installation manual clearly
stating the manufacturer's instructions for insulation materials.
3.2
SYSTEM TYPES
3.2.1 Type T-1, Mineral Fiber with Vapor-Barrier Jacket
Cover piping with mineral-fiber pipe insulation with factory-and field-attached vaporbarrier jacket. Maintain vapor seal. Securely cement jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and
bands in place with vapor-barrier adhesive. Provide jacket overlaps not less than [40]
millimeter and jacketing bands for butt joints 75 millimeter wide.
Cover exposed-to-view fittings and valve bodies with preformed mineral-fiber pipe-fitting
insulation of the same thickness as the pipe-barrel insulation. Temporarily secure fitting
insulation in place with light cord ties. Apply a 1.52 millimeter coating of white indoor
vapor-barrier coating and, while still wet, wrap with glass lagging tape with 50 percent
overlap, and smoothly blend into the adjacent jacketing. Apply additional coating as
needed and rubber-gloved to smooth fillet or contour coating, then allowed to fully cure
before the finish coating is applied. On-the-job fabricated insulation for concealed fittings
and special configurations, build up from mineral fiber and a special mastic consisting of
a mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive diluted with 3 parts water. Where
standard vapor-barrier jacketing cannot be used, make the surfaces vapor tight by using
coating and glass lagging cloth or tape as previously specified.
In lieu of materials and methods previously specified, fittings may be wrapped with a
twine-secured, mineral-wool blanket to the required thickness and covered with
premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. Make seams vapor tight with a double bead of
manufacturer's standard vapor-barrier adhesive applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. Hold all jacket ends in place with AISI 300 series corrosionresistant steel straps, [0.381] millimeter thick by [15] millimeter wide.
Set pipe insulation into an outdoor vapor-barrier coating for a minimum of [150] millimeter
at maximum [3500]-millimeter spacing and the ends of the insulation sealed to the
jacketing with the same material to provide an effective vapor-barrier stop.
Do not use staples in applying insulation. Install continuous vapor-barrier materials over
all surfaces, including areas inside pipe sleeves, hangers, and other concealments.
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 11 OF 15
PGC-230033-C-P8
Provide piping insulation at hangers consisting of 208 kilogram per cubic meter density,
fibrous-glass inserts or expanded, rigid, closed-cell, polyvinylchloride. Seal junctions with
vapor-barrier jacket where required, glass-cloth mesh tape, and vapor-barrier coating.
Expose white-bleached kraft paper side of the jacketing to view.
Finish exposed-to-view insulation with not less than a [0.152]-millimeter
thickness of nonvapor-barrier coating suitable for painting.
dry-film
3.2.2 Type T-2, Mineral Fiber with Glass Cloth Jacket
Cover piping with a mineral-fiber, pipe insulation with factory-attached, presized, white,
glass cloth. Securely cement jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and bands in place with vaporbarrier adhesive with jacket overlap not less than 40 millimeter and jacketing bands for
butt joints 75 millimeterwide.
Cover exposed-to-view fittings with preformed mineral-fiber fitting insulation of the same
thickness as the pipe insulation and temporarily secured in place with light cord ties.
Install impregnated glass lagging tape with indoor vapor-barrier on 50 percent overlap
basis and the blend tape smoothly into the adjacent jacketing. Apply additional coating
as needed, and rubber gloved to a smooth contour. Tape ends of insulation to the pipe
at valves DN50 and smaller. Build up on-the-job fabricated insulation for concealed
fittings and special configurations from mineral fiber and a mixture of insulating cement
and lagging adhesive, diluted with 3 parts water. Finish surfaces with glass cloth or tape
lagging.
Cover all valves 65 millimeter and larger and all flanges with preformed insulation of the
same thickness as the adjacent insulation.
Finish exposed-to-view insulation with a minimum [0.152]-millimeter dry-film thickness of
nonvapor- barrier coating suitable for painting.
In lieu of materials and methods specified above, fittings may be wrapped with a twinesecured, mineral-wool blanket to the required thickness and covered with premolded
polyvinylchloride jackets. Hold all jacket ends in place with AISI 300 series corrosionresistant steel straps, [0.381] millimeter thick by 15 millimeter [ ] wide. Provide fitting
insulation, thermally equivalent to pipe-barrel insulation to preclude surface temperatures
detrimental to polyvinylchloride.
3.2.3 Type T-3, Cellular Elastomer
Cover piping-system surfaces with flexible cellular-elastomer sheet or preformed
insulation. Maintain vapor seal. Cement insulation into continuous material with a
solvent cutback chloroprene adhesive recommended by the manufacturer for the specific
purpose. Apply adhesive to both of the surfaces on a 100-percent coverage basis to a
minimum thickness of 0.254 millimeter wet or approximately 4 square meter per liter of
undiluted adhesive.
Seal insulation on cold water piping to the pipe for a minimum of 150 millimeter at
maximum intervals of 3500 millimeter to form an effective vapor barrier. At piping
supports, ensure insulation is continuous through using outside-carrying type clevis
hangers with insulation shield. Install [Cork] load-bearing inserts between the pipe and
insulation shields to prevent insulation compression.
Insulate hot-water, cold-water, and condensate drain pipes to the extent shown with
nominal [15] millimeter thick, fire retardant (FR), cellular elastomer, preformed pipe
insulation. Seal joints with adhesive.
At pipe hangers or supports where the insulation rests on the pipe hanger strap, cut the
insulation with a brass cork borer and a [No. 3] superior grade cork inserted. Seal
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 12 OF 15
PGC-230033-C-P8
seams with approved adhesive. Insulate sweat fitting with miter-cut pieces of cellular
elastomer insulation of the same nominal pipe size and thickness as the insulation on the
adjacent piping or tubing. Joint miter-cut pieces with approved adhesive. Slit and snap
covers over the fitting, and seal joints with approved adhesive.
Insulate screwed fittings with sleeve-type covers formed from miter-cut pieces of cellular
elastomer thermal insulation having an inside diameter large enough to overlap adjacent
pipe insulation. Butt pipe insulation against fittings, and overlap not less than [25]
millimeter. Use adhesive to join cover pieces and cement the cover to the pipe
insulation.
Finish surfaces exposed to view or ultraviolet light with a [0.051] millimeter minimum dryfilm thickness application of a polyvinylchloride lacquer recommended by the
manufacturer, and applied in not less than [two] coats.
3.2.4 Type T-4, Cellular Glass with Vapor-Barrier Jacket
Cover piping with cellular glass insulation and factory- and field-attached vapor-barrier
jacket. Maintain vapor seal. Securely cement jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and bands in
place with vapor-barrier adhesive, and overlap jacket not less than [40] millimeter.
Provide jacket bands for butt joints of not less than [75] millimeter width. Provide
insulation continuous through hangers. Bed insulation in an outdoor vapor-barrier
coating applied to all piping surfaces.
Insulate flanges, unions, valves, anchors, and fittings with factory premolded or
prefabricated or field fabricated segments of insulation of the same material and
thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. When segments of insulation are used, provide
elbows with not less than three segments. For other fittings and valves, cut segments to
the required curvature or nesting size.
Secure segments of the insulation in place with twine or copper wire. After the insulation
segments are firmly in place, apply a vapor-barrier coating over the insulation in two
coats with glass tape imbedded between coats. First coat,tinted, the second, white to
ensure application of two coats. Apply coating to a total dry-film thickness of 1.6
millimeter minimum. Overlap glass tape seams not less than [25] millimeter and the
tape end not less than [100] millimeter.
In lieu of materials and methods specified above, fittings may be wrapped with 10
millimeter thick, vapor-barrier, adhesive-coated strips of cellular elastomer insulation.
Insulation shall be under tension, compressed to 25 percent of original thickness, and
wrapped until overall thickness is equal to adjacent insulation. Secure cellular elastomer
in place with twine and sealed with vapor-barrier coating applied to produce not less than
[1.6] millimeterdry-film thickness. Cover fittings with premolded polyvinylchloride jackets.
Make seams vapor-tight with a double bead of manufacturer's standard vapor-barrier
adhesive applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Hold jacket ends in
place with AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel straps, [0.381] millimeterthick by [15]
millimeter wide.
Insulate anchors secured directly to piping, to prevent condensation, for not less than
[150] millimeter from the surface of the pipe insulation.
Install white-bleached kraft paper side of jacket exposed to view. Finish exposed-to-view
insulation with not less than a [0.152] millimeter dry-film thickness of nonvapor-barrier
coating suitable for painting.
3.2.5 Type T-5, Calcium Silicate with Glass Cloth Jacket (Piping)
Cover piping with a calcium-silicate pipe insulation with factory attached and presized,
white, glass cloth. Field apply jackets when required. Securely cement jackets, jacket
laps, flaps, and bands in place with vapor-barrier adhesive. Jacket overlap shall be not
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 13 OF 15
PGC-230033-C-P8
less than [40] millimeter. Jacketing bands for butt joints shall be100 millimeter wide.
Fabricate fittings from segmented pipe barrel sections bedded in general purpose
insulating cement and wired in place. Fill voids with general purpose insulating cement
with not less than [6] millimeter thick, final coating. Impregnate glass lagging tape with
lagging adhesive, wrapped with a 50-percent overlap, and be blended smoothly into
adjacent jacketing. Apply additional adhesive as needed and rubber-gloved to a smooth
contour.
3.2.6 Type T-6, Mineral Fiber with Aluminum Jacket
Cover piping with mineral-fiber pipe insulation with factory-attached or field-applied
aluminum jacketing.
Cover fittings and valve bodies with preformed mineral-fiber pipe-fitting insulation of the
same thickness as the pipe-barrel insulation. Temporarily secure fitting insulation in
place with light cord ties. Apply a 1.52 millimeter coating of vapor-barrier mastic, and
while still tacky, wrapped with glass lagging tape.
Apply additional mastic as needed and rubber-gloved to smooth fillets or contours. Build
up on-the-job fabricated insulation for special configurations from mineral fiber and a
mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive diluted with 3 parts water. Only where
standard aluminum jacketing cannot be used, make the surfaces vapor-tight by using
mastic and glass lagging cloth or tape as specified above with an added finish coat of
mastic.
Set pipe insulation into outdoor vapor-barrier coating for a minimum of [150] millimeter at
maximum [3500] millimeter spacing. Seal ends of the insulation to the jacketing with the
same material to provide effective vapor barrier stops.
Install continuous vapor barrier over all surfaces, including areas inside pipe sleeves,
hangers, and other concealment.
Apply piping insulation to both sides of pipe hangers. Insulate junctions with a special
mastic mixture, glass cloth mesh tape, and mastic as previously specified.
Securely cement jacket laps, flaps, and bands in place with aluminum jacket sealant.
Provide 150 millimeter wide minimum jacketing bands for butt joints.
Lap joints, wherever possible, against the weather so that the water will run off the lower
edge and in accordance with the pipe drainage pitch. Locate longitudinal laps on
horizontal lines 45 degrees below the horizontal centerline and alternately staggered 25
millimeter. Lap jacketing material a minimum of [50] millimeter, circumferentially sealed
with mastic, and strapped to provide a waterproof covering throughout. Locate straps
200 millimeter on center and pull up tight to hold jacketing securely in place. Use screws
in addition to straps when necessary to obtain a waterproof covering. Place extra straps
on each side of supporting devices and at openings. Where flanging access occurs,
strap a chamfer sheet to the pipe at jacketing.
Stiffen exposed longitudinal edges of aluminum jacketing by bending a 25 millimeter hem
on one edge. Provide expansion joints for maximum and minimum dimensional
fluctuations.
To prevent corrosion, do not allow the aluminum jacketing to come in direct contact with
other types of metal.
At openings in jacket, apply an outdoor vapor-barrier coating for [50] millimeter in all
directions. Apply jacketing while waterproofing is tacky.
Use screws at each corner of each sheet, at fitting jackets, and as necessary for the
service. Place number 7, 10 millimeter long, binding-head aluminum sheet metal screws
through the mastic seal.
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 14 OF 15
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.2.7 Type T-7, Calcium Silicate with Glass Cloth Jacket (Surfaces)
Cover surfaces with insulation block bedded in an insulating cement and covered with
glass cloth jacketing.
Clean surfaces with a chlorinated solvent. Mix general purpose insulating cement with 3
parts water to 1 part nonvapor-barrier adhesive to bring to application consistency. Set
block into bedding and joints and fill spaces with a bedding mix and wrap with galvanized
chicken wire mesh well laced into an envelope. Trowel a 10 millimeter thick coating of
bedding mix jacket on with nonvapor-barrier adhesive and glass cloth. Finish surfaces
with not less than a [0.152] millimeter dry-film thickness of nonvapor- barrier coating.
[At the Contractor's option, aluminum sheet jacketing may be used in lieu of glass cloth.]
3.2.8 Type T-9, Cellular Elastomer
Clean pump surfaces with solvent. Apply not less than 25 millimeter of general purpose
insulating cement, mixed with nonvapor-barrier adhesive diluted with 3 parts water, to
achieve smooth surface and configuration contours. After all water has been removed,
cover surfaces with 13 millimeter thick cellular elastomer insulation attached and joined
into a continuous sheet with an outdoor vapor-barrier coating recommended by the
insulation manufacturer for the specific purpose. Apply coating to both of the surfaces on
a 100-percent coverage basis with a minimum thickness of [0.254] millimeter wet, or
approximately 3.7 square meter per liter of undiluted coating. Blend coating into the
adjacent flange insulation and the joint covered with a band of cellular elastomer equal to
the flange assembly width. Use same coating to seal insulation to the casing at
penetrations and terminations. Insulate pumps in a manner that permits insulation to be
removed to repair or replace pumps.
Finish insulation with a [0.051] millimeter minimum dry-film application of a
polyvinylchloride lacquer coating recommended by the manufacturer and applied in not
less than [two] coats.
3.2.9 Type T-10, Mineral-Fiber Fill
Pack voids surrounding pipe with mineral-fiber fill.
3.2.10 Type T-17, Calcium Silicate Weatherproof Jacket
Cover piping system surfaces with calcium silicate insulation. Cover fittings and valve
bodies with preformed insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe
insulation.
3.3
ACCEPTANCE
Final acceptance is dependent upon providing construction (Record Drawings) details to
PGC engineer . Include construction details, by building area, the insulation material
type, amount, and installation method. An illustration or map of the duct routing locations
may serve this purpose. With data, provide a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the
system name, date, and the words "Record Drawings insulation/material." Forward to the
Systems Engineer/Condition Monitoring Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in
the Maintenance Database."
END OF SECTION 22 07 19
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 15 OF 15
PGC-230033-C-P8
22 12 00
WATER STORAGE TANK
CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
REFERENCE ............................................................................................................... 2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK........................................................................................... 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................. 2
SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 2
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .................................................. 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS............................................................................................................. 3
2.1
GRP WATER STORAGE TANK AND ACCESSORIES ................................................ 3
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................ 5
22 12 00 WATER STORAGE TANK
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 5
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCE
Conform to General Requirements for Mechanical Services.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Furnish and install Water Storage Tanks as indicated on drawings.
1.3
1.4
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer’s Qualifications:
Firms regularly engaged in manufacture
of specified items with characteristics, sizes and capacities required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years.
B.
Certification, test certificates under specified operating conditions shall
be provided by manufacturer.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data :
instructions.
Submit
manufacturer’s
specifications
and installation
B.
Shop Drawings : Submit manufacturer’s assembly-type shop drawings
indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and methods of
assembly of components.
C.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type
of equipment, control and accessory, including “trouble – shooting”
maintenance guide. Include this data, product data and shop drawings
in maintenance manual.
D.
Submit warranty certificate against leakage.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damage,
breaking, denting and scoring.
Do not install damaged equipment or
components, replace with new.
B.
Store equipment and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather,
dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.
22 12 00 WATER STORAGE TANK
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 5
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GRP WATER STORAGE TANK AND ACCESSORIES
A.
The manufacture and design of the hot press moulded GRP sectional
water storage tanks shall be to the quality standard requirements of BS EN
ISO 9001 and shall comply with BS7491 : Part 3 : 1994 glassfibre reinforced
plastic cisterns for cold water storage.
B.
Cisterns shall be manufactured by the hot press moulded method, glass
reinforced plastic, moulded at temperatures up to 150 deg.C using isophthalic
unsaturated polyester resins, UV stabilized and ‘E’ glassfibre reinforcement,
color mid gray. Tank shall be suitable for storage of potable cold water at
atmospheric pressure and 50 Cº.
C.
The cistern design shall incorporate 1.00 x 1.00m pillow panels to walls of
non- insulated cisterns with provision for flat panels for connections and
fittings. Purpose made cover panels 1.00m x 1.00m and 1.00m x 0.50m flat
panels positioned to give free draining channels.
Tank shall be equipped with air vents & level indicators.
D.
All Surfaces of the panels shall be smooth and crevice free to provide
hygienic finish and be dimensionally accurate with sharply defined profiles.
E.
Float valve chambers to be provided with central hinged lockable ABS lid,
1.00m x1.00m in plan, with options of 180mm, 300mm, 500mm depth with
provision for type A air gap in compliance with BS6281 : Part1 : 1992.
F.
Man access 600mm diameter hinged lockable ABS lid.
G.
All tanks deeper than 1.50m shall be fitted with internal GRP ladders,
external standard duty stainless steel access ladders.
H.
Where partitions are required, they must be of full height using standard
panels.Each compartment to be capable of supporting water on either side with
one side empty.
I.
Panels to be rigidly supported by a combination of stainless steel tie rods
internally and galvanized box sections externally. All metallic components in
contact with water, bolts and nuts used in assembly of tanks shall be
stainless steel 316/A4 grade.
J.
Steelworks designed to BS5950, internally stainless steel 316/A4 grade
and externally hot dipped mild steel galvanized to BS729. The cisterns to
incorporate external wall bracing on depths greater than 1.50m, and tie rods
2.00m.
K.
Extruded synthetic rubber sealing strip to be used covering full width of
panel flange providing a watertight seal. It shall be non toxic, flexible and
resistante to ultraviolet.
L.
Certificate of WRC (Water Research Centre) approval shall be provided.
M.
Composite Material Specifications:
22 12 00 WATER STORAGE TANK
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 5
PGC-230033-C-P8
Density
Water Absorption
Coefficient Thermal Expansion
Flexural Strength
Flexural Modules
Tensile Strength
Impact Strength
Glass Content
Light Transmission
1800
0.18
2.1x105
185
13
90
80
30
0.00
Kg/m3
Mg
Deg.C
Mpa
Gpa
Mpa
Kj/M2
%
ISO 1183
ISO 62
ASTM
D696
ISO 178
ISO 178
Iso r 3268
ISO 179
Panel strength shall be fully compliant with BS 7491 : Part 3 : 1994 , giving a factor
of safety of tanks in excess of 6 times working pressure against rupture.
N.
Insulation of Tank shell/panels
Insulation shall be at least 40mm thick of expanded polystyrene (density
grade 30) or polyurethane foam 25mm thick 40 Kg/M3 insulating material.
Insulation shall not be exposed to external weather conditions, it shall be
covered with an external permanently fixed cover made of the same materials
used in the GRP panels which should be resistant to ultra violet radiation,
weather protective and water tight.
22 12 00 WATER STORAGE TANK
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 5
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
All tanks shall be installed strictly in compliance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
3.2
All cisterns to be installed on either flat continuous foundation or close center beams
conforming to manufacturer’s specification of flatness and deflection.
3.3
Installation shall be carried out by approved installers.
3.4
Testing shall be carried out on completion of installation and to be completed within
ten working days of assembly.
3.5
The testing of panels and sealant shall be as listed by Water Research Center, UK
conforming to water fittings Bylaws Scheme.
END OF SECTION 22 12 00
22 12 00 WATER STORAGE TANK
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 5
PGC-230033-C-P8
22 13 29
SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
CONTENTS
PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
REFERENCES........................................................................................................................ 3
SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................................................... 3
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ............................................................................... 4
EXTRA MATERIALS ............................................................................................................... 4
PART 2
PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................... 5
2.1
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................. 5
2.1.1 Name plates ................................................................................................................................................. 5
2.1.2 Equipment Guards ..................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.3 Special Tools ............................................................................................................................................. 5
2.1.4 Electric Motors .......................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.5 Motor Controls .......................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.6 Bolts, Nuts, Anchors, and Washers............................................................................................................ 5
2.1.7 Pressure Gauges ......................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2
CENTRIFUGAL SOLIDS HANDLING PUMPS ......................................................................... 5
2.2.1 Pump Casing .............................................................................................................................................. 5
2.2.2 Impeller...................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.3 Wearing Rings ........................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.4 Pump Shaft ................................................................................................................................................ 6
2.2.5 Pump Shaft Sleeve ..................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.6 Stuffing Box .............................................................................................................................................. 6
2.2.7 Mechanical Seals ....................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.8 Bearings ..................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.9 Lubrication ................................................................................................................................................ 7
2.2.10 Pump Support .......................................................................................................................................... 7
2.2.11 Coupling .................................................................................................................................................. 7
2.3
SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ................................................................................ 7
2.3.1 Pump Casing .............................................................................................................................................. 7
2.3.2 Mating Surfaces ......................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.3 Coatings ..................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.4 Impeller...................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.5 Wearing Rings ........................................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.6 Pump Shaft ................................................................................................................................................ 8
2.3.7 Seals........................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.8 Bearings ..................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.9 Motor ......................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.10 Power Cable ............................................................................................................................................. 8
2.3.11 Installation Systems ................................................................................................................................. 8
2.4
SELF-PRIMING CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ................................................................................ 9
2.4.1 Pump Casing .............................................................................................................................................. 9
2.4.2 Impeller...................................................................................................................................................... 9
2.4.3 Wear Plate.................................................................................................................................................. 9
2.4.4 Pump Shaft ................................................................................................................................................ 9
2.4.5 Pump Shaft Sleeve ..................................................................................................................................... 9
2.4.6 Seals......................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.4.7 Bearings ................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.4.8 Lubrication .............................................................................................................................................. 10
2.4.9 Suction Check Valve ............................................................................................................................... 10
22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.4.10 Pump Support ........................................................................................................................................ 10
2.4.11 Coupling ................................................................................................................................................ 10
2.5
PLUNGER PUMPS ............................................................................................................... 10
2.5.1 Pump Base ............................................................................................................................................... 10
2.5.2 Pump Body .............................................................................................................................................. 10
2.5.3 Valves ...................................................................................................................................................... 11
2.5.4 Connecting Rod, Eccentric, Eccentric Bearings, and Shaft ..................................................................... 11
2.5.5 Plungers ................................................................................................................................................... 11
2.5.6 Cylinders ................................................................................................................................................. 11
2.5.7 Stuffing Box ............................................................................................................................................ 11
2.5.8 Air Chambers ........................................................................................................................................... 11
2.5.9 Sampling Valve ....................................................................................................................................... 11
2.5.10 Pressure Relief Valve ............................................................................................................................ 11
2.5.11 Lubrication ............................................................................................................................................ 11
2.5.12 Chain Drive............................................................................................................................................ 12
2.5.13 V-Belt and Integral Gear Drive .............................................................................................................. 12
2.5.14 Gear Reducer Drive ............................................................................................................................... 12
2.6
ELECTRICAL WORK ............................................................................................................ 12
PART 3
EXECUTION ................................................................................................................. 13
3.1
EXAMINATION ..................................................................................................................... 13
3.2
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ............................................................................................... 13
3.2.1 Pump Installation ..................................................................................................................................... 13
3.2.2 Concrete ................................................................................................................................................... 13
3.2.3 Grouting Screw Pump Flow Channel ...................................................................................................... 13
3.3
PAINTING ............................................................................................................................. 13
3.4
FRAMED INSTRUCTIONS .................................................................................................... 13
3.5
FIELD TESTING AND ADJUSTING EQUIPMENT ................................................................. 14
3.5.1 Operational Test....................................................................................................................................... 14
3.5.2 Retesting .................................................................................................................................................. 14
3.5.3 Performance Test Reports ........................................................................................................................ 14
3.6
MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES ........................................................................................... 14
3.7
FIELD TRAINING .................................................................................................................. 14
22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
1. AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)
a.
ABMA 11 (1990; R 2008) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings
b.
ABMA 9 (1990; R 2008) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings
2. ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
a.
ASME B40.100 (2005; R 2010) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
3. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
a.
ASTM A153/A153M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on
Iron and Steel Hardware
4. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
a.
NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for Industrial Control and
Systems: General Requirements
b.
NEMA MG 1 (2011) Motors and Generators
5. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
a.
1.2
NFPA 70 (2011; Errata 2 2012) National Electrical Code
SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
A. SD-02 Shop Drawings
1. Equipment Installation
B. SD-03 Product Data
1. Materials and Equipment
2. Framed Instructions
3. Spare Parts
C. SD-06 Test Reports
1. Field Testing and Adjusting Equipment
D. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
1. Operating and Maintenance Manuals[; ][; ]
22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
1.3
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect from the weather, excessive humidity and excessive temperature variation; and
dirt, dust, or other contaminants all equipment delivered and placed in storage.
1.4
EXTRA MATERIALS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, after
approval of the related submittals. Include in the data a complete list of parts and
supplies, with source of supply.
22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items
that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Equipment
shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting
Officer, reasonably convenient to the site. Pump casings shall be constructed of cast iron
of uniform quality and free from blow holes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage defects,
cracks, and other injurious defects. Impellers shall be cast iron
2.1.1 Name plates
Provide each major item of equipment with the manufacturer's name, address, type or
style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a plate secured to the item of
equipment.
2.1.2 Equipment Guards
Enclose or guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, projecting setscrews, keys, and other
rotating parts so located that any person may come in close proximity thereto.
2.1.3 Special Tools
Provide one set of special tools, calibration devices, and instruments required for
operation, calibration, and maintenance of the equipment.
2.1.4 Electric Motors
Motors shall conform to NEMA MG 1.
2.1.5 Motor Controls
Controls shall conform to NEMA ICS 1.
2.1.6 Bolts, Nuts, Anchors, and Washers
Bolts, nuts, anchors, and washers shall be steel; galvanized in accordance with ASTM
A153/A153M.
2.1.7 Pressure Gauges
Compound gauges shall be provided on the suction side of pumps and standard pressure
gauges on the discharge side of pumps. Gauges shall comply with ASME B40.100.
Gauge ranges shall be as appropriate for the particular installation.
2.2
CENTRIFUGAL SOLIDS HANDLING PUMPS
Centrifugal solids handling pumps shall be of the nonclogging centrifugal type designed to
pump solids up to 76 mm in diameter and which provide no internal interstices that catch
solids and stringy materials to cause clogging.
2.2.1 Pump Casing
Pump casing shall be constructed with tapped and plugged holes for venting and draining
the pump. The casing shall be capable of withstanding pressures 50 percent greater than
22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
the maximum operating pressure. The volute shall have smooth passages. The casing
shall be such that the impeller can be removed without disturbing the suction and
discharge connections. The casing shall have a handhole to permit inspection and
cleaning of the pump interior. Lifting eyes shall be provided to facilitate handling of the
pump.
2.2.2 Impeller
The impeller shall be designed with smooth passages to prevent clogging and pass stringy
or fibrous materials. The impeller shall be statically, dynamically, and hydraulically
balanced within the operating range and to the first critical speed at 150 percent of the
maximum operating speed. The impeller shall be securely keyed to the shaft with a
locking arrangement whereby the impeller cannot be loosened by torque from either
forward or reverse direction.
2.2.3 Wearing Rings
Renewable wearing rings shall be provided on the impeller and casing and shall have
wearing surfaces normal to the axis of rotation. Wearing rings shall be designed for ease
of maintenance and shall be secured to prevent rotation. Replaceable steel wear plates
fastened to casing may be used in lieu of wearing rings on casing and impeller.
2.2.4 Pump Shaft
Pump shaft shall be of stainless or high grade alloy steel and shall be of adequate size
and strength to transmit the full driver horsepower with a liberal safety factor.
2.2.5 Pump Shaft Sleeve
The pump shaft shall be protected from wear by a stainless steel, high grade alloy steel or
bronze shaft sleeve. The joint between the shaft and sleeve shall be sealed to prevent
leakage.
2.2.6 Stuffing Box
The stuffing box shall be of the same material as the casing and shall be [grease] [or]
[water] sealed. The stuffing box shall be designed for a minimum of five rings of packing
and shall have easily removable split type glands.
2.2.7 Mechanical Seals
Single or Double (depends on pressure applications) mechanical seals shall be provided
to seal the pump shaft against leakage. Each seal interface shall be held in contact by its
own spring system, supplemented by external liquid pressures. The seal system shall be
constructed to be readily removable from the shaft.
2.2.8 Bearings
Pump bearings shall be ball or roller type designed to handle all thrust loads in either
direction. Pumps depending only on hydraulic balance end thrust will not be acceptable.
Bearings shall have an ABEMA L-10 life of 50,000 hours minimum, as specified in ABMA 9
or ABMA 11.
22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.2.9 Lubrication
Bearings shall be [oil bath] [or] [grease] lubricated. [An oil reservoir shall be provided for
oil bath lubricated bearings. The reservoir shall have an overflow opening to prevent
overfilling and shall have a drain at the lowest point.] [A grease fitting shall be provided for
grease-lubricated bearings. The grease fitting shall be of the type that prevents
overlubrication and the building up of pressure injurious to the bearings. If the grease
fitting is not easily accessible, grease tubing shall be provided to a convenient location.]
2.2.10 Pump Support
Horizontal centrifugal pumps shall be provided with a common base plate for the pump
and motor. Vertical shaft centrifugal pumps shall be provided with separate bases for the
pump and motor. Vertical dry pit centrifugal pumps shall be supported by a heavy cast
iron base with adequate legs to provide maximum rigidity and balance.
2.2.11 Coupling
Couplings shall be of the heavy-duty flexible type, keyed or locked to the shaft.
Disconnecting of the coupling shall be possible without removing the driver half or the
pump half of the coupling from the shaft. Couplings for extended shaft vertical centrifugal
pumps may be of the universal type.
2.3
SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
Submersible centrifugal pumps shall be centrifugal type pumps designed to pump solids
up to 76 mm in diameter and shall be capable of withstanding submergence as required
for the particular installation.
2.3.1 Pump Casing
The casing shall be capable of withstanding operating pressures 50 percent greater than
the maximum operating pressures. The volute shall have smooth passages which provide
unobstructed flow through the pump.
2.3.2 Mating Surfaces
Mating surfaces where watertight seal is required, including seal between discharge
connection elbow and pump, shall be machined and fitted with nitrile rubber O-rings.
Fitting shall be such that sealing is accomplished by metal-to-metal contact between
mating surfaces, resulting in proper compression of the O-rings without the requirement of
specific torque limits.
2.3.3 Coatings
Exterior surfaces of the casing in contact with sewage shall be protected by a sewage
resistant coal tar epoxy coating. All exposed nuts and bolts shall be stainless steel.
2.3.4 Impeller
The impeller shall be of the [single] or [double] shrouded non-clogging design to minimize
clogging of solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge, or other materials found in sewage.
The impeller shall be statically, dynamically, and hydraulically balanced within the
operating range and to the first critical speed at 150 percent of the maximum operating
speed. The impeller shall be securely keyed to the shaft with a locking arrangement
22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
whereby the impeller cannot be loosened by torque from either forward or reverse
direction.
2.3.5 Wearing Rings
Wearing rings, when required, shall be renewable type and shall be provided on the
impeller and casing and shall have wearing surfaces normal to the axis of rotation.
Material for wear rings shall be standard of pump manufacturer. Wearing rings shall be
designed for ease of maintenance and shall be adequately secured to prevent rotation.
2.3.6 Pump Shaft
The pump shaft shall be of high grade alloy steel and shall be of adequate size and
strength to transmit the full driver horsepower with a liberal safety factor.
2.3.7 Seals
A tandem mechanical shaft seal system running in an oil bath shall be provided. Seals
shall each interface held in contact by its own spring system. [Conventional mechanical
seals which require a constant pressure differential to effect sealing will not be allowed.]
2.3.8 Bearings
Pump bearings shall be ball or roller type designed to handle all thrust loads in either
direction. Pumps depending only on hydraulic balance end thrust will not be acceptable.
Bearings shall have an ABEMA L-10 life of 50,000 hours minimum, as specified in ABMA 9
or ABMA 11.
2.3.9 Motor
The pump motor shall have Class F insulation, NEMA B design, in accordance with NEMA
MG 1, and shall be watertight. The motor shall be either oil filled, air filled with a water
jacket, or air filled with cooling fins which encircles the stator housing.
2.3.10 Power Cable
The power cable shall comply with NFPA 70, Type SO, and shall be of standard
construction for submersible pump applications. The power cable shall enter the pump
through a heavy duty entry assembly provided with an internal grommet assembly to
prevent leakage. The cable entry junction chamber and motor shall be separated by a
stator lead sealing gland or terminal board which shall isolate the motor interior from
foreign material gaining access through the pump top. [Epoxies, silicones, or other
secondary sealing systems are not acceptable.]
2.3.11 Installation Systems
2.3.11.1 Rail Mounted Systems
Rail mounted installation systems shall consist of guide rails, a sliding bracket, and a
discharge connection elbow. Guide rails shall be of the size and type standard with
the manufacturer and shall not support any portion of the weight of the pump. The
sliding guide bracket shall be an integral part of the pump unit. The discharge
connection elbow shall be permanently installed in the wet well along with the
discharge piping. The pump shall be automatically connected to the discharge
22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
connection elbow when lowered into place and shall be easily removed for inspection
and service without entering the pump well.
2.3.11.2 Bolt Down Systems
The pump mount system shall include a base designed to support the weight of the
pump. The base shall be capable of withstanding all stresses imposed upon it by
vibration, shock, and direct and eccentric loads.
2.3.11.3 Lifting Chain
Lifting chain to raise and lower the pump through the limits indicated shall be
provided. The chain shall be galvanized stainless steel and shall be capable of
supporting the pump.
2.4
SELF-PRIMING CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
Self-priming centrifugal pumps shall be designed to pump solids up to 76 mm in diameter
and shall be of the centrifugal type capable of repeated re-prime when handling trashladen sewage.
2.4.1 Pump Casing
The casing shall be capable of withstanding pressures 50 percent greater than the
maximum operating pressures. The pump casing shall contain no openings of smaller
diameter than the specified sphere size. There shall be no internal devices that will inhibit
maintenance or interfere with priming and performance. The pump shall be designed to
retain sufficient liquid in the casing to ensure unattended operation. The casing shall be
such that the impeller can be removed without disturbing the suction and discharge
connections. Front access shall be provided to the pump interior to permit inspection and
cleaning of the pump interior without removing suction or discharge piping.
2.4.2 Impeller
The impeller shall be of the two-vane, semi-open, non-clog type with pump-out vanes cast
integrally on its backside. The impeller shall be statically, dynamically, and hydraulically
balanced within the operating range and to the first critical speed at 150 percent of the
maximum operating speed. The impeller shall be securely keyed to the shaft with a
locking arrangement whereby the impeller cannot be loosened by torque from either
forward or reverse direction.
2.4.3 Wear Plate
A replaceable wear plate constructed of [cast iron] or [alloy steel] shall be provided.
2.4.4 Pump Shaft
Pump shaft shall be of high grade alloy steel or stainless steel and shall be of adequate
size and strength to transmit the full driver wattage with a liberal safety factor.
2.4.5 Pump Shaft Sleeve
The pump shaft shall be protected from wear by a high grade alloy steel or stainless steel
shaft sleeve. A seal, if needed, shall be placed between the shaft and sleeve to prevent
leakage.
22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 9 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.4.6 Seals
The pump shaft shall be sealed against leakage by [oil lubricated] or [water lubricated]
mechanical seal. The stationary sealing member shall be [tungsten carbide] or [silicon
carbide] and the rotating member shall be [tungsten carbide] or [silicon carbide]. The seal
shall be such that the faces will not lose alignment during shock loads that cause
deflection, vibration, and axial or radial movement of the pump shaft.
2.4.7 Bearings
Pump bearings shall be ball or roller type designed to handle all thrust loads in either
direction.
2.4.8 Lubrication
Bearings shall be [oil bath] [or] [grease] lubricated. [An oil reservoir for oil bath lubricated
bearings shall be provided. The reservoir shall have an overflow opening to prevent
overfilling and shall have a drain at the lowest point.] [A grease fitting shall be provided to
add grease for grease-lubricated bearings. The grease fitting shall be of the type that
prevents overlubrication and the building up of pressure injurious to the bearings. If the
grease fitting is not easily accessible, grease tubing to a convenient location shall be
provided.]
2.4.9 Suction Check Valve
The pump shall contain a suction check valve to maintain prime. The suction check valve
shall be removable without disturbing the suction piping. [The pump shall be capable of
prime or re-prime in the event of check valve failure.]
2.4.10 Pump Support
A common fabricated steel base plate shall be provided for the pump and motor.
2.4.11 Coupling
Power shall be transmitted from the motor to the pump by a [flexible coupling] . [Flexible
couplings shall be of the heavy duty type, keyed or locked to the shaft.
2.5
PLUNGER PUMPS
Plunger pumps shall be of the positive displacement type designed to pump sewage
sludge with a minimum amount of clogging.
2.5.1 Pump Base
A common, welded steel, drip-rim base with a 25 mm threaded drain connection shall be
provided for the pump and motor. The base shall be of heavy section, fully braced to
withstand all shock loads and to resist buckling when properly anchored.
2.5.2 Pump Body
The pump body shall be cast iron. The pump shall be of heavy construction, designed to
handle its maximum rated capacity and head on a continuous duty basis and shall be
hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times the maximum rated head of the pump. The pump body
shall be of sectional construction so that the stuffing box, valve bodies, and air chamber
adapters are independently removable. The construction shall permit removal of the
22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 10 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
stuffing box, plunger, and connecting rod without disturbing the body, valve chambers,
manifolds, piping, or shaft.
2.5.3 Valves
Valve chambers shall be provided on both the inlet and discharge connections of each
cylinder. The valve chambers shall be constructed with contoured interiors to minimize
clogging. Valves shall be ball type, at least 130 mm in diameter, and constructed of
neoprene. Valve seats shall be independent, fully machined plates which may be
replaced without disturbing valve bodies or piping.
2.5.4 Connecting Rod, Eccentric, Eccentric Bearings, and Shaft
The connecting rod and eccentric strap assembly shall be cast as one piece and shall
have a quality hot-poured Babbitt lining. The eccentric, bearings, and shaft shall be
designed to handle the stresses and deflections imposed upon it by the specified service.
[The shaft shall be offset from the vertical centerline of the cylinder by an amount
appropriate to the cylinder diameter to reduce lateral thrust on the cylinder during the
discharge stroke.]
2.5.5 Plungers
Plungers shall be ductile iron and shall have a plugged drain hole in the bottom which shall
be accessible through the top of the plunger.
2.5.6 Cylinders
Cylinders shall be machined to a smooth bore to provide a uniform surface throughout the
full travel of the plunger.
2.5.7 Stuffing Box
The cylinder and plunger shall have an effective packing arrangement to provide
lubrication for the plunger and maintain the most effective vacuum. The stuffing box shall
be of heavy cast construction and shall be provided with a circular drain lip and 25 mm
threaded drain connection.
2.5.8 Air Chambers
Air chambers shall be provided on [the discharge side] [both suction and discharge sides]
of the pump. Air chambers shall have a minimum capacity of 0.0295 cubic meters and a
minimum 76 mm diameter opening.
2.5.9 Sampling Valve
A 50 mm sampling valve shall be provided on the discharge side of the pump.
2.5.10 Pressure Relief Valve
A pressure relief valve shall be provided with a bypass line from the main suction and
discharge manifolds. The valve shall be factory set to prevent motor overload or pump
damage.
2.5.11 Lubrication
Each pump eccentric shall be provided with a sight-feed oil lubricator.
22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 11 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.5.12 Chain Drive
Capacity variations shall be provided by stroke adjustment accomplished at each eccentric
assembly, through the use of eccentric flanges coupled to the eccentric body. Overall
drive reduction shall be obtained through the combination of a gearhead motor and silent
roller chain. Motor gearhead shall be totally enclosed and running in oil. Chain capacity
shall be at least 150 percent of the chain manufacturers published horsepower rating. The
entire chain drive assembly shall be completely enclosed in a sealed lip, dust resistant
steel guard.
2.5.13 V-Belt and Integral Gear Drive
Capacity variations shall be provided by stroke adjustment accomplished at each eccentric
assembly, through the use of eccentric flanges coupled to the eccentric body. Overall
drive reduction shall be obtained through a combination of gears and V-belts. Gears shall
run in an oil bath contained in an oil- tight cast iron or aluminum enclosure. The gear
reduction design, gear materials and face widths, shafting, and bearings shall be selected
for the specified operating conditions. The entire V-Belt drive assembly shall be covered
by a rigid safety guard.
2.5.14 Gear Reducer Drive
Capacity variations shall be provided by pump speed change only. The low speed shaft of
the reducer shall be directly connected to the main shaft of the pump through a flexible
coupling with shear pin protection. The shear pin overload protection shall be designed for
release at 150 percent to 175 percent of normal torque. The high speed shaft of the
reducer shall be connected to the motor by a heavy duty flexible coupling. The entire gear
reduction unit shall be enclosed in a dustproof and oil-tight housing.
2.6
ELECTRICAL WORK
Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors, motor starters,
controls and wiring in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM. Electrical characteristics shall be as specified or indicated. Motor starters shall
be provided complete with thermal overload protection and other appurtenances
necessary for the motor control specified. Manual or automatic control and protective or
signal devices required for the operation specified, and any control wiring required for
controls and devices but not shown, shall be provided.
22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 12 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and
advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work.
3.2
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Submit Drawings containing complete wiring and schematic diagrams and any other
details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly
function as a unit. Show on the Drawings proposed layout and anchorage of equipment
and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including
clearances for maintenance and operation.
3.2.1 Pump Installation
Install pumping equipment and appurtenances in the position indicated and in accordance
with the manufacturer's written instructions. Provide all appurtenances required for a
complete and operating pumping system, including such items as piping, conduit, valves,
wall sleeves, wall pipes, concrete foundations, anchors, grouting, pumps, drivers, power
supply, seal water units, and controls.
3.2.2 Concrete
Concrete shall conform to Section 03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
3.2.3 Grouting Screw Pump Flow Channel
After installation and adjustment of the screw pump, place grout in the flow channel to the
configuration and dimensions indicated and as required to insure a proper fit between the
screw pump and flow channel. A radius screed provided by the pump manufacturer shall
be temporarily attached to provide proper clearance between the screw and the flow
channel. The flow channel shall be grouted in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
3.3
PAINTING
Pumps and motors shall be thoroughly cleaned, primed, and given two finish coats of paint
at the factory in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Field painting
required for ferrous surfaces not finished at the factory is specified in Section 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.4
FRAMED INSTRUCTIONS
Post, where directed, framed instructions containing wiring and control diagrams under
glass or in laminated plastic. Condensed operating instructions, prepared in typed form,
shall be framed as specified above and posted beside the diagrams. Post the framed
instructions before acceptance testing of the system. Submit pump characteristic curves
showing capacity in gpm, net positive suction head (NPSH), head, efficiency, and pumping
horsepower from 0 gpm to 110 percent (100 percent for positive displacement pumps) of
design capacity. Submit a complete list of equipment and material, including
manufacturer's descriptive data and technical literature, performance charts and curves,
catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Diagrams, instructions, and other sheets
proposed for posting.
22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 13 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
3.5
FIELD TESTING AND ADJUSTING EQUIPMENT
3.5.1 Operational Test
Prior to acceptance, an operational test of all pumps, drivers, and control systems shall be
performed to determine if the installed equipment meets the purpose and intent of the
specifications. Tests shall demonstrate that the equipment is not electrically,
mechanically, structurally, or otherwise defective; is in safe and satisfactory operating
condition; and conforms with the specified operating characteristics. Prior to applying
electrical power to any motor driven equipment, the drive train shall be rotated by hand to
demonstrate free operation of all mechanical parts. Tests shall include checks for
excessive vibration, leaks in all piping and seals, correct operation of control systems and
equipment, proper alignment, excessive noise levels, and power consumption.
3.5.2 Retesting
If any deficiencies are revealed during any test, such deficiencies shall be corrected and
the tests shall be reconducted.
3.5.3 Performance Test Reports
Submit performance test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust
each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified
performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system. In each test
report indicate the final position of controls.
3.6
MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
Provide the services of a manufacturer's representative who is experienced in the
installation, adjustment, and operation of the equipment specified. The representative
shall supervise the installation, adjustment, and testing of the equipment.
3.7
FIELD TRAINING
Provide a field training course for designated operating and maintenance staff members.
T. Field training shall cover all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance
manuals. Submit 4 copies of operation and 4 copies of maintenance manuals for the
equipment furnished. One complete set prior to performance testing and the remainder
upon acceptance. Operation manuals shall detail the step-by-step procedures required for
system startup, operation, and shutdown. Include in the operation manuals the
manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, and brief description of all equipment and
their basic operating features. List in the maintenance manuals routine maintenance
procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. Maintenance
manuals shall include piping and equipment layout and simplified wiring and control
diagrams of the system as installed. Manuals shall be approved prior to the field training
course
END OF SECTION 22 13 29
22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 14 OF 14
PGC-230033-C-P8
22 14 29
SUMP PUMPS
CONTENTS
PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 2
REFERENCES......................................................................................................... 2
SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 2
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................................................. 3
EXTRA MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................... 5
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................... 5
2.2
WET-PIT SUMP PUMPS .......................................................................................... 5
2.2.1 Pump Selection ......................................................................................................... 5
2.2.2 Pump Casing ............................................................................................................ 6
2.2.3 Impeller ..................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.4 Strainer ..................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.5 Pump Shaft ............................................................................................................... 6
2.2.6 Bearings and Lubrication .......................................................................................... 6
2.2.7 Flexible Couplings..................................................................................................... 7
2.2.8 Support Pipe ............................................................................................................. 7
2.2.9 Discharge Pipe.......................................................................................................... 7
2.2.10 Liquid-Level Control ................................................................................................ 7
2.2.11 High-Water Alarm ................................................................................................... 8
2.2.12 Sump Tank and Cover plate .................................................................................... 8
2.2.13 Painting ................................................................................................................... 8
2.3
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS........................................................................................... 8
2.3.1 Pump Selection ......................................................................................................... 8
2.3.2 Pump Housing .......................................................................................................... 9
2.3.3 Impeller ..................................................................................................................... 9
2.3.4 Pump Shaft ............................................................................................................... 9
2.3.5 Mechanical Seal........................................................................................................ 9
2.3.6 Bearings and Lubrication .......................................................................................... 9
2.3.7 Motor and Power Cord .............................................................................................. 9
2.3.8 Liquid-Level Control .................................................................................................. 9
2.3.9 High-Water Alarm ................................................................................................... 10
2.3.10 Sump Tank and Cover plate .................................................................................. 10
2.3.11 Painting ................................................................................................................. 10
PART 3
EXECUTION ................................................................................................... 11
3.1
INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................... 11
3.1.1 Alignment................................................................................................................ 11
22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation
only.
1.
AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)
a) ABMA 11
Bearings
(1990; R 2008) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller
b) ABMA 9 (1990; R 2008) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings
2.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
a) ASTM A53/A53M
(2012) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel,
Black and Hot- Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
3.
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)
a) ISO 1940-1
(2003; Cor 2005) Mechanical Vibration - Balance Quality
Requirements for Rotors in a Constant (Rigid) State - Part 1:
Specification and Verification of Balance
b) ISO 2858 (1975) End Suction Centrifugal Pump (Rating 16 Bar)
Designation Nominal Duty Point and Dimensions - International
Restrictions
c) ISO 5199 (2002) Technical Specifications for Centrifugal Pumps, Class II
4.
1.2
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
a)
NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts
Maximum)
b)
NEMA MG 1
(2011) Motors and Generators
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
A. SD-02 Shop Drawings
1. Connection Diagrams
2. Control Diagrams
3. Fabrication Drawings
4. Installation Drawings
B- SD-03 Product Data
1. Manufacturer's Catalog Data
2. Pump Performance Curve
22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
3. Pump and Motor Specifications
4. Spare Parts[; G]
5. Special Tools
6. Wet-Pit Sump Pumps
7. Submersible Pumps
8. Accessories
C- SD-06 Test Reports
1. Hydrostatic Leak
2. Static Heads
3. Pump Flow Capacity
D- SD-07 Certificates
1. Manufacturer's Certification of Bearing Life
E- SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions
3. Vibration Specifications
1.3
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Inspect the pump for damage or other distress when received at the project site. Store
the pump and associated equipment indoors as recommended by the pump
manufacturer, protected from construction or weather hazards at the project site.
Provide adequate short-term storage for the pump and equipment in a covered, dry,
and ventilated location prior to installation. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for
extended storage.
1.4
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Submit manufacturers complete spare parts list showing all parts, spare parts,
and bulletins for pumps. Clearly show all details, parts, and adequately
describe parts or have proper identification marks. Drawings incorporated in
the parts lists may be reduced to one page size provided they are clear and
legible, or they may be folded into the bound lists to page size. Photographs or
catalog cuts of components may be included for identification.
B. a. Furnish the following spare parts:
1. One complete set of bearings and seals.
2. Replacement wearing rings and O-rings.
3. One impeller.
22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
C. a. Furnish one set of all special tools required to completely assemble,
disassemble, or maintain the pumps. Special tools refers to oversized or
specially dimensioned tools, special attachment or fixtures, or any similar items.
22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Provide pump and motor with vibration levels conforming to ISO 1940-1 unless
otherwise noted. Ensure motor vibration levels conform to NEMA MG 1, Motors and
Generators, Part 7 unless otherwise noted.
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Show details of connection of cables and pump motors on connection diagrams for
sump pumps. Submit control diagrams for sump pumps showing motor starters, relays,
or any other component necessary for safe operation.
Indicate the sump pump size, type, and efficiency rating on fabrication drawings.
Ensure installation drawings for sump pumps are in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended instructions.
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for sump pumps showing performance data
including; performance curves and indicating brake horsepower, head liter per second,
and NPSH. Also include equipment foundation data and equipment data.
Provide manufacturer's installation instructions and vibration specifications.
2.2
WET-PIT SUMP PUMPS
This specification covers automatic, electric-motor-driven, centrifugal,
suspended, sump pumps and accessories.
wet-pit,
Construct and furnish pumps in accordance with the applicable requirements of ISO
2858 and ISO 5199 standards and those specified herein.
Include with the duplex pump unit two individual, vertical, submerged, volute, centrifugal
pumps mounted below a cover plate; vertical, flexible-connected, solid-shaft motors;
motor and bearing- support housing attached to the cover plate; pump-support and
shaft-housing pipes; discharge pipes; and automatic controls. Design the installation of
the unit to permit removal of one pump assembly without disturbing the operation of the
other.
Ensure requirements for each material designation are in accordance with the
applicable definition listed in the centrifugal pump section of ISO 2858and ISO 5199
standards. Materials for components and accessories not covered by these definitions
are as specified herein.
Avoid contact between dissimilar metals. Where such contact cannot be avoided,
protect joints between dissimilar metals against galvanic corrosion by plating, organicinsulation coatings, gaskets, or other suitable means.
2.2.1 Pump Selection
Where parallel pump operation is indicated, select pumps with characteristics
specifically suited for the service without unstable operation.
Select pumps for service within 4 percent of maximum efficiency for a given casing and
impeller series.
22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
Do not select pumps having impeller diameter larger than 90 percent of the published
maximum diameter of the casing or less than 15 percent larger than the published
minimum diameter of the casing.
Provide a pump with duty conditions as [indicated on drawings.].
a.
Provide a pump unit that delivers, at rated speed, not less than the
specified litre per
second against the specified or indicated discharge
head while the liquid level is not more than 300 millimetre above the datum
elevation of the pump.
Use the level of the entrance eye of the
impeller as the datum elevation. Include in the calculations of the
discharge head, both the friction head of the system piping external to the
pump unit and the static head measured from a point of reference on the
sump to the highest point in the system. .
b.
Provide Pump Performance Curve, and Pump and Motor Specifications.
2.2.2 Pump Casing
Provide cast iron pump casing. Provide a volute and discharge nozzle of the pump
casing cast as one piece. Construct casing with a bolted plate to permit inspection and
removal of the impeller. Design casing to withstand a hydrostatic pressure of not less
than 1-1/2 times the design shutoff head of the pump.
2.2.3 Impeller
Provide cast iron or bronze impeller, enclosed or semi-open, with vanes on back
shroud. Refer to the paragraph entitled, "Bearings and Lubrication," of this section for
additional requirements. Ensure impeller is dynamically balanced.
2.2.4 Strainer
Protect intake with a large cast-iron, slotted intake strainer with an effective free area
sufficient to prevent cavitations and degradation of efficiency. Provide a strainer with a
free area of at least four times the cross-sectional area of the suction casing.
2.2.5 Pump Shaft
Construct the pump shaft of ground and polished AISI Type 304 or 316 corrosionresistant steel with hardened wearing surfaces at intermediate shaft-bearing locations.
Provide mechanical properties and diameter of the shaft to ensure that whip, deflection,
or vibration is not of sufficient magnitude to impose greater than design loads on the
specified shaft bearings under normal operating conditions. Provide the means for
external adjustment of the clearance between the impeller and the inner surfaces of the
volute section.
2.2.6 Bearings and Lubrication
Furnish one or more antifriction ball- or roller-bearings in the motor and bearing support
housing above the cover-plate surface, with full provision for the mechanical and
hydraulic radial and thrust loads imposed. Provide sealed and grease lubricated
bearings that have an L-10 rating of not less than 80,000 hours in accordance with
ABMA 9 or ABMA 11. Ensure the shop drawings bear the manufacturer's certification
of bearing life. Provide bearings manufactured from vacuum-processed or degassedalloy steels. Furnish bearings with grease and pressure-relief fittings at bottom or
opposite side the bearing where discharge may be viewed.
22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
Provide sleeve type intermediate shaft bearings. Ensure center distance between any
two bearings on the shaft does not exceed 1370 millimeter for pumps operating
between 1,700 and 1,800 revolutions per minute (rpm) or 1520 millimeter for pumps
operating at 1,200 rpm or less. Provide sleeve bearing not less than 2 times the shaft
diameter and locate near the lower extremity of the shaft.
Provide heavy-duty bronze or bronze-backed, Babbitt-lined sleeve bearings. Provide
appropriate nonferrous piping and fittings to permit individual lubrication of the
intermediate and lower bearings from above the sump cover plate. Provide means to
prevent the pumped fluid from entering the lower bearing. Include a suitable seal or a
system wherein a partial vacuum developed below the bearing by the impeller rotation
induces a positive flow of lubricant into the bearing. Fit bearings with a centralized
grease lubricator that is manually or electrically operated from a single point.
[Provide heavy-duty bronze- or corrosion-resistant steel-backed cutlass-rubber type
sleeve bearings with nonferrous piping and fittings provided for individual flushing of
intermediate and lower bearings.
2.2.7 Flexible Couplings
Connect the pump shaft to the motor shaft through a flexible coupling. Provide a tire
shape or a solid-mass serrated-edge disk shape flexible member made of chloroprene
material and retained by fixed flanges. Provide flexible coupling that acts as a dielectric
connector, that does not transmit vibration or end thrust, and that permits up to 4degree misalignment under normal duty.
2.2.8 Support Pipe
Provide a wrought-iron or steel support pipe concentric with the pump shaft that
connects the pump to the sump cover plate. Provide support-pipe flanges that are
machined and doweled to ensure proper alignment of the pump and shaft whenever the
pipe is disassembled and reassembled in the field.
2.2.9 Discharge Pipe
Furnish a discharge pipe running from the pump-discharge outlet to the sump cover
plate as an integral part of the pump unit. Arrange the discharge pipe to preclude
discharge piping beyond the pump assembly from imposing loads which would tend to
cause shaft misalignment. Provide black steel or wrought iron pipe, with wall thickness
not less than that specified in ASTM A53/A53M for Schedule 40 pipe. Ensure
discharge pipe is gastight through the sump cover plate. Ensure discharge end of the
pipe terminates in a screwed or flanged connection in accordance with the
manufacturer's standard practice.
2.2.10 Liquid-Level Control
Provide a duplex pump unit with the electrical and mechanical devices required to
provide automatic operation of the pump unit when the liquid in the sump rises to a
predetermined level. Ensure controls automatically transfer the operating cycle from
one pump to the other and operates both pumps simultaneously whenever the inflow to
the sump exceeds the capacity of the operating pump. Provide a means of adjustment
such as float-rod stops to allow for variations in the start and stop level-control points.
Provide AISI Type 304 or 316 corrosion-resistant steel float and rod. For all other parts
of the fluid-level-sensing mechanism below the cover plate, provide bronze, brass, or
material of equivalent resistance to the corrosive effects of sewage.
22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.2.11 High-Water Alarm
Provide a high-water alarm switch, complete with actuating mechanism, for operation
on an electrical circuit other than the motor circuit. Design the switch to operate
indicated alarm device(s) whenever a predetermined high-water level is reached in the
sump because of failure of either pump or a fluid inflow that exceeds the combined
capacity of both pumps. .
2.2.12 Sump Tank and Cover plate
2.2.12.1 Tank
Protect concrete sump-tank interior surfaces by not less than a two-coat, twocomponent system of amine-cured coal-tar epoxy totaling 0.381 millimeter in
thickness.
2.2.12.2 Cover plate
Provide a cast iron or steel or corrosion-resistant [aluminum sump tank cover plate,
of adequate strength to support the pumps without distortion, and of adequate
strength to safely support maintenance personnel. Provide gasketed openings
through the sump tank cover plate, unless otherwise specified. Provide a DN50
pips or larger threaded outlet to permit installation of a vent pipe. Ensure sump
cover plate provides either manhole or hand hole access to the tank.
2.2.13 Painting
Treat and paint equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice for
the specified duty.
2.3
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
Construct and furnish pumps and accessories in accordance with the requirements of
ISO 2858 and ISO 5199 standards and those specified herein.
Install operating switch such that in case of failure, the operating switch does not
require breaking of pump-motor seals for repairs.
Provide a duplex unit that includes float level controls for each submersible pump.
Ensure requirements for each material designation are in accordance with the
applicable definition listed in the centrifugal pump section of ISO 2858and ISO 5199
standards. Ensure materials for components and accessories not covered by these
definitions are as specified herein.
Avoid contact between dissimilar metals. Where such contact cannot be avoided,
protect joints between dissimilar metals against galvanic corrosion by plating, organic
insulation coatings, gaskets, or other suitable means.
2.3.1 Pump Selection
Select pumps for the service within 4 percent of maximum efficiency for a given casing
and impeller series.
Provide pump with duty conditions as [indicated on drawings.
22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
Ensure pump seals, lubricant, and electrical insulation are suitable for service in liquids
up to 60 degrees C.
2.3.2 Pump Housing
Provide a pump housing that encloses the pump motor and volute with its integrally cast
feet. Provide a cast iron pump housing that is watertight under all heads normal to the
service, and constructed to permit inspection and repair. Furnish with a volute
designed to withstand a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 1-1/2 times the design
shutoff head of the pump.
2.3.3 Impeller
Provide a dynamically balanced and totally enclosed bronze impeller.
Provide cast-iron nonclogging type impeller with design features to provide maximum
freedom from clogging when liquid containing rags and stringy material is handled.
Provide impeller that is dynamically balanced and that has a minimum size solid-sphere
handling capability of 40 millimeter.
2.3.4 Pump Shaft
Provide a pump shaft that is an extension of the motor shaft and constructed of ground
and polished AISI Type 300 or 400 series corrosion-resistant steel with hard wearing
surfaces (over 300 Brinell).
2.3.5 Mechanical Seal
Provide manufacturer's standard mechanical type pump shaft seal specifically
constructed for the service duty temperature and resistance to pumped fluid.
2.3.6 Bearings and Lubrication
Furnish antifriction ball- or roller-bearings with full provision for the mechanical and
hydraulic, radial, and thrust loads imposed. Seal and permanently grease or oil
lubricate bearings.
2.3.7 Motor and Power Cord
Provide permanently sealed, oil-filled, and watertight motor and that is manufacturer's
standard construction for the service. Fit the motor space with watertight expansion
provisions to accommodate temperature normal to specified duty. Ensure motor seals
remain watertight under any pressure developed in the volute and under a sump-level
static head of not less than 9100 millimeter of water. Ensure motor control for three
phase motor provides overload protection.
Provide waterproof, internally grounded, oil-resistant, Type SO chloroprene power cord,
with three- prong plug of indicated length.
2.3.8 Liquid-Level Control
Furnish a duplex pump unit with the electrical and mechanical devices required to
provide automatic operation of the pump unit when the liquid in the sump rises to
predetermined level. Provide controls that automatically transfer the operating cycle
from one pump to the other, and that operate both pumps simultaneously whenever the
inflow to the sump exceeds the capacity of the operating pump. Provide means of
adjustment such as float-rod stops to allow for variations in the start and stop level22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 9 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
control points. Provide AISI Type 304 or 316 corrosion-resistant steel float and rod.
Provide bronze, brass, or material of equivalent resistance to the corrosive effects of
the pumped fluid for all other wetted parts of the fluid-level sensing mechanism.
Pedestal mount controls above the cover plate. Provide Type 1, general purpose
enclosures conforming to NEMA 250.
2.3.9 High-Water Alarm
Provide a high-water alarm switch complete with actuating mechanism for operation on
an electrical circuit other than the motor circuit. Design the switch to operate indicated
alarm device(s) whenever a predetermined high-water level is reached in the sump
because of failure of either pump or a fluid inflow that exceeds the capacity of both
pumps. Provide switch enclosure that is the same as the level-control switch.
2.3.10 Sump Tank and Cover plate
2.3.10.1 Tank
Furnish a standard opening for connection to the drainage inflow pipe in the
indicated size and location with respect to the top of the tank.
Protect the concrete-sump interior surfaces by not less than a two-coat, twocomponent system of amine-cured coal-tar epoxy totaling 0.381 millimeter in
thickness.
2.3.10.2 Cover plate
Provide cast iron or aluminum sump cover plate, of adequate strength to support not
less than 9500 pascal without distortion. Seal all openings through the sump cover to
be gastight and watertight.
Provide a standard outlet for a vent pipe. Ensure sump cover provides either manhole
or handhole access to the interior.
2.3.11 Painting
Treat and paint equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice for
specified duty.
22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 10 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.1 Alignment
Before attempting alignment, demonstrate that the pump does not have any load/force
imposed by the piping system. Minimum alignment values (below) are for pump and
driver at normal running temperatures. Compensate values for thermal growth. Correct
limited movement of the pump or driver to ensure alignment capability. Ensure hold
down bolts are not undercut in order to perform adjustment.
Ensure shims are commercially die-cut, without seams or folds, and are made of
corrosion resistant stainless steel. Do not use more than four shims at any single point.
Pump and driver may have an intermediate shaft, spacer, or spool piece (sometimes
called a jackshaft) Based on the motor nominal operating speed. Align the pump and
driver to the following minimum specifications:
Speed(RPM)
close- offset (mils)
600
900
1200
1800
3600
7200
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
1.5
1.0
close-coupled
angle(mils/in.)
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.4
0.3
spool piece angle
(mils/in. @ coupling pt.)
3.0
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.4
Provide final alignment settings as part of the final test data.
END OF SECTION 22 14 29
22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 11 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
22 32 00
WATER CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
WORK INCLUDED ........................................................................................................................2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK............................................................................................................2
QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................2
SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................2
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ..................................................................2
PART 2 PRODUCTS ...............................................................................................................................3
2.1
PACKAGED FILTRATION SYSTEM .............................................................................................3
PART 3 EXECUTION ..............................................................................................................................4
22 32 00 WATER CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 4
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Compliance with sections of Division 1, General Requirements and documents
referred to therein.
B.
Conform to General Requirements for Mechanical Services.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish and install Plumbing Equipment as indicated on drawings.
B. This section specifies the requirements for the water filtration equipment
1.3
1.4
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer’s Qualifications:
Firms regularly engaged in manufacture
of specified items with characteristics, sizes and capacities required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years.
B.
Certification, test certificates under specified operating conditions shall
be provided by manufacturer.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data
instructions.
:
Submit
manufacturer’s
specifications
and
installation
B.
Shop Drawings : Submit
manufacturer’s assembly-type shop drawings
indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and methods of
assembly of components.
C.
Wiring Diagrams : Submit manufacturer’s electrical requirements
for
power supply wiring to equipment. Submit manufacturer’s ladder-type wiring
diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between
portions of wiring that are factory – installed and portions to be field- installed.
D.
Maintenance Data:
Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type
of equipment, control and accessory, including “trouble – shooting”
maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, shop drawings and wiring
diagrams in maintenance manual.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damage,
breaking, denting and scoring.
Do not install damaged equipment or
components, replace with new.
B.
Store equipment and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather,
dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.
22 32 00 WATER CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 4
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PACKAGED FILTRATION SYSTEM
A.
A packaged multimedia filtration system complete shall be supplied for
turbidity odor and smell removal. Capacity shall be as indicated on the
drawings.
B.
Filter tank shall be suitable for a working pressure of 689 KPa (100psi) and
tested at 50% in excess of the working pressure. Shell height to allow a
minimum free board space of 100% of the mineral bed depth for adequate
expansion during backwashing. Tank to be equipped with one manhole located
in the top head of the tank. Filter tank to be supported by legs and be painted
with a rust inhibiting primer. Filter tank shall be of glass reinforced polyester
construction.
C.
The collector system shall consist of a plate welded to the complete diameter
of the tank and centrally supported by a pier. Plate to accommodate collectors
spaced to collect and dispense water laterally. Multiple layers of filter media to
be furnished to properly distribute the backwash water and support the mineral
bed.
D.
Following media shall consist of four layers as follows:
1.
Top layer to consist of light weight chips to retain large flat pieces of debris.
2.
Second layer to collect the bulk of course turbidity.
3.
Third layer to remove finer particles not collected in the upper layers.
4.
Bottom layer of high density material to polish the water
removing particulates down to 10 micron size.
E.
All filter media shall be of good quality possessing characteristics of
durability, long life, resistance to attrition and shall not impart taste, odour or
colour to the water being treated. Filter media shall be selected for removing
particulates down to 10 micron size.
F.
The filter unit shall be equipped with a fully automatic, self contained control
valve using a cartridge design permitting instant service.
Timer to
automatically control the filter clean-up cycle on a pre set schedule. Duration
of backwash and rinse cycles to be factory set to accommodate site
conditions. Laboratory test report shall be submitted for Consultant approval.
G.
The filtration unit shall be suitable for removal of suspended matters,
de- chlorination, organic removal, and odour removal.
22 32 00 WATER CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 4
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3 EXECUTION
A.
All material shall be installed strictly in compliance with the manufacturers
instructions.
B.
Run all piping as direct as possible, avoiding unnecessary offsets.
C.
The interconnecting piping for plants shall be UPVC Class E and the valves
shall be non-corrosive material.
D.
The installation shall be carried out and validated by the water treatment
plant supplier.
E.
Ream all pipes to full inside diameter after cutting and thoroughly clean
before erection. All material shall have proper identification marks that can
be verified prior installation.
F.
After the plants are installed, thoroughly flush all piping before running
pumps sterilizing the potable water system.
G.
The sterilization works
maintenance manual.
shall
be
included
in
the
operation
and
END OF SECTION 22 32 00
22 32 00 WATER CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 4
PGC-230033-C-P8
22 33 30.00 10
SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
CONTENTS
PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3
REFERENCES......................................................................................................... 3
SOLAR ENERGY SYSTEM ...................................................................................... 5
SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 5
WELDER QUALIFICATIONS .................................................................................... 6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................................................. 6
WARRANTY ............................................................................................................ 6
SPARE PARTS ........................................................................................................ 6
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................ 7
2.1
GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 7
2.1.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS .........................................................................................................7
2.1.2 NAMEPLATES ..........................................................................................................................7
2.1.3 IDENTICAL ITEMS ..................................................................................................................7
2.1.4 EQUIPMENT GUARDS [AND ACCESS] ................................................................................7
2.1.5 SPECIAL TOOLS ......................................................................................................................7
2.2 PIPING SYSTEM ........................................................................................................ 7
2.2.1 COPPER TUBING .....................................................................................................................7
2.2.2 SOLDER .....................................................................................................................................7
2.2.3 JOINTS AND FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBING ..................................................................7
2.2.4 FLANGES ..................................................................................................................................8
2.2.5 DIELECTRIC WATERWAYS AND FLANGES ......................................................................8
2.2.6 BRONZE GATE, GLOBE, ANGLE, AND CHECK VALVES ................................................8
2.2.7 BALL VALVES .........................................................................................................................8
2.2.8 RELIEF VALVES, PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE .........................................................8
2.2.9 CALIBRATING BALANCING VALVES ................................................................................8
2.2.10 AIR VENTS..............................................................................................................................9
2.2.11 STRAINERS ............................................................................................................................9
2.2.12 PRESSURE GAUGES .............................................................................................................9
2.2.13 THERMOMETERS..................................................................................................................9
2.2.14 PIPE THREADS .......................................................................................................................9
2.2.15 PIPE SUPPORTS .....................................................................................................................9
2.2.16 ALUMINUM SHEETS ............................................................................................................9
2.2.17 COPPER SHEETS COPPER ALLOY 110 ..............................................................................9
2.3
ELECTRICAL WORK ............................................................................................... 9
2.4 COLLECTOR SUBSYSTEM ........................................................................................ 9
2.4.1 SOLAR COLLECTOR CONSTRUCTION ...............................................................................9
2.4.2 ABSORBER PLATE AND FLOW TUBES.............................................................................10
2.4.3 COVER GLAZING ..................................................................................................................10
2.4.4 INSULATION ..........................................................................................................................10
2.4.5 CASING ...................................................................................................................................10
2.4.6 MOUNTING AND ASSEMBLY HARDWARE .....................................................................10
2.4.7 SOLAR COLLECTOR PERFORMANCE ..............................................................................10
2.5
SOLAR COLLECTOR ARRAY ................................................................................ 11
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.5.1 NET ABSORBER AREA AND ARRAY LAYOUT ...............................................................11
2.5.2 PIPING .....................................................................................................................................11
2.5.3 SUPPORTS FOR SOLAR COLLECTOR ARRAY .................................................................11
2.6
STORAGE TANK ................................................................................................... 11
2.6.1 ELECTRIC BACKUP BOOSTER ...........................................................................................12
2.7
TRANSPORT SUBSYSTEM ................................................................................... 12
2.7.1 HEAT EXCHANGER ..............................................................................................................12
2.7.2 PUMPS .....................................................................................................................................12
2.7.3 PIPE INSULATION .................................................................................................................13
2.7.4 EXPANSION TANK ................................................................................................................13
2.7.5 HEAT TRANSFER FLUID......................................................................................................13
2.8
CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SUBSYSTEM .............................................. 13
2.8.1 DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT .............................................13
2.8.2 THERMISTOR TEMPERATURE SENSORS.........................................................................13
2.8.3 SENSOR AND CONTROL WIRING ......................................................................................14
2.8.4 FLOWMETERS .......................................................................................................................14
2.8.5 SIGHT FLOW INDICATORS .................................................................................................14
2.9 PAINTING AND FINISHING ...................................................................................... 14
PART 3 EXECUTION ..................................................................................................... 15
3.1 EXAMINATION ......................................................................................................... 15
3.2 INSTALLATION......................................................................................................... 15
3.2.1 COLLECTOR SUBSYSTEM ....................................................................................................15
3.2.2 STORAGE SUBSYSTEM.........................................................................................................15
3.2.3 TRANSPORT SUBSYSTEM .....................................................................................................15
3.2.4 CONTROL SUBSYSTEM ........................................................................................................17
3.3 INSPECTION AND TESTING .................................................................................... 17
3.3.1 INSPECTION ............................................................................................................................17
3.3.2 TESTING PRIOR TO CONCEALMENT .................................................................................17
3.3.3 POSTING FRAMED INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................................18
3.3.4 ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND FINAL INSPECTION ..........................................................18
3.4 FIELD TRAINING ...................................................................................................... 19
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
1. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
a) ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 (1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R
2004) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems
2. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
a) ASHRAE 93 (2010) Methods of Testing to Determine the Thermal
Performance of Solar Collectors
3. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
a) AWWA C606 (2011) Grooved and Shouldered Joints
4. AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
a) AWS B2.1/B2.1M (2009) Specification for Welding Procedure and
Performance Qualification
b) AWS D1.2/D1.2M
(2008) Structural Welding Code - Aluminum
5. ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
a) ASME B1.20.2M
(Metric)
(2006; R 2011) Pipe Threads, 60 Deg. General Purpose
b) ASME B16.15 (2011) Cast Bronze Alloy Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and
250 c)
ASME B16.18 (2012) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
d) ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2010) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper
Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
e)
ASME B16.24 (2011) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings:
Classes 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500
f)
ASME B16.26
Copper Tubes
(2011) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared
g) ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions;
Classes 150, 250, and 300
h) ASME B31.1 (2010) Power Piping
i)
ASME B40.100 (2005; R 2010) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
j)
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2010) BPVC Section VIII-Rules for Construction
of Pressure Vessels Division 1
k) ASME PTC 19.3
(1974; R 2004; Errata 2012) Temperature Measurement
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
6. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
a) ASTM A183 (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track
Bolts and Nuts
b) ASTM A536 (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
c) ASTM B152/B152M (2009) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet, Strip,
Plate, and Rolled Bar
d)
ASTM B209M (2010) Standard Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet and Plate (Metric)
e) ASTM B32 (2008) Standard Specification for Solder Metal
f)
ASTM B62 (2009) Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce
Metal Castings
g) ASTM B75M (1999; R 2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper
Tube (Metric)
h) ASTM B828 (2002; R 2010) Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by
Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings
i)
ASTM B88M (2005; R 2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper
Water Tube (Metric)
j)
ASTM C1048
(2004) Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat
Glass – Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass
k) ASTM D2000(2012) Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in
Automotive Applications
l)
ASTM F1199
(1988; R 2010) Cast (All Temperatures and Pressures)
and Welded Pipe Line Strainers (150 psig and 150 degrees F Maximum)
7. MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND
FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)
a) MSS SP-110 (2010) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint,
Grooved and Flared Ends
b)
MSS SP-58 (2009) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and
Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation
c)
MSS SP-69 (2003) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application
(ANSI Approved American National Standard)
d)
MSS SP-72 (2010a) Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for
General Service
e) MSS SP-80 (2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves
8. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
a) NEMA MG 1 (2011) Motors and Generators
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
9. U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
a) UFC 3-310-04 (2007; Change 1) Seismic Design for Buildings
10. UNIFIED PLUMBING CODE OF ABU DHABI (PCAD)
a) Chapter 5 water heater, solar thermal energy and chillers
1.2
SOLAR ENERGY SYSTEM
A. Provide a solar energy system arranged for preheating of service (domestic and/or
process) water using flat plate liquid solar collectors. Include in the system
components a solar collector array, storage tank, pump[s], automatic controls,
instrumentation, interconnecting piping and fittings, heat exchanger, expansion
tank, electrical backup system and accessories required for the operation of the
system.
B. Submit manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature; performance chart
and curves; catalog cuts; and installation instructions. Proposed diagrams,
instructions, and other sheets, prior to posting.
A copy of the posted
instructions proposed to be used, including a system schematic, wiring and
control diagrams, and a complete layout of the entire system. Include with the
instructions, in typed form, condensed operating instructions explaining preventive
maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal safe
operation and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system, methods
of balancing and testing flow in the system, and methods of testing for control
failure and proper system operation.
C. Submit drawings containing a system schematic; a collector layout and roof plan
noting reverse-return piping for the collector array; a system elevation; an
equipment room layout; a schedule of operation and installation instructions;
and a schedule of design information including collector height and width,
recommended flow rate and pressure drop at that flow rate, and number of
collectors to be grouped per bank.
D. Include on the drawings complete wiring and schematic diagrams and any other
details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will
properly function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout and anchorage
of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the
work, including clearances for maintenance and operation.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
A. SD-02 Shop Drawings
1. Solar Energy System
2. As Built Drawings
B. SD-03 Product Data
1. Spare Parts
2. Solar Energy System
3. Welder Qualifications
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
C. SD-06 Test Reports
1. Inspection and Testing
D. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
A. Operation and Maintenance Procedures
1.4
WELDER QUALIFICATIONS
Qualify procedures and welders in accordance with the code under which the welding
is specified to be accomplished. Submit, prior to welding operations, 3 copies of
qualified procedures and lists of names and identification symbols of qualified welders
and welding operators.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, excessive
humidity and excessive temperature variation, and dirt and dust or other contaminants.
1.6
WARRANTY
Provide a minimum 10-year warranty against the following: failure of manifold or riser
tubing, joints or fittings; degradation of absorber plate selective surface; rusting or
discoloration of collector hardware; and embrittlement of header manifold seals.
Include in the warranty full repair or replacement of defective materials or equipment.
1.7
SPARE PARTS
Submit data for each different item of material and equipment listed, including a
complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply; a list
of parts and supplies that are either normally furnished at no extra cost with the
purchase of equipment, or specified to be furnished as part of the contract; and a list of
additional items recommended by the manufacturer to ensure efficient operation for a
period of 120 days.
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate
items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening.
Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the
Contracting Officer, reasonably convenient to the site. Solar system parts and
components shall be TUV, UL listed.
2.1.2 NAMEPLATES
Each major item of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or
style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a plate secured to the item of
equipment.
2.1.3 IDENTICAL ITEMS
Items of the same classification shall be identical, including equipment, assemblies,
parts, and components.
2.1.4 EQUIPMENT GUARDS [AND ACCESS]
Fully enclose or guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting set-screws,
keys, and other rotating parts so located that any person may come in close proximity.
High-temperature equipment and piping so located as to endanger personnel or where
it creates a potential fire hazard shall be properly guarded or covered with insulation of
a type specified. [Provide catwalk, ladder, and guard rails where shown and in
accordance with Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.]
2.1.5 SPECIAL TOOLS
Provide one set of special tools, calibration devices, and instruments required for
operation, calibration, and maintenance of the equipment.
2.2 PIPING SYSTEM
Piping system shall be complete with pipe, pipe fittings, valves, strainers, expansion
loops, hangers, inserts, supports, anchors, guides, sleeves, and accessories. System
materials shall conform to the following:
2.2.1 COPPER TUBING
ASTM B88M, Type K where buried, Type L otherwise. Collector risers Type L or M.
2.2.2 SOLDER
ASTM B32, Type Sb5, Sn94, Sn95, or Sn96.
2.2.3 JOINTS AND FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBING
Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform to ASME
B16.22 and ASTM B75M. Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
to ASME B16.18 and ASTM B828. Cast copper alloy fittings for flared copper tube shall
conform to ASME B16.26 and ASTM B62. Brass or bronze adapters for brazed tubing
may be used for connecting tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and
equipment. Cast bronze threaded fittings shall conform to ASME B16.15.
Extracted brazed tee joints produced with an acceptable tool and installed as
recommended by the manufacturer may be used. Grooved mechanical joints and
fittings shall be designed for not less than 862 kPa service and shall be the product of
the same manufacturer. Grooved fitting and mechanical coupling housing shall be
ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. Gaskets for use in grooved joints shall be
molded synthetic polymer of pressure responsive design and shall conform to ASTM
D2000 for circulating medium up to 110 degrees C. Grooved joints shall conform to
AWWA C606. Coupling nuts and bolts for use in grooved joints shall be steel and shall
conform to ASTM A183.
2.2.4 FLANGES
Bronze, Class 125 or 150 as applicable, ASME B16.24.
2.2.5 DIELECTRIC WATERWAYS AND FLANGES
Waterways and flanges shall conform to the requirements of ASME B16.39. Dielectric
waterways shall have metal connections at both ends suited to match connecting
piping. Ends shall be threaded or soldered to match adjacent piping. Dielectric
waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed to prevent
current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric waterways and flanges shall be
suitable for the temperatures, pressures, and antifreeze encountered. Dielectric
flanges shall meet the performance requirements described herein for dielectric
waterways.
2.2.6 BRONZE GATE, GLOBE, ANGLE, AND CHECK VALVES
MSS SP-80, Type 1 (or nonslam, spring type), Class 125 or 150.
2.2.7 BALL VALVES
MSS SP-72 or MSS SP-110, Class 125 or 150.
2.2.8 RELIEF VALVES, PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE
ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4. Pressure relief valves located on the solar collector array upper
manifold and on the expansion tank shall open and discharge the collector fluid [into
drain indicated when fluid pressure rises above 862 kPa. Pressure and temperature
relief valves located on the solar storage tank shall open and discharge water [into
drain indicated when fluid pressure rises above 862 kPa or when fluid temperature
rises above 99 degrees C.
2.2.9 CALIBRATING BALANCING VALVES
Calibrated balancing valves shall be suitable for 862 kPa and 121 degrees C service.
Calibrated balancing valves shall be of bronze body/brass ball construction with seat
rings compatible with system fluid and shall have differential readout ports across valve
seat area. Readout ports shall be fitted with internal insert of compatible material and
check valve. Calibrated balancing valves shall have memory stop feature to allow
valve to be closed for service and reopened to set point without disturbing balance
position, and shall have calibrated nameplate to assure specific valve settings.
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.2.10 AIR VENTS
Brass or bronze valves or cocks suitable for 862 kPa service. Air vents shall be
provided with threaded plugs or caps.
2.2.11 STRAINERS
ASTM F1199, removable basket and screen, Y pattern, cast iron strainer with
pressures to 862 kPa, simplex type; or a combination elbow-strainer with straightening
vanes and strainer arranged for horizontal flow.
2.2.12 PRESSURE GAUGES
ASME B40.100. Pressure gauges shall be provided with throttling type needle valve or
a pulsation dampener and shutoff valve. Minimum dial size shall be 90 mm.
2.2.13 THERMOMETERS
ASME PTC 19.3, Type I, Class 3. Thermometers shall be supplied with wells and
separable bronze sockets.
2.2.14 PIPE THREADS
ASME B1.20.2M.
2.2.15 PIPE SUPPORTS
MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. Metal insulation shield shall be stainless steel.
2.2.16 ALUMINUM SHEETS
ASTM B209M, Alloy 3003.
2.2.17 COPPER SHEETS COPPER ALLOY 110
ASTM B152/B152M.
2.3
ELECTRICAL WORK
Electric motor-driven equipment specified shall be provided complete with motor, motor
starters, and controls. Electrical equipment and wiring shall be in accordance with
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Electrical characteristics shall
be as specified or indicated. Motor starters shall be provided complete with thermal
overload protection and other appurtenances necessary for the motor control specified.
Each motor shall be of sufficient size to drive the equipment at the specified capacity
without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. Manual or automatic control and
protective or signal devices required for the operation specified, and any control wiring
required for controls and devices, but not shown, shall be provided. Integral size
motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
2.4 COLLECTOR SUBSYSTEM
2.4.1 SOLAR COLLECTOR CONSTRUCTION
Collectors shall be of the flat plate, liquid, internally manifolded type. Each collector
shall be provided with cover glazing, an absorber plate, heat transfer liquid flow tubes,
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 9 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
internal headers, weep holes, insulation, and a casing. Collectors shall be of weathertight construction. Solar collectors shall withstand a stagnation temperature of 177
degrees C and a working pressure of 862 kPa without degrading, out-gassing, or
warping. Collector net aperture area shall be as shown and shall be a minimum of 2.6
square meters. Collector length, width, and volume shall be proposed by the
specialized subcontractor.
2.4.2 ABSORBER PLATE AND FLOW TUBES
Absorber sheet or plate shall be copper. Top of absorber plate shall be coated with
selective surface of black chrome and shall have an emissivity less than 0.2 and
absorptivity greater than 0.9. Flow tubes shall be Type L or Type M copper, and shall
be soldered, brazed, or mechanically bonded to the absorber plate. Tubes shall be
installed on the absorber plate so that they drain by gravity.
2.4.3 COVER GLAZING
Each collector shall have a single layer of cover glazing made of clear float, water
white or low iron type tempered glass. Glass shall meet ASTM C1048. Cover glazing
shall be completely replaceable from the front of the collector without disturbing the
piping or adjacent collectors. Cover glazing shall be separated from the collector by a
continuous gasket made of EPDM rubber.
2.4.4 INSULATION
Back and sides of the absorber plate shall be insulated. Insulation shall fill space
between absorber plate and casing and shall have an R value of 4 minimum.
Insulation shall conform to EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35
RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS and shall be fibrous glass, polyisocyanurate,
urethane foam, or other material suitable for the intended purpose, and shall withstand
the moisture, sun exposure, and stagnation temperature limitations of the solar
collector. Polyisocyanurate insulation shall not come in contact with the absorber
plate.
2.4.5 CASING
Casing shall be aluminum. Finish shall be mill finish or factory applied baked enamel,
embossed or bronze anodized aluminum. Cover glazing shall be separated from the
casing by an EPDM rubber gasket or equivalent material. Allowance shall be made for
thermal expansion between the cover and absorber plates and the casing, and for
drainage of moisture through weep holes.
2.4.6 MOUNTING AND ASSEMBLY HARDWARE
Mounting brackets and hinges shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Assembly
hardware including all bolts, washers, and nuts shall be stainless steel.
2.4.7 SOLAR COLLECTOR PERFORMANCE
Thermal performance shall be plotted on the thermal efficiency curve in accordance
with ASHRAE 93. The y-intercept shall be equal to or greater than 0.68, and the
numerical value of the slope of the curve (FRUL) shall be between 0 and minus 5.7
watts per square meter per degree K (0 and minus 1.0 Btu per hour per square foot per
degree F). Manufacturers shall recommend s volumetric flow rate and the design
pressure drop at the recommended flow rate. .
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 10 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.5
SOLAR COLLECTOR ARRAY
2.5.1 NET ABSORBER AREA AND ARRAY LAYOUT
Array shall consist of an assembly of solar collectors as shown with a minimum total
array aperture area. Solar collectors shall be assembled as shown in banks of equal
number of collectors. Banks shall consist of no less than 2 and no more than 7
collectors each. Collector array shall be oriented so that all collectors face the same
direction and are oriented within 20 degrees of true south and with respect to true
south as indicated. Collectors arranged in multiple rows shall be spaced so that no
shading from other collectors is evident between 1000 hours and 1400 hours solar time
on December 21. Minimum spacing between rows shall be as shown.
2.5.2 PIPING
The array piping shall include interconnecting piping between solar collectors, and shall
be connected in a reverse-return configuration as indicated with approximately equal
pipe length for any possible flow path. Flow rate through the collector array shall be as
indicated on material submittal. Automatic pressure relief valves shall be provided in
the array piping system as indicated, and shall be adjusted to open when the pressure
within the solar array rises above 862 kPa. Each collector bank shall be capable of
being isolated by valves, and each bank capable of being separated shall have a
pressure relief valve installed and shall be capable of being drained. Manually
operated air vents shall be located at system high points, and all array piping shall be
pitched a minimum of 21 mm/meter as shown so that piping can be drained by gravity.
Calibrated balancing valves shall be supplied at the outlet of each collector bank as
indicated.
2.5.3 SUPPORTS FOR SOLAR COLLECTOR ARRAY
Support structure for collector array shall be aluminum and shall be in accordance with
Section [05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50
14STRUCTURAL METAL FABRICATIONS Support structure shall secure collector
array at the tilt angle with respect to horizontal and orientation with respect to true
south. Support structure shall withstand static weight of filled collectors and piping,
wind, seismic, and other loads as indicated. Seismic details shall [conform to UFC 3310-04 and Sections 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIPMENT and 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT. Support structure shall allow access to all equipment for maintenance,
repair, and replacement.
2.6
STORAGE TANK
Solar system hot water storage tank shall have a storage volume as shown on plans
and shall be as per hydraulic and thermal calculations. Solar system storage tank shall
conform to specifications for hot water storage tanks in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING,
GENERAL PURPOSE. Insulation shall be in accordance with Section 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, except that insulation shall
have an R value of not less than 30. Tank penetrations shall be designed to allow for
connections to copper piping without risk of corrosion due to dissimilar metals, and
shall be factory installed as indicated. Thickness of tank insulation shall be PCAD
(chapter 5, part II, table 5-5)
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 11 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.6.1 ELECTRIC BACKUP BOOSTER
Electric backup booster to be part of the storage tank, consisting of copper elements.
all sizing and character of this backup system to be submitted by specialized contractor
for approval.
2.7
TRANSPORT SUBSYSTEM
2.7.1 HEAT EXCHANGER
The heat exchanger construction and testing shall be in accordance with ASME BPVC
SEC VIII D1. Minimum design pressure rating shall be 862 kPa. Heat exchanger shall
be capable of returning a hot- side exit temperature of [49] degrees C or less given a
hot-side approach temperature of 60 degrees C and a cold-side approach temperature
of 38 degrees C. Heat exchanger shall be capable of withstanding temperatures of at
least 116 degrees C. Heat exchanger shall be capable of operation at the flow rates as
shown.
2.7.1.1 Plate Heat Exchanger
Heat exchanger shall be constructed of multiple plates of 316 stainless steel,
titanium, copper, copper- nickel, or brass. Plates shall be frame-mounted,
mechanically bonded, welded, or brazed at edges. Plate-type heat exchanger
shall be able to be cleaned. Gaskets shall be of EPDM rubber or Viton. All plate
heat exchanger characteristics shall be as indicated.
2.7.1.2 Tube-in-Shell Heat Exchanger
Heat exchanger shall be fixed bundle, shell-and-tube type. Shell, tube sheets, and
end plates shall be constructed of nonferrous, brass, copper-nickel, or 316
stainless steel. Shell insulation shall be in accordance with Section 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, except that insulation
shall have a minimum R value of not less than 12. Tubes shall be seamless
copper or copper alloy and shall be mechanically bonded, welded, or brazed to the
end tube plates. Tubes shall be straight and supported by tube sheets which
maintain the tubes in alignment. [Straight tube heat exchanger shall be arranged
for mechanical cleaning.] All tube-in-shell heat exchanger characteristics shall be
as indicated.
2.7.2 PUMPS
Circulating pumps shall be electrically-driven, single-stage, centrifugal type. The
pumps shall be supported [on a concrete foundation. The pumps shall have a capacity
not less than that indicated and shall be either integrally-mounted with the motor or
direct-connected by a flexible-shaft coupling on a cast-iron or steel sub base. The
pump shaft shall be constructed of corrosion resistant alloy steel, sleeve bearings and
glands of bronze designed to accommodate a mechanical seal. Pumps shall have
stainless steel impellers and casings of bronze. The motors shall have sufficient power
for the service required, shall be of a type approved by the manufacturer of the pump,
shall be suitable for the available electric service and for the heat transfer fluid used,
and shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. The motors shall be controlled by suitable switches that
can be activated by either the differential temperature controller or by manual override
(Hand-Off-Automatic). Each pump suction and discharge connection shall be provided
with a pressure gauge as specified.
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 12 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.7.3 PIPE INSULATION
Pipe insulation and coverings shall be applied in accordance with PCAD ( chapter 5.
Part II ) and Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL
SYSTEMS, as called out for steam piping to 103 kPa. Array piping insulation shall be
capable of withstanding 121 degrees C, except that piping within 450 mm of collector
connections shall be capable of withstanding 204 degrees C.
2.7.4 EXPANSION TANK
Expansion tank shall be constructed and tested in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC
VIII D1 , the tank should be designed for a hydrostatic test pressure of 2 ½ times the
allowable working pressure of the system and as applicable for a working pressure of
862 kPa. Tank shall be provided with an elastomeric EPDM bladder which separates
the system fluid from the tank walls and is suitable for a maximum operating
temperature of 116 degrees C. Expansion tank size and arrangement shall be
proposed by contractor for approval. Tank shall be provided with 862 kPa pressure
relief valve. Tank shall be factory pre-charged.
2.7.5 HEAT TRANSFER FLUID
Solar collector loop fluid shall be uninhibited USP/food-grade propylene-glycol and
shall be mixed with distilled or demineralized water to form a 50 percent by volume
propylene-glycol solution. Solar collector loop fluid shall be potable water for direct
circulation system
2.8
CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SUBSYSTEM
2.8.1 DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Differential temperature control equipment shall be supplied as a system by a single
manufacturer. Controller shall be solid-state electronic type complete with an integral
transformer to supply low voltage, shall allow a minimum adjustable temperature
differential (on) of 4 to 11 degrees C, a minimum adjustable temperature differential
(off) of 2 to 3 degrees C, and shall include a switching relay or solid state output device
for pump control. Thermostat shall operate in the on-off mode. Controller accuracy
shall be plus or minus 0.5 degree C. Controller shall be compatible with 10-kOhm
thermostat temperature sensors. Differential control shall provide direct digital
temperature readings of all temperatures sensed. Control shall indicate visually when
pumps are energized. Control ambient operating range shall be a minimum of 0 to 49
degrees C.
2.8.2 THERMISTOR TEMPERATURE SENSORS
Temperature sensors shall be 10-kOhm thermistors supplied by the differential
temperature controller manufacturer, with an accuracy of plus or minus 1 percent at 25
degrees C. Model supplied must have passed an accelerated life test conducted by
subjecting thermistor assemblies to a constant temperature of 204 degrees C or
greater for a period of 1000 hours minimum. Accuracy shall have remained within plus
or minus 1 percent as stated above. Thermistors shall be hermetically sealed glass
type. Operating range shall be minus 22 to plus 204 degrees C. Immersion wells or
watertight threaded fittings shall be provided for temperature sensors.
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 13 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.8.3 SENSOR AND CONTROL WIRING
18 AWG minimum twisted and shielded 2, 3, or 4 conductor to match analog function
hardware. Control wiring shall have 600 volt insulation. Multiconductor wire shall have
an outer jacket of PVC.
2.8.4 FLOWMETERS
Flowmeters shall consist of a venturi, 150 mm dial differential pressure meter, valved
pressure taps, and bar stock needle valves. Venturi flow nozzle shall have threaded
bronze ends for pipe sizes up to 50 mm and flanged ends for pipe sizes 65 mm and
above. Venturi length shall not be less than 1.6 times the pipe size. Venturi shall be
selected to read differential pressure corresponding to 0.5 to 1.5 times the system flow
rate. Venturi shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 1 percent of the range. Meter
shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 2 percent of the full scale range.
2.8.5 SIGHT FLOW INDICATORS
Sight flow indicators shall consist of a clear glass window or cylinder and a nonferrous
or 316 stainless steel body and impeller. Indicator shall have threaded ends for pipe
sizes up to 50 mm and flanged ends for pipe sizes 65 mm and above. Maximum
operating pressure shall be no less than 862 kPa. Maximum operating temperature
shall be no less than 121 degrees C.
2.9 PAINTING AND FINISHING
Equipment and component items, when fabricated from ferrous metal and located
inside the building, shall be factory finished with the manufacturer's standard finish.
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 14 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming thoroughly familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in
the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any
work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 COLLECTOR SUBSYSTEM
3.2.1.1 Collector Array
Solar collector array shall be installed at the tilt angle, orientation, and elevation
above roof as recommended by manufacturer. For installation on flat roofs with
rack type collector mounting or for ground mounted collectors, bottom of collector
shall be a minimum of 450 mm from roof or ground surface. For mounting on
pitched roofs, back of collectors shall be installed a minimum of 50 mm above roof
surface. Each solar collector shall be removable for maintenance, repair, or
replacement. Solar collector array shall not impose additional loads on the
structure beyond the loads scheduled on the structural drawings.
3.2.1.2 Array Piping
Collector array piping shall be installed in a reverse-return configuration so that
path lengths of collector supply and return are of approximately equal length. All
piping must be coded with fluid type and flow direction labels in accordance with
Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.2.1.3 Array Support
Array support shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the
collector manufacturer. Structural members requiring welding shall be welded in
accordance with AWS D1.2/D1.2M for aluminum and welders should be qualified
according to AWS B2.1/B2.1M.
3.2.2 STORAGE SUBSYSTEM
Solar storage tank penetrations shall be installed as shown so that cold water inlet to
storage tank and outlet from storage tank to collector array are located near the bottom
of the tank, and inlet from collector array and outlet to load are located near the top of
the tank.
3.2.3 TRANSPORT SUBSYSTEM
3.2.3.1 Flow Rates
[System flow rate shall be based on recommended collector flow rate, and shall be
as per manufacturer. All flow rates shall be below 1.5 meters/second.
3.2.3.2 Pumps
[Pumps shall be installed on foundations, leveled, grouted, and realigned before
operation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.] [All base mounted
pumps shall have a straight pipe between the suction side of the pump and the
first elbow. The length of this pipe shall be a minimum of five times the diameter
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 15 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
of the pipe on the suction side of the pump, or a suction diffuser of the proper size
shall be attached to the suction side of the pump.]
Drain line sizes from the
pumps shall not be less than the drain trap or the pump dirt pocket, but in no case
shall the drain line be less than 13 mm iron pipe size. Drain lines shall terminate
to spill over the nearest floor or open sight drain.
3.2.3.3 Expansion Tank
Expansion tank shall be installed on suction side of pump.
3.2.3.4 Piping, Valves, and Accessories
Piping shall be installed in accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING,
GENERAL PURPOSE, except where noted otherwise. Solders used on piping
shall be as shown. Piping shall be coded with fluid type and flow direction labels
in accordance with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. When a foodgrade uninhibited propylene-glycol solution is used to heat potable service water,
tamper resistant seals must be attached to all fill ports. All propylene-glycol
circuits must be labeled "CONTAINS UNINHIBITED FOOD-GRADE
PROPYLENE-GLYCOL: INTRODUCTION OF ANY NONAPPROVED FLUID
MAY CONSTITUTE A HEALTH HAZARD." . Air vents shall be installed at the
high points of the collector array and in the equipment room.
3.2.3.5 Pipe Expansion
Expansion of supply and return pipes shall be provided for by changes in the
direction of the run of pipe or by expansion loops as indicated. Expansion loops
shall provide adequate expansion of the main straight runs of the system within
the stress limits specified in ASME B31.1. Loops shall be cold- sprung and
installed where indicated. Pipe guides shall be provided as indicated. Expansion
joints shall not be used in system piping.
3.2.3.6 Valves
Valves shall be installed at the locations indicated and where required for the
proper functioning of the system. Valves shall be installed with their stems
horizontal or above. Gate or ball valves shall be installed at the inlet and outlet of
each bank of internally manifolded collectors. Calibrated balancing valves with
integral pressure taps shall be installed at the outlet of each bank and at the pump
discharge. Final setting for each valve shall be marked on each valve. Ball valves
shall be installed with a union immediately adjacent. Gate valves shall be installed
at the inlet and outlet of each pump and also at the inlet and outlet of each heat
exchanger. A check valve shall be installed at pump discharges. Discharges of
relief valves shall be piped to the nearest floor drain or as indicated on system
drawings.
3.2.3.7 Foundations
Concrete foundations or pads for storage tanks, heat exchangers, pumps, and
other equipment covered by this specification shall be constructed in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations and be a minimum of 150 mm high with
chamfered edges.
3.2.3.8 Grooved Mechanical Joints
Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's instructions.
Grooved fittings, couplings, and grooving tools shall be the products of the same
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 16 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
manufacturer. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances
specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field
shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, narrow- land
micrometer, or other method specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer
for the intended application. Grooved width and dimension of groove from end of
pipe shall be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to
verify compliance with the coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints
shall not be used in concealed locations.
3.2.4 CONTROL SUBSYSTEM
3.2.4.1 Differential Temperature Controller
Automatic control equipment shall be installed at the location shown in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Control wiring and sensor wiring
shall be installed in conduit.
[Collector temperature sensor shall be provided
by differential temperature controller manufacturer and mounted directly on the
absorber plate by the manufacturer.] Unless otherwise indicated, operators,
controllers, sensors, indicators, and like devices when installed on equipment
casings and pipe lines shall be provided with stand-off mounting brackets, bases,
nipples, adapters, or extended tubes to provide clearance, not less than the
thickness of the insulation, between the surface and the device. These stand-off
mounting items shall be integral with the devices or standard accessories of the
controls manufacturer unless otherwise approved. Clamp-on devices or
instruments where direct contact with pipe surface is required shall be exempted
from the use of the above mounting items. All control wiring shall be color coded
and identified with permanent numeric or alphabetic codes.
3.2.4.2 Sequence of Operation
The differential temperature controller sensing temperature difference between the
fluid in a solar collector and water in the storage tank shall start solar collector loop
[and storage loop] pumps[s] when the temperature differential (Delta T - ON) rises
above [8] degrees C, and shall stop the pump when the differential (Delta T - OFF)
falls below [3] degrees C.
3.3 INSPECTION AND TESTING
Submit an independent testing agency's certified reports of inspections and laboratory
tests, including analysis, position of flow-balancing equipment, and interpretation of
test results. Each report shall be properly identified. Describe test methods used and
compliance with recognized test standards.
3.3.1 INSPECTION
Make system available for inspection at all times.
3.3.2 TESTING PRIOR TO CONCEALMENT
3.3.2.1 Hydrostatic Test
Demonstrate to PGC engineer that all piping has been hydrostatically tested, at a
pressure of 862 kPa for a period of time sufficient for inspection of every joint in
the system and in no case less than 2 hours, prior to installation of insulation.
Expansion tank and relief valves shall be isolated from test pressure. No loss of
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 17 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
pressure shall be allowed. Leaks found during tests shall be repaired by replacing
pipe or fittings and the system retested. Caulking of joints shall not be permitted.
3.3.2.2 Cleaning of Piping
System piping shall be flushed with clean, fresh water prior to concealment of any
individual section and prior to final operating tests. Prior to flushing piping, relief
valves shall be isolated or removed. Solar collectors shall be covered to prevent
heating of cleaning fluid, unless cleaning is performed during hours of darkness.
The solution shall be circulated through the section to be cleaned at the design
flow rate for a minimum of 2 hours.
3.3.3 POSTING FRAMED INSTRUCTIONS
Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic shall be posted where directed.
These instructions shall include a system schematic, and wiring and control diagrams
showing the complete layout of the entire system. Condensed operating instructions
explaining preventative maintenance procedures, balanced flow rates, methods of
checking the system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and
stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified above, and
posted beside the diagrams. Proposed diagrams, instructions, and other sheets shall
be submitted for approval prior to posting. The framed instructions shall be posted
before acceptance testing of the system.
3.3.4 ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND FINAL INSPECTION
Tests shall be performed in the presence of PGC engineer. Furnish all instruments
and personnel required for the tests. A written record of the results of all acceptance
tests shall be maintained, to be submitted in booklet form. The tests shall be as
follows:
3.3.4.1 As-Built Drawings
Submit, as a condition of final acceptance, a complete set of as-built system
drawings. Drawings shall clearly indicate the actual condition of the installed solar
energy system at the time of the final test.
3.3.4.2 Final Hydrostatic Test
Demonstrate to PGC engineer that all piping has been hydrostatically tested at a
pressure of 862 kPa for a period of time sufficient for inspection of every joint in
the system and in no case less than 2 hours. Expansion tank and relief valves
shall be isolated from test pressure. Gauges used in the test shall have been
calibrated within the 6-month period preceding the test. Test shall be witnessed
by PGC engineer. No loss of pressure shall be allowed. Leaks found during tests
shall be repaired by replacing pipe or fittings and the system retested. Caulking of
joints shall not be permitted.
3.3.4.3 System Flushing
For the final inspection, the system shall be thoroughly flushed, in no case for less
than 2 hours, of all foreign matter until a white linen bag installed in a strainer
basket shows no evidence of contamination. The white linen bag shall be in the
strainer basket during the entire flushing operation prior to its being presented to
the Contracting Officer for approval.
PGC engineer will inspect the linen bag
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 18 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
prior to completion of flushing and approve the flushing operation. System shall
be drained prior to final filling.
3.3.4.4 System Filling
System shall be filled through indicated connections with solution. Solution shall
be mixed externally to the solar system and consist of [50] percent propyleneglycol and [50] percent distilled water by volume] [distilled water]. Air shall be
vented from the system after filling. System pressure at the high point on the roof
shall be 69 kPa minimum.
3.3.4.5 Operational Test
Operational test shall occur over a period of 48 consecutive hours with sufficient
solar insulation to cause activation of the solar energy system during daylight
hours. With system fully charged so that pressure at the high point on the roof or
the lowest system pressure is a minimum of 69 kPa and with fluid and pump[s]
energized, [sight flow indicator must indicate flow] [flow meter must indicate flow
as indicated]. Calibrated balancing valves with pressure taps shall indicate bank
flow rate as shown.
3.3.4.6 Control Logic
By substituting variable resistors for collector and storage tank temperature
sensors, demonstrate the differential temperature controller correctly energizes
the system pump[s] when the collector sensor indicates a temperature of [8]
degrees C greater than the storage tank temperature, as indicated on the
controller display panel. The differential temperature controller shall de-energize
the system pump[s] when the displayed temperature of the solar collectors is [3]
degrees C greater than the displayed temperature of the storage tank.
3.3.4.7 Temperature Sensor Diagnostics
Demonstrate that the controller will correctly identify open and short circuits on
both the solar collector temperature sensor circuit and the storage tank sensor
circuit.
3.3.4.8 Overall System Operations
Demonstrate that the solar energy system will operate properly while unattended
for a period of at least 72 hours and that the controller will start pump[s] after being
warmed by the sun, and that it will properly shut down during cloudy weather or in
the evening over a minimum of three complete cycles. Contractor is permitted to
manipulate the temperature of the storage tank by the introduction of cold water at
local groundwater temperature.
3.4 FIELD TRAINING
Provide a field training course for designated operating and maintenance staff
members. T. The training shall include discussion of the system design and layout
and demonstrations of routine operation and maintenance procedures. This training
shall include: normal system operation and control; flow balancing; detection of a
nonfunctioning system due to sensor, controller, and/or mechanical failure; filling,
draining, and venting of the collector array; replacement of sensors, collectors, and
collector components; collector cleaning and inspection for leaks; and heat exchanger
cleaning and expansion tank charging if applicable. Submit [6] copies of operation and
[6] copies of maintenance manuals for the equipment furnished. One complete set
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 19 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
prior to performance testing and the remainder upon acceptance. Manuals shall be
approved prior to the field training course.
Operating manuals shall detail the step-by-step procedures required for system filling,
startup, operation, and shutdown. Operating manuals shall include the manufacturer's
name, model number, service manual, parts list, and brief descriptions of all equipment
and their basic operating features. Maintenance manuals shall list routine maintenance
procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, troubleshooting guides, piping and
equipment layout, balanced fluid flow rates, and simplified wiring and control diagrams
of the system as installed.
END OF SECTION 22 14 29
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 20 OF 20
PGC-230033-C-P8
22 66 53.00 40
LABORATORY CHEMICALS-WASTE AND VENT PIPING
CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
1.1
1.2
1.3
REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 2
SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................... 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS............................................................................................................. 4
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
BOROSILICATE GLASS, TYPE BSG .......................................................................... 4
HIGH-SILICON CAST IRON, TYPE HSCI .................................................................... 4
POLYETHYLENE DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT, TYPE PE-DWV ................................ 4
POLYPROPYLENE DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT, TYPE PP-DWV ............................. 4
POLYVINYLCHLORIDE DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT, TYPE PVC-DWV .................... 5
PART 3 EXECUTION ........................................................................................................... 6
3.1
INSTALLATION AND TESTING ................................................................................... 6
22 66 53.00 40 LABORATORY CHEMICALS-WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 6
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation
only.
1.
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
a. ASME B16.12 (2009) Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings
2.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
a. ASTM A518/A518M (1999; R 2008) Standard
Corrosion- Resistant High-Silicon Iron Castings
Specification
for
b. ASTM C1036 (2010e1) Standard Specification for Flat Glass
c. ASTM D2447 (2003) Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic
Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80, Based on Outside Diameter
d. ASTM D2665 (2012) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
e. ASTM D4101 (2011) Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and
Extrusion Materials
f.
1.2
ASTM D6927 (2006) Standard Test Method for Marshall Stability and Flow
of Bituminous Mixtures
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL ROCEDURES:
A.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit Installation Drawings.
B.
SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
1. Borosilicate Glass Materials
2. High-Silicon Cast Iron Material
3. Polyethylene Material
4. Polypropylene Material
5. Polyvinylchloride Material
C.
SD-06 Test Reports
1. Submit Test Reports
22 66 53.00 40 LABORATORY CHEMICALS-WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 6
PGC-230033-C-P8
D.
SD-07 Certificates
1. Submit Listing of Product Installations.
2. Submit certificates for the following items showing conformance with the
referenced standards contained in this section
3. Borosilicate Glass Materials
4. High-Silicon Cast Iron Material
5. Polyethylene Material
6. Polypropylene Material
7. Polyvinylchloride Material
1.3
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Submit installation drawings for chemical-waste drainage systems in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommended instructions.
22 66 53.00 40 LABORATORY CHEMICALS-WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 6
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
BOROSILICATE GLASS, TYPE BSG
A.
Provide borosilicate glass materials for drain, waste, and vent piping systems,
tempered and annealed in conformance with ASTM C1036, coupling per AISI
Type 304 corrosion- resistant steel lined with Buna-N resilient member supporting
a tetrafluoroethylene liner, ensuring that the liner is the only material wetted by
waste stream. Verify piping class is BSG-1.
B.
Provide vent-system materials 1800 millimeter and higher above the floor of Type
PP or PVC with extra-heavy Type HSCI extension through roof.
HIGH-SILICON CAST IRON, TYPE HSCI
A.
For high-silicon cast iron material, conforming to ASTM A518/A518M, drain,
waste, and vent piping systems provide bell-and-spigot or beaded-end straight
barrel, extra heavy, acid-resistant soil pipe containing not less than 14-1/2
percent silicon. For joint seals provide lead and acid-resistant packing. Provide
mechanical joint coupling constructed of AISI Type 304 corrosion-resistant steel
with chloroprene resilient member supporting a tetrafluoroethylene liner, and
ensure the liner is the only material wetted by waste stream. Tighten nut to a
minimum of 12 newton meter.
B.
Provide vent-system materials at 1800 millimeter and higher above the floor of
Type PP or Type PVC with extra-heavy Type HSCI extensions through roof.
POLYETHYLENE DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT, TYPE PE-DWV
A. For polyethylene material drain, waste, and vent piping systems provide products
manufactured from polyethylene (PE) olefin resins in conformance with ASTM
D2447 and ASME B16.12 for applicable dimensions and configurations, Schedule
40, Type PE- 2306, black, specifically suitable for joining by fusion of interfaces
into a homogeneous mass at high temperatures. Ensure threaded assemblies
are molded. No thread cutting is permitted.
2.4
B.
Provide vent extensions through the roof of extra-heavy Type HSCI.
C.
Selected drainage-system components may be manufactured from
polypropylene (PP) materials, provided proposed means and methods of
connection are recommended by the manufacturing source.
POLYPROPYLENE DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT, TYPE PP-DWV
A.
For Polypropylene material drain, waste, and vent piping systems provide products
manufactured from Type I - 19509, black olefin resins conforming to ASTM D4101
and tested in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM D2447.
Comply with applicable provisions of ASME B16.12 for material dimensions and
configurations.
B.
Ensure pipe-wall thickness is Schedule 40 with minimum burst pressure when
tested in accordance with ASTM D6927 for 60 to 90 seconds, as follows:
22 66 53.00 40 LABORATORY CHEMICALS-WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 6
PGC-230033-C-P8
Size (millimeter) DN
Burst Pressure
2.5
40
50
80
100
4585 380 3650
3100 (kilopascal)
C.
Provide only PP materials specifically suitable for joining interfaces into a
homogeneous mass by fusion at high temperatures, with molded threaded
assemblies. No thread cutting is permitted.
D.
Provide vent extensions through the roof of extra-heavy Type HSCI.
E.
For selected drainage system components use products manufactured
from PE materials when so specified, and provided proposed means and
methods of connection as recommended by the manufacturing source.
POLYVINYLCHLORIDE DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT, TYPE PVC-DWV
A.
For polyvinylchloride material drain, waste, and vent piping-system provide
materials manufactured from Type I normal impact resins in conformance with
ASTM D2665 and ASME B16.12 for applicable dimensions. Ensure materials are
gray and specifically suited for joining socket interfaces into a homogeneous
mass by solvent-cement welding.
B.
Ensure all fittings are molded to produce, upon insertion of pipe, an interference
fit at approximately 2/3 of the depth of the socket. No thread cutting is permitted.
C.
Provide vent extensions through the roof of extra-heavy type HSCI.
22 66 53.00 40 LABORATORY CHEMICALS-WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 6
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION AND TESTING
A.
Submit test reports consisting of system operation tests for chemical-waste
drainage systems.
B. Within listing of product installations for chemical-waste drainage systems include
identification of at least five units, similar to those proposed for use, that have
been in successful service for a minimum of five years.
Include
purchaser, address of installation, service organization, and date of installation.
C.
Install and test equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION 22 66 53.00 40
22 66 53.00 40 LABORATORY CHEMICALS-WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 6
PGC-230033-C-P8
23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
RELATED DOCUMENTS......................................................................................... 2
SUMMARY............................................................................................................... 2
DEFINITIONS .......................................................................................................... 2
DESIGN CONDITIONS ............................................................................................ 3
DRAWINGS, INSTRUCTIONS AND SAMPLES ....................................................... 3
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES ............................................................................ 5
LABELS, TAGS AND CHARTS ................................................................................ 5
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS .................................................... 6
OPERATIONS AND MAINTNEANCE TRAINING PROGRAM ................................. 9
INITIAL OPERATION OF SYSTEMS ..................................................................... 13
NOISE AND VIBRATION ....................................................................................... 13
WARRANTEE ........................................................................................................ 14
QUALITY ASSURANCE......................................................................................... 14
WELDING .............................................................................................................. 15
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ............................................................. 16
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING ...................................................................... 16
ASSET CODING .................................................................................................... 17
PART 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................19
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS .................................................................................... 19
JOINING MATERIALS ........................................................................................... 19
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS......................................................................................... 20
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS .................................................................................... 21
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS ............................................................................ 21
PIPING SPECIALTIES ........................................................................................... 21
GROUT .................................................................................................................. 22
PART 3 EXECUTION ...........................................................................................................23
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS ................................................ 23
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS............................... 26
PAINTING AND FINISHING ................................................................................... 26
CONCRETE BASES .............................................................................................. 27
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE ..................................... 27
DEMOLITION......................................................................................................... 27
CUTTING AND PATCHING ................................................................................... 27
GROUTING............................................................................................................ 27
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to
complement other Division 23 Sections.
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Concrete base construction requirements.
3. Escutcheons.
4. Dielectric fittings.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Mechanical sleeve seals.
7. Equipment nameplate data requirements.
8. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment is specified
in Division 23 Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment".
9. No shrink grout for equipment installations.
10. Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports.
11. Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections.
12. Mechanical demolition.
13. Cutting and patching.
14. Touchup painting and finishing.
B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 23 Section 23 21 10
"Hydronic Piping".
C. This section also includes other requirements to complement other sections in
Division 23 sections.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,
furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof,
spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished
occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations:
Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to
outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop
locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical
contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor
ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
NP: Nylon plastic.
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
uPVC: unplasticized polyvinyl chloride plastic.
RTRP: Reinforcement thermosetting resin pipe.
GRE: Glass reinforced epoxy pipe.
GRP: Glass reinforced plastic pipe.
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1.
2.
1.4
CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.
DESIGN CONDITIONS
A. Outdoor Design Conditions:
1.
Outside Temperatures:
Summer:
i.
ii.
A.
Dry Bulb: 46 deg.C.
Wet Bulb: 29.4 deg.C.
Indoor Design Conditions:
Indoor Conditions (Summer)
Area
1.5
Space
Temp
DB
(degC)
Rel. Hum.
%
DRAWINGS, INSTRUCTIONS AND SAMPLES
A.
Equipment and Materials Lists: As per contract requirement after award of
contract, submit lists of equipment and materials with names of proposed
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
manufacturers and drawings of interrelated items. All submissions are to show
submission dates.
B. Shop and Installation Drawings: As per contract requirement, submit for
approval detailed shop and installation drawings showing to-scale dimensions of
equipment, ducts, pipes etc. in plan and elevation and in relation of same to space
assigned.
C. Shop and Installation Drawings: prepare composite installation drawings and sections
to a scale of not less than 1/50 showing clearly how work will be installed in relation
to the work of other trades.
D. Shop and Installation Drawings of equipment and material are to include
manufacturer's detailed drawings, cuts of catalogues and descriptive literature
showing type, performance characteristics, construction, component parts,
dimensions, arrangement, operating clearances, capacity, electrical characteristics,
power requirements, motor, drive and testing information.
E. Shop and Installation Drawings: submit manufacturer's certified
drawings,
templates and installation instructions to be furnished for all equipment showing
operating weights, weight distribution, location of any vibration isolation mounts, size
and location of anchor bolts, drains and other required openings and all other
pertinent data to assist in design of bases and supports.
F.
Shop and Installation Drawings: mark clearly in ink catalogues, pamphlets and
drawings for proper identification of item proposed and indicate, with reasons,
deviations from the Specification and the Drawings.
G. Shop and Installation Drawings lists etc.: submit five copies.
H. Shop and Installation Drawings: submit for approval, materials not covered by
drawings, e.g. pipes, fittings and incidentals, giving ratings and names of
manufacturers.
I.
Shop and Installation Drawings: no equipment or materials to be purchased or
delivered to Site until drawings etc. are approved.
J.
Further Drawings: during the progress of the work, submit shop-drawings, to 1/20
or 1/10 scale, as required by the PGC Engineer and as specified elsewhere.
K.
Drawings are generally diagrammatic and not to be scaled. Measurements are to
be made from established bench marks.
L.
Drawings: check all architectural, structural and electrical drawings in laying out work
to verify adequacy of space in which work is to be installed. Notify PGC where
space appears inadequate.
M. Substitution of Equipment and Material: reference to equipment and material by name,
make or catalogue number, and lists of approved manufacturers are to be interpreted
as establishing standard of quality and performance and are not intended to
eliminate equivalent products of other manufacturers.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
N. Minor Changes and Modifications may be made in layout to prevent conflict with work
of other trades or for proper execution of the work.
O.
Cooperate with other trades to permit their work to be installed satisfactorily and
with minimum interference or delay.
P.
Coordinate space conditions where work will be installed in close proximity to and
may interfere with work of other trades, and accept responsibility for the sufficiency of
shafts and chases, clearance in double partitions, suspended ceilings etc.
for proper installation of the work.
Q. Furnish to other trades templates, patterns, setting out plans and shop details
necessary for proper installation and coordination of adjacent work.
R. Protection: close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage
and construction.
S. Samples: submit for approval samples of proposed materials and workmanship.
1.6
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Access: install work to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and
repair. Approved deviations from the Drawings may be made to accomplish this.
1.7
B.
Group Together as practically as possible concealed valves and devices to be easily
accessible through access doors.
C.
Purpose: access doors are to be provided for the operation of concealed
dampers, damper quadrants, controls, valves, traps, vents, drains, cleanouts,
motors, air filters etc.
D.
Details of access doors and frames: Provide details, dimensions and locations
of access doors required and submit for approval in sufficient time to enable access
doors to be installed during normal course of work.
LABELS, TAGS AND CHARTS
A.
General: refer to section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment"
and the following to complete this task. Consult PGC Engineer for any discrepancy.
B. Identification: Access doors are to be identified to indicate location of concealed
work. Method and schedule for identification of access doors is to be approved.
C. Nameplates: each piece of equipment to have a certified nameplate at a
conspicuous location, permanently attached at factory, printed or stamped with name
and address of manufacturer, equipment model number, serial number, date of
manufacture, electrical characteristics, performance rating or duty, pressure,
temperature or other limitations and other pertinent data.
D.
Label and Identify equipment, instruments, controls, electrical devices, valves etc.
as to duty, service or function. Label controls and electrical devices to indicate
clearly what they control.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
E.
Labels: attach to equipment etc. or to adjacent permanent surfaces in an approved
permanent manner.
F.
Labels: laminated Bakelite with different colours for and surface, core and
incised lettering in English. Refer to section 23 05 53 "Identifications for HVAC
Piping and Equipment".
G. Tags: Refer to section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment".
H. Tag controls and instruments that cannot be easily identified with Bakelite labels.
I.
Tag valves and controls, except equipment shut off valves located at equipment.
J.
Labels and Tags: submit for approval a schedule of equipment and devices to
be labeled and tagged, with suggested nomenclature.
K.
Charts are to be prepared of schematic flow diagrams of each piping system
with location and function of each valve and with type and size of each essential
feature of the system.
L.
Charts: prepare schedules for equipment lubrication and maintenance and essential
operating instructions.
M. Charts: submit for approval.
N.
1.8
Charts: mount on wooden plaques or 6 mm Masonite boards, cover with heat
bonded clear plastic laminate or frame under glass, and permanently fix with four
brass screws at approved locations.
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Instruction Manuals: provide six copies in bound booklet form containing the
following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Brief description of each system and piece of equipment with basic
operating features
Descriptive literature of equipment and components with manufacturer's
name, model number, capacity rating and operating characteristics
Service manual prepared by manufacturer for every major piece of
equipment giving operating and maintenance instructions, starting and shut-down
instructions, lubrication instructions and list of possible breakdown and repairs
Manufacturer's list of general spare parts for every piece of equipment with
unit prices
Manufacturer's list of recommended spare parts for one year of operation of
each piece of equipment with unit prices
Detailed and simplified one line colour coded flow diagram of each system with
tag number, location and function of each valve and instrument
Detailed and simplified colour coded as-installed wiring diagrams of
motor controllers and automatic controls with tag number, location and
function of each instrument and electrical device with description of
sequence of operation and interlocks.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
B.
Instruction Manuals: submit in draft form for review and approval prior to taking over
as per the contract requirement.
C.
Record Drawings: submit an approved complete set of as-built drawings and
electrical wiring diagrams in tracing or other reproducible form.
D. Overall Purpose: provide a general overview of the original design intent.
E. Description: provide the followings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Type of system.
System location and what it serves.
What the system depends upon in order to function.
Design data, basic design parameters, basic assumptions made during design.
Reasons for selecting particular plant.
Expected service life (where available).
Planned operational efficiency.
F.
Equipment Schedule: the type, model number and serial number of all component
items within the system should be listed, together with the names of their respective
manufacturers of suppliers.
G.
Parts Identification and Recommended Spares: this should comprise a
parts identification list detailing and identifying replaceable assemblies, subassemblies and components. it should include supplier’s recommendation for both
spares and “running spare” (i.e. parts required for scheduled replacement due to
wear or deterioration), recommend stocking level of spare parts and manufacturing
and shipping time required for imported spare parts.
H. Commissioning Data
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
I.
Measured Data.
Measurement Points.
Test Equipment used
Calibration Certificate details.
Test Certificates
Safety & Fire Certificates (where applicable)
A statement of whether design requirements.
Operation: instructions must be given for the safe and efficient operation, under
both normal and emergency conditions. These will be in addition to manufacturer’s
literature for Plant Items and should include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
A recommended strategy for operation and control.
An outline of the general operating mode.
Control data (location, effect, object, sequence, limits of capability, modes,
set points).
Procedure and sequences for start-up, running and shutdown, under both
normal and emergency conditions.
Interlocks between plant items
Operating procedure for standby plant.
Precautions necessary to overcome known hazards.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
8. The means by which any potentially hazardous plants may be made safe.
9. Target figures of both energy consumption and energy costs.
10. Forms for recording plant running hours, energy consumption and energy costs.
J.
Maintenance: the manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions for maintenance
for each item of plant and equipment. Clear distinction should be made between
planned tasks (preventative maintenance) and work done on corrective basis.
instructions should be given on each of the following as appropriate:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
K.
Maintenance Schedules: should be provided for preventative maintenance tasks and
should be based on manufacturer’s recommendations and other authoritative
sources and should include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
L.
The isolation and return of plant and equipment.
Adjustments, calibration and testing.
Dismantling and re-assembly.
The exchange of components and assemblies
Dealing with hazards which may arise during maintenance.
The nature of deterioration and the defects to be looked for.
Special tools, test equipment and ancillary services.
Inspections
Examinations
Tests
Adjustments
Calibration
Lubrication
Periodic Overhaul
Procedure for the logical diagnosis and correction of faults should be provided.
Modification Information: information on permitted plant or system modification’s
allowed for by the manufacturers of system designers should be included for
each system. Space must be provided in the name for the recording of all
modifications and changes as they occur.
M. Disposal Instructions: where relevant, information should be provided detailing:
1.
2.
3.
Any known dangers likely to arise during the disposal of specific items of plant
or equipment together with the necessary precautions and safety measures.
Methods for safely disposing of or destroying the equipment or any parts
thereof, including packaging, insulation and fluids.
Sources from which further advice can be obtained.
N. Names and Addresses of Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Name equipment / item
Name of manufacturer
Address
Telephone number and telex/fax number
Name of local supplier/agent
Address
Telephone number and telex/fax number.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
O. Index of Plans and Drawings: an index should be provided of all “as fitted” drawings
supplied during the course of the installation work, identified by number and title.
Index should also include a schedule of all drawings issued by the
manufacturers and suppliers during the course of the installation work e.g. control
panel-wiring diagrams.
P.
Emergency Information: should include names, addresses, telephone and telex/fax
numbers of the appropriate contacts in the event of the fire, theft or burglary, and
fuel, gas, electricity or water failure/leaks. It should also list those firms or staff to
contact in the event of the failure or breakdown of such plant as lifts, plants, etc.
Q.
Manufacturers Literature: a complete set of all manufacturers’ literature should
be provided for the plant and equipment installed and assembled. The literature
should provide the following information:
1. Description of the product as purchased
2. The cost and date of purchase
3. Performance – behavioral characteristics of the equipment in use
4. Applications – suitability for use
5. Operation and maintenance
6. Resources of labor, plant, material and space required
7. Methods of Operation and Control
8. Clearing and maintenance requirements
9. Protective measures
10. Labor, safety and welfare associated with the equipment
11. Public safety considerations.
1.9
OPERATIONS AND MAINTNEANCE TRAINING PROGRAM
A.
Manufacturers
guarantees
and
warranties:
manufacturers guarantees and warranties.
B.
Contractor – furnished training program: to provide trained operation and
maintenance (O&M) personnel for the Employer’s Operations and Maintenance
Program, Contractor shall develop and implement a program for the training of
Employer nominated staff in operating and maintaining the facilities and
systems/subsystems constructed and installed.
Two copies of submittals
required by this Attachment to the Special Conditions shall be supplied to
Authorized Representative for review not later, than ninety (90) days prior to
scheduled start of each formal training course. Thirty (30) days shall be allowed for
such review. Training shall be performed only in accordance with such reviewed
and approved training program submittals. All training aids proposed for use in the
program shall be available for inspection prior to commencement of training. Upon
completion of the training program, the training aids, tools, test equipment, training
manuals and other materials relating to the program shall be handed over to the
Employer.
When short familiarization courses are offered to Contractor by
the equipment manufacturer/vendor as a common industry practice at no extra cost
to Contractor, then Contractor shall make arrangements for the Government
nominated staff to attend such courses at the no additional cost to the Government.
C.
DESCRIPTION: this section covers the requirements for preparing, administrating
and conducting a training program in English for Employer, nominated
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
include
copies
of
PAGE 9 OF 28
all
PGC-230033-C-P8
operator, maintenance, supervisor and instructor trainees in operation,
maintenance and computer software programming of the system. Training shall be
of sufficient scope and depth to ensure that all operations, maintenance and
computer software trainees who complete the training program will be fully qualified,
certified and capable of operating and/or maintaining the system/subsystems as
installed under this Contract. The program shall provide the training, orientation
and familiarization necessary to ensure a smooth transition between system
installation and operations activities.
D.
Scope: Training shall be in sufficient scope to ensure that all trainees who complete
the program will be certified as capable to operate and/or maintain the equipment,
systems and facilities furnished and installed under this contract, and to ensure
a smooth transition between construction and operation activities.
E.
Scope: training shall be performed in accordance with an approved training program.
All training aids shall be available and approved prior to start of training. Each
training course shall usually include classroom (theoretical) training and on-the-job
(hands-on) training to provide practical experience.
Where system/subsystem
interfaces occur, such as with equipment or facilities furnished under other
contracts, the contractor shall co-operate with and assist the Construction Manager
in co-ordinating timing and scheduling of training so that trainees can be made
familiar with the operation and maintenance of the system/subsystem as a complete,
in-place, operating unit.
F. Language: training shall be conducted in English and Arabic.
G. Submittals: The following should be submitted:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
A training program stating all program courses and activities, and their
individual duration’s sequence, and interrelationships.
A narrative description of each course, including its purpose, technical scope
and the number of hours from start of course to trainee certification.
Current resumes of training and technical personnel who will be assigned to the
classroom and/or on-the-job (hands-on) phases of training. Resumes shall
be identified by course.
The ration of training and technical personnel to trainees for both classroom
and on-the-job phases of each course.
A narrative (verbal) and graphic (pictorial) explanation of the system’s
operational scheme and features which will be covered in the Operations-related
courses.
A narrative (verbal) and graphic (pictorial) explanation of the system’s
operational and maintenance schemes which will be covered in the
maintenance-related
courses.
A comprehensives training manual for each course in the form and content
which will be used in both classroom and on-the-job phases of training. In
addition to other information, the manual shall contain an agenda, the hours
devoted to each topic/subject, and the objectives for each lesson. Such manual
shall be prepared in English.
A descriptive listing, by course, of all training aids to be used during both
classroom and on-the-job phases of training.
A narrative description of the practices to be followed to measure, record and
report each trainee’s progress and proficiency on completion of formal
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 10 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
training. Also, a description of the method(s) to be used to certify trainees
as being capable to operate and/or maintain the system/subsequent.
10. Samples of written examinations to be used for each course.
11. A narrative description of the methods proposed to provide make-up instruction
for trainees who miss training sessions due to illness of approved absences.
12. A bibliography containing a listing of reference publications to be used
in conjunction with classroom and on-the-job training.
H.
Employer Nominated Staff: Employer will nominate staff to receive training.
Such trainees many be expected to be familiar with the fundamental concepts of the
operation and maintenance of similar system and be basically qualified in both
written and spoken English. Each trainee will be designated by Employer in one of
three categories (trainees, supervisor-trainee, or instructor trainee) for operations,
maintenance or computer software training.
I.
Assistance to Key Technical Personnel: all key technical personnel of Contractor
shall have a general responsibility to assist Employer non-nominated trainees in
conducting training for the operation and maintenance of the system/subsystem.
Such assistance shall be a part of their duties and shall be included in their job
descriptions.
J.
Qualifications of Training Personnel: personnel designated to conduct training shall
be fully qualified and shall have a minimum of three years experience with the
systems/subsystem as installed, or comparable successful experience as a trainee.
K.
Training Aids: Training aids shall include approved operation and maintenance
(O&M) manual(s) prepared by Contractor as part of this Contract; training manuals,
including course outline, basic test of instructions modules and trainee workbook;
films; slides; video tape(s); charts; models; hand-outs; catalogues’ samples; and
other visual and written aids to complement instruction. In addition spare parts and
other special hardware shall be provided to support “hand-on” familiarization with
the equipment or systems.
L.
Training Manuals: training manuals in English shall be provided for each training
course covering both the classroom and on-the-job phases. The organisation of
the manuals shall follow the same sequence as the course’s schedule presentation
of material, providing such additional background and supplementary information as
a trainee may need to understand the O&M manuals. The training manuals shall
contain course agenda, schedule of hours devoted to each topic or subject and
objectives for each lesson.
M. Laboratory Equipment spare parts and mock-up models may be used for theoretical
orientation.
However, practical “hands-on” familiarization shall be provided
on equipment which is either installed and operable or ready to be installed and
capable of being operated. System spares of special hardware items may be used to
support “hands-on” familiarization as long as said spares are returned to inventory in
satisfactory condition in accordance with approved procedures.
N.
Proficiency: at designated intervals, each trainee’s proficiency level shall be
determined by written, oral and practical performance tests.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 11 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
O.
Completion: upon satisfactory completion of the training, it shall be certified, in
writing, that each trainee, by name, is qualified to operate or maintain the system,
supervise or instruct, as applicable.
P.
Disposition: upon completion of the training program, all training aids, test
equipment and similar items provided by Contractor for this training program shall
become the property of the Employer.
Q.
Schedule of all Plant Requiring Lubrication should be provided together
with manufacturer’s recommendations on the type of lubricant and the method and
frequency of application where the type of lubricant is identified by product name, a
generic reference (e.g. B.S.) should also be given. Special requirements for the
handling and storage of lubricants should be provided where applicable for
recommended lubricants.
R.
Make-Up Instruction: make-up instruction shall be scheduled to accommodate shift
work and authorised absences.
S.
Training Categories: training shall be provided using approved programs in the
following categories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
T.
Operations Training: operators shall be provided with a thorough training in all
aspects of system/subsystem operation under both normal and abnormal
conditions. This training shall include, but not be limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
U.
Operations
Maintenance
Computer Software
Operations – Supervisor
Operations – Instructor
Maintenance – Supervisor
Maintenance – Instructor
Other categories as may be required by CONTRACTOR’s system design.
Orientation to provide overview of system/subsystem purpose, configuration and
operations;
Terminology;
Operations theory and interface;
Equipment appearance, functions, concepts and operation;
Operating modes, practices and procedures under normal and
emergency conditions;
Safety precautions;
On-the-job operating experience covering all system/subsystem operating
functions, activities and tasks including those associated with degraded
operating modes, failure recognition and recovery processes;
Familiarity with the content and use of O&M manuals and related reference
publications.
Maintenance Training: maintenance training shall cover all on-site routine,
preventive and remedial maintenance of the system/subsystem. This training shall
include, but not be limited to:
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 12 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
1.
Orientation to provide overview of system/subsystem purpose, configuration and
operations;
2. Terminology;
3. Operations theory and interfaces;
4. Equipment modes, practices and procedures under normal and
emergency conditions;
5. Safety precautions;
6. Use of tools and test equipment;
7. Preventive maintenance;
8. Troubleshooting, diagnostics and testing;
9. Assembly and disassembly;
10. Repair and parts replacement;
11. Parts ordering practices and storage;
12. Failure and recovery procedures;
13. System/subsystem cabling;
14. Familiarity with and use of O&M manuals and other reference materials.
V. Computer Software Training: computer software training shall cover
management,
development and maintenance of system/subsystem
the
software.
training shall include but not be limited to:
use,
This
1.
Orientation to provide overview of system/subsystem concepts, configuration
and operations;
2. Basis programming and software architecture;
3. System executive and utility program;
4. Application program;
5. Modification program;
6. Modification of command lines codes;
7. Interrupt logic;
8. Intra- and inter-system interfaces;
9. Processor system operating procedures;
10. Diagnostics;
11. Communications software;
12. File management;
13. Hand-on training;
14. Safety precautions;
15. Familiarization with and use of O&M manuals and other reference materials.
W. Operations – Supervisor Training: supplemental and specialized training shall
be provided for supervisor level trainees. This training shall impart the knowledge
and skills necessary to schedule, supervise and improve the proficiency of
operating and computer software personnel.
X. Operations – Instructor Training: supplemental and specialized training shall be
provided to prepare graduate trainees or nominated instructors successfully to
instruct future trainees in system/subsystem operations and computer software.
Y.
Maintenance – Supervisor Training: supplemental and specialized training shall be
provided for supervisory level trainees. This training shall impart the knowledge
and skills necessary to schedule, supervise and improve the proficiency of
maintenance personnel.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 13 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
Z.
1.10
Maintenance – Instructor Training: supplemented and specialised training shall be
provided to prepare graduate trainees of nominated instructions successfully to
instruct future trainees in all phases of system/subsystem maintenance.
INITIAL OPERATION OF SYSTEMS
A.
After installation is complete, operate system for time required to complete
tests specified under TESTING, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING, to demonstrate
performance in accordance with design requirements and to provide instruction and
training to the Employer's designated personnel.
B. Commencement Date: obtain approval of commencement date.
1.11
1.12
NOISE AND VIBRATION
A.
Equipment is to operate under all conditions of load without objectionable noise or
vibration.
B.
Noise and vibration noticeable outside a room in which moving equipment is
installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside the room, will be considered objectionable.
C.
Noise Level resulting from equipment and heard in the same building or
nearby buildings is not to exceed specified noise levels as measured with a
standard sound level meter on the 'A' scale.
D.
Correction: conditions considered objectionable are to be corrected by approved
means and as directed.
E.
Method of Correction: noise is to be corrected by addition of sound absorbers in
ducts, by internal duct lining, by installation of sound barriers or dampeners on
walls and/or ceilings of equipment rooms or by other method to produce satisfactory
noise levels.
F.
Vibration Control is to be by approved vibration isolators applied and installed in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
WARRANTEE
A.
Warrantee is to cover perfect mechanical operation of systems, perfect attainment of
temperatures and humidity’s within specified design conditions, acceptable noise and
vibration levels and reasonable consumption of power, fuel and water.
B.
Defects during warrantee Period: if during warrantee period any equipment or
material proves defective or any part of system fails to function properly, equipment
is to be replaced and defects and malfunctions corrected as directed by the PGC
Engineer.
C. Extension of warrantee: if during warrantee period any piece of major equipment is
replaced or rebuilt, the warrantee period is to be extended as per the
contract conditions.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 14 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
D.
Maintenance and Operation: provide necessary skills and labor to assure
proper operation and to provide regular and preventive maintenance required for
equipment and controls during warrantee period on a continuous 24 hour basis.
E.
Maintenance and Operation: act promptly to correct problems arising in operation of
equipment or system.
F.
Maintenance and Operation: provide the Employer with monthly inspection
certificates of equipment, record findings on a check list, and certify that each piece
of equipment has been examined, is operating as intended and has been properly
maintained as recommended by the manufacturer.
G. Maintenance and Operation: check all controls monthly to ascertain that they function
as designed.
H. Spare Parts for normal wear and tear are to be provided by the Employer.
1.13
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and
viewing angles of identification devices.
B.
Equipment Selection:
Equipment of higher electrical characteristics,
physical dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished at no additional cost to
the Contract, provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors,
bases, equipment spaces, and the like are increased accordingly. If minimum energy
ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must meet design and
commissioning requirements.
C. Equipment Vibration Tolerance:
1.
The allowable vibration tolerance is specified in Division 23 Section
230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping" and equipment.
Equipment specifications require factory balancing of equipment to this
tolerance.
2.
After air balance work is completed and permanent drive sheaves are in place,
perform field mechanical balancing and adjustments required to meet the
specified vibration tolerance.
D. Products Criteria:
1.
Equipment Service: Products shall be supported by a service organization that
maintains a complete inventory of repair parts and is located reasonably close
to the site.
2.
Multiple Units: When 2 or more units of materials or equipment of the same
type or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.
3. Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use
components made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final
assembled product.
4. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable
trademark
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 15 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name
or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise
permanently marked on each item of equipment.
5. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be
used.
E.
Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part
thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these
recommendations shall be furnished to the Resident PGC Engineer prior to
installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the
recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be
cause for rejection of the material.
F. Provide copies of approved equipment submittals to the Testing, Adjusting
and Balancing Subcontractor.
1.14
WELDING
A. The Contractor is entirely responsible for the quality of the welding and shall:
1.
2.
3.
Conduct tests of the welding procedures used by his organization, determine
the suitability of the procedures used, determine that the welds made will meet
the required tests, and also determine that the welding operators have the
ability to make sound welds under standard conditions.
Comply with ASME B31.1 and AWS B2.1.
Perform all welding operations required for construction and installation of
the piping systems.
B.
Qualification of Welders: Rules of procedure for qualification of all welders and
general requirements for fusion welding shall conform with the applicable portions of
ASME B31.1, Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications, and
AWS B2.1, and / or, as approved by the Qualifications."
C.
Examining Welder: Examine each welder at job site, in the presence of the
Resident PGC Engineer, to determine the ability of the welder to meet the
qualifications required. Test welders for piping for all positions, including welds with
the axis horizontal (not rolled) and with the axis vertical. Each welder shall be
allowed to weld only in the position in which he has qualified and shall be required
to identify his welds with his specific code marking signifying his name and number
assigned.
D.
Examination Results: Provide the Resident Engineer with a list of names and
corresponding code markings. Retest welders who fail to meet the prescribed
welding qualifications. Disqualify welders, who fail the second test, for work on the
project.
E.
Beveling: Field bevels and shop bevels shall be done by mechanical means or by
flame cutting. Where beveling is done by flame cutting, surfaces shall be thoroughly
cleaned of scale and oxidation just prior to welding. Conform to specified standards.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 16 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
1.15
F.
Alignment: Utilize split welding rings or approved alternate method for joints on all
pipes above 50 mm to assure proper alignment, complete weld penetration, and
prevention of weld spatter reaching the interior of the pipe.
G.
Erection: Piping shall not be split, bent, flattened, or otherwise damaged either
before, during, or after installation.
H.
Defective Welds: Replace and re-inspect defective welds. Repairing defective welds
by adding weld material over the defect or by peening will not be permitted. Welders
responsible for defective welds must be re-qualified.
I.
Electrodes: Electrodes shall be stored in a dry heated area, and be kept free of
moisture and dampness during the fabrication operations. Discard electrodes that
have lost part of their coating.
J.
Welding: welded joints for pipes larger than 300 mm and all pipes within tunnel to be
subjected to 100 % x-ray testing.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
The equipment supplied shall be packed for protection against damage during
handling, transport, warehousing and installation. The efficiency of the packing shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair or replace any
damaged items, at no additional cost, as instructed by the Engineer even after
delivery of the equipment, if it is proven that the damage was caused by packing,
storage, or handling deficiencies.
B.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance
of dirt, debris, and moisture.
C.
Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do
not exceed structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.
D. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
E.
1.16
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight.
and bending.
Support to prevent sagging
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other trades and building
components.
B.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure
during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations.
C.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-inplace concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
D.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials
and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large
equipment requiring positioning before closing in building.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 17 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
1.17
E.
Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and
overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations,
franchised service companies, and controlling agencies.
F.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items
requiring access are concealed behind finished surfaces.
G.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and
painting, if devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before
installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
ASSET CODING
A.
The Sub-contractor shall identify all equipment, materials, spare parts and
consumables and incorporate them into the as-built documentation and operating &
maintenance manuals.
B.
The Sub-contractor shall also be responsible for the creation of the entire asset
code electronic data base handed over to the Client upon completion of the project.
An indicative Asset Coding format sample is shown hereinafter. The MEP
Subcontractor shall note that the format may be revised at a later date. The MEP
Subcontractor shall prepare the data base in excel/other formal capable of
importing to other data bases. The MEP Subcontractor shall be also responsible
for preparation and fixing of asset code tags to materials and equipment forming
part of his supply. The asset codes shall be stated at the time of submittal to track
order, manufacturing, delivery, installation and testing and commissioning. The
minimum list of equipment to be coded is as follows:
C. HVAC and Electrical (MEP) Installation
1.
ACMV/BMS System
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Ventilation Systems - Fans. DX units, split unite and all associated
automatic dampers, VFD, and local motor control panels (LMCP).
Chilled Water System - MCC, chilled water pumps, feed & expansion
tank, valves, automatic air vents, expansion bellow, chemical treatment
system and heat exchangers.
Cooling Tower System - Cooling towers, condenser water pumps, make
up water tank & pumps, LMCP, and condenser water chemical treatment
system.
BMS/ Control System - All central hardware, and field panels and all
field equipment.
Smoke Control System - Fans, smoke curtains and smoke curtain control
panel
All landlord AHU, VAV, FCU, and heat recovery units including
associated LMCP. VFD and automatic dampers.
Thermal storage system.
Workshop equipment including platform lift, cranes and monorails.
Electrical System
a.
All Main LV switchboard and sub-boards.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 18 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
b.
c.
d.
All UPS charger/battery system.
All central battery system
All emergency generator and associated cooling towers, pumps and
LMCP.
e. All power/lighting distribution panels.
f. All main HV switchboards.
g. All transformers
h. All cables HV, MV and LV.
i. All central dimmer panels/systems.
j. ATS, power factor correction capacitors, and DB's.
k. All exit lights, architectural light fittings, and wiring devices.
l. All disconnector switches, sockets (normal, power) and wiring device.
m. Lighting protection systems.
n. Earthing system.
o. Telephone raceways.
p. Cameras.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections 23 21 10 "Hydronic Piping"
B.
2.2
Pipe Threads:
ASME B1.20.1 or British Standard Taper Pipe Thread for
factory- threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not
listed below.
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:
piping system contents.
1.
Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 3.2 mm maximum thickness,
unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze
flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and
steel flanges.
2.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 3.2 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated; and
full- face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Flange: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated; Bolts, Nuts
and washers, stainless steel for potable/domestic water piping, galvanized for other
piping systems.
D.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended
by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 19 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Alloy Sn95: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10
percent lead content.
Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10
percent maximum lead content.
Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum
lead content.
Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum
lead content.
Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum
lead content.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
1.
2.
BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.
BAg1: Silver alloy.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.
J.
Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts:
gasket, carbon-steel bolts and nuts.
K.
Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end,
pressure pipes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
L.
2.3
ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
AWWA C110, rubber
Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.
Followers: ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron.
Gaskets: Rubber.
Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.
Finish: Enamel paint.
Couplings for RTRP and Fittings: Piping manufacturer's standard.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar
metals, to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.
B.
Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and
weld- neck end types and matching piping system materials.
C. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 20 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
D.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 1725 kPa minimum
working pressure at 82 deg. C.
E.
Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 1035 or
2070 kPa minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
F.
Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly,
full- face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or
polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
1.
2.4
G.
Dielectric
Couplings:
Galvanized-steel
coupling
with
inert
and
noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 2070 kPa minimum
working pressure at 107 deg. C.
H.
Dielectric Nipples:
Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive,
thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 2070 kPa minimum
working pressure at 107 deg. C.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide
flexible pipe connections. Include 2070 kPa minimum working-pressure rating,
unless higher working pressure is indicated, and ends according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.5
Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 1035 or 2070
kPa minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
DN50 and Smaller: Threaded.
DN65 and Larger: Flanged.
Option for DN65 and Larger: Grooved for use with keyed couplings.
B.
Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered
with bronze wire braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze
welded to hose.
C.
Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel,
inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples or
flanges, welded to hose.
D.
Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors:
Corrugated,
stainless- steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include
stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose.
E.
Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomer rubber construction, with
multiple plies of NP fabric, molded and cured in hydraulic presses. Include 2070 kPa
minimum working-pressure rating at 104 deg. C Units may be straight or elbow
type, unless otherwise indicated.
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A.
Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously
fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure
plates.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 21 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
2.6
PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1.
Steel Sheet Metal: 0.6 mm minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed
with welded longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping
flange.Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
a.
b.
B.
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
Screws used for outdoor and wet application shall be of stainless steel.
Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if
required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
OD: Completely cover opening.
Cast Brass: One piece, with set screw and polished chrome-plated finish.
Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge, set screw and polished
chrome- plated finish.
Stamped Steel: One piece, with set screw and chrome-plated finish.
Stamped Steel: One piece, with spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, set screw, and chromeplated finish.
Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chromeplated finish.
Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.
C. Screws: Provide Stainless Steel screws for outdoor and wet applications.
2.7
GROUT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.
1.
2.
3.
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout,
nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and
exterior applications.
Design Mix: 34.5 MPa, 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 22 OF 28
PGC-190008-C-P1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify
otherwise. Individual Division 23 piping Sections specify unique piping installation
requirements.
B.
General Locations and Arrangements:
Drawing plans, schematics, and
diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated
locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated,
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping at indicated slope.
D.
Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
E.
Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building
walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building
elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling
panel removal.
I.
Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 25 mm clearance around insulation.
J.
Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
L.
Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
M.
Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall
board partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and
polished chrome-plated finish. Use split-casting escutcheons if required, for
existing piping.
Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set
screw.
Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring
clips, and chrome-plated finish.
Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set-screw or spring clips.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 23 OF 28
PGC-190008-C-P1
N.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete
floor and roof slabs.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
2.
3.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas
or other wet areas 50 mm above finished floor level. Extend sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.
Install sleeves large enough to provide 6 mm annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than DN150.
b. Steel, Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes DN150 and larger, penetrating
gypsum- board partitions.
c.
Stack Sleeve Fittings:
For pipes penetrating floors with
membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges.
Install section of soil pipe to extend sleeve to 50 mm above finished
floor level.
Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"
for flashing.
i.
4.
5.
Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve
and pipe or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants. Refer to Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants" for materials.
Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant,
unless otherwise indicated.
P. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 25 mm annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 150 mm in diameter.
2. Install steel sheet for sleeves 150 mm in diameter and larger.
3.
Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand
and make watertight seal.
Q.
Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install steel pipe for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 25 mm annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1.
Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand
and make watertight seal.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 24 OF 28
PGC-190008-C-P1
R.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping materials.
Refer to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.
S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
T.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for
roughing- in requirements.
U. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically
required in individual piping Specification Sections:
1.
2.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and
fittings before assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS' "Soldering Manual," `
Chapter "The Soldering of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS' "Brazing Handbook,"
Chapter "Pipe and Tube."
5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according
to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded
pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as
follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
7.
8.
Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of
internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads,
unless dry seal threading is specified.
Align threads at point of assembly.
Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is
being threaded.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that
are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked
or open welds.
Welded Joints:
Construct joints according to AWS D10.12,
"Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe,"
using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality
Assurance" Article.
Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket
material, size, type, and thickness for service application.
Install gasket
concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to
make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use
suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using
torque wrench.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by
wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the
following:
a.
b.
c.
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers,
and solvent cements.
ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661.
CPVC Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 25 OF 28
PGC-190008-C-P1
d.
e.
f.
9.
PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672.
PVC Nonpressure Piping: ASTM D 2855.
PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Procedure and solvent
cement according to ASTM D 3138.
Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping
with clean cloth or paper towels.
Join according to ASTM D 2657
procedures and manufacturer's written instructions.
a.
b.
Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
V. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless
otherwise indicated:
1.
Install unions, in piping DN50 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with DN50 or smaller threaded pipe
connection.
2. Install flanges, in piping DN65 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at
final connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
3.
Dry Piping Systems:
Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect
piping materials of dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect
piping materials of dissimilar metals.
3.2
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are
not indicated.
B.
Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are
shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Engineer.
C.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building
systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair
or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with
minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible
locations.
E. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.
F.
3.3
Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and
parallel to equipment shafts if possible.
PAINTING AND FINISHING
A.
Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation,
and application of paint.
B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 26 OF 28
PGC-190008-C-P1
1. Interior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish
coat over enamel undercoat and primer.
2. Interior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include
2 finish coats over galvanized metal primer.
3. Interior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish
coat over enamel undercoat and primer.
4. Exterior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2
finish coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer.
5. Exterior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include
2 finish coats over galvanized metal primer.
6. Exterior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2
finish coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer.
C. Do not paint piping specialties with factory-applied finish.
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with
materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.4
CONCRETE BASES
A.
3.5
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required, but not
less than 150 mm larger in both directions than supported unit. Follow supported
equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 21
MPa, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in
Concrete Specification Section.
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment,
and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. Floor
mounted metallic supports shall have base and concrete plinths beneath.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
C. Floor Mounted Support: Provide base plate and concrete plinths beneath each floor
mounted support.
3.6
DEMOLITION
A.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove Work as indicated in Division 23 Sections and
as stated below.
B.
If pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed,
remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality.
C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety.
D.
Work Abandoned in Place: Cut and remove underground pipe a minimum of 50
mm beyond face of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing
finish.
E. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from Project site.
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 27 OF 28
PGC-190008-C-P1
F.
3.7
Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make
operational equipment indicated for relocation.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces
necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of
trades involved.
B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
3.8
GROUTING
A. Install nonmetallic, no shrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces,
pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.
Mix grout according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for
equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.
-
23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
End of Section -
PAGE 28 OF 28
PGC-230033-C-P8
`
23 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
RELATED DOCUMENTS......................................................................................... 2
SUMMARY............................................................................................................... 2
REFERENCE STANDARDS .................................................................................... 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE........................................................................................... 3
SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 3
WARRANTY ............................................................................................................ 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS ..............................................................................................................5
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
GENERAL ................................................................................................................ 5
SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS .............................................. 6
SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS .............. 6
SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS .................................... 6
THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS ......................................... 7
STARTING EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................... 8
RATING ................................................................................................................... 8
PART 3 EXECUTION ...........................................................................................................10
3.1
3.2
3.3
APPLICATION ....................................................................................................... 10
INSTALLATION...................................................................................................... 10
TESTING ............................................................................................................... 10
23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
1.2
Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly
applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them.
SUMMARY
A.
Perform all Work required to provide and install high efficiency single- and threephase electric motors required for equipment supplied under this division of Work as
indicated by the Contract Documents, with supplementary items necessary for proper
installation. Refer to Electrical Drawings for motor starter sizes. Disconnect switches
to be furnished in Division 26.
B.
The HVAC contractor shall furnish starters for HVAC Work. Motor starters shall be
provided in accordance with Division 26 Specifications. Some motors furnished in
mechanical equipment rooms shall have starters furnished and installed as part of
Division 26 (as per Specification Section 26 29 14, Motor Starters). Coordinate with
Division 26.
C. Motors rated at less than 190 Watts and intended for intermittent operation need
not conform to these Specifications.
D. ECM (Electronically Commutated Motor) motors on terminal units, fan-coil units,
and computer room air conditioning units are except from specification requirements
that can not apply due to different electrical design characteristics.
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless
identified by a specific edition date.
B.
All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall
be applicable to this Project.
C. All materials, installation and Workmanship shall comply with the
applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references:
1. AFBMA 9 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. AFBMA 11 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
3. EISA - The Energy Independence & Securities Act 2007.
4. ANSI/EEE 112 – Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.
5. ANSI/NEMA/ MG 1 – Motors and Generators Part 31.
6. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.
7. ANSI C19 – Industrial Control Apparatus.
8. NEMA ICS – Industrial Control and Systems.
9. NEMA RV 3 - Application and Installation Guidelines for Flexible and
Liquidtight Flexible Metal and Nonmetallic Conduits
23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
10. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit,
Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable
11. NEMA FB 2.20 - Selection and Installation Guidelines For Fittings for Use
With Flexible Electrical Conduit and Cable
12. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box
Supports
13. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box
Supports
14. NEMA OS 3 - Selection and Installation Guidelines for Electrical Outlet Boxes
15. UL 508 – Industrial Control Equipment.
16. ANSI/EEE 117 – Standard Test Procedure for Evaluation of Systems of
Insulating Materials for Random Wound AC Electric Machinery.
17. ANSI/NEMA MG 2 – Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for
Selection, Installation and Use of Electric Motors.
18. ANSI/UL 674 – Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Hazardous
(Classified) Locations.
19. ANSI/UL 1004 – Electric Motors.
D. IEC STANDARDS: When IEC motors are used, all IEC specifications are to
match NEMA specifications as a minimum.
1. IEC 60 034-1: General regulations for rotating electrical machines.
2. IEC 60 085: General regulations for rotating electrical machines.
3. IEC 60 034-7: Type of construction, installation and terminal box position.
4. IEC 60 034-9: Noise levels.
5. IEC 60 038: Standard voltages.
6. IEC 60 034-6: Cooling methods for rotating electrical machines.
7. IEC 60 034-14: Mechanical vibrations, rotating electrical machines.
8. IEC 60 034-5: Degree of protection for rotating electrical machines.
9. IEC 60 079: Hazardous Motors.
10. IEC 60 721: Paint finish.
1.4
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Motors associated with variable frequency drives (VFD) shall be inverter-duty rated,
and provided with grounded shaft or ceramic bearings to insulate shaft, and Class B
130 degrees C rise insulation. Ref. NEMA MG1 Part 31.
B.
Conform to NFPA 70.
SUBMITTALS
A.
All motors provided by the Contractor shall be of the same manufacturer unless they
are an integral part of the piece of equipment to which they are attached.
B. Product Data: Provide the following information for each motor:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Manufacturer.
Rated full load horsepower.
Rated volts.
Number of Phases.
Insulation Class.
Frequency in Hertz.
23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
7. Full load amperes (FLA).
8. Locked rotor amperes (LRA) at rated voltage or NEMA code letter.
9. Nominal speed at full load (rpm).
10. Service factor.
11. NEMA design letter.
12. NEMA machine type (ODP, WP-I, TEFC, etc.).
C. For motors one horsepower and larger, include the following additional information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
NEMA frame size.
NEMA insulation system classification. For motors required to be
installed
outdoors, include information showing compliance for outdoor
Time
rating. Maximum ambient temperature for which motor is
application.
Bearing
size and type data.
designed.
Guaranteed efficiency and power factor at full load, 75% load, 50% load, 25%
load and 0% load.
D. For motors 20 horsepower and larger, include the following additional information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
No load amperes.
Safe stall time.
Guaranteed efficiency and power factor at full load, 75% load, 50% load, 25%
load and 0% load.
Motor manufacturer’s recommended maximum power factor correction
capacitor
(kVar)
that can safely be switched with the motor.
Expected value of corrected power factor at no load, 50 percent, 75 percent and
full
load.
Full load amperes with corrected power factor.
Maximum guaranteed slip at full load.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1.
Submit operation and maintenance data including assembly Drawings, bearing
data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions.
F. Alternate Motors:
1.
1.6
If a motor horsepower rating larger than indicated is offered as a substitute
and accepted, provide required changes in size of conductors, conduits, motor
controllers, overload relays, fuses, circuit breakers, switches and other
related items at no change in the Contract price.
WARRANTY
A. Provide minimum one-year manufacturer’s warranty including coverage for motors
one horsepower and larger.
23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal and
local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Electrical Service: Refer to Drawing schedules for required electrical characteristics.
C. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment and for temperature
rise in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, Service
Factor and motor enclosure type.
1.
C
2.
Totally Enclosed Motors: Design for a service factor of 1.15 and a 130 degrees
maximum temperature rise in the same conditions.
Explosion-Proof Motors: UL approved and labeled for hazard classification,
with over temperature protection.
D. Visible Stainless Steel Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase,
cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer’s name
and model number, Service Factor, Power Factor, efficiency.
E.
Electrical Connection: Provide adequately sized metal electrical connection box
for conduit connection. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is
made directly, provide metal electrical box for conduit connection.
F. Motors shall be built in accordance with the latest ANSI, IEEE and NEMA Standards
and shall be fully coordinated with the equipment served, shall be of sizes and
electrical characteristics scheduled and of approved manufacturer as listed below or
of the same manufacturer as the equipment which they serve. Nameplate rating
of motors shall match the characteristics scheduled.
G. All motors shall be designed for normal starting torque unless the driven
machine requires high starting torque and shall be selected for quiet operation,
free from magnetic hum.
H. All motors shall be provided with adequately sized electrical connection box
for attachment of flexible conduit. Paragraph 1.3 of this specification refers to the
NEMA standards and publications relevant to applications and use of both metal and
liquid tight flexible conduit. When motors are connected to driven equipment by the
use of a V-belt drive, they shall be furnished with adjustable rails.
I.
All air handling unit motor(s) with single and fan array arrangements, exhaust
fan motors, chilled water pump motors, chiller motors shall be compatible with
variable frequency drive controllers. Equipment manufacturer shall coordinate with
VFD manufacturer to ensure compatibility. Characteristics of motors furnished on
equipment shall be furnished to VFD manufacturer for review, prior to
installing motor on equipment. VFD’s shall be furnished with driven equipment
and shall be run tested as an equipment unit at factory prior to shipment. Submit
23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
run test report prior to shipping. F.O.B. of motors to factory shall be by the equipment
manufacturer.
2.2
J.
Motors shall be open drip-proof type, except where specified or noted otherwise on
the drawings.
K.
Motors ¼ to ¾ hp shall be Subtype II and meet the minimum requirements of
EPAct92 for minimum NEMA nominal efficiency motors.
L.
Motors 1 to 200 hp shall be Subtype I and meet the minimum requirements of
NEMA Table 12-12 for NEMA premium efficiency motors.
SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current.
C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque.
D. Drip-proof Enclosure:
Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation,
NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings.
E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0
Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings.
F. Single phase motors, shall be less than 3/4 horsepower and shall be permanent
split phase, capacitor start, induction run, 230 volt, 50 hertz motors with dripproof
enclosures except as hereinafter specified. These motors shall have built-in thermal
overload protection and shall be rated for temperature rise as hereinbefore specified
for 3-phase motors.
2.3
SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.
C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.
D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C
temperature rise) insulation, minimum Service Factor as specified herein,
prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector.
E.
2.4
Single phase motors shall be less than 3/4 horsepower and shall be permanent split
phase, capacitor start, induction run, 230 volt, 50 hertz motors. These motors shall
have built-in thermal overload protection with automatic reset and shall be rated for
temperature rise as hereinbefore specified for 3-phase motors.
SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.
23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.
C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.
D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.
E.
Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; capacitor-start/capacitor-run
motors shall have two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at
operating speeds.
F. Enclosures shall be of the open dripproof type with a service factor as specified
herein and Class B insulation rated at 90 degrees C temperature rise measured
above 40 degrees C room ambient condition at full load, unless otherwise noted.
G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0
Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings.
H. Single phase motors, in general, shall be less than 3/4 horsepower and shall
be permanent split phase, capacitor start, induction run, 230 volt, 50 hertz motors.
These motors shall have built-in thermal overload protection and shall be rated for
temperature rise as hereinbefore specified for 3-phase motors.
2.5
THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS
A.
Enclosures shall be of the open drip proof type with a service factor as specified
herein and Class B insulation rated at 130 degrees C temperature rise measured
above 40 degrees C room ambient condition at full load, unless otherwise noted.
B.
All motors 3/4 horsepower and larger, unless smaller motors are indicated to
be supplied as 3-phase, shall be 3-phase and shall be squirrel cage premium
efficiency induction type with standard NEMA frame sizes.
C. Three phase motors not connected to variable frequency drives are to be protected
for phase loss and phase unbalance protection.
D. Motors 1 HP and larger shall have integral frames.
E. Starting Torque: Between one and one and one-half times full load torque.
F. Starting Current:
1.
2.
3.
3-7.5 HP: Five times full load current.
7.5 to 50 HP: Two times full load current.
50 HP and above: 1.5 times full load current.
G. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pullout Torque: NEMA Design
B characteristics.
H. Design, Construction, Testing and Performance: Conform to ANSI/NEMA MG 1 for
Design B motors.
23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
I.
Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.
J.
Testing Procedure: In accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112, Test Method B. Load
test motors to determine freedom from electrical or mechanical defects and
compliance with performance data.
K. Motor Frames: NEMA standard T-frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with
end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.
L.
Bearings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ball or roller type, double shielded with continuous grease relief to
accommodate excessive pressure caused by thermal expansion or over
lubrication.
All motor bearings shall be factory prepacked with a nondetergent lubricant
and shall be provided with lubrication fitting arranged to provide easy
access when
installed on the driven apparatus except as noted hereinafter.
Permanently lubricated factory-sealed motors may be provided in
fractional horsepower sizes only where they are an integral part of a piece of
approved apparatus.
All bearings shall be designed for L-10, 40,000 hour minimum life hours
of continuous service. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley
with belt centerline at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Direct driven
fans may require specific bearings other then ball type, verify equipment
specification where motor may be used where bearing life requirement may
exceed L-10 rating. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.
M. Sound Power Levels: Refer to ANSI/NEMA MG 1.
N. Part Winding Start (Where Indicated): Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and
pressure with rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel. Bearings
shall be double shielded with waterproof non-washing grease.
O. Nominal Efficiency and Power Factor: Meet or exceed values as scheduled at load
and rated voltage when tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112.
P.
2.6
2.7
Motors one horsepower and larger shall be provided with a copper frame grounding
lug of hydraulic compression design, for installation by the electrical subcontractor.
STARTING EQUIPMENT
A.
Each motor shall be provided with proper starting equipment. Starting equipment
shall be furnished by this Division.
B.
Relays and equipment supplied by this Contractor shall be integral with electrical
equipment supplied.
RATING
A.
Speed and Size: Speed and approximate horsepower ratings are specified
in equipment Specification Sections or are indicated on the Drawings. Furnish
motors sufficiently sized for the particular application and with full-load rating not less
23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 8 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
than required by the driven equipment at specified capacity. Size motors so
as not to overload at any point throughout the normal operating range.
B. Voltage:
1.
2.
Single phase: 230 volts for 240-volt nominal system voltage.
Three phase: 400 volts for 415-volt nominal system voltage.
C. Frequency: 50 Hertz.
D. Efficiency: Provide energy-efficient motors meeting the requirements of NEMA
MG1- 12.55A, Table 12Y and MG 1.41.3. Efficiency to be determined by testing in
accordance with NEMA MG 112.53 using IEEE 112A – Method B.
E. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1-12.47 but not less than those indicated
per the Table below.
Table: NEMA Open Motor Service Factors:
Horsepower
3600 RPM
1800 RPM
1200 RPM
900 RPM
1/6 – 1/3
1.35
1.35
1.35
1.35
½
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.15
¾
1.25
1.25
1.15
1.15
1
1.25
1.15
1.15
1.15
1.5-150 and above
150
1.15
1.15
1.15
1.15
23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 9 OF 11
PGC-190008-C-P1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A. Single-phase motors for shaft mounted fans shall be split phase type.
B.
Single-phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers shall be permanent
split capacitor type.
C. Single-phase motors for fans shall be capacitor start, capacitor run type.
D. Motors located in exterior locations and in direct drive axial fans, roll filters,
humidifiers and draw-through air units shall be totally enclosed weatherproof epoxysealed type.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements,
referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. All installation shall
recommendations.
be
in
accordance
with
manufacturer’s
published
C. Properly install and align motors after installation on the driven equipment.
D. Motor feeders shall be free of splices. In special cases when splice-free feeders
are impractical, splices may be allowed given prior written approval from PGC.
E. Use crimp-on, solderless copper terminals on the branch circuit conductors. For
motors 20 horsepower and larger, use motor lead splicing kit or approved equal.
F. When the motor and equipment are installed, the motor’s nameplate must be in full
view.
3.3
TESTING
A.
General: Provide all necessary instruments, labor and personnel required to
perform motor inspection and testing.
B.
Inspection: Inspect all motors for damage, moisture absorption, alignment,
freedom of rotation, proper lubrication, oil leaks, phase and rotation and cleanliness,
and report any abnormalities to PGC before energizing.
C. Tests: Motor full load current and full load voltage shall be measured. Motor phase
loss and phase unbalance protection shall be tested. Motor Test Report forms
included at the end of this Section shall be completed and submitted prior
to Substantial Completion.
D. Energizing: After installation has been thoroughly checked and found to be in
proper condition, with thermal overloads in motor controllers properly sized and all
controls in place, energize the equipment at system voltage for operational testing.
23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 10 OF 11
PGC-190008-C-P1
E. Motor Test Report Form:
-
End of Section -
23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 11 OF 11
PGC-230033-C-P8
23 05 16
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
RELATED DOCUMENTS......................................................................................... 2
SUMMARY............................................................................................................... 2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................ 2
SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE........................................................................................... 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS ..............................................................................................................3
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS, GENERAL................................................................... 3
PACKLESS-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS........................................................ 3
SLIP-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS................................................................... 3
BALL-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS.................................................................. 3
GROOVED-PIPING-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS ........................................... 4
PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES..................................................................................... 4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS.............................................................................. 4
PART 3 EXECUTION .............................................................................................................6
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
EXAMINATION ........................................................................................................ 6
PIPE EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION .............................................................. 6
FABRICATED-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION COMPENSATION INSTALLATION.......... 6
PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDE INSTALLATION ............................................................. 6
PIPE ANCHOR INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 6
PAINTING ................................................................................................................ 7
23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 7
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
1.4
This Section includes pipe expansion joints, guides, and anchors for mechanical
piping systems.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Compatibility: Provide pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe
anchors suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and
temperatures.
B.
Fabricate and install expansion and anchor system capable of sustaining
forces generated by gravity, thermal movement, and seismic events
SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of pipe expansion joint and pipe alignment guide specified.
C. Pipe expansion joint schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location,
and features for each required expansion joint.
D. Assembly-type shop drawings for each type of pipe expansion joint, pipe
alignment guide, and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances,
and methods of component assembly.
E.
Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that
with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
welders
comply
F. Maintenance data for each type pipe expansion joint specified to include in
the "Operating and Maintenance Manuals" specified in the Division 1 Section "Project
Closeout".
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to AWS D1.1
"Structural Welding Code--Steel".
1.
Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests
for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to ASME "Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications".
23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 7
PGC-190008-C-P1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS, GENERAL
A. Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors.
B. Refer to "Pipe Expansion Joint Schedule" for criteria of individual pipe expansion
joints.
C. Pipe expansion joint pressure ratings shall be compatible with piping system
where system pressures require PN 16 or PN 32 components. This applies to all the
following joint types.
2.2
PACKLESS-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Metal-Bellows Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints: Pressure rated for 1200
kPa minimum; conform to the standards of Expansion Joint Manufacturers
Association, Inc. (EJMA); with end fittings and external tie rods for limiting maximum
travel. Features include the following:
1.
Copper Piping Systems: 2 ply phosphor-bronze bellows and brass
shrouds.
2.
Steel Piping Systems: 2 ply stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel
shrouds.
B. Expansion-Compensator Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints: Pressure rated for
1600 kPa minimum for low-pressure systems and for 3200 kPa minimum for highpressure systems. Include 2 ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds, and
end fittings for copper piping systems and 2 ply stainless-steel bellows,
carbon-steel shrouds, and end fittings for steel piping systems. Include internal
guides, antitorque device, and removable end clip for proper positioning.
C. Rubber-Sphere Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints:
Single-sphere type,
fabric- reinforced butyl rubber with full-faced integral flanges, external control rods,
and internal reinforcing. Include steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt
holes over entire surface of flanges. Pressure rating is 1200 kPa minimum at 116
deg C minimum.
D. Rubber-Sphere Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints:
Double-sphere type,
fabric- reinforced butyl rubber with full-faced integral flanges, external control rods,
and internal reinforcing. Include steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt
holes over entire surface of flanges. Pressure rating is 1200 kPa minimum at 116
deg C minimum.
2.3
SLIP-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Carbon-steel packing-type expansion joint designed for repacking under
pressure. Include limit stops, flanged or weld ends to match piping system, and drip
connection where used for steam piping systems.
1.Joint Packing: Asbestos-free polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) compound.
2. Pressure Rating: 1725 kPa minimum at 204 deg C minimum. For systems
with higher pressure use 3200 kPa minimum pressure rating.
23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 3 OF 7
PGC-190008-C-P1
2.4
BALL-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
General:
Designed for 360 degree (6.3rad) rotation and minimum of 30
degree (0.52rad) angular deflection for sizes 150 mm and smaller and 15 degree
(0.26rad) for sizes 200 mm and larger.
B.
Carbon steel and comply with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section II
"Materials Specifications" and ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials
and design of pressure containing parts and bolting.
1.
2.
3.
2.5
2.6
GROOVED-PIPING-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Coupling: ASTM A 53, cut-grooved, short, steel-pipe nipples, and ductile-iron
or malleable-iron shouldered couplings. Include removable ties to hold joint
compressed or expanded during piping fabrication. Include suitable gasket materials
for piping system.
B.
Slip-Joint: ASTM A 53, steel-pipe body; polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE),
modified- polyphenylene-coated steel-pipe slide; and ductile-iron or malleableiron housing. Include suitable gasket material for piping system.
PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A.
Factory-fabricated cast semisteel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted twosection outer cylinder and base. Include two-section guiding spider that bolts
tightly to the pipe.
1.
2.7
Packing: Asbestos-free composition.
Pressure Rating: 1725 kPa minimum at 204 deg C minimum.Use 3100
kPa pressure ratings for system with high pressures.
Factory Test:
Test before shipment with steam at working pressure of
piping system with no leaks.
Alignment Guide Lengths: As required for indicated travel.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black
and galvanized.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex-head, traand nuts.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Power-Actuated Fasteners:
Attachments with pull-out and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
E. Concrete: Portland-cement mix, (20.7 Pa).
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
Water: Potable.
23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 4 OF 7
PGC-190008-C-P1
F. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink, nonmetallic.
1.
2.
3.
Characteristics include post-hardening volume-adjusting dry hydraulic-cementtype grout that is nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended
for both interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: (34.5 MPa), 28 day compressive strength.
Water: Potable.
4.
Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.
23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 5 OF 7
PGC-190008-C-P1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates and conditions under which pipe expansion joints, pipe
alignment guides, and pipe anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PIPE EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe expansion joints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Align expansion joints to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.
C. Use rubber sphere packless type expansion joints for pipes up to 200 mm and
metal- bellows packless type for pipes above 200 mm.
3.3
3.4
3.5
FABRICATED-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION COMPENSATION INSTALLATION
A.
Install pipe expansion loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as
required to absorb 50 percent of total compression or tension that will be
produced during anticipated change in temperature.
B.
Connect risers to mains with at least 5 pipe fittings including tee in main.
C.
Connect risers to terminal units with at least 4 pipe fittings including tee in riser.
PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDE INSTALLATION
A.
Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins pipe expansion joints.
B.
Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins pipe expansion loops.
C.
Install pipe alignment guides on piping elsewhere as indicated.
D.
Secure pipe alignment guides to building substrate.
PIPE ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A.
Install pipe anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding
those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to
connected equipment.
B.
Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping
and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS D1.1.
C.
Construct concrete pipe anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions
indicated.
D. Where pipe expansion joints are indicated, install pipe anchors according to
expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions to control movement to
compensators.
23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 6 OF 7
PGC-190008-C-P1
E.
Pipe Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install pipe anchors at
ends of principal pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion
loops and bends. Preset anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and
contraction of piping.
F. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment
guides, and pipe anchors that are installed on or in concrete.
3.6
PAINTING
A.
Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint,
exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same
materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for
touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
B.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils
(0.05 mm).
Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section
"Painting".
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
-
End of Section -
23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 7 OF 7
PGC-230033-C-P8
23 05 16.13
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
(UNDERGROUND)
CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
DESCRIPTION OF WORK....................................................................................... 2
REFERENCES......................................................................................................... 2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................ 2
SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS ..............................................................................................................3
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
EXPANSION FITTING ............................................................................................. 3
PIPE BEND AND LOOPS ........................................................................................ 3
GUIDES ................................................................................................................... 3
ANCHORS ............................................................................................................... 3
PART 3 EXECUTION .............................................................................................................4
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION ................................................................... 4
PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION................................................................. 4
GUIDE SUPPORT INSTALLATION ......................................................................... 4
ANCHOR INSTALLATION ....................................................................................... 4
PAINTING ................................................................................................................ 5
23 05 16 13 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING (UNDER GROUND)
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 5
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for mechanical piping
systems, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Expansion joints.
Expansion compensators.
Pipe bends and loops.
Rollers, guides and anchors.
B. Refer to mechanical drawings for expansion joints details.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. All pipe supports shall comply with MSS SP-58, MSS SP-69 and BS 3974 Part 1.
B. The Expansion joint manufacturer shall maintain a QA system and a copy of the
QA manual must be available for inspection.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Products designed and selected by the contractor and manufacturer shall be suitable
for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures.
B. Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with section 01340.
23 05 16 13 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING (UNDER GROUND)
PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 2 OF 5
PGC-230033-C-P8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
EXPANSION FITTING
A. Bellows shall be constructed of s